Catalog Parker

Parker Heavy Duty Hydraulic Cylinders Series 2H
Exclusive with the Parker Stepped Cushion for increased performance and productivity Faster cycle time Reduced hydraulic shock Reduced machine noise Lower machine maintenance
Heavy Duty Service Industrial Tie-Rod Construction Nominal Pressure 3000 PSI Standard Bore Sizes 1-1/2" through 6" Piston Rod Diameters 5/8" through 4" 18 Standard Mounting Styles
For Cylinder Division Plant Locations See Page II.

39
The heavy-duty hydraulic cylinder with features only Parker can promise and deliver!
Series 2H cylinders keep on performing like you expect from Parker producing more power per pound, more power per dollar over millions of trouble-free cycles. Everything you need for reliable 3,000 psi performance. Patented Jewel rod gland for longer life and lower operating costs. Chromeplated, case hardened piston rods. Rod end studs of high yield-strength steel, with rolled threads for added strength. Tie rods with rolled threads and steel nuts. Floating cushions with float-check action and positive metal-to-metal seal. And every Parker cylinder is individually tested before it leaves our plant.
For additional information call your local Parker Cylinder Distributor.

40
Series 2H Heavy Duty Hydraulic Cylinders

Standard Specifications
Heavy Duty Service ANSI/(NFPA) T3.6.7R2 - 1996 Specifications and Mounting Dimension Standards Standard Construction Square Head Tie Rod Design Nominal Pressure 3000 P.S.I.* Standard Fluid Hydraulic Oil Standard Temperature -10 F to +165 F** Bore Sizes 11/2" through 6" (Larger sizes available)
Specifications/ Mountings
Piston Rod Diameter 5/8" through 4" Mounting Styles 18 standard styles at various application ratings Strokes Available in any practical stroke length Cushions Optional at either end or both ends of stroke. Float Check at cap end. Rod Ends Three Standard Choices Specials to Order
*If hydraulic operating pressure exceeds 3000 P.S.I., send application data for engineering evaluation and recommendation. See section C, page 84 for actual design factors.
** See section C, page 83 for higher temperature service. In line with our policy of continuing product improvement, specifications in this catalog are subject to change. Note: Series 2H Hydraulic Cylinders fully meet ANSI/(NFPA) T3.6.7R2 - 1996 Specifications and Mounting Dimension Standards for Square Head Industrial Fluid Power Cylinders.
Available Mounting Styles

Tie Rods Extended Head End Style TB 11/2 -6" Page 44 Tie Rods Extended Cap End Style TC 11/2 -6" Page 44 Tie Rods Extended Both Ends Style TD 11/2 -6" Page 44 Head Rectangular Flange Style J 11/2 -6" Page 46
(NFPA MX3) Head Square Flange Style JB 11/2 -6" Page 46
(NFPA MX2) Head Rectangular Style JJ 11/2 -6" Page 46
(NFPA MX1) Cap Rectangular Flange Style H 11/2 -6" Page 48
(NFPA MF1) Cap Square Flange Style HB 11/2 -6" Page 48
(NFPA MF5) Cap Rectangular Style HH 11/2 -6" Page 48
(NFPA ME5) Side Lug Style C 11/2 -6" Page 50
(NFPA MF2) Centerline Lugs Style E 11/2 -6" Page 50
(NFPA MF6) Side Tapped Style F 11/2 -6" Page 50
(NFPA ME6) Side End Angles Style CB 11/2 -6" Page 52
(NFPA MS2) Side End Lugs Style G 11/2 -6" Page 52
(NFPA MS3) Cap Fixed Clevis Style BB 11/2 -6" Page 52
(NFPA MS4) Head Trunnion Style D 11/2 -6" Page 54
(NFPA MS1) Cap Trunnion Style DB 11/2 -6" Page 54
(NFPA MS7) Intermediate Fixed Trunnion Style DD 11/2 -6" Page 54
(NFPA MP1) Spherical Bearing Style SB 11/2 -6" Page 56
(NFPA MT1) Double Rod Cylinders Style KT Shown 11/2 -6"
(NFPA MT2)
(NFPA MT4)
Most of the above illustrated mounting styles are available in double rod cylinders. See Catalog Page 58.

41
The inside story on why series 2H is your best choice in heavy duty hydraulic cylinders
Primary Seal New TS-2000 Rod Seal is a proven leakproof design completely selfcompensating and self-relieving to withstand variations and conform to mechanical deflection that may occur. Piston Rod Stud Furnished on 2" diameter rods and smaller when standard style #4 rod end threads are required or on 13/8" diameter rods and smaller when style #8 threads are required. Also available in 2 times the catalog A dimension length. Studs have rolled threads and are made from high strength steel. Anaerobic adhesive is used to permanently lock the stud to the piston rod. Jewel Rod Gland Assembly Externally removable without cylinder disassembly. Long bearing surface is inboard of the seals, assuring positive lubrication from within the cylinder. An O ring is used as a seal between gland and head, and also serves as a prevailing torquetype lock.
Steel Head Bored and grooved to provide concentricity for mating parts. Ports S.A.E. O ring ports are standard. End Seals Pressure-actuated cylinder body-to-head and cap O rings.
Secondary Seal Double-Service Wiperseal (Hannifin Patent #2907596) wipes clean any oil film adhering to the rod on the extend stroke and cleans the rod on the return stroke.
Stepped Cushions
Sleeve Design Spear Design
High Strength Tie Rods Made from 100,000 psi minimum yield steel with rolled threads for added strength.
The Cylinder Body Heavy-wall steel tubing, honed to a micro finish bore.
Adjustable Floating Stepped Cushions For maximum performance economical and flexible for even the most demanding applications provides superior performance in reducing shock. Cushions are optional and can be supplied at head end, cap end, or both ends without change in envelope or mounting dimensions.
Parker's New, Exclusive

Stepped floating cushions combine the best features of known cushion technology.
Deceleration devices or built-in cushions are optional and can be supplied at head end, cap end, or both ends without change in envelope or mounting dimensions. Parker cylinder cushions are a stepped design and combine the best features of known cushion technology. Standard straight or tapered cushions have been used in industrial cylinders over a very broad range of applications. Parker research has found that both designs have their limitations. As a result, Parker has taken a new approach in cushioning of industrial hydraulic cylinders and for specific load and velocity conditions have been able to obtain deceleration curves that come very close to the ideal. The success lies in a stepped sleeve or spear concept where the steps are calculated to approximate theoretical orifice areas curves. In the cushion performance chart, pressure traces show the results of typical orifice flow conditions. Tests of a three-step sleeve or spear show three pressure pulses coinciding with the steps. The deceleration cushion plunger curves shape comes very close to being theoretical, with the exception of the last 1/2 inch of
travel. This is a constant shape in order to have some flexibility in application. The stepped cushion design shows reduced pressure peaks for most load and speed conditions, with comparable reduction of objectionable stopping forces being transmitted to the load and the support structure. All Parker Hannifin cushions are adjustable. The Series 2H cylinder design incorporates the longest cushion sleeve and cushion spear that can be provided in the standard envelope without decreasing the rod bearing and piston bearing strengths. (1) When a cushion is specified at the head end: a. A self-centering stepped sleeve is furnished on the piston rod assembly. b. A needle valve is provided that is flush with the side of the

42
Piston Rod Medium carbon steel, induction case-hardened, hard chrome-plated and polished to 10 RMS finish. Piston rods are made from 90,000 to 100,000 psi minimum yield material in 5/8" through 4" diameters. Larger diameters vary between 57,000 and 90,000 psi minimum material, depending on rod diameter. The piston thread equals the catalog style #4 rod end thread for each rod diameter to assure proper piston-to-rod thread strength. Two wrench flats are provided for rod end attachment. Ports S.A.E. O ring ports are standard. Steel Cap Bored and grooved to provide concentricity for mating parts.
The exclusive Jewel gland gives you longer cylinder life, better performance and lower costs.
Optional Ports
Ports N.P.T.F. ports are optional at no extra charge. Oversize N.P.T.F. and S.A.E. ports are available at extra charge. Seals Buna-N (Nitrile) seals are standard. Fluorocarbon Seals Optional at extra charge. Alloy Steel Tie Rod Nuts Align-A-Groove (Patent #3043639) A 3/16" wide surface machined at each end of the cylinder body. Makes precise mounting quick and easy. One-Piece Nodular Iron Piston The wide piston surface contacting cylinder bore reduces bearing loads. Anaerobic adhesive is used to permanently lock and seal the piston to the rod.
An extra-long inboard bearing surface insures lubrication from within the cylinder. Outboard of the bearing surface are two leakproof seals The TS-2000 and Wiperseal. The serrated TS-2000 (primary seal) is completely self-compensating and self-relieving. It adjusts to mechanical deflections or any pressure variation from near-zero to rated operating pressure. The result is positive, no-leak sealing regardless of conditions. The Wiperseal does double duty. On the advance stroke, it acts as a secondary pressure seal. On the return, it wipes away any dirt on the rod. This means less wear on bearing surfaces and internal parts. Longer life for working parts. And, less loss of fluid. Plus, you can replace a Jewel gland without removing the tie rods or the retainer. Just a few twists with a spanner wrench does the job. Optional Pistons OPTIONAL PISTONS Lipseal Piston Optional at no extra charge. Zero leakage under static conditions for hydraulic pressures up to 3000 psi. Seals are self-compensating to conform to variations in pressure, mechanical deflection, and wear. Back-up washers prevent extrusion. Hi Load Piston Optional at extra charge. Includes wear rings and bronze-filled PTFE seals. Two wear rings serve as bearings which deform radially under sideloading, enabling the load to be spread over a larger area and reduce unit loading. Bronze-filled PTFE seals are designed for extrusion-free, leak-proof service and longer cylinder life than the lipseal type piston. Nut Retained Piston Optional at extra charge. b. A float check self-centering bushing is provided which incorporates a large flow check valve for fast out-stroke action. c. A socket-keyed needle valve is provided that is flush with the side of the cap when wide open. It is located on side number 2 in all mounting styles except D, DB, DD, JJ, HH and E. In these styles it is located on side number 3.
PHENOLIC BEARINGS
BRONZE FILLED TEFLON RINGS
SYNTHETIC RUBBER EXPANDER RINGS
Step Cut Iron Piston Rings are standard.
head even when wide open. It may be identified by the fact that it is socket-keyed. It is located on side number 2, in all mounting styles except D, DB, DD, JJ, HH and E. In these styles it is located on side number 3. c. On 6" bore and larger cylinders (except for 21/2" bore with code 2 rod), a springless check valve is provided that is also flush with the side of the head and is mounted adjacent to the needle valve except on mounting style C, where it is mounted opposite the needle valve. It may be identified by the fact that it is slotted. d. On 11/2" - 5" bore cylinders a slotted sleeve design is used in place of the check valve. e. 1 /2" - 2 /2" bore cylinders use a cartridge style needle valve (see Figure A).
1 1
Cushion Length
Cyl. Rod Bore Dia. In. In. 11/2 2 21/2
5
Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Cushion Length Inch Head* 11/8 11/8 11/8 11/8 11/8 11/8 13/8 11/16 13/8 11/16 11/16 11/16 Cap 13/16 13/16 11/8 11/8 11/8 11/8 15/16 15/16 11/4 11/4 11/8 11/8
Cyl. Rod Bore Dia. In. In. 6 7 8 21/2 4 3 5 31/2 51/2
Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2
Cushion Length Inch Head* 15/16 15/16 113/16 111/16 21/16 115/16 Cap 11/2 11/2 115/16 115/16 2 2
/8
1 1 1 /8
3
1 13/4 13/8 2 13/4 21/2 2 31/2
Figure A (2) When a cushion is specified at the cap end: a. A cushion stepped spear is provided on the piston rod.
3 /4
1
*Head end cushions for rod diameters not listed have cushion lengths with the limits shown.
4 5

43
Tie Rod Mountings 11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes

Tie Rods Extended Head End Style TB (NFPA Style MX3)
E 1

Y
ZB + STROKE ZJ + STROKE P + STROKE
LB + STROKE
EE
AA
E 4
2 R
MM
3 R
DD
BB
Tie Rods Extended Cap End Style TC (NFPA Style MX2)

E 1
LB + STROKE
EE
AA
E 4
2 R
MM
DD
3 R
BB
Tie Rods Extended Both Ends Style TD (NFPA Style MX1)

E 1
LB + STROKE
EE
AA
E 4
2 R
MM
3 R
DD
BB
BB
Basic Mounting (T) NFPA MXO Not shown is no tie rod extended and can be supplied upon request.
Rod End Dimensions see table 2 Thread Style 8 Thread Style 4

(NFPA Style SM) Small Male
Thread Style 9
A KK
LA
(NFPA Style IM) Intermediate Male
C V MM B
A CC
LA
(NFPA Style SF) Small Female
A
1 8
C V
MM B
KK
MM B D WRENCH NA FLATS C V W
D WRENCH FLATS
NA
1 8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA
1 8
A high strength rod end stud is supplied on thread style 4 through 2" diameter rods and on thread style 8 through 13/8" diameter rods. Larger sizes or special rod ends are cut threads. Style 4 rod ends are recommended where the workpiece is secured against the rod shoulder.
When the workpiece is not shouldered, style 4 rod ends are recommended through 2" piston rod diameters and style 8 rod ends are recommended on larger diameters. Use style 9 for applications where female rod end threads are required. If rod end is not specified, style 4 will be supplied.
Special Thread Style 3 Special thread, extension, rod eye, blank, etc., are also available. To order, specify Style 3 and give desired dimensions for CC or KK, A and LA. If otherwise special, furnish dimensioned sketch.

44

Table 1Envelope and Mounting Dimensions
EE Bore 11/2 2 2 1/2 3 1/4 4 5 6 AA 2.3 2.9 3.6 4.6 5.4 7.0 8.1 BB 13/8 113/16 113/16 25/16 25/16 3 3/16 3 5/8 DD
3/8-24 1/2-20 1/2-20 5/8-18 5/8-18 7/8-14
Tie Rod Mountings 11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes
Add Stroke
E 21/2 3 3 1/2 4 1/2 5 6 1/2 7 1/2
NPTF
1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4
SAE 10 10 10 12 12 12 16
F
3/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 7/8 7/8
G 13/4 13/4 13/4 2 2 2 21/4
J 11/2 11/2 11/2 13/4 13/4 13/4 21/4
K
3/8 7/16 7/16 9/16 9/16 13/16 7/8
R 1.63 2.05 2.55 3.25 3.82 4.95 5.73
LB 5 5 1/ 4 5 3/ 8 6 1/ 4 6 5/ 8 7 1/8 83 /8
P 2 7/ 8 2 7/ 8 3 3 1/ 2 3 3/ 4 41/4 4 7/ 8
1-14
SAE straight thread ports are standard and are indicated by port number.
NPTF ports are available at no extra charge.
Table 2Rod Dimensions

Rod Dia. MM
5/8
Table 3 Envelope and Mounting Dimensions

Rod Extensions and +.000 -.002 B C D 1/2 3/8 1.124 7/8 1/2 1.499 7/8 1/2 1.499 5/8 1.999 11/8 7/8 1/2 1.499 3/4 2.374 11/2 5/8 1.999 11/8 5/8 1.999 11/8 7/8 2.624 111/16 3/4 2.374 11/2 3/4 2.374 11/2 3.124 21/16 1 7/8 2.624 111/16 7/8 111/16 2.624 3 4.249 1 21/16 3.124 1 25/8 3.749 1 21/16 3.124 1 33/8 4.749 1 25/8 3.749 1 3 4.249 1 Pilot Dimensions LA 13/8 21/8 17/8 2 5/ 8 17/8 31/4 2 5/ 8 21/2 31/2 31/8 3 43/8 33/8 33/8 47/8 43/8 47/8 41/4 51/4 43/4 43/4 NA
9/16 15/16 15/16
Bore 11/2 2
21/2
31/4
Rod No. 1(Std.) 2 1(Std.) 2 1(Std.) 2 3 1(Std.) 2 3 1(Std.) 2 3 1(Std.) 2 3 4 1(Std.) 2 3 4
1 1 13/8 1 13/4 13/8 13/8 2 13/4 13/4 21/2 2 2 31/2 21/2 3 21/2 4 3 31/2
Thread Style Style 8 4&9 CC KK 7/16-20 1/2 -20 3/4-16 7/8 -14 3/4-16 7/8 -14 11/4-12 1-14 3/4-16 7/8 -14 11/2-12 11/4-12 11/4-12 1-14 11/4-12 1-14 13/4-12 11/2-12 11/2-12 11/4-12 11/2-12 11/4-12 21/4-12 17/8-12 13/4-12 11/2-12 13/4-12 11/2-12 31/4-12 21/4-12 23/4-12 21/4-12 33/4-12 23/4-12 31/4-12 21/2-12 17/8-12 21/4-12 17/8-12 3-12 21/4-12 21/2-12
Add Stroke
B
V
1/4 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
A
3/4
W
5/8
11/8 11/8 15/8 11/8 2 15/8 15/8 21/4 2 2 3 21/4 21/4 31/2 3 31/2 3 4 31/2 31/2
1
3/4
15/16
15/16
1
3/4
111/16 15/16 15/16 115/16 111/16 111/16 23/8 115/16 115/16 33/8 23/8 27/8 23/8 37/8 27/8 33/8
11/4 1
7/8
11/4 11/8 1 13/8 11/8 11/8 13/8 13/8 13/8 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4
Y 2 23/8 23/8 25/8 23/8 27/8 25/8 23/4 31/8 3 3 33/8 31/8 31/8 33/8 33/8 33/8 31/2 31/2 31/2 31/2
ZB 6 63/8 67/16 611/16 69/16 71/16 613/16 711/16 81/16 715/16 83/16 89/16 85/16 91/16 95/16 95/16 95/16 101/2 101/2 101/2 101/2
ZJ 55/8 6 6 61/4 61/8 65/8 63/8 71/8 71/2 73/8 75/8 8 73/4 81/4 81/2 81/2 81/2 95/8 95/8 95/8 95/8

45
Rectangular Flange and Head Mountings 11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes

Head Rectangular Flange Mounting Style J (NFPA Style MF1)
For Style "J" Mount
Max. PSI - Push* Bore Size 2 Rod Code 1 2 3 4 900
E 4

For pressures exceeding those shown use mounting styles JB or JJ.
ZB + STROKE Y W UF 1 P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE K
1 1/2 1500 1000 2000 1200
2 1/2 2000 1100 1500 3 1/4 1800 1300 1400 4 5 6 1800 1300 1700 1300 1200 800 800 1000
1200 1000
2 R MM
* Maximum pressure rating push application.
3 E TF
FB 4 HOLES
F WF
Head Square Flange Mounting Style JB For Style "JB" Mount (NFPA Style MF5) Max. PSI - Push*
Bore Size 2 Rod Code 1 2 3 4
UF E 4
UF E 1 Y W
ZB + STROKE P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE K
1 1/2 3000 3000 3000 3000
2 1/2 3000 3000 3000 3 1/4 3000 3000 3000 4 5 6 3000 3000 3000
2 R TF
MM
3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 2700 3000 2700

3 R TF F WF J K
* Maximum pressure rating push application.
FB 8 HOLES
Head Rectangular Mounting Style JJ (NFPA Style ME5)

A WF KK C RT UF 1 KB KK THREAD STYLE 4 CC THREAD STYLE 8
Y WF
ZB + STROKE P + STROKE LG + STROKE EE K
MM B NA 1 8 D WRENCH FLATS
E 4
2 R
RD B
3 E TF
FB 4 HOLES
RT LAF

Thread Style 9
A KK
LA
C V MM B
A CC
LA
A
1 8
C V
MM B
KK
D WRENCH FLATS
NA
1 8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA
1 8

46

EE Bore 11/2 2 2 1/2 3 1/4 4 5 6 E 21/2 3 3 1/2 41/2 5 6 1/2 7 1/2 NPTF
1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4
Rectangluar Flange and Head Mountings 11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes
Add Stroke
SAE 10 10 10 12 12 12 16
F
3/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 7/8 7/8
FB
7/16 9/16 9/16 11/16 11/16 15/16
G 13/4 13/4 13/4 2 2 2 21/4
J 11/2 11/2 11/2 13/4 13/4 13/4 21/4
K
3/8 7/16 7/16 9/16 9/16 13/16 7/8
R 1.63 2.05 2.55 3.25 3.82 4.95 5.73
TF 37/16 41/8 4 5/8 57/8 6 3/8 8 3/16 97/16
UF 41 /4 51 /8 5 5/ 8 7 1/ 8 7 5/ 8 9 3/ 4 111/4
LB 5 51/4 5 3/ 8 6 1/ 4 65 /8 71 /8 8 3/ 8
LG 4 5/8 4 5/8 4 3/ 4 5 1/ 2 5 3/ 4 6 1/ 4 73/8
P 2 7/ 8 2 7/ 8 3 3 1/ 2 3 3/ 4 41 /4 47 /8
11/16

Rod Dia. MM
5/8
Table 3 Table 3 Envelope and Envelope and Mounting Mounting Dimensions Dimensions
Rod Extensions and Pilot Dimensions +.000 -.002 B 1.124 1.499 1.499 1.999 1.499 2.374 1.999 1.999 2.624 2.374 2.374 3.124 2.624 2.624 4.249 3.124 3.749 3.124 4.749 3.749 4.249
Add Stroke
Bore 11/2 2
21/2
31/4
1 1 13/8 1 13/4 13/8 13/8 2 13/4 13/4 21/2 2 2 31/2 21/2 3 21/2 4 3 31/2
Thread Style Style 8 4&9 CC KK 7/16-20 1/2 -20 3/4-16 7/8 -14 3/4-16 7/8 -14 11/4-12 1-14 3/4-16 7/8 -14 11/2-12 11/4-12 11/4-12 1-14 11/4-12 1-14 13/4-12 11/2-12 11/2-12 11/4-12 11/2-12 11/4-12 21/4-12 17/8-12 13/4-12 11/2-12 13/4-12 11/2-12 31/4-12 21/2-12 21/4-12 17/8-12 23/4-12 21/4-12 21/4-12 17/8-12 33/4-12 3-12 23/4-12 21/4-12 31/4-12 21/2-12
B
C
3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 1/2 3/4 5/8 5/8 7/8 3/4 3/4
A
3/4
D
1/2 7/8 7/8
11/8 11/8 15/8 11/8 2 15/8 15/8 21/4 2 2 3 21/4 21/4 31/2 3 31/2 3 4 31/2 31/2
KB 0 0 0
1/4
11/8
7/8
0
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
1
7/8 7/8
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
11/2 11/8 11/8 111/16 11/2 11/2 21/16 111/16 111/16 3 21/16 25/8 21/16 33/8 25/8 3
LA 13/8 21/8 17/8 2 5/ 8 17/8 31/4 2 5/ 8 21/2 31/2 31/8 3 43/8 33/8 33/8 47/8 43/8 47/8 41/4 51/4 43/4 43/4
LAF 13/4 21/2 21/2 31/4 21/2 37/8 31/4 31/4 41/4 37/8 37/8 51/4 41/4 41/4 53/4 51/4 53/4 51/4 61/4 53/4 53/4
NA
9/16 15/16 15/16
V
1/4 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
W
5/8
1
3/4
15/16
15/16
1
3/4
111/16 15/16 15/16 115/16 111/16 111/16 23/8 115/16 115/16 33/8 23/8 27/8 23/8 37/8 27/8 33/8
11/4 1
7/8
11/4 11/8 1 13/8 11/8 11/8 13/8 13/8 13/8 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4
RD 21/8 21/2 21/2 3 21/2 31/2 3 3 4 31/2 31/2 41/2 4 4 53/4 41/2 51/4 41/2 61/2 51/4 53/4
RT
3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 5/8 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 5/8 5/8
WF 1 13/8 13/8 15/8 13/8 17/8 15/8 15/8 2 17/8 17/8 21/4 2 2 21/4 21/4 21/4 21/4 21/4 21/4 21/4
Y 2 23/8 23/8 25/8 23/8 27/8 25/8 23/4 31/8 3 3 33/8 31/8 31/8 33/8 33/8 33/8 31/2 31/2 31/2 31/2
ZB 6 6 3/8 6 7/16 611/16 69/16 7 1/16 613/16 711/16 81/16 715/16 83/16 89/16 85/16 91/16 95/16 95/16 95/16 101/2 101/2 101/2 101/2

47
Rectangular Flange and Cap Mountings 11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes

Cap Rectangular Flange Mounting Style H (NFPA Style MF2)
For Style "H" Mount Max. PSI - Pull* Bore Size 2 Rod Code 1 2 3 4
MM W

For pressures exceeding those shown use mounting styles HB or HH.
Y ZF + STROKE P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE UF 1
1 1/2 2500 3000 3000 3000
2 1/2 3000 3000 3000 3 1/4 3000 3000 3000 4 5 6 3000 3000 3000
R 2
2000 3000 2000 2500 1800 2500 2000 2000

K 3 E TF
* Maximum pressure rating pull application.
XF + STROKE
FB 4 HOLES
FB 4 HOLES
Cap Square Flange Mounting Style HB (NFPA Style MF6)
ZF + STROKE P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE
UF E 1
MM
TF R 2
4 E UF
XF + STROKE
3 R TF
FB 8 HOLES
Cap Rectangular Mounting Style HH (NFPA Style ME6)
Y W
P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE UF 1
MM
R 2
XF + STROKE
FB 4 HOLES
3 E TF

Thread Style 9
A KK
LA
C V MM B
A CC
LA
A
1 8
C V
MM B
KK
D WRENCH FLATS
NA
1 8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA
1 8

48

EE Bore 11/2 2 2 1/2 3 1/4 4 5 6 E 21/2 3 3 1/2 41/2 5 6 1/2 7 1/2 NPTF
1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4
Rectangular Flange and Cap Mountings 11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes
Add Stroke
SAE 10 10 10 12 12 12 16
F
3/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 7/8 7/8
FB
7/16 9/16 9/16 11/16 11/16 15/16
G 13/4 13/4 13/4 2 2 2 21/4
J 11/2 11/2 11/2 13/4 13/4 13/4 21/4
K
3/8 7/16 7/16 9/16 9/16 13/16 7/8
R 1.63 2.05 2.55 3.25 3.82 4.95 5.73
TF 3 7/16 4 1/8 4 5/8 5 7/8 6 3/8 8 3/16 9 7/16
UF 4 1 /4 5 1 /8 5 5 /8 7 1/ 8 7 5/ 8 9 3 /4 111/4
LB 5 51/4 5 3/ 8 6 1/ 4 6 5/ 8 7 1/ 8 8 3/ 8
P 2 7/ 8 2 7/ 8 3 3 1/ 2 3 3/ 4 4 1/ 4 4 7/ 8
11/16

Rod Dia. MM
5/8
Rod Extensions and +.000 -.002 A B C D 3/4 1/2 1.124 3/8 7/8 11/8 1.499 1/2 7/8 11/8 1.499 1/2 15/8 1.999 5/8 11/8 7/8 11/8 1.499 1/2 2 2.374 3/4 11/2 15/8 1.999 5/8 11/8 15/8 1.999 5/8 11/8 21/4 2.624 7/8 111/16 2 2.374 3/4 11/2 2 2.374 3/4 11/2 3 3.124 1 21/16 21/4 2.624 7/8 111/16 21/4 2.624 7/8 111/16 31/2 4.249 1 3 3 3.124 1 21/16 31/2 3.749 1 2 5/8 3 3.124 1 21/16 4 4.749 1 3 3/8 31/2 3.749 1 25/8 31/2 4.249 1 3 Pilot Dimensions Add Stroke
Bore 11/2 2
21/2
31/4
1 1 13/8 1 13/4 13/8 13/8 2 13/4 13/4 21/2 2 2 31/2 21/2 3 21/2 4 3 31/2
Thread Style Style 8 4&9 CC KK 7/16-20 1/2 -20 3/4-16 7/8 -14 3/4-16 7/8 -14 11/4-12 1-14 3/4-16 7/8 -14 11/2-12 11/4-12 11/4-12 1-14 11/4-12 1-14 13/4-12 11/2-12 11/2-12 11/4-12 11/2-12 11/4-12 21/4-12 17/8-12 13/4-12 11/2-12 13/4-12 11/2-12 31/4-12 21/4-12 23/4-12 21/4-12 33/4-12 23/4-12 31/4-12 21/2-12 17/8-12 21/4-12 17/8-12 3-12 21/4-12 21/2-12
B
LA 13/8 21/8 17/8 2 5/ 8 17/8 31/4 2 5/ 8 21/2 3 1/2 3 1/8 3 4 3/8 3 3/8 3 3/8 47/8 4 3/8 4 7/8 41/4 51/4 4 3/4 4 3/4 NA
9/16 15/16 15/16
V
1/4 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
W
5/8
1
3/4
15/16
15/16
1
3/4
111/16 15/16 15/16 115/16 111/16 111/16 2 3/8 115/16 115/16 3 3/8 2 3/8 27/8 23/8 37/8 27/8 3 3/8
11/4 1
7/8
11/4 11/8 1 13/8 11/8 11/8 13/8 13/8 13/8 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4
WF 1 13/8 13/8 15/8 13/8 17/8 15/8 15/8 2 17/8 17/8 21/4 2 2 21/4 21/4 21/4 21/4 21/4 21/4 21/4
Y 2 2 3/8 2 3/8 2 5/8 2 3/8 2 7/8 25/8 2 3/4 31/8 3 3 3 3/8 31/8 31/8 3 3/8 3 3/8 3 3/8 31/2 31/2 31/2 31/2
XF 5 5/8 6 6 6 1/4 6 1/8 6 5/8 6 3/8 7 1/8 7 1/2 7 3/8 75/8 8 7 3/4 8 1/4 8 1/2 8 1/2 8 1/2 9 5/8 9 5/8 9 5/8 9 5/8
ZF 6 6 3/8 6 5/8 6 7/8 6 3/4 7 1/4 7 7 7/8 8 1/4 81/8 8 1/2 8 7/8 8 5/8 9 1/8 9 3/8 9 3/8 9 3/8 105/8 105/8 105/8 105/8

49
Side Lugs, Centerline Lugs and Side Tapped Mountings 11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes
Side Lug Mountings Style C (NFPA Style MS2)

Y W US 1 ZB + STROKE P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE
E ST
2 E-.005 2-.010 3
MM
SW SW
E TS
SB SW 4 HOLES SW
F SW XS
G SU SS + STROKE SU
K SW
Centerline Lugs Mounting Style E (NFPA Style MS3)

US 1 SB 4 HOLES ST E 4 2 MM
Y W
ZB + STROKE P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE
3 SW SW E TS SW SW
F SW XS
G SU SS + STROKE SU
K SW
Side Tapped Mounting Style F (NFPA Style MS4)

E 1
Y W
ZB + STROKE P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE K
E 4
2 E -.005 2 -.010 3 TN NT THREAD, ND DEEP 4 TAPPED MTG. HOLES
MM
F XT
G SN + STROKE

Thread Style 9
A KK
LA
C V MM B
A CC
LA
A
1 8
C V
MM B
KK
D WRENCH FLATS
NA
1 8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA
1 8

50

EE Bore 11/2 2 2 1/2 3 1/4 4 5 6 E 21/2 3 3 1/2 41/2 5 6 1/2 7 1/2 NPTF
1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4
Side Lugs, Centerline Lugs and Side Tapped Mountings 11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes
Add Stroke F
3/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 7/8 7/8
SAE 10 10 10 12 12 12 16
G 13/4 13/4 13/4 2 2 2 21/4
J 11/2 11/2 11/2 13/4 13/4 13/4 21/4
K
3/8 7/16 7/16 9/16 9/16 13/16 7/8
NT
3/8-16 1/2-13
SB*
7/16 9/16
ST
1/2 3/4
SU
15/16
SW
3/8 1/2 11/16 11/16 7/8 7/8
TN
3/4 15/16
TS 31/4 4 4 7/8 57/8 6 3/4 81/4 9 3/4
US 4 5 61/4 71/4 81/2 10 12
LB 5 51/4 5 3/ 8 6 1/ 4 6 5/ 8 7 1/ 8 8 3/ 8
P 2 7/ 8 2 7/ 8 3 3 1/ 2 3 3 /4 41/4 4 7 /8
SN 2 7/ 8 2 7/ 8 3 3 1/ 2 3 3/ 4 41/4 5 1/ 8
SS 3 7/ 8 3 5/ 8 3 3/ 8 4 1/ 8 4 4 1/ 2 5 1/ 8
11/4 19/16 19/16 2 2 21/2
5/8-11 13/16 3/4-10 13/16
1 1 11/4 11/4 11/2
15/16 11/2 2 1/16 2 15/16 35/16
1-8 1-8 11/4-7
11/16 11/16 15/16
11/8
NPTF ports are available at no extra charge. * Upper surface spotfaced for socket head screws.

Rod Dia. MM
5/8
Rod Extensions and +.000 -.002 A B C D 3/4 1/2 1.124 3/8 7/8 11/8 1.499 1/2 7/8 11/8 1.499 1/2 15/8 1.999 5/8 11/8 7/8 11/8 1.499 1/2 2 2.374 3/4 11/2 15/8 1.999 5/8 11/8 15/8 1.999 5/8 11/8 21/4 2.624 7/8 111/16 2 2.374 3/4 11/2 2 2.374 3/4 11/2 3 3.124 1 21/16 21/4 2.624 7/8 111/16 21/4 2.624 7/8 111/16 31/2 4.249 1 3 3 3.124 1 21/16 31/2 3.749 1 2 5/8 3 3.124 1 21/16 4 4.749 1 3 3/8 31/2 3.749 1 25/8 31/2 4.249 1 3 Pilot Dimensions
Add Stroke
Bore 11/2 2
21/2
31/4
1 1 13/8 1 13/4 13/8 13/8 2 13/4 13/4 21/2 2 2 31/2 21/2 3 21/2 4 3 31/2
LA 13/8 21/8 17/8 2 5/ 8 17/8 31/4 2 5/ 8 21/2 3 1/2 3 1/8 3 4 3/8 3 3/8 3 3/8 47/8 4 3/8 4 7/8 41/4 51/4 4 3/4 4 3/4
NA
9/16 15/16 15/16
V
1/4 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
W
5/8
ND
3/8 3/8 7/16 7/16 1/2 1/2 1/2 11/16 11/16 11/16 11/16 11/16 11/16
1
3/4
15/16
15/16
1
3/4
111/16 15/16 15/16 115/16 111/16 111/16 2 3/8 115/16 115/16 3 3/8 2 3/8 27/8 23/8 37/8 27/8 3 3/8
11/4 1
7/8
11/4 11/8 1 13/8 11/8 11/8 13/8 13/8 13/8 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4
1 1 1 1 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4
XS 13/8 13/4 17/8 21/8 2 1/16 2 9/16 25/16 2 5/16 211/16 2 9/16 2 3/4 31/8 2 7/8 2 7/8 3 1/8 31/8 31/8 3 3/8 3 3/8 3 3/8 3 3/8
XT 2 2 3/8 2 3/8 2 5/8 2 3/8 2 7/8 25/8 2 3/4 31/8 3 3 3 3/8 31/8 31/8 3 3/8 3 3/8 3 3/8 31/2 31/2 31/2 31/2
Y 2
2 3/8 2 3/8 2 5/8 2 3/8 2 7/8 25/8 2 3/4 31/8 3 3 3 3/8 31/8 31/8 3 3/8 3 3/8 3 3/8 31/2 31/2 31/2 31/2
ZB 6 6 3/8 6 7/16 611/16 69/16 7 1/16 613/16 711/16 81/16 715/16 83/16 89/16 85/16 91/16 95/16 95/16 95/16 101/2 101/2 101/2 101/2

51
Side End Angles, Side End Lugs and Cap Fixed Clevis Mountings 11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes
Side End Angles Mounting Style CB (NFPA Style MS1)

Y W E 4 ZA + STROKE XA + STROKE P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE AB 6 HOLES
The maximum recommended operating pressure for Style CB is 500 psi. The recommended minimum stroke length is two times the bore size.
E 3
MM
AT
2 AH
AO
AL
G SA + STROKE
ZE + STROKE XE + STROKE Y P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE
AT J
AL
AO
Side End Lugs Mounting Style G (NFPA Style MS7)

E
E
-.005 -.010
MM
ET
For this cylinder mounting style, both the mounting lugs and cylinder end caps must rest on a firm surface.
EB 4 HOLES R
EO
EL
G SE + STROKE
EL
EO
Cap Fixed Clevis Mounting Style BB (NFPA Style MP1)
Y W
ZC + STROKE P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE CD
Tie rods thread into cap on all bore sizes.
PIVOT PIN E 1
MM
4 E
MR K LR F G XC + STROKE J L M CW 3 CB
CW

Thread Style 9
A KK
LA
C V MM B
A CC
LA
A
1 8
C V
MM B
KK
D WRENCH FLATS
NA
1 8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA
1 8

52

+.000 -.002 Bore AB AH AL AO AT CB CD* CW E EB 11/2 7/16 13/8 1 3/8 1/8 3/4 .501 1/2 21/2 7/16 2 2 1/2 3 1/4 4 5 6
9/16 11/16 13/16
Side End Angles, Side End Lugs and Cap Fixed Clevis Mountings 11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes
EE
NPTF SAE
Add Stroke EL EO ES ET F
7/8 15/16 15/16 3/8 7/8 3/ 4 3/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 7/8 7/8 1/2 15/16 7/8 1/2 15/16 7/8 5/8 5/8 3/4
K
3/8
L
3/4
LR M MR R
9/16 1/2 3/4 5/8 15/16 15/16
1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4
10 10 10
13/4 11/2
S LB P SA SE 1.63 13/4 5 27/8 7 63/4 2.05 2 51/4 27/8 73/4 71/8 2.55 23/8 53/8 3 73/4 71/4
111/16 11/4 115/16
1/2
1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 5/16
11/4 .751 11/4 .751
5/8 5/8
9/16
13/4 11/2 7/16 11/4 1 13/4 11/2 7/16 2 2 2
13/16 9/16
3 1/2 9/16
11/16 11/16 15/16
11/4 15/16 3/4
29/16 113/16 11/16 213/16 21/8

7/8 7/8
11/2 1.001 3/4 41/2 2 1.376 1 5 21/2 1.751 11/4 6 1/2 21/2 2.001 11/4 7 1/2
12 11/8 12 11/8
11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/2 11/2
13/4 9/16 11/2 11/4 1 13/16 3.25 31/8 61/4 31/2 97/8 81/2 13/4 9/16 21/8 13/4 13/8 15/8 3.82 31/4 65/8 33/4 107/8 87/8 13/4
13/16 7/8
11/16
11/16 311/16 21/8 15/16 41/4
12 11/2 16
21/4 21/16 13/4 21/8 4.95 43/4 71/8 41/4 113/8 101/8 21/2 25/16 2 23/8 5.73 53/8 83/8 47/8 131/4 113/4
27/16 11/16 3/8
11/16
111/16 7/8
13/4 13/4 1
21/4 21/4
* Dimension CD is pin diameter. Table 3 Table 3 Envelope and Envelope and Mounting Mounting Dimensions Dimensions
Rod Extensions and +.000 -.002 A B C D 3/4 1/2 1.124 3/8 7/8 11/8 1.499 1/2 7/8 11/8 1.499 1/2 15/8 1.999 5/8 11/8 7/8 11/8 1.499 1/2 2 2.374 3/4 11/2 15/8 1.999 5/8 11/8 15/8 1.999 5/8 11/8 21/4 2.624 7/8 111/16 2 2.374 3/4 11/2 2 2.374 3/4 11/2 3 3.124 1 21/16 21/4 2.624 7/8 111/16 21/4 2.624 7/8 111/16 31/2 4.249 1 3 3 3.124 1 21/16 31/2 3.749 1 25/8 3 3.124 1 21/16 4 4.749 1 33/8 31/2 3.749 1 25/8 31/2 4.249 1 3 Pilot Dimensions Add Stroke

Rod Dia. MM
5/8
Bore 11/2 2
21/2
31/4
1 1 13/8 1 13/4 13/8 13/8 2 13/4 13/4 21/2 2 2 31/2 21/2 3 21/2 4 3 31/2
B
LA 13/8 21/8 17/8 2 5/ 8 17/8 31/4 2 5/ 8 21/2 31/2 31/8 3 43/8 33/8 33/8 47/8 43/8 47/8 41/4 51/4 43/4 43/4 NA
9/16 15/16 15/16
V
1/4 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
W
5/8
1
3/4
15/16
15/16
1
3/4
111/16 15/16 15/16 115/16 111/16 111/16 23/8 115/16 115/16 33/8 23/8 27/8 23/8 37/8 27/8 33/8
11/4 1
7/8
11/4 11/8 1 13/8 11/8 11/8 13/8 13/8 13/8 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4
Y 2 23/8 23/8 25/8 23/8 27/8 25/8 23/4 31/8 3 3 33/8 31/8 31/8 33/8 33/8 33/8 31/2 31/2 31/2 31/2
XA 65/8 7 71/4 71/2 75/16 713/16 79/16 815/16 95/16 93/16 93/4 101/8 97/8 103/8 105/8 105/8 105/8 121/16 121/16 121/16 121/16
XC 63/8 63/4 71/4 71/2 73/8 77/8 75/8 85/8 9 87/8 93/4 101/8 97/8 101/2 103/4 103/4 103/4 121/8 121/8 121/8 121/8
XE 61/2 67/8 615/16 73/16 71/16 79/16 75/16 81/4 85/8 81/2 83/4 91/8 87/8 93/4 10 10 10 115/16 115/16 115/16 115/16
ZA 7 73/8 73/4 8 77/8 83/8 81/8 95/8 10 97/8 105/8 11 103/4 111/4 111/2 111/2 111/2 131/8 131/8 131/8 131/8
ZC 67/8 71/4 8 81/4 81/8 85/8 83/8 95/8 10 97/8 111/8 111/2 111/4 121/4 121/2 121/2 121/2 141/8 141/8 141/8 141/8
ZE 67/8 71/4 77/16 711/16 79/16 81/16 713/16 87/8 91/4 91/8 93/8 93/4 91/2 101/2 103/4 103/4 103/4 123/16 123/16 123/16 123/16
Caution: When using mounting styles CB and G, check clearance between mounting members and rod attachment or accessory. If necessary, specify longer rod extension to avoid interference with mounting members.

53
Trunnion Mountings 11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes

Head Trunnion Mounting Style D (NFPA Style MT1)
For "D" Style Mount Maximum Pressure Rating - PSI Bore 2 PSI 3000
E 4

Y W UT 1 1R 8 2 TD MM ZB + STROKE P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE
1 1/2 3000 2 1/2 3000 3 1/4 2800 4 5 6 1800 1200 1000

TL 3 E
TL
F XG
Cap Trunnion Mounting Style DB (NFPA Style MT2)
For "DB" Style Mount Maximum Pressure Rating - PSI Bore 2 PSI 3000
E 4
Y W UT 1 1R 8 2 TD MM
ZB + STROKE P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE
1 1/2 3000 2 1/2 3000 3 1/4 2800 4 5 6 1800 1200 1000

TL 3 E
TL
G XJ + STROKE
Intermediate Fixed Trunnion Mounting Style DD For "DD" Style Mount (NFPA Style MT4) Maximum
Pressure Rating - PSI Bore 2 PSI 3000
UW E 4
W UM 1
ZB + STROKE P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE BD
1 1/2 3000 2 1/2 3000 3 1/4 2800 4 5 6 1800 1200 1000

3 E TM
1R 8 2 TD MM
F TL TL
G XI

Thread Style 9
A KK
LA
C V MM B
A CC
LA
A
1 8
C V
MM B
KK
D WRENCH FLATS
NA
1 8
D WRENCH FLATS
NA
1 8

54

EE Bore 11/2 2 2 1/2 3 1/4 4 5 6 BD 1 1/ 4 1 1/ 2 1 1/ 2 2 2 2 3 E 21/2 3 3 1/2 41/2 5 6 1/2 7 1/2 NPTF
1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4
Trunnion Mountings 11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes
SAE 10 10 10 12 12 12 16
F
3/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 7/8 7/8
G 13/4 13/4 13/4 2 2 2 21/4
J 11/2 11/2 11/2 13/4 13/4 13/4 21/4
K
3/8 7/16 7/16 9/16 9/16 13/16 7/8
+.000 -.001 TL TD 1.000 1 1.375 13/8 1.375 13/8
Add Stroke
TM 3 3 1/ 2 4 5 5 1/ 2 7 81/2
UM 5 61/4 6 3/ 4 8 1/ 2 9
UT 41/2 5 3/ 4 61/4 8 8 1/ 2
UW 33/8 41/8 45/8 513/16 63/8 73/4 103/8
LB 5
P 2 7/ 8
Style DD Minimum Stroke 0

1/4 1/8 3/8 1/8
51/4 2 7/ 8 5 3/ 8 3
1.750 13/4 1.750 13/4
6 1 / 4 3 1/ 2 6 5/ 8 7 1/ 8 8 3/ 8 3 3 /4 41/4 4 7 /8
1.750 13/4 2.000 2
101/2 10 121/2 111/2
0
1/4

Rod Dia. MM
5/8
Rod Extensions and +.000 -.002 A B C D 3/4 1/2 1.124 3/8 7/8 11/8 1.499 1/2 7/8 11/8 1.499 1/2 15/8 1.999 5/8 11/8 7/8 11/8 1.499 1/2 2 2.374 3/4 11/2 15/8 1.999 5/8 11/8 15/8 1.999 5/8 11/8 21/4 2.624 7/8 111/16 2 2.374 3/4 11/2 2 2.374 3/4 11/2 3 3.124 1 21/16 21/4 2.624 7/8 111/16 21/4 2.624 7/8 111/16 31/2 4.249 1 3 3 3.124 1 21/16 31/2 3.749 1 2 5/8 3 3.124 1 21/16 4 4.749 1 3 3/8 31/2 3.749 1 25/8 31/2 4.249 1 3 Pilot Dimensions Min. LA 13/8 21/8 17/8 2 5 /8 17/8 31/4 2 5 /8 21/2 3 1/2 3 1/8 3 4 3/8 3 3/8 3 3/8 47/8 4 3/8 4 7/8 41/4 51/4 4 3/4 4 3/4 NA
9/16 15/16 15/16
Bore 11/2 2
21/2
31/4
1 1 13/8 1 13/4 13/8 13/8 2 13/4 13/4 21/2 2 2 31/2 21/2 3 21/2 4 3 31/2
Add Stroke Y XJ 47/8 51/4 51/4 51/2 53/8 57/8 55/8 61/4 65/8 61/2 63/4 71/8 67/8 73/8 75/8 75/8 75/8 83/8 83/8 83/8 83/8 ZB 6 6 3/8 6 7/16 6 11/16 6 9/16 7 1/16 6 13/16 7 11/16 8 1/16 7 15/16 8 3/16 8 9/16 8 5/16 9 1/16 9 5/16 9 5/16 9 5/16 101/2 101/2 101/2 101/2
V
1/4 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/4 1/2 3/8 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
W
5/8
1
3/4
15/16
15/16
1
3/4
111/16 15/16 15/16 115/16 111/16 111/16 2 3/8 115/16 115/16 3 3/8 2 3/8 27/8 23/8 37/8 27/8 3 3/8
11/4 1
7/8
11/4 11/8 1 13/8 11/8 11/8 13/8 13/8 13/8 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4
XG 17/8 21/4 21/4 21/2 21/4 23/4 21/2 25/8 3 27/8 27/8 3 1/4 3 3 3 1/4 3 1/4 3 1/4 3 3/8 3 3/8 3 3/8 3 3/8
XI 37/16 313/16 315/16 43/16 315/16 47/16 4 3/16 411/16 51/16 415/16 415/16 55/16 51/16 51/16 55/16 55/16 55/16 61/16 61/16 61/16 61/16
2 2 3/8 2 3/8 2 5/8 2 3/8 2 7/8 25/8 2 3/4 31/8 3 3 3 3/8 31/8 31/8 3 3/8 3 3/8 3 3/8 31/2 31/2 31/2 31/2
Dimension XI to be specified by customer.

55
Spherical Bearing Mounting Style SB 11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes

XL + STROKE CE KE ER ZC + STROKE XC + STROKE MA LUBRICATION FITTING 1
LUBRICATION FITTING
Bore 11/2 2 21/2 31/4 4 5 6
Max. Op. PSI 1500 2200 1450 1500 1850 2000 1800
4
3 EX
CD LE W KK NR
CD
MS 3 EX
Table 1 Dimensions
Rod No. 1(Std.) 2 1(Std.) 2 1(Std.) 2 3 1(Std.) 2 3 1(Std.) 2 3 1(Std.) 2 3 4 1(Std.) 2 3 4 Rod Dia. MM
5
Bore 1 /2
1
/8
2 /2
1
3 /4
1
1 1 13/8 1 13/4 13/8 13/8 2 13/4 13/4 21/2 2 2 31/2 21/2 3 21/2 4 3 31/2
Thread Style Style 9 7 KK KK 7 /16-20 7 /16-20 3 /4-16 3 /4-16 3 /4-16 3 /4-16 3 /4-16 1-14 1-14 1-14 11/4-12 11/4-12 11/4-12 1 1 /2-12 11/2-12 11/2-12 11/2-12 7 1 /8-12 17/8-12 17/8-12 17/8-12
Add Stroke A
3 3
W
5
/4 /4
/8 /4 /4
1
3
11/8 11/8 11/8 11/8 11/8 15/8 15/8 15/8 2 2 2 21/4 21/4 21/4 21/4 3 3 3 3
1
3
11/4 1
7
/8
11/4 11/8 1 13/8 11/8 11/8 13/8 13/8 13/8 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4
XC 63/8 6 3/4 71/4 71/2 7 3/8 77/8 7 5/8 8 5/8 9 87/8 9 3/4 101/8 9 7/8 101/2 10 3/4 10 3/4 10 3/4 121/8 121/8 121/8 121/8
XL 71/4 7 5/8 81/2 83/4 85/8 91/8 87/8 101/2 107/8 10 3/4 117/8 121/4 12 13 131/4 131/4 131/4 147/8 147/8 147/8 147/8
ZC 71/8 71/2 81/4 81/2 83/8 87/8 85/8 97/8 101/4 101/8 115/8 12 113/4 13 131/4 131/4 131/4 145/8 145/8 145/8 145/8
KE 11/2 17/8 2 21/4 2 21/2 21/4 23/4 31/8 3 31/8 3 1/2 31/4 35/8 37/8 37/8 37/8 4 4 4 4
CD* CE -.0005 7 /8 .5000 -.0005 1 1 /4 .7500 -.0005 11/4 .7500 -.0005 7 1 /8 1.0000 -.0005 1 2 /8 1.3750
ER
13
EX
7
LE
3
MA
3
MS
15
NR
5
/16
/16 /32
/4
/4
/16
/8
11/8 11/8
21
11/16 11/16
1 1
13/8 13/8
1 1
21
/32
11/4
/8
17/16
11/4
111/16
11/4
111/16 13/16
17/8
17/8
27/16
15/8
-.0005 21/2 1.7500
21/16 117/32
21/8
21/2
27/8
21/16
-.0005 23/4 2.0000
21/2
13/4
21/2
21/2
3 5/16
23/8
Maximum operating pressure at 4:1 design factor is based on tensile strength of material. Pressure ratings are based on standard commercial bearing ratings. Note: for additional dimensions see Series 2H Style BB mount. Rod No. 1 is standard. *Dimension CD is hole diameter. Recommended maximum swivel angle on each side of the cylinder centerline.
Mounting Information Head End Mounting

A A
Cap End Mounting

A A
Table 1 Bore 11/2 2 21/2 31/4 4 5 6 Head End Mounted Angle a Tan. of a 2 21/2 21/2 3 21/2 3 3 .035 .044 .044 .052 .044 .052 .052 Cap End Mounted Tan. of a Angle a 2 41/2 41/2 3 3 3 3 .035 .079 .079 .052 .052 .052 .052
X X
X X
XL + STROKE
XL + STROKE
Note: Dimension X is the maximum off center mounting of the cylinder. To determine dimension X for various stroke lengths multiply the distance between pivot pin holes by tangent of angle a. For extended position use X = XL times 2X stroke.

56

Parker offers a complete range of Cylinder Accessories to assure you of the greatest versatility in present or future cylinder applications. Accessories offered for the
Spherical Rod Eye
CD
Cylinder Accessories Spherical Bearing Mounting Style SB
respective cylinder include the Rod Eye, Pivot Pin and Clevis Bracket. To select the proper part number for any desired accessory refer to the charts below.
Bore Sizes Rod Eye

EX
Series 2H Part No. CD A CE EX ER LE JK JL LOAD CAPACITY LBS.
11/2 132290
2 & 21/2 132291
31/ 4 132292
4 132293
5 132294
6 132295
.5000-0005
11/ 16 7/ 8 7/16 13/ 16 3/ 4 7/16-20 7/ 8
ER (MAX)
.7500-0005 1 1 1/ 4
21/ 32
LE
CE
LUBE FITTING
A
JK THD
1 1/ 8 11/16 3/4-16 15/16 9441
1.0000-0005 1.3750-0005 1.7500-0005 2.0000-0005 1 1/ 2 2 2 1/ 8 2 7/ 8 7/ 8 1/ 8 1/ 2 2 1 2 2 3/ 4 7/ 8 13/16 117/32 1 3/ 4 1 1/ 4 111/16 2 1/16 2 1/ 2 17/16 1 7/ 8 2 1/ 8 2 1/ 2 1-14 11/4-12 11/2-12 17/8-12 1 1/ 2 2 2 1/ 4 2 3/ 4 16860 28562 43005 70193
2644
JL
DIA
Order to fit Piston Rod Thread Size.
B
Pivot Pin
Bore Sizes Pivot Pin Series 2H Part No. CD CL SHEAR CAPACITY LBS. 11/ 2 83962 2 & 21/2 83963 31/4 83964 4 83965 5 83966 6 83967
CL
CD
.4997-0004 19/16 8600
.7497-0005 21/32 19300
.9997-0005 21/2 34300
1.3746-0006 1.7496-0006 1.9996-0007 35/16 47/32 415/16 65000 105200 137400
Pivot Pins are furnished with (2) Retainer Rings.
Clevis Bracket
Bore Sizes
Clevis Bracket
Series 2H Part No. CD CF CW DD E F FL LR M MR R LOAD CAPACITY LBS.
11/ 2 83947 1/ 2
7/16 1/ 2 13/32
2 & 21/2 83948 3/ 4

21/32 5/ 8 17/32
31/4 83949
1
7/ 8 3/ 4 17/32
4 83950 1 3/ 8
5 83951 1 3/ 4
6 83952
FL
LR
MR DD DIA 4 HOLES
CW
CF
CW
13/16 1
21/32
117/32 1 1/ 4
29/32
2 1 3/ 4 1 1/ 2
29/32
CD + .004 + .002
R E
3
1/ 2
3 3/ 4
5/ 8
5 1/ 2
3/ 4
6 1/ 2
7/ 8
1 1/ 2
15/16 1/ 2 5/ 8
R E
2 1 3/ 8
7/ 8
Order to fit Mounting Plate or Rod Eye.
2.05 5770
1 2.76 9450
2 1/ 2 111/16 1 13/16 4.10 14300
3 1/ 2 27/16 1 3/ 8 1 5/ 8 4.95 20322
8 1/ 2 1 1/ 4 4 1/ 2 2 7/ 8 1 3/ 4 21/16 6.58 37800
105/8 1 1/ 2 5 35/16 2 2 3/ 8 7.92 50375

57
Double Rod Models 11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes

How to Use Double Rod Cylinder Dimensioned Drawings
11/2" to 6" Bores
ZM + 2 x STROKE ZL + STROKE P + STROKE LD + STROKE EE
Rod End #1
Rod End #2
Dimensions Shown on Mounting This Page Supplement Styles for Mounting Dimensions on Pages Styles for Corresponding Listed Below Single Rod Double Rod 11/2" - 6" Bores Models* Page No. Models
MM
T TB TD J JB JJ C E F CB G D DD
KT KTB KTD KJ KJB KJJ KC KE KF KCB KG KD KDD
44 44 44 46 46 46 50 50 50 52 52 54 54
To determine dimensions for a double rod cylinder, first refer to the desired single rod mounting style cylinder shown on preceding pages of this catalog. (See table at left.) After selecting necessary dimensions from that drawing, return to this page supplement the single rod dimensions with those shown on drawing at right and dimension table below. Note that double rod cylinders have a head (Dim. G) at both ends and that dimension LD replaces LB and ZL replaces ZB, etc. The double rod dimensions differ from, or
are in addition to those for single rod cylinders shown on preceding pages and provide the information needed to completely dimension a double rod cylinder. On a double rod cylinder where the two rod ends are different, be sure to clearly state which rod end is to be assembled at which end. Port position 1 is standard. If other than standard, specify pos. 2, 3 or 4 when viewed from rod end #1 only. See port position information in Section C.
*If only one end of these Double Rod Cylinders is to be cushioned, be sure to specify clearly which end this will be. Specify XI dimension from rod end #1.
All dimensions are in inches and apply to Code 1 rod sizes only. For alternate rod sizes, determine all envelope dimensions (within LD dim.) as described above and then use appropriate rod end dimensions for proper rod size from single rod cylinder.
Add stroke Rod Rod Dia. Bore No. MM
5/8 11/2 1 1 2 1 1 21/2 1 13/8 31/4 1 13/4 4 1 2 5 1 21/2 6 1 Replaces:
On single rod mounting styles:
Add 2X Stroke
LD 55/8 61/8 61/4 71/4 73/4 81/4 9 3/8 LB
ZL 6 1/4 67/8 7 81/8 83/4 93/8 105/8 ZB
All Mtg. Styles
XAK ZAK 7 5/8 71/4 7 5/8 5/8 1/8 8 8 8 5/8 5/8 3/16 8 8 8 3/4 7/8 915/16 10 5/8 10 12 107/8 113/4 1/2 111/2 12 123/8 1/4 131/16 141/8 14 SA XA ZA CB
SAK
SNK 2 7/8 2 7/8 3 31/2 33/4 41/4 47/8 SN F
SSK 41/8 37/8 35/8 43/8 41/4 43/4 51/8 SS C,E
SEK 73/8 8 81/8 91/2 10 111/4 123/4 SE
XEK 71/8 713/16 715/16 91/4 97/8 107/8 125/16 XE G
ZEK 71/2 8 5/16 8 7/16 97/8 101/2 115/8 133/16 ZE
ZM 67/8 75/8 73/4 9 93/4 101/2 117/8

All Mtgs.

58
NOTES

59
Cylinder Accessories
8 2 6

2 Female Rod Clevis
ER +.004 CD +.002 CE A CW CB CW
3 Cylinder Accessories
KK THREAD
Order to fit thread size.
Parker offers a complete range of cylinder accessories to assure you of greatest versatility in present or future cylinder applications.
3 Knuckle (Female Rod Eye)

ER CD CD KK THREAD CD CA CB CD +.004 +.002 A FULL THREAD
Rod End Accessories

Accessories offered for the rod end of the cylinder include Rod Clevis, Eye Bracket, Knuckle, Clevis Bracket and Pivot Pin. To select the proper part number for any desired accessory, refer to Chart A below and look opposite the thread size of the rod end as indicated in the first column. The Pivot Pins, Eye Brackets and Clevis Brackets are listed opposite the thread size which their mating Knuckles or Clevises fit.
Chart A
Mating Parts
Thread Rod Size Clevis Eye Bracket Pin
Mating Parts
Clevis Knuckle Bracket Pin Alignment Coupler
Order to fit thread size. 134757 134757 134757 134757 134757 134757 134757 134757 134757 134757 133739 133739 133739 0031 0044 0050 0075 0075 0088 0100 0100 0125 0125 0150 0175 0188
51221 7/16-20 50940 1/2-20 50941 3/4-16 50942 3/4-16 133284 7/8-14 50943 1-14 50944 1-14 133285 11/4-12 50945 11/4-12 133286 11/2-12 50946 13/4-12 50947 17/8-12 50948 21/4-12 50949 21/2-12 50950 23/4-12 50951 31/4-12 50952 31/2-12 50953 4-12 50954
5/16-24
74077 69195 69195 69196 69196 *85361 *85361 *85361 69198 69198 *85362 *85363 *85363 *85364 *85365 *85365 73538 73539 73539
68368 68368 68369 68369 68370 68370 68370 68371 68371 68372 68373 68373 68374 68375 68375 73545 73547 73547
74075 69089 69090 69091 69091 69092 69093 69093 69094 69094 69095 69096 69097 69098 69099 69100 73536 73437 73438
74076 69205 69205 69206 69206 69207 69207 69207 69208 69208 69209 69210 69210 69211 69212 69213 73542 73542 73543
74078 68368 68368 68369 68369 68370 68370 68370 68371 68371 68372 69215 69215 68374 68375 69216 73545 73545 82181
4 Clevis Bracket for Knuckle

CW MR M 25 LR FL F R E R E DD DIA 4 HOLES CB CW CD + .004 + .002
Order to fit Knuckle.
8 Mounting Plate or 5 Eye Bracket

MR M 25 LR FL F R E R E DD DIA 4 HOLES CB CD + .004 + .002
Consult Factory
For alignment coupler dimensions, see section C. *Cylinder accessory dimensions conform to NFPA recommended standard NFPA/T3.6.8 R1-1984, NFPA recommended standard fluid power systems cylinder dimensions for accessories for cataloged square head industrial types. Parker adopted this standard in April, 1985. Eye Brackets or Mounting Plates shipped before this date may have different dimensions and will not necessarily interchange with the NFPA standard. For dimensional information on older style Eye Brackets or Mounting Plates consult Drawing #144805 or previous issues of this catalog.
Accessory Load Capacity
1. When used to mate with the Rod Clevis, select from Chart A. 2. When used to mount the Style BB cylinders, select from the Mounting Plate Selection Table. See Chart B at lower left.
The various accessories on this and the following Chart B pages have been load rated for your convenience. Mtg. Plate Series 2H The load capacity in lbs., shown on the following Part No. Bore Size page is the recommended maximum load for that 11/2" 69195 accessory based on a 4:1 design factor in tension. 69196 2", 21/2" (Pivot Pin is rated in shear.) Before specifying, compare the actual load or the tension (pull) force *85361 31/4" at maximum operating pressure of the cylinder 69198 4" with the load capacity of the accessory you plan to *85362 5" use. If load or pull force of cylinder exceeds load capacity of accessory, consult factory. *85363 6"
6 Pivot Pin
CL +.001 CD -.002
Mounting Plates
Mounting Plates for Style BB (clevis mounted) cylinders are offered. To select proper part number for your application, refer to Chart B, above right.
1. Pivot Pins are furnished with Clevis Mounted Cylinders as standard. 2. Pivot Pins are furnished with (2) Retainer Rings. 3. Pivot Pins must be ordered as separate item if to be used with Knuckles, Rod Clevises, or Clevis Brackets.

60

A CB CD CE CW ER KK
Load Capacity Lbs. O
Cylinder Accessories
Female Rod Clevis Part Number 51221 50940 50941 50942 133284 50943 50944 133285 50945 133286 50946 50947 50948 50949 50950 50951 50952 50953 50954 13/16 3/4 3/4 11/8 15/8 31/2 31/2 4 15/8 3 11/8 15/8 17/8 21/4 31/2 2 3 31/2 4 1/4 1/2 11/32 3/4 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/4 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 2 2 3 4 3 4 41/2 2 2 5/16 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 1 3 1 2 1 13/4 4 13/8 3 2 4 21/2 31/2 13/8 21/4 11/2 23/8 215/16 215/16 31/8 63/4 11/2 51/2 21/8 33/4 41/2 63/4 41/8 61/2 73/4 813/16 813/16 51/2 13/64 1/2 5/8 3/4 1/2 3/4 5/8 3/4 11/2 11/4 1 11/4 11/2 21/4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/4 19/64 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1 23/4 1 2 1 1 2 4 1 2 2 4 1 3 5/16-24 7/16-20 1/2-20 3/4-16 3/4-16 7/8-14 1-14 1-14 11/4-12 11/4-12 11/2-12 13/4-12 17/8-12 21/4-12 21/2-12 23/4-12 31/4-12 31/2-12 4-12
2600 4250 4900 11200 11200 18800 19500 19500 33500 33500 45600 65600 65600 98200 98200 98200 156700 193200 221200
A CA CB CD ER KK
Knuckle Part Number 74075 69089 69090 69091 69092 69093 69094 69095 69096 69097 69098 69099 69100 73536 73437 73438 73439 3/4 3/4 3/4 5 1/2 15/8 3 5/8 11/8 2 1/4 5 2 1/4 3 31/2 4 1/2 5 1/2 11/8 2 3 1/2 9 1/8 11/2 2 13/16 37/16 6 1/2 2 1/16 4 7 5/8 4 3/8 61/8 7 5/8 9 1/8 5 11/2 11/2 2 3/8 5 13/16 3/4 1/4 1/2 1/2 7/16 1/2 1/2 3/4 4 1/2 11/2 3 1/2 1 4 2 2 3 4 5 2 1 2 3 1/2 3/4 7/16 1/2 4 1 3 13/4 3 1/2 2 2 3 3 1/2 4 13/8 1 2 1/2 23/32 19/32 23/32 17/16 4 1/4 11/16 2 1/2 4 31/32 4 31/32 5 11/16 5 11/16 2 27/32 2 27/32 3 9/16 41/4 131/32 17/16 3/4-16 5/16-24 7/16-20 1/2-20 7/8-14 1-14 11/4-12 11/2-12 13/4-12 17/8-12 2 1/4-12 2 1/2-12 2 3/4-12 3 1/4-12 3 1/2-12 4-12 41/2 -12
3300 5000 5700 12100 13000 21700 33500 45000 53500 75000 98700 110000 123300 161300 217300 273800 308500
74076 CB CD CW DD E F FL LR M MR R
69205
3/4 1/2 1/2 13/32
15/32 7/16 3/8 17/64
69206 11/4
3/4 5/8 17/32
69207 11/2 1
3/4 21/32
2 1/4
3/8
3 1/2
1/2
5
5/8
6 1/2
3/4
1
5/8 3/8 1/2
11/2
3/4 1/2 5/8
1 7/8 13/16
3/4 29/32
1.75
3600
2.55
7300
3.82
14000
2 1/4 11/2 1 11/4 4.95

19200
Clevis Bracket for Knuckle Part Number 69208 69210 69211 69212 69209 2 2 1/2 3 3 2 1/2 13/8 2 2 1/2 3 13/4 1 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/4 21/32 29/32 11/16 13/16 1 5/16 7 1/2 12 3/4 12 3/4 12 3/4 9 1/2 7/8 7/8 1 1 1 3 4 1/4 4 1/2 6 3 5/8 2 3 3/16 3 1/2 4 1/4 2 3/4 2 1/4 2 1/2 3 13/8 13/4 1 21/32 2 25/32 3 1/8 3 19/32 2 7/32 5.73 9.40 9.40 9.40 7.50
36900 34000 33000 34900 33800
69213 3 1/2 3 11/2 15/16 12 3/4 1 6 4 1/4 3 3 19/32 9.40

36900
73542 4 3 1/2 2 113/16 15 1/2 111/16 6 11/16 5 3 1/2 4 1/8 12.00

83500
73543 4 1/2 4 2 2 1/16 17 1/2 1 15/16 7 11/16 5 3/4 4 4 7/8 13.75

102600
73544 5 4 2 2 1/16 17 1/2 115/16 7 11/16 5 3/4 4 4 7/8 13.75

108400
74077 CB CD DD E F FL LR M MR R
69195
3/4 1/2 13/32
5/16 5/16 17/64
69196 11/4
3/4 17/32
2 1/4
3/8
2 1/2
3/8
3 1/2
5/8
1
5/8 3/8 1/2
11/8
3/4 1/2 9/16
17/8 11/4
3/4 7/8
1.75
1700
1.63
4100
2.55
10500
Eye Bracket and Mounting Plate Part Number 85361* 69198 85362* 85363* 85364* 11/2 2 2 1/2 2 1/2 3 1 13/4 2 13/8 2 1/2 21/32 21/32 29/32 1 3/16 11/16 4 1/2 5 6 1/2 7 1/2 8 1/2 7/8 7/8 11/8 1 1/2 13/4 2 3/8 3 3 3/8 4 4 3/4 11/2 2 1/4 3 2 1/8 2 1/2 1 13/8 13/4 2 2 1/2 15/8 2 1/8 3 11/4 2 7/16 3.25 3.82 4.95 5.73 6.58
20400 21200 49480 70000 94200
85365* 3 3 15/16 9 1/2 2 5 1/4 3 1/4 2 3/4 3 1/4 7.50

121900
73538 4 3 1/2 113/16 12 5/8 111/16 5 11/16 4 3 1/2 4 1/8 9.62

57400
73539 41/2 4 21/16 14 7/8 115/16 6 7/16 4 1/2 4 5 1/4 11.45

75000
74078 CD CL
Shear Capacity Lbs.O
68368
1/2
68369
3/4
7/16
1 5/16
6600
17/8
8600
2 5/8
19300
68370 1 3 1/8
34300
68371 13/8 4 1/8

65000
68372 13/4 5 3/16

105200
Pivot Pin Part Number 68373 69215 68374 2 2 2 1/2 6 3/16 5 3/16 5 11/16
137400 137400 214700
68375 3 6 1/4
309200
69216 3 6 3/4
309200
73545 3 1/2 8 1/4

420900
82181 4 8 5/8
565800
73547 4 9
565800
*Cylinder accessory dimensions conform to NFPA recommended standard NFPA/T3.6.8 R1-1984, NFPA recommended standard fluid power systems cylinder dimensions for accessories for cataloged square head industrial types. Parker adopted this standard in April, 1985. Eye Brackets or Mounting Plates shipped before this date may have different dimensions and will not necessarily interchange with the NFPA standard. For dimensional information on older style Eye Brackets or Mounting Plates consult Drawing #144805 or previous issues of this catalog. O See Accessory Load Capacity note on previous page. These sizes supplied with cotter pins. Includes Pivot Pin. Consult appropriate cylinder rod end dimensions for compatibility.

61
How to Order

Additional Lipseal Piston (if desired): Parker Lipseal pistons are offered as an option at no extra cost in the Series 2H cylinders. With this feature, zero leakage under static holding conditions is attained. Call out with Lipseal piston if this type of piston is desired. If not specified, the ring type piston will be furnished. Hi Load piston seals are available for an additional charge. Refer to the beginning of Section C for the benefits of this piston seal assembly. Fluid Medium: Series 2H hydraulic cylinders are equipped with seals for use with hydraulic oil. If other than hydraulic oil will be used, specify class of fluid (See Catalog section C.)
How to Order Series 2H Cylinders

When ordering Series 2H cylinders, please review the following:
Note: Duplicate cylinders can be ordered by giving the SERIAL NUMBER from the nameplate of the original cylinder. Factory records supply a quick positive identification. Piston Rods: Specify rod code number based on diameter. Give thread style number for a standard thread or specify dimensions. See Style 3 Rod End below. Cushions: If cushions are required specify according to the model number on the next page. If the cylinder is to have a double rod and only one cushion is required, be sure to specify clearly which end of the cylnder is to be cushioned. Special Modifications: Additional information is required on orders for cylinders with special modifications. This is best handled with descriptive notes. For further information, consult factory.
Water Service Modifications

Standard When requested, Parker can supply Series 2H cylinders with standard modifications that make the cylinders more nearly suitable for use with water as the fluid medium. The modifications include chrome-plated cylinder bore; electroless nickel-plated, nonwearing internal surfaces; Lipseal style piston, Buna N Seals and chrome-plated, stainless steel piston rod. On orders for water service cyinders, be sure to specify the maximum operating pressure.
(These factors must be taken into account because of the lower tensile strength of stainless steels available for use in piston rods.) Warranty Parker will warrant Series 2H cylinders modified for water service to be free of defects in materials or workmanship. On the other hand, Parker cannot accept responsibility for premature failure of cylinder function, where failure is caused by corrosion, electrolysis or mineral deposits within the cylinder.
Class 1 Seals
Class 1 seals are the seals provided as standard in a cylinder assembly unless otherwise specified. For further information on fluid compatibility or operating limitations of all components, see section C. For the 2H series cylinders the following make-up Class 1 Seals: Primary Piston Rod Seal Enhanced Polyurethane Piston Rod Wiper Nitrile Piston Seals Cast Iron Rings Option Nitrile lipseals with polymyte back-up washers Option Hi-Load. Filled P.T.F.E. seals with a nitrile expander O-Rings Nitrile (nitrile back-up washer when used)
Combination Mountings
Single Rod End The first mounting is the one called out on the head end of the cylinder. The second or subsequent mountings are called out as they appear in the assembly moving away from the rod end. Exception: When tie rod mountings are part of a combination, the model number should contain an S (Special) in the model code and a note in the body of the order clarifying the mounting arrangement. The P is used to define a thrust key and is not considered to be a mounting. However, it is located at the primary end. Example: 4.00 CCBB2HLTS14AC x 10.000 Combination C mounting head only. BB mounting cap end This cylinder is also cushioned at both ends. Double Rod End In general, the model number is read left to right corresponding to the cylinder as viewed from left to right with the primary end at rod end #1. See Double Rod Models information page in this section. For this option the piston rod number, piston rod end, and piston rod threads are to be specified for both ends. The simplest are for symmetric cylinders such as: TD, C, E, F, G, and CB mounts. All other mounting styless, the description of the first rod end will be at the mounting end. In the case of multiple mounts, the description of the first rod end will be at the primary mounting end. For DD mounts, the description of the first rod end will be the same location as the XI dimension. Example: 4.00 KDD2HLT24A/18A x 10.000 XI=8 This is a center trunnion mounting cylinder with the XI dimension measured from the code 2 rod side of the cylinder which has the style 4 thread. The opposite end code 1 rod with the style 8 thread.
Style 3 Rod End

A style 3 rod end indicates a special rod end configuration. All special piston rod dimensions must have all three: KK; A; W/WF or LA/LAF specified with the rod fully retracted. A sketch or drawing should be submitted for rod ends requiring special machining such as snap ring grooves, keyways, tapers, multiple diameters, etc. It is good design practice to have this machining done on a diameter at least 0.065 inches smaller than the piston rod diameter. This allows the piston rod to have a chamfer preventing rod seal damage during assembly or maintenance. Standard style 55 rod ends with a longer than standard WG dimension should call out a style 3 rod end and the note: same as 55 except WG=____. A drawing should be submitted for special 55 rod ends that have specific tolerances or special radii. Special rod ends that have smaller than standard male threads, larger than standard female threads, or style 55 rod ends with smaller than standard AF or AE dimensions are to be reviewed by Engineering for proper strength at operating pressure.
Service Policy
On cylinders returned to the factory for repairs, it is standard policy for the Cylinder Division to make such part replacements as will put the cylinder in as good as new condition. Should the condition of the returned cylinder be such that expenses for repair would exceed the costs of a new one, you will be notified. Address all correspondence and make shipments to, Service Department at your nearest regional plant listed in the pages of this catalog.
Certified Dimensions
Parker Cylinder Division guarantees that all cylinders ordered from this catalog will be built to dimensions shown. All dimensions are certified to be correct, and thus it is not necessary to request certified drawings.

62

Parker Series 2H cylinders can be completely and accurately described by a model number consisting of coded symbols. To develop a model number, select only those symbols that represent
Model Numbers
Series 2H Model Numbers How to Develop Them How to Decode Them

the cylinder required, and place them in the sequence indicated below. Note: Page numbers with a letter prefix, ie: C77, are located in section C of this catalog. 6" C K F P TB 2H L T V S 1 4 2 A C 12"
Feature
Bore* Cushion-Head Double-Rod Mounting* Style
Description
Specify in inches Used only if cushion required Used only if double-rod cylinder is required Head Tie Rods Extended Cap Tie Rods Extended Both End Tie Rods Extended Head Rectangular Flange Head Square Flange Head Rectangular Cap Rectangular Flange Cap Square Flange Cap Rectangular Side Lugs Centerline Lugs Side Tapped Side End Angles Side End Lugs Cap Fixed Clevis Head Trunnion Cap Trunnion Intermediate Fixed Trunnion Spherical Bearing Used only for Thrust Key (Styles C,F,G, & CB) Used only for Manifold Port O-Ring Seal (Style C) Any Practical Mounting Style Listed Above Used in all 2H Model Numbers Ring packed piston standard Used only for Lipseal Piston Used only for Hi-Load Piston SAE Straight Thread O-Ring Port (Standard) Used only for NPTF (Dry Seal Pipe Thread) Used only for BSP (Parallel Thread ISO 228) Used only for SAE Flange Ports (3000 psi) Used only for BSPT (Taper Thread) Used only for Metric Thread Used only for Metric Thread per ISO 6149 High Water Content Fluid Nut Retained Piston Fluorocarbon Seals Water Service EPR Seals Used only if special Modifications are required: Oversize Ports Port Position Change Special Seals Stop Tube Stroke Adjuster Tie Rod Supports For Single Rod Cylinders, select one only. Refer to Rod number listing, Table 2, Pages 44 through 55 See chart in Section C for minimum piston rod diameter
Page No. Symbol

C94,42 & 43 58 44 44 44 46 46 46 48 48 48 50 50 50 52 52 52 54 54 54 56 C93 C91 43 43 C89 C89 C89 C89 C89 C89 C89 C83 43 C83 C83 C83 C91 C89 C83 C95 C93 C93 C92 B56 C92 C92 C19 C92 C92 C92 C92 C92 C94, 42 & 43 C93 C K TB TC TD J JB JJ H HB HH C E F CB G BB D DB DD SB P M As listed above 2H C L K T U R P B G Y J F V W X S
Modifications Mounting Combination Mounting Style Series* Piston
Ports*
Common Modifications
Special Modifications
Use Symbol S to designate special Modification except piston rod end
Piston Rod* Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 7 8 9 55 3 2 A W M C
Piston* Rod End
Piston Rod Alternate Thds. Piston Rod* Threads Cushion-Cap Stroke*
Select: Style 4 Small Male Style 7 Female Thread for Spherical Rod Eye Style 8 Intermediate Male Style 9 Short Female Style 55 Rod End for Flange Coupling Style 3 Special (Specify) Used only for stud two times longer than standard. UNF Standard BSF (British Fine) Metric Used only if cushion required Specify in inches
Double Rod Cylinders Styles 4, 8 and 9 are catalog standards. Specify Style 3 for any special piston rod end For double rod cylinders, specify rod number and rod end symbols for both piston rods. A typical double rod model number would be:
6" KJ-2HU14A/14AX12"
*Required for Basic Cylinder Model Number In case of Stop Tube, call out Gross Stroke Length
Cylinders with these mounting styles should have a minimum stroke length equal to or greater than their bore size.
Dark Arrows Indicate Basic Minimum Model Number Specify XI dimension

63
Parker TS-2000 seal designed to eliminate cylinder rod seal leakage.

Parker Series 2H Heavy Duty and Series 3L Medium Duty Hydraulic Cylinders with the TS-2000 seal offers positive protection against cylinder rod leakage under the most demanding applications. The TS-2000 seal is the product of countless hours of research, development and extensive field testing and is only available on Parker Cylinders. Based on the popular Parker Serrated Lipseal rod design, the TS-2000 incorporates the pressurecompensated, uni-directional characteristics of a U-cup with the multiple edge sealing effectiveness of compression-type stacked-packings. The goal for the Parker team was to design a rod seal suitable for all types of applications, regardless of pressure profile. It had to be composed of a Jewel gland with wiperseal and TS-2000 cylinder rod seal. material that would not react chemically with hydraulic fluids. And it had to produce better and more reliable dry rod performance than the standard serrated lip-seal design in a broad range of applications. The result is the TS-2000 seal, designed especially to eliminate rod seal leakage in the most demanding applications. It features a special polyurethane material that will not react chemically with petroleum-based hydraulic fluid, is extremely resistant to abrasion and extrusion, and provides exceptional service life. It has more sealing edges than other seals on the market, which in turn produces dry rod performance. The seal geometry was refined for maximum stability in the groove and has excellent performance characteristics throughout a broad range of pressures and piston rod velocities. The Parker design team was successful! TS-2000 rod seal has not failed in any of the test applications in the lab or on the job, no matter how tough or demanding. For more information on the TS-2000 call or write your local Parker distributor or Parker Hannifin Corporation, Cylinder Division, 500 S. Wolf Road, Des Plaines, IL 60016, 847-298-2400.
Worldclass Quality Products and Service

64
2A Tie Rod Cylinders

NFPA Pneumatic Cylinders for working pressures up to 18 bar
Catalogue HY07-0910/UK October 2006
Catalogue HY07-0910/UK
Mounting Styles 2A Cylinder Mounting Styles

The standard range of Parker 2A cylinders comprises 15 mounting styles, to suit the majority of applications. General guidance for the selection of the cylinders is given below, with dimensional information about each mounting style shown on pages 8 to 20 for 25.4mm to 152.4mm (1 to 6) bore sizes, and pages 22 to 30 for 203.2mm to 355.6mm (8 to 14) bore sizes.
Tie Rod Cylinders 2A Series
Application-specific mounting information is shown on pages 36 and 37. Where a non-standard mounting style is required to satisfy a particular application, our design engineers will be happy to assist. Please contact the factory for details.
NFPA MX3
NFPA MX2
NFPA MX1
TB NFPA MF1
TC NFPA MF5
TD NFPA MF2
J NFPA MF6
JB NFPA MS2
H NFPA MS4
HB NFPA MS7
C NFPA MP1
F NFPA MP2
G NFPA MT1
BB NFPA MT2
BC NFPA MT4
DB
DD
K (KTB shown)
Most mounting styles are available as double rod cylinders
Parker Hannifin Ltd. Cylinder Division Europe
Introduction
Contents
Introduction Standard Specifications Design Features and Benefits Seal Groups Cylinder Selection Check List Mounting Styles Dimensions 25.4mm to 152.4mm (1 to 6) bore sizes Piston Rod End Data 25.4mm to 152.4mm (1 to 6) bore sizes Double Rod Cylinders Dimensions 203.2mm to 355.6mm (8 to 14) bore sizes Piston Rod End Data 203.2mm to 355.6mm (8 to 14) bore sizes Accessories Non-Lubricated Air Cylinders (2AN Series) Mounting Information Pressure Limitations Push and Pull Forces Piston Rod Sizes & Stop Tubes Stroke Factors & Long Stroke Cylinders Cushioning Ports, Locations and Piston Speeds Optional Features Replacement Parts and Service Repairs Storage Information & Cylinder Mass Data Warranty How to Order Cylinders

Page
3 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 21 22 30 31 34 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 46 47
Index
Accessories Cushioning Cylinder Selection Check List Design Features Dimensions Double Rod Cylinders Forces Push and Pull inPHorm Masses Model Numbers Mounting Styles and Information Non-Lubricated Air Cylinders (2AN Series) Optional Features Ordering Instructions Piston Rod End Data Piston Rod Size Selection Piston and Seal Types Ports Standard and Oversize Pressure Ratings and Limitations Replacement Parts and Service Seal Groups Speed Limitations Standard Specifications Stop Tubes Storage and Installation Stroke Limiters Stroke Factors Stroke Tolerances Thrust Keys Warranty
Page
31-33 41 6 4-5 8, 22 21 38 3 46, 31-33 47 2, 7, 36-37 34-35 43 47 20, 30 39 5 42 37 44-45 5 42 3 39 46 43 40 37 36 46
Introduction
Parker Hannifin Corporation is a world leader in the manufacture of components and systems for motion control. Parker has more than 800 product lines for hydraulic, pneumatic and electro-mechanical applications in some 1200 industrial and aerospace markets. With more than 50,000 employees and some 210 manufacturing plants and administrative offices around the world, Parker provides customers with technical excellence and first class customer service. Parker Hannifins Cylinder Division is the worlds largest supplier of hydraulic cylinders for industrial applications. The heavy duty series 2A pneumatic cylinders described in this catalogue are of all-steel construction and are based on the Parker series 3L hydraulic range see catalogue HY07-1130. They are exceptionally robust and are ideally suited for applications in steel mills, foundries, aluminium smelting plants or other arduous environments where normal light duty aluminium cylinders are not sufficiently durable. In addition to the standard cylinders featured in this catalogue, 2A cylinders can be designed to suit customer requirements. Our engineers will be pleased to advise on unique designs to suit specific applications.
inPHorm
European Cylinder inPHorm is Parker Hannifins product selection program that helps to select the correct part for an application. The program prompts for the details of the application, makes the necessary design calculations, and selects a suitable product. inPHorm can also generate CAD drawings of the selected part, which can be viewed in other software applications, and customised and imported into other CAD packages. Please contact your local sales office (see rear cover) for further information. Visit us at www.parker.com/uk
Standard Specifications Heavy-duty service NFPA specifications Standard construction square head 4 tie rod design Standard pressure to 18 bar (250 psi) dependent on
bore size
Standard medium filtered and lubricated air Standard temperature -20C to +80C Hard chrome-plated bore
Bore sizes 25.4mm (1) to 355.6mm (14) Piston rod diameters 12.7mm (1/2) to 139.7mm (51/2) Mounting styles 15 standard styles Strokes available in any practical stroke length Cushions optional at either end or both ends of stroke Rod ends three standard choices specials to order
Note: In line with our policy of continuing product improvement, specifications in this catalogue are subject to change without notice.
Design Features and Benefits
3 1
7 4
Lipseals
1 Piston Rod
Gland seal life is maximised by manufacturing piston rods from precision ground, high tensile carbon alloy steel, hard chrome plated and polished to 0.2m max. Piston rods are induction case hardened to Rockwell C54 minimum before chrome plating, resulting in a dent-resistant surface.
Non-Lubricated Rod Seals

For non-lubricated air cylinders, rod seals with special rounded sealing lips are supplied as standard. Specify series 2AN (see pages 34-35).
2 Rod Gland
The rod gland, complete with rod seals, can easily be removed without dismantling the cylinder, so servicing is quicker and therefore more economical.
4 Cylinder Body
The surface of the cylinder bore is finished to minimise internal friction and prolong seal life. The bore of the cylinder is hard chrome-plated to prevent corrosion and extend the life of the cylinder.
3 Rod Seals
The serrated lipseal has a series of sealing edges which take over successively as pressure increases, providing efficient sealing under all operating conditions. On the return stroke the serrations act as a check valve. The double lip wiperseal acts as a secondary seal, cleaning the rod on the return stroke. Its outer lip prevents the ingress of dirt into the cylinder, extending the life of gland and seals.
5 Cylinder Body Seals

To ensure that the cylinder body remains leak free, even under pressure shock conditions, Parker fits pressure-energised body seals.
6 Piston
Lipseal pistons are fitted as standard to 2A cylinders. All pistons are of one-piece type, and feature wide bearing surfaces to resist side loading. Long thread engagement secures the piston to the piston rod and, for additional safety, the piston is secured by thread-locking adhesive and a locking pin.
7 Cushioning
End of stroke deceleration is available by using straight cushions at the head and cap see page 41 for details. The head and cap end cushions are self-centring. The polished cap end spear is an integral part of the piston rod.
8 Floating Cushion Bushes & Sleeves

Cushioning is provided by the use of a floating cushion sleeve at the head end of the cylinder, and a floating cushion bush at the cap end. The use of a check valve in the head and lifting of the bronze cushion bush in the cap, provides minimum flow restriction at the start of the return stroke. This allows full pressure to be applied over the whole area of the piston, to provide full power and fast cycle times.
Design Features and Benefits 9 Cushion Adjustment

Needle valves are provided at both ends of the cylinder for precise cushion adjustment, and retained within the head and cap so that they cannot be inadvertently removed. The cartridge type needle valve illustrated below is fitted to cylinders of up to 63.5mm (21/2) bore see page 42.
Tie Rod Cylinders 2A Series Piston Seals

Lipseal Pistons A Lipseal piston is fitted to 2A cylinders as standard. It offers a wide piston surface which reduces bearing load, and is suitable for speeds of up to 0.5m/s. Fully dynamic and self-compensating seals allow for variations in pressure, mechanical deflections and wear. Non-Lubricated Pistons For non-lubricated air cylinders, lipseals with special rounded sealing lips are supplied as standard. Specify Series 2AN (see pages 34-35).
Seal Groups
Parker offers two classes of seals for 2A and 2AN (non-lubricated air) cylinders:
10 Check Valve
A check valve is provided at the head end of the cylinder, providing minimum flow restriction at the start of the return stroke. This allows full pressure to be applied to the annular area of the piston, permitting faster cycle times. Group 1 Seals are standard and are suitable for air or nitrogen. The temperature range for Group 1 seals is -20C to +80C. Group 5 Seals are made from fluorocarbon elastomers and extend the working temperature for 2A cylinders from -15C up to 150C, or 204C with reduced life. For non-lubricated air cylinders in high temperature applications, please refer to page 35.
Special Designs
Parkers design and engineering staff are available to produce special designs to meet customers specific requirements. Alternative sealing arrangements, special mounting styles, different bores and rod sizes are just a few of the custom features which can be supplied.
Cylinder Selection Check List

The following check list indicates the principal factors which should be considered when selecting a pneumatic cylinder for a particular application. Further information is available on the pages shown. If more detailed information is required about any aspect of a cylinders specification, please contact our design engineers who will be happy to assist.
Tie Rod Cylinders 2A Series inPHorm

The European Cylinder inPHorm program can assist with the selection and specification of an hydraulic cylinder for a particular application. Please ask for HY07-1260/Eur.
Establish System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series 2A

Weight to be moved and force required Nominal operating pressure and range Distance to be travelled Average and maximum piston speed
Mounting Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 7

Select the appropriate style for the specific application
Cylinder Bore and Operating Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 37, 38

Determine the bore and system pressure required to provide the necessary force
Piston Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 20, 30, 38, 39, 40

Single or double rod? Determine the minimum rod diameter required to withstand buckling forces Is a stop tube required? Select a suitable rod end and rod end thread Check pressure rating of selected cylinder and piston rod
Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 5
Does seal type suit application? (eg: Lipseal for 2A cylinders, Non-Lubricated for 2AN cylinders)
Cushioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 41
Select cushioning requirements if applicable
Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 42
Select suitable ports Are the standard positions acceptable?
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 5
Select seals to suit the chosen temperature range
Rod and Cap End Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 31-33

Are rod end and/or cap end accessories required?
10
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 43

Removable trunnions, rod end bellows etc.
Mounting Styles Cylinder Mounting Styles

The standard range of Parker 2A cylinders comprises 15 mounting styles, to suit the majority of applications. General guidance for the selection of cylinders is given below, with dimensional information about each mounting style shown on the pages indicated. Application-specific mounting information is shown on pages 36-37. Where a non-standard mounting style is required to satisfy a particular application, our design engineers will be happy to assist. Please contact the factory for details.
Extended Tie Rods

Cylinders with TB, TC and TD mountings are suitable for straight line force transfer applications, and are particularly useful where space is limited. For compression (push) applications, cap end tie rod mountings are most appropriate; where the major load places the piston rod in tension (pull applications), head end mounting styles should be specified. Cylinders with tie rods extended at both ends may be attached to the machine member from either end, allowing the free end of the cylinder to support a bracket or switch.
Styles TB, TC, TD

See pages 8-9, 22-23 TB
Flange Mounted Cylinders

Flange mounted cylinders are also suitable for use on straight line force transfer applications. Four flange mounting styles are available: head rectangular flange (J), head square flange (JB), cap rectangular flange (H), and cap square flange (HB). Selection of the correct flange mounting style depends on whether the major force applied to the load will result in compression (push) or tension (pull) stresses on the piston rod select H or HB for push, and J or JB for pull applications.
Styles J, JB, H, HB
See pages 10-13, 24 J
Foot Mounted Cylinders

Foot mounted cylinders do not absorb force on their centreline. As a result, the application of force by the cylinder produces a turning moment which attempts to rotate the cylinder about its mounting bolts. It is important, therefore, that the cylinder should be firmly secured to the mounting surface and that the load should be effectively guided, to avoid side loads being applied to rod gland and piston bearings. A thrust key modification may be specified to provide positive cylinder location see page 36.
Styles C, F, G
See pages 14-15, 26-27 C
Pivot Mountings
Cylinders with pivot mountings, which absorb forces on their centrelines, should be used where the machine member to be moved travels in a curved path. Pivot mountings may be used for tension (pull) or compression (push) applications. Two pivot mounting styles are available: cap fixed clevis (BB), and cap detachable clevis (BC). Cylinders using a fixed clevis (BB) may be used if the curved path of the piston rod travel is in a single plane. For applications where the piston rod will travel in a path either side of the true plane of motion, a spherical bearing mounting is recommended. Please consult the factory.
Styles BB, BC
See pages 16-17, 25 BB
Trunnion Mounted Cylinders

These cylinders are designed to absorb force on their centrelines. They are suitable for tension (pull) or compression (push) applications, and may be used where the machine member to be moved travels in a curved path in a single plane. Trunnion mounted cylinders are available in head trunnion (D), cap trunnion (DB), and intermediate fixed trunnion (DD). Trunnion pins are designed for shear loads only and should be subjected to minimum bending stresses. 7
Styles D, DB, DD
See pages 18-19, 28-29 DB
25.4mm to 152.4mm Bore Sizes

ZB + stroke P + stroke
See Notes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Style TB
Tie Rods Extended Head End (NFPA Style MX3)
LB + stroke
See Notes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Style TC
Tie Rods Extended Cap End (NFPA Style MX2)
LB + stroke
Dimensions TB, TC & TD See also Rod End Dimensions, page 20

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 AA 38.9 51.3 66.2 BB 19.1 25.4 28.5 DD 1 10-24
1
E 38.1 4 50.8 4 63.5 4
EE 5
(BSPP)
F 9.5 9.5 9.5
G 38.1 38.1 38.1
H4 6.4 3.2 2.4 2.4
G1/4 G3/8 G3/8
/4-28
/16-24
78.5
28.5
/16-24
76.2
G /8
9.5
38.1
82.6 (31/4")
99.1
34.9
/8-24
95.2
G1/2
15.9
44.5
101.6 (4")
119.4
34.9
/8-24
114.3
G1/2
15.9
44.5
127.0 (5")
147.2
46.0
/2-20
139.7
G1/2
15.9
44.5
152.4 (6")
175.4
46.0
/2-20
165.1
G3/4
19.1
50.8
All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise stated.

See Notes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Style TD
Tie Rods Extended Both Ends (NFPA Style MX1)
LB + stroke
Notes
1 2 3 4 5 All tie rod threads (dimension DD) are UNF, with the exception of 25.4mm (1) bore which is UNC. Mounting nuts should be tightened to the torque values shown for tie rod nuts see page 37. For Styles TB and TC an additional set of mounting nuts are supplied. For Style TD, two additional sets of mounting nuts are supplied. The extra height H of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and rod sizes shown in the table below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2) bore cylinders only. R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, please see page 42.
Dimensions TB, TC & TD Continued

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J 25.4 25.4 25.4 K 5.0 6.4 7.5 R 27.4 36.3 46.7 Y 49 49 49 58 49 65 58 49 71 58 65 58 74 65 71 58 81 65 71 74 58 81 65 71 74 81 81 68 84 74 78 84 84 84 LB 98.4 101.6 101.6 + stroke P 54 58 58 ZB max 119.3 119.3 123.8 133.4 125.8 141.7 135.3 129.0 151.2 138.4 144.9 152.9 168.8 159.3 165.6 152.9 175.1 159.3 165.6 168.8 162.2 184.0 168.6 174.9 178.1 184.5 184.5 181.3 197.2 187.6 191.8 197.2 197.2 197.2
25.4
7.5
55.6
104.8
61
82.6 (31/4")
31.7
10.0
70.1
123.8
70
101.6 (4")
31.7
10.0
84.3
123.8
70
127.0 (5")
31.7
13.0
104.1
130.2
77
152.4 (6")
38.1
13.0
123.9
146.1
83

See Notes 1, 2
Style J
Head Rectangular Flange (NFPA Style MF1)
LB + stroke
See Notes 1, 2
Style JB
Head Square Flange (NFPA Style MF5)
LB + stroke
Dimensions J & JB See also Rod End Dimensions, page 20

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 E 38.1 1 50.8 1 63.5 1 EE 2
(BSPP)
F 9.5 9.5 9.5
FB 6.4 7.9 9.5
G 38.1 38.1 38.1
H1 6.4 3.2 2.4 2.4
J 25.4 25.4 25.4
K 5.0 6.4 7.5
G1/4 G3/8 G3/8
76.2
G /8
9.5
9.5
38.1
25.4
7.5
82.6 (31/4")
95.2
G1/2
15.9
11.1
44.5
31.8
10.0
101.6 (4")
114.3
G1/2
15.9
11.1
44.5
31.8
10.0
127.0 (5")
139.7
G1/2
15.9
14.2
44.5
31.8
13.0
152.4 (6")
165.1
G3/4
19.1
14.2
50.8
38.1
13.0
10

Notes
1
The extra height H of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and rod sizes below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2) bore cylinders only. R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, please see page 42.
Dimensions J & JB Continued

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 R 27.4 36.3 46.7 TF 50.8 69.8 85.7 UF 63.5 85.7 104.7 WF 25.4 25.4 25.4 34.9 25.4 41.3 34.9 25.4 47.6 34.9 41.3 34.9 50.8 41.3 47.6 34.9 57.2 41.3 47.6 50.8 34.9 57.2 41.3 47.6 50.7 57.2 57.2 41.3 57.2 47.6 50.8 57.2 57.2 57.2 Y 49 49 49 58 49 65 58 49 71 58 65 58 74 65 71 58 81 65 71 74 58 81 65 71 74 81 81 68 84 74 78 84 84 84 LB 98.4 101.6 101.6 + stroke P 54 58 58 ZB max 119.3 119.3 123.8 133.4 125.8 141.7 135.3 129.0 151.2 138.4 144.9 152.9 168.8 159.3 165.6 152.9 175.1 159.3 165.6 168.8 162.2 184.0 168.6 174.9 178.1 184.5 184.5 181.3 197.2 187.6 191.8 197.2 197.2 197.2
55.6
98.4
117.4
104.8
61
82.6 (31/4")
70.1
119.0
139.7
123.8
70
101.6 (4")
84.3
138.1
158.7
123.8
70
127.0 (5")
104.1
168.2
193.7
130.2
77
152.4 (6")
123.9
193.7
219.1
146.1
83
11

See Notes 1, 2
ZF + stroke P + stroke
Style H
Cap Rectangular Flange (NFPA Style MF2)
LB + stroke XF + stroke
See Notes 1, 2
ZF + stroke P + stroke
Style HB
Cap Square Flange (NFPA Style MF6)
LB + stroke XF + stroke
Dimensions H & HB See also Rod End Dimensions, page 20

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 E 38.1 1 50.8 1 63.5 1 EE 2
(BSPP)
F 9.5 9.5 9.5
FB 6.4 7.9 9.5
G 38.1 38.1 38.1
H1 6.4 3.2 2.4 2.4
J 25.4 25.4 25.4
K 5.0 6.4 7.5
G1/4 G3/8 G3/8
76.2 1
G3/8
9.5
9.5
38.1
25.4
7.5
82.6 (31/4")
95.2
G1/2
15.9
11.1
44.5
31.8
10.0
101.6 (4")
114.3
G1/2
15.9
11.1
44.5
31.8
10.0
127.0 (5")
139.7
G1/2
15.9
14.2
44.5
31.8
13.0
152.4 (6")
165.1
G3/4
19.1
14.2
50.8
38.1
13.0
12

Notes 1 The extra height H of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and rod sizes shown below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2) bore cylinders only. 2 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, please see page 42.
Dimensions H & HB Continued

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 R 27.4 36.3 46.7 TF 50.8 69.8 85.7 UF 63.5 85.7 104.7 Y 49 49 49 58 49 65 58 49 71 58 65 58 74 65 71 58 81 65 71 74 58 81 65 71 74 81 81 68 84 74 78 84 84 84 + stroke LB 98.4 101.6 101.6 P 54 58 58 XF 114.3 114.3 117.5 127.0 117.5 133.4 127.0 120.7 142.9 130.2 136.5 142.9 158.8 149.2 155.6 142.9 165.1 149.2 155.6 158.8 149.2 171.5 155.6 161.9 165.1 171.5 171.5 168.3 184.2 174.6 177.8 184.2 184.2 184.2 ZF 123.8 123.8 127.0 136.5 127.0 142.9 136.5 130.2 152.4 139.7 146.1 158.8 174.6 165.1 171.5 158.8 181.0 165.1 171.5 174.6 165.1 187.3 171.5 177.8 181.0 187.3 187.3 187.3 203.2 193.7 196.9 203.2 203.2 203.2
55.6
98.4
117.4
104.8
61
82.6 (31/4")
70.1
119.0
139.7
123.8
70
101.6 (4")
84.3
138.1
158.7
123.8
70
127.0 (5")
104.1
168.2
193.7
130.2
77
152.4 (6")
123.9
193.7
219.1
146.1
83
13

ZB + stroke P + stroke LB + stroke
See Notes 1, 3, 5, 6
Style C
Side Lug Mounting (NFPA Style MS2)
SS + stroke
Style F
Side Tapped Mounting (NFPA Style MS4)
SN + stroke NT thread, ND deep (x4)
Dimensions C, F & G See also Rod End Dimensions, page 20

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 E 38.1 5 50.8 5 63.5 5 EB 9.0 9.5 EE 6
(BSPP)
EL 19.1 23.8
EO 6.4 7.9
ES 14 16
ET 14.3 19.1
F 9.5 9.5 9.5
G 38.1 38.1 38.1
H5 6.4 3.2 2.4 2.4
J 25.4 25.4 25.4
K 5.0 6.4 7.5
ND 6.4 6.4 9.5 4.8 9.5 9.5 9.5 12.7 11.1 12.7 12.7 19.1 12.7 19.1 19.1 19.1 15.9 19.1 19.1 19.1 23.8 19.1 23.8 23.8 23.8 23.8 23.8 28.6 22.2 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6
NT 2 M5 M6 M8
R 36.3 46.7
SB 3 6.6 11.0 11.0
G1/4 G3/8 G3/8
76.2
9.5
G /8
27.0
7.9
20
22.2
9.5
38.1
25.4
7.5
M10
55.6
11.0
82.6 (31/4")
95.2
11.1
G /2
22.2
9.5
25
25.4
15.9
44.5
31.8
10.0
M12
70.1
14.0
101.6 (4")
114.3
11.1
G1/2
25.4
9.5
32
31.8
15.9
44.5
31.8
10.0
M12
84.3
14.0
127.0 (5")
139.7
14.2
G1/2
27.0
12.7
35
38.1
15.9
44.5
31.8
13.0
M16
104.1
22.0
152.4 (6")
165.1
14.2
G3/4
25.4
12.7
45
41.3
19.1
50.8
38.1
13.0
M20
123.9
22.0
14

ZE + stroke XE + stroke P + stroke LB + stroke
Style G
Side End Lug (NFPA Style MS7)
SE + stroke
Notes
1 2 3 4 5 6 Consider the use of a thrust key with this mounting see page 36. Tapped mounting holes are metric (coarse pitch series). Upper surfaces of lugs are machined for socket head screws. Not available in 25.4mm (1) bore sizes. The extra height H of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and rod sizes shown below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2) bore cylinders only. R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, please see page 42.
Dimensions C, F & G Continued

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 7.9 12.7 12.7 SW 7.9 9.5 9.5 TN 13.5 15.5 22.0 TS 54.0 70.0 82.6 US 69.9 88.9 101.6 XS 33.3 33.3 34.9 44.5 34.9 50.8 44.5 34.9 57.2 44.5 50.8 47.6 63.5 54.0 60.3 47.6 69.8 54.0 60.3 63.5 52.4 74.6 58.7 65.1 68.3 74.6 74.6 58.6 74.6 65.1 68.3 74.6 74.6 74.6 XT 49.2 49.2 49.2 58.7 49.2 65.1 58.7 49.2 71.4 58.7 65.1 61.9 77.8 68.3 74.6 61.9 84.1 68.3 74.6 77.8 61.9 84.1 68.3 74.6 77.8 84.1 84.1 71.4 87.3 77.8 81.0 87.3 87.3 87.3 Y 49 49 49 58 49 65 58 49 71 58 65 58 74 65 71 58 81 65 71 74 58 81 65 71 74 81 81 68 84 74 78 84 84 84 LB 98.4 101.6 101.6 P 54 58 58 SE 139.7 149.2 + stroke SN SS 54.0 57.2 57.2 73.0 73.0 73.0 XE 136.5 146.1 141.3 157.2 150.8 147.6 170.0 157.2 163.5 165.1 181.0 171.5 177.8 168.2 190.5 174.6 181.0 184.2 176.2 198.4 182.6 188.9 192.1 198.4 198.4 193.7 209.6 200.0 203.2 209.6 209.6 209.6 ZB max 119.3 119.3 123.8 133.4 125.8 141.7 135.3 129.0 151.2 138.4 144.9 152.9 168.8 159.3 165.6 152.9 175.1 159.3 165.6 168.8 162.2 184.0 168.6 174.9 178.1 184.5 184.5 181.3 197.2 187.6 191.8 197.2 197.2 197.2 ZE 142.9 152.4 149.2 165.1 158.8 155.6 177.8 165.1 171.5 174.6 190.5 181.0 187.3 177.8 200.0 184.2 190.5 193.7 188.9 211.1 195.3 201.6 204.8 211.1 211.1 206.4 222.3 212.7 215.9 222.3 222.3 222.3
12.7
9.5
31.0
95.3
114.3
104.8
61
158.8
60.3
76.2
82.6 (31/4")
19.1
12.7
38.0
120.7 146.1
123.8
70
168.3
66.7
82.6
101.6 (4")
19.1
12.7
52.0
139.7 165.1
123.8
70
174.6
66.7
82.6
127.0 (5")
25.4
17.5
66.0
174.6 209.5
130.2
77
184.2
73.0
79.4
152.4 (6")
25.4
17.5
80.0
200.0 235.0
146.1
83
196.9
79.4
92.1
15

See Notes 2, 3, 4
ZC + stroke P + stroke
Style BB
Cap Fixed Clevis 25.4mm (1") bore only (NFPA Style MP1)
11.1 XC + stroke
Style BB
Cap Fixed Clevis Excluding 25.4mm (1") bore (NFPA Style MP1)
XC + stroke
Dimensions BB & BC See also Rod End Dimensions, page 20

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CB 19.9 19.9 CD 1
+0.00 -0.05
CW 12.7 12.7
E 38.1 3 50.8 3 63.5 3
EE 4
(BSPP)
F 9.5 9.5 9.5
G 38.1 38.1 38.1
H3 6.4 3.2 2.4 2.4
J 25.4 25.4 25.4
K 5.0 6.4 7.5
11.13 12.73 12.73
G1/4 G3/8 G3/8
19.9
12.73
12.7
76.2
G /8
9.5
38.1
25.4
7.5
82.6 (31/4")
32.6
19.08
15.8
95.2
G1/2
15.9
44.5
31.8
10.0
101.6 (4")
32.6
19.08
15.8
114.3
G1/2
15.9
44.5
31.8
10.0
127.0 (5")
32.6
19.08
15.8
139.7
G1/2
15.9
44.5
31.8
13.0
152.4 (6")
39.0
25.43
19.1
165.1
G3/4
19.1
50.8
38.1
13.0
16

ZD + stroke P + stroke
Style BC
Cap Detachable Clevis (NFPA Style MP2) Notes 1 Dimension CD is the pivot pin diameter except for 25.4mm (1) bore. Style BB and BC cylinders of 38.1mm (11/2) bores and above are supplied complete with a pivot pin. 2 On 25.4mm (1) bore size styles BB and BC a single lug is fitted, as shown above. Dimension CD is the crosshole diameter the pivot pin is not included. 3 The extra height H of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and rod sizes shown below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2) bore cylinders only. 4 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, please see page 42.
LB + stroke XD + stroke
Dimensions BB & BC Continued

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 L 12.7 19.1 19.1 LR 12.7 15.9 15.9 MR 12.7 15.9 15.9 Y 49 49 49 58 49 65 58 49 71 58 65 58 74 65 71 58 81 65 71 74 58 81 65 71 74 81 81 68 84 74 78 84 84 84 LB 98.4 101.6 101.6 P 54 58 58 + stroke XC XD 127.0 136.5 127.0 136.5 136.5 146.1 136.5 152.4 146.1 139.7 161.9 149.2 155.6 174.6 190.5 181.0 187.3 174.6 196.9 181.0 187.3 190.5 181.0 203.2 187.3 193.7 196.9 203.2 203.2 206.4 222.3 212.7 215.9 222.3 222.3 222.3 146.1 155.6 146.1 161.9 155.6 149.2 171.5 158.8 165.1 190.5 206.4 196.9 203.2 190.5 212.7 196.9 203.2 206.4 196.9 219.1 203.2 209.6 212.7 219.1 219.1 225.4 241.3 231.8 235.0 241.3 241.3 241.3 ZC 138.1 138.1 149.2 158.8 149.2 165.1 158.7 152.4 174.6 161.9 168.2 193.7 209.6 200.0 206.4 193.7 215.9 200.0 206.4 209.6 200.6 222.3 206.4 212.7 215.9 222.3 222.3 231.8 247.7 238.2 241.3 247.7 247.7 247.7 ZD 147.6 147.6 158.8 168.3 158.8 174.6 168.3 161.9 184.2 171.5 177.8 209.6 225.4 215.9 222.3 209.6 231.8 215.9 222.3 225.4 215.9 238.1 222.3 228.6 231.8 238.2 238.2 251.0 266.7 257.4 260.4 266.7 266.7 266.7
19.1
15.9
15.9
104.8
61
82.6 (31/4")
31.8
25.4
23.8
123.8
70
101.6 (4")
31.8
25.4
23.8
123.8
70
127.0 (5")
31.8
25.4
23.8
130.2
77
152.4 (6")
38.1
31.8
30.2
146.1
83
17

See Notes 4, 5
Style D
Head Trunnion (NFPA Style MT1)
See Notes 4, 5
Style DB
Cap Trunnion (NFPA Style MT2)
XJ + stroke
Dimensions D, DB & DD See also Rod End Dimensions, page 20

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BD 31.7 38.1 E 38.1 5 50.8 5 63.5 5 EE 4
(BSPP)
F 9.5 9.5 9.5
G 38.1 38.1 38.1
H5 6.4 3.2 2.4 2.4
J 25.4 25.4 25.4
K 5.0 6.4 7.5
TD
+0.00 -0.03
TL 19.1 25.4 25.4
TM 63.5 76.2
G1/4 G3/8 G3/8
19.05 25.40 25.40
38.1
76.2
G /8
9.5
38.1
25.4
7.5
25.40
25.4
88.9
82.6 (33/4")
50.8
95.2
G1/2
15.9
44.5
31.8
10.0
25.40
25.4
114.3
101.6 (4")
50.8
114.3
G1/2
15.9
44.5
31.8
10.0
25.40
25.4
133.4
127.0 (5")
50.8
139.7
G1/2
15.9
44.5
31.8
13.0
25.40
25.4
158.8
152.4 (6")
63.5
165.1
G3/4
19.1
50.8
38.1
13.0
34.92
34.9
193.7
18

See Notes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Style DD
Intermediate Fixed Trunnion (NFPA Style MT4) Notes 1 Note the minimum stroke from the table below. 2 XI dimension to be specified by customer. Please note minimum dimension from the table below. 3 Not available in 25.4mm (1) bore size. 4 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, please see page 42. 5 The extra height H of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and rod sizes shown below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2) bore cylinders only.
Dimensions D, DB & DD Continued

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 UM 114.3 127.0 UT 76.2 101.6 114.3 UV 63.5 76.2 XG 44.5 44.5 44.5 54.0 44.5 60.3 54.0 44.5 66.7 54.0 60.3 57.2 73.0 63.5 69.8 57.2 79.4 63.5 69.8 73.0 57.2 79.4 63.5 69.8 73.0 79.4 79.4 66.7 82.6 73.0 76.2 82.6 82.6 82.6 Min. XI 2 80 89 83 99 93 83 105 93 99 105 121 112 118 105 127 112 118 121 105 127 112 118 121 127 127 124 140 131 134 140 140 140 Y 49 49 49 58 49 65 58 49 71 58 65 58 74 65 71 58 81 65 71 74 58 81 65 71 74 81 81 68 84 74 78 84 84 84 Style DD min. stroke 3.2 10.0 + stroke LB 98.4 101.6 101.6 P 54 58 58 XJ 101.6 101.6 104.7 114.3 104.7 120.7 114.3 108.0 130.2 117.4 123.8 127.0 142.9 133.4 139.7 127.0 149.2 133.4 139.7 142.9 133.4 155.6 139.7 146.1 149.2 155.6 155.6 149.2 165.1 155.6 158.8 165.1 165.1 165.1 ZB max 119.3 119.3 123.8 133.4 125.8 141.7 135.3 129.0 151.2 138.4 144.9 152.9 168.8 159.3 165.6 152.9 175.1 159.3 165.6 168.8 162.2 184.0 168.6 174.9 178.1 184.5 184.5 181.3 197.2 187.6 191.8 197.2 197.2 197.2
139.7
127.0
88.9
6.4
104.8
61
82.6 (31/4")
165.1
146.1
108.0
20.0
123.8
70
101.6 (4")
184.2
165.1
127.0
20.0
123.8
70
127.0 (5")
210.0
190.5
152.4
13.0
130.2
77
152.4 (6")
263.6
235.0
177.8
26.0
146.1
83
19
Piston Rod End Data Rod End Details 25.4mm to 152.4mm (1 to 6) bore sizes only
Piston Rod End Data for 203.2mm to 355.6mm (8 to 14) bore size cylinders is shown on page 30.

Rod End Style 4 Rod End Style 8
Rod End Styles 4 & 8

Style 4 rod ends are recommended for all applications in which the work piece is secured against the rod shoulder. Where the work piece is not shouldered, Style 8 rod ends are recommended. If a rod end style is not specified, Style 4 will be supplied.
Wrench flats Wrench flats
Rod End Style 9
Rod End Style 9

For applications where a female thread is required.
Rod End Style 3

Non-standard piston rod ends are designated Style 3. A dimensional sketch or description should accompany the order. Please specify dimensions KK or CC, and A.
Wrench flats
Rod End Dimensions 25.4mm to 152.4mm (1 to 6) bore sizes

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MM Rod Diameter 12.7 (1/2") 15.9 (5/8") 15.9 (5/8") 25.4 (1") 15.9 (5/8") 34.9 (13/8") 25.4 (1") 15.9 44.5 25.4 34.9 25.4 50.8 34.9 44.5 25.4 63.5 34.9 44.5 50.8 25.4 88.9 34.9 44.5 50.8 63.5 76.2 (5/8") (13/4") (1") (13/8") (1") (2") (13/8") (13/4") (1") (21/2") (13/8") (13/4") (2") (1") (31/2") (13/8") (13/4") (2") (21/2") (3") Styles 4 & 9 KK Metric M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M10x1.5 M20x1.5 M10x1.5 M26x1.5 M20x1.5 M10x1.5 M33x2 M20x1.5 M26x1.5 M20x1.5 M39x2 M26x1.5 M33x2 M20x1.5 M48x2 M26x1.5 M33x2 M39x2 M20x1.5 M64x2 M26x1.5 M33x2 M39x2 M48x2 M58x2 M26x1.5 M76x2 M33x2 M39x2 M48x2 M58x2 M64x2 KK UNF 1
5 7 7
Style 8 CC Metric M10x1.5 M12x1.5 M12x1.5 M22x1.5 M12x1.5 M30x2 M22x1.5 M12x1.5 M39x2 M22x1.5 M30x2 M22x1.5 M45x2 M30x2 M39x2 M22x1.5 M56x2 M30x2 M39x2 M45x2 M22x1.5 M76x2 M30x2 M39x2 M45x2 M56x2 M68x2 M30x2 M95x2 M39x2 M45x2 M56x2 M68x2 M76x2 CC UNF
7 1 1
+0.00 -0.05
NA
/16-24 /16-20 /16-20 /4-16
/16-20 /2-20 /2-20 /8-14
15.9 19.0 19.0 28.6 19.0 41.3 28.5 19.0 50.8 28.5 41.3 28.5 57.1 41.3 50.8 28.5 76.2 41.3 50.8 57.1 28.5 88.9 41.3 50.8 57.1 76.2 88.9 41.3 101.6 50.8 57.1 76.2 88.9 88.9
25.37 28.55 28.55 38.07 28.55 50.77 38.07 28.55 60.30 38.07 50.77 38.07 66.65 50.77 60.30 38.07 79.35 50.77 60.30 66.65 38.07 107.92 50.77 60.30 66.65 79.35 95.22 50.77 120.62 60.30 66.65 79.35 95.22 107.92
10 13 13 22 13 30 22 13 36 22 30 22 41 30 36 22 55 30 36 41 22 75 30 36 41 55 65 30 85 36 41 55 65 75
11.1 14.3 14.3 22.6 14.3 32.2 22.6 14.3 41.6 22.6 32.2 22.6 48.0 32.2 41.6 22.6 60.3 32.2 41.6 48.0 22.6 85.7 32.2 41.6 48.0 60.3 73.0 32.2 98.4 41.6 48.0 60.3 73.0 85.7
6.4 6.4 6.4 12.7 6.4 15.9 12.7 6.4 19.1 12.7 15.9 6.4 12.7 9.5 12.7 6.4 15.9 9.5 12.7 12.7 6.4 15.9 9.5 12.7 12.7 15.9 15.9 6.4 12.7 9.5 9.5 12.7 12.7 12.7
15.9 15.9 15.9 25.4 15.9 31.8 25.4 15.9 38.1 25.4 31.8 19.1 34.9 25.4 31.8 19.1 41.3 25.4 31.8 34.9 19.1 41.3 25.4 31.8 34.9 41.3 41.3 22.2 38.1 28.6 31.8 38.1 38.1 38.1
3 7
/16-20 1-14 3 /4-16
1 /2-20 11/4-12 7 /8-14 1 /2-20 11/2-12 7 /8-14 11/4-12 7 /8-14 13/4-12 11/4-12 11/2-12 7 /8-14 21/4-12 11/4-12 11/2-12 13/4-12 7 /8-14 31/4-12 11/4-12 11/2-12 13/4-12 21/4-12 23/4-12
7 /16-20 11/4-12 3 /4-16 1-14 3 /4-16 11/2-12 1-14 11/4-12 3 /4-16 17/8-12 1-14 11/4-12 11/2-12 3 /4-16 21/2-12 1-14 11/4-12 11/2-12 17/8-12 21/4-12
82.6 (31/4")
101.6 (4")
127.0 (5")
152.4 (6")
34.9 (13/8") 101.6 (4") 44.5 (13/4") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 76.2 (3") 88.9 (31/2")
1-14 3-12 11/4-12 11/2-12 17/8-12 21/4-12 21/2-12
11/4-12 33/4-12 11/2-12 13/4-12 21/4-12 23/4-12 31/4-12
All rod threads are UNF except 1-14 which is UNS.
20
Double Rod Cylinders

ZM + (2 x stroke) ZL + stroke P + stroke LD + stroke
ZM + (2 x stroke) LD + stroke P + stroke
SSK + stroke
XS
SSK + stroke
Double Rod Cylinders 25.4 to 152.4mm Bore Sizes Available with styles TB, TD, J, JB, C, F, G, D, DD
Double Rod Cylinders 203.2 to 355.6mm Bore Sizes Available with styles TB, TD, JB, C, F, G, D, DD
Mounting Styles and Codes

Double rod cylinders are denoted by a K in the model code, shown on page 47.
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6") 203.2 (8") 254.0 (10") 304.8 (12") 355.6 (14") Rod No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
MM Rod Diameter 12.7 (1/2") 15.9 (5/8") 15.9 (5/8") 15.9 (5/8") 25.4 (1") 25.4 (1") 25.4 (1") 34.9 (13/8") 34.9 (13/8") 44.5 (13/4") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2")
+ stroke LD 120.7 123.8 123.8 127.0 152.4 152.4 158.8 178.0 181.0 206.4 219.1 257.2 ZL 139.7 146.1 147.6 150.8 181.0 181.0 188.9 211.1 SSK 85.7 85.7 85.7 88.9 95.3 95.3 92.1 104.8 108.0 123.8 136.5 161.9
+ 2x stroke ZM 152.4 155.6 155.6 158.8 190.6 190.5 196.9 222.3 225.4 263.5 282.6 333.4
Dimensions
To obtain dimensional information for double rod cylinders, first select the desired mounting style by referring to the corresponding single rod models shown on the preceding pages. Dimensions for the appropriate single rod model should be supplemented by those from the table opposite to provide a full set of dimensions.
Rod Strength
Double rod cylinders employ two separate piston rods, with one screwed into the end of the other within the piston rod assembly. As a result, one piston rod is stronger than the other. The stronger rod is identified by the letter K stamped on its end.
Combination Rods
Double rod cylinders with rods of differing rod diameters are also available. Please contact the factory for details.
Cushioning
Double rod cylinders can be supplied with cushions at either or both ends. Cushioning requirements should be specified by inserting a C in the ordering code see page 47. Double rod cylinders that require cushioning are supplied with floating cushion sleeves at both ends.
Style 9 Rod Ends

If a stroke of less than 25mm on bore sizes up to 82.6mm (31/4), or a stroke of less than 100mm on bore sizes of 101.6mm (4) and over, is required, where Style 9 rod ends are required at both ends, please consult the factory.
All dimensions apply to rod no. 1 only. For alternative rod sizes, please consult the factory.
21

See Notes 1, 2, 3
Style TB
LB + stroke
See Notes 1, 2, 3
Style TC
LB + stroke
Dimensions TB, TC & TD See also Rod End Dimensions, page 30

Bore Rod No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 1 3 4 5 7 8 AA BB DD 1 E EE 3
(BSPP)
203.2 (8")
231.1
58.7
/8 - 18
215.9
G3/4
19.1
50.8
38.1
254.0 (10")
284.5
68.3
/4 - 16
269.9
G1
19.1
57.2
50.8
304.8 (12")
337.8
68.3
/4 - 16
323.9
G1
19.1
57.2
50.8
355.6 (14")
391.2
81.0
/8 - 14
374.7
G11/4
19.1
69.9
57.2
22

See Notes 1, 2, 3
Style TD
Tie Rods Extended Both Ends (NFPA MX1)
LB + stroke
Notes 1 All tie rod threads are UNF. 2 For Styles TB and TC an additional set of mounting nuts are supplied. For Style TD, two additional sets of mounting nuts are supplied. 3 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, please see page 42.

Bore Rod No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 1 3 4 5 7 8 K R TT 101.6 177.8 101.6 101.6 101.6 139.7 139.7 139.7 177.8 101.6 101.6 101.6 139.7 139.7 139.7 177.8 177.8 101.6 101.6 139.7 139.7 139.7 177.8 177.8 101.6 139.7 139.7 139.7 177.8 177.8 WF 41.3 57.2 47.6 50.8 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 47.6 50.8 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 50.8 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 Y 68 84 74 78 84 84 84 84 84 77 80 86 86 86 86 86 86 80 86 86 86 86 86 86 94 94 94 94 94 94 LB + stroke P ZB max 187.4 203.3 193.8 197.0 203.3 203.3 203.3 203.3 203.3 226.5 229.7 236.0 236.0 236.0 236.0 236.0 236.0 242.4 248.7 248.7 248.7 248.7 248.7 248.7 282.6 282.6 282.6 282.6 282.6 282.6
203.2 (8")
16.0
163.6
149.2
86
254.0 (10")
17.0
201.2
181.0
107
304.8 (12")
17.0
238.8
193.7
120
355.6 (14")
19.0
276.9
225.4
142
23

See Note 2
Style JB
Head Square (NFPA Style ME3)
LB + stroke
See Note 2
ZJ + stroke P + stroke
Style HB
Cap Square (NFPA Style ME4)
XK + stroke LB + stroke
Dimensions JB, HB & BB See also Rod End Dimensions, page 30

Bore Rod No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 1 3 4 5 7 8 CB CD
+0.00 -0.08
CW
EB
EE 2
(BSPP)
LR
203.2 (8")
39.7
25.43
19.1
215.9
18
G3/4
19.1
50.8
38.1
16.0
38.1
31.8
254.0 (10")
52.4
34.95
25.4
269.9
22
G1
19.1
57.2
50.8
17.0
54.0
47.6
304.8 (12")
65.1
44.48
31.8
323.9
22
G1
19.1
57.2
50.8
17.0
57.2
54.0
355.6 (14")
65.1
50.83
31.8
374.7
24
G11/4
19.1
69.9
57.2
19.0
63.5
60.3
24

See Note 1, 2
Style BB
Cap Fixed CLevis (NFPA Style MP1)
LB + stroke XC + stroke
Notes 1 Supplied complete with pivot pin. 2 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, please see page 42.
Dimensions JB, HB & BB Continued

Bore Rod No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 1 3 4 5 7 8 MR TE TT 101.6 177.8 101.6 101.6 101.6 139.7 139.7 139.7 177.8 101.6 101.6 101.6 139.7 139.7 139.7 177.8 177.8 101.6 101.6 139.7 139.7 139.7 177.8 177.8 101.6 139.7 139.7 139.7 177.8 177.8 WF 41.3 57.2 47.6 50.8 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 47.6 50.8 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 50.8 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 Y 68 84 74 78 84 84 84 84 84 77 80 86 86 86 86 86 86 80 86 86 86 86 86 86 94 94 94 94 94 94 LB P XC 209.6 225.4 215.9 219.1 225.4 225.4 225.4 225.4 225.4 263.5 266.7 273.1 273.1 273.1 273.1 273.1 273.1 282.6 288.9 288.9 288.9 288.9 288.9 288.9 327.0 327.0 327.0 327.0 327.0 327.0 + stroke XK 133.4 149.2 139.7 142.9 149.2 149.2 149.2 149.2 149.2 158.8 161.9 168.3 168.3 168.3 168.3 168.3 168.3 174.6 181.0 181.0 181.0 181.0 181.0 181.0 206.4 206.4 206.4 206.4 206.4 206.4 ZB max 187.4 203.3 193.8 197.0 203.3 203.3 203.3 203.3 203.3 226.5 229.7 236.0 236.0 236.0 236.0 236.0 236.0 242.4 248.7 248.7 248.7 248.7 248.7 248.7 282.6 282.6 282.6 282.6 282.6 282.6 ZC 235.0 250.8 241.3 244.5 250.8 250.8 250.8 250.8 250.8 298.5 301.6 308.0 308.0 308.0 308.0 308.0 308.0 327.0 333.4 333.4 333.4 333.4 333.4 333.4 377.8 377.8 377.8 377.8 377.8 377.8 ZJ 171.5 187.3 177.8 181.0 187.3 187.3 187.3 187.3 187.3 209.6 212.7 219.1 219.1 219.1 219.1 219.1 219.1 225.4 231.8 231.8 231.8 231.8 231.8 231.8 263.5 263.5 263.5 263.5 263.5 263.5
203.2 (8")
30.2
192.3
149.2
86
254.0 (10")
41.3
238.8
181.0
107
304.8 (12")
54.0
281.9
193.7
120
355.6 (14")
60.3
326.9
225.4
142
25

See Note 1, 5
Style C
SS + stroke LB + stroke
See Note 4, 5
Style F
SN + stroke LB + stroke
NT thread, ND deep (x4)
Dimensions C, F & G See also Rod End Dimensions, page 30

Bore Rod No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 1 3 4 5 7 8 E EB EE 5
(BSPP)
EL
EO
ES
ET
ND
NT 4
SB 1
ST
203.2 (8")
215.9
18
G3/4
28.6
15.9
57.2
50.8
19.1
50.8
38.1
16.0
28.6
M20
163.6
22
25.4
254.0 (10")
269.9
22
G1
33.3
15.9
69.9
61.9
19.1
57.2
50.8
17.0
38.1
M24
201.2
26
31.8
304.8 (12")
323.9
22
G1
33.3
15.9
88.9
69.9
19.1
57.2
50.8
17.0
38.1
M24
238.8
26
31.8
355.6 (14")
374.7
24
G11/4
38.1
19.1
101.6
95.3
19.1
69.9
57.2
19.0
47.6
M30
276.9
33
38.1
26

ZE + stroke XE + stroke P + stroke
See Note 2. 3, 5
Style G
Side End Lugs (NFPA Style MS7)
LB + stroke SE + stroke
Notes 1 Upper surfaces of lugs are machined for socket head screws. 2 Mounting style G is not available on 203.2mm (8) bores with rod numbers 2, 6, 7, 8 and 0, and 254.0mm (10) bores with rod numbers 9 and 0. 3 When using mounting Style G, check clearance between mounting members and rod attachment or accessory. If necessary, specify longer rod extension to avoid interference with mounting member. 4 Tapped mounting holes are metric (coarse pitch series). 5 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, please see page 42.

Bore Rod No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 1 3 4 5 7 8 SW TN TS TT US XS 58.7 74.6 65.1 68.3 74.6 74.6 74.6 74.6 74.6 69.9 73.0 79.4 79.4 79.4 79.4 79.4 79.4 73.0 79.4 79.4 79.4 79.4 79.4 79.4 85.7 85.7 85.7 85.7 85.7 85.7 XT 71.4 87.3 77.8 81.0 87.3 87.3 87.3 87.3 87.3 79.4 82.6 88.9 88.9 88.9 88.9 88.9 88.9 82.6 88.9 88.9 88.9 88.9 88.9 88.9 96.8 96.8 96.8 96.8 96.8 96.8 Y 68 84 74 78 84 84 84 84 84 77 80 86 86 86 86 86 86 80 86 86 86 86 86 86 94 94 94 94 94 94 LB P SE + stroke SN SS 101.6 177.8 101.6 101.6 114.3 250.8 101.6 285.8 139.7 139.7 139.7 177.8 101.6 101.6 101.6 139.7 139.7 314.3 358.8 139.7 139.7 177.8 177.8 101.6 101.6 139.7 184.2 368.0 139.7 412.8 139.7 177.8 177.8 101.6 139.7 139.7 212.7 431.8 489.0 139.7 177.8 177.8 XE ZB max 200.0 187.4 203.3 206.4 193.8 209.6 197.0 215.9 203.3 203.3 203.3 203.3 203.3 242.9 246.1 252.4 252.4 252.4 252.4 226.5 229.7 236.0 236.0 236.0 236.0 236.0 236.0 242.4 248.7 248.7 248.7 248.7 248.7 248.7 282.6 282.6 282.6 282.6 282.6 282.6 ZE 215.9 222.3 225.4 231.8 258.8 261.9 268.3 268.3 268.3 268.3 274.6 281.0 281.0 281.0 281.0 281.0 281.0 320.7 320.7 320.7 320.7 320.7 320.7
203.2 (8")
17.5
149.2
86
187.3
82.6
95.3
254.0 (10")
22.2
181.0
107
228.6 104.8
117.5
304.8 (12")
22.2
193.7
120
241.3
117.5
258.8 265.1 265.1 130.2 265.1 265.1 265.1 265.1
355.6 (14")
28.6
225.4
142
301.6 301.6 301.6 282.6 139.7 149.2 301.6 301.6 301.6
27

See Note 2
Style D
E LB + stroke
See Note 2
Style DB
XJ + stroke LB + stroke
Dimensions D, DB & DD See also Rod End Dimensions, page 30

Bore Rod No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 1 3 4 5 7 8 BD E EE 2
(BSPP)
TD -0.03
+0.00
TL
TM
TT 101.6 177.8 101.6 101.6 101.6 139.7 139.7 139.7 177.8 101.6 101.6 101.6 139.7 139.7 139.7 177.8 177.8 101.6 101.6 139.7 139.7 139.7 177.8 177.8 101.6 139.7 139.7 139.7 177.8 177.8
203.2 (8")
63.5
215.9
G3/4
19.1
50.8
38.1
16.0
34.93
34.9
247.7
254.0 (10")
76.2
269.9
G1
19.1
57.2
50.8
17.0
44.45
44.5
304.8
304.8 (12")
76.2
323.9
G1
19.1
57.2
50.8
17.0
44.45
44.5
355.6
355.6 (14")
88.9
374.7
G11/4
19.1
69.9
57.2
19.0
50.83
50.8
412.8
28

See Notes 1, 2
Style DD
Intermediate Fixed Trunnion (NFPA Style MT4)
LB + stroke
Notes 1 XI dimension to be specified by customer. Please note minimum dimension from the table below. 2 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, please see page 42.

Bore Rod No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 1 3 4 5 7 8 UM UT UV XG 66.7 82.6 73.0 76.2 82.6 82.6 82.6 82.6 82.6 76.2 79.4 85.7 85.7 85.7 85.7 85.7 85.7 79.4 85.7 85.7 85.7 85.7 85.7 85.7 92.1 92.1 92.1 92.1 92.1 92.1 Min. XI 1 123.8 139.7 130.2 133.4 139.7 139.7 139.7 139.7 139.7 142.9 146.1 152.4 152.4 152.4 152.4 152.4 152.4 146.1 152.4 152.4 152.4 152.4 152.4 152.4 171.5 171.5 171.5 171.5 171.5 171.5 Y 68 84 74 78 84 84 84 84 84 77 80 86 86 86 86 86 86 80 86 86 86 86 86 86 94 94 94 94 94 94 Style DD min. stroke + stroke LB P XJ 152.4 168.3 158.8 161.9 168.3 168.3 168.3 168.3 168.3 184.2 187.3 193.7 193.7 193.7 193.7 193.7 193.7 200.0 206.4 206.4 206.4 206.4 206.4 206.4 235.0 235.0 235.0 235.0 235.0 235.0 ZB max 187.4 203.3 193.8 197.0 203.3 203.3 203.3 203.3 203.3 226.5 229.7 236.0 236.0 236.0 236.0 236.0 236.0 242.4 248.7 248.7 248.7 248.7 248.7 248.7 282.6 282.6 282.6 282.6 282.6 282.6
203.2 (8")
317.5
285.8
241.3
22.2
149.2
86
254.0 (10")
393.7
358.8
298.5
22.2
181.0
107
304.8 (12")
444.5
412.8
349.3
9.5
193.7
120
355.6 (14")
514.4
476.2
406.4
9.5
225.4
142
29
Piston Rod End Data Rod End Details 203.2mm to 355.6mm (8 to 14) bore sizes
Rod End Style 4 Rod End Style 8

Rod End Style 9
Wrench flats
Wrench flats
Wrench flats

Style 4 rod ends are recommended for all applications in which the work piece is secured against the rod shoulder. Where the work piece is not shouldered, Style 8 rod ends are recommended. If rod end style is not specified, Style 4 will be supplied.
Rod End Style 9

Rod End Style 3

Non-standard piston rod ends are designated Style 3. A dimensional sketch or description should accompany the order. Please specify dimensions KK or CC, and A.
Rod End Dimensions 203.2mm to 355.6mm (8 to 14) bore sizes

Styles 4 & 9 Bore Rod No. MM Rod Diameter 34.9 (13/8") 139.7 (51/2") 44.5 (13/4") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 76.2 (3") 88.9 (31/2") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 44.5 (13/4") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 76.2 (3") 88.9 (31/2") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 139.7 (51/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 76.2 (3") 88.9 (31/2") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 139.7 (51/2") 63.5 (21/2") 76.2 (3") 88.9 (31/2") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 139.7 (51/2") KK Metric M26x1.5 M100x2 M33x2 M39x2 M48x2 M58x2 M64x2 M76x2 M90x2 M33x2 M39x2 M48x2 M58x2 M64x2 M76x2 M90x2 M100x2 M39x2 M48x2 M58x2 M64x2 M76x2 M90x2 M100x2 M48x2 M58x2 M64x2 M76x2 M90x2 M100x2 KK UNF 1 1-14 4-12 11/4-12 11/2-12 17/8-12 21/4-12 21/2-12 3-12 31/2-12 11/4-12 11/2-12 17/8-12 21/4-12 21/2-12 3-12 31/2-12 4-12 11/2-12 17/8-12 21/4-12 21/2-12 3-12 31/2-12 4-12 17/8-12 21/4-12 21/2-12 3-12 31/2-12 4-12 Style 8 CC Metric M30x2 M130x2 M39x2 M45x2 M56x2 M68x2 M76x2 M95x2 M110x2 M39x2 M45x2 M56x2 M68x2 M76x2 M95x2 M110x2 M130x2 M45x2 M56x2 M68x2 M76x2 M95x2 M110x2 M130x2 M56x2 M68x2 M76x2 M95x2 M110x2 M130x2 CC UNF 11/4-12 51/4-12 11/2-12 13/4-12 21/4-12 23/4-12 31/4-12 33/4-12 43/4-12 11/2-12 13/4-12 21/4-12 23/4-12 31/4-12 33/4-12 43/4-12 51/4-12 13/4-12 21/4-12 23/4-12 31/4-12 33/4-12 43/4-12 51/4-12 21/4-12 23/4-12 31/4-12 33/4-12 43/4-12 51/4-12 A B
+0.00 -0.05
NA
203.2 (8")
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 1 3 4 5 7 8
41.3 139.7 50.8 57.2 76.2 88.9 88.9 101.6 127.0 50.8 57.2 76.2 88.9 88.9 101.6 127.0 139.7 57.2 76.2 88.9 88.9 101.6 127.0 139.7 76.2 88.9 88.9 101.6 127.0 139.7
50.77 158.72 60.30 66.65 79.35 95.22 107.92 120.62 146.02 60.30 66.65 79.35 95.22 107.92 120.62 146.02 158.72 66.65 79.35 95.22 107.92 120.62 146.02 158.72 79.35 95.22 107.92 120.62 146.02 158.72
30 120 36 41 55 65 75 85 110 36 41 55 65 75 85 110 120 41 55 65 75 85 110 120 55 65 75 85 110 120
33.3 136.5 42.9 49.2 60.3 73.0 85.7 98.4 123.8 42.9 49.2 60.3 73.0 85.7 98.4 123.8 136.5 49.2 60.3 73.0 85.7 98.4 123.8 136.5 60.3 73.0 85.7 98.4 123.8 136.5
6.4 12.7 9.5 9.5 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 9.5 9.5 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 9.5 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7
22.2 38.1 28.6 31.8 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 28.6 31.8 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 31.8 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1
254.0 (10")
304.8 (12")
355.6 (14")
All rod threads are UNF except 1-14 which is UNS.
30
Accessories Accessory Selection

Accessories for the rod end of a cylinder are selected by reference to the rod end thread, shown on pages 20 and 30, while the same accessories, when used at the cap end, are selected by cylinder bore size. See tables of part numbers below and on the following pages.
Tie Rod Cylinders 2A Series Load Capacity

The various accessories on these pages have been load rated for your convenience. The load capacity in kN is the recommended maximum load for that accessory based on a 4:1 factor of safety in tension. (Pivot pin is rated in shear). Before specifying, compare the actual load or the pull force at maximum operating pressure of the cylinder with the load capacity of the accessory you plan to use. If the load or pull force of the cylinder exceeds the load capacity of the accessory, please consult the factory.
Pivot Pin Diameters Style BB

To obtain the same diameter of pivot pin at the rod end and cap end of a style BB clevis-mounted cylinder fitted with a rod clevis or plain rod eye, a no. 1 rod should be specified.
Rod and Cap End Accessories

Accessories for the 2A cylinder comprise: Rod End rod clevis, eye bracket and pivot pin plain rod eye, clevis bracket and pivot pin Cap End eye bracket for style BB mounting
Rod Clevis, Eye Bracket and Pivot Pin

Thread KK M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M12x1.5 M20x1.5 M22x1.5 M26x1.5 M33x2 M39x2 M45x2 M48x2 M58x2 M64x2 M68x2 M76x2 M90x2 M100x2 M110x2 Rod Clevis 51221G 50940G 50941G 50942G 50943G 50944G 50945G 50946G 50947G 50948G 50949G 50950G 50951G 50952G 50953G 50954G Eye Bracket 74077 69195 69195 69196 85361 1 85361 1 69198 85362 1 85363 1 85363 1 85364 1 85365 1 85365 1 73538 73539 73539 Pivot Pin 68368 68368 68369 68370 68370 68371 68372 68373 68373 68374 68375 68375 73545 73547 73547 Nominal Force kN 7.7 18.3 18.3 46.8 83.8 91.0 94.5 203.3 312.1 312.1 420.0 420.0 543.6 256.0 334.4 334.4 Mass kg 0.4 0.7 0.7 2.3 5.2 5.1 9.9 19.5 28.6 28.5 48.4 63.4 63.1 104.8 157.8 156.6
Plain Rod eye, Clevis Bracket and Pivot Pin

Thread KK M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M12x1.5 M20x1.5 M22x1.5 M26x1.5 M33x2 M39x2 M45x2 M48x2 M58x2 M64x2 M68x2 M76x2 M90x2 M100x2 M110x2 Plain Rod Eye 74075G 69089G 69090G 69091G 69092G 69093G 69094G 69095G 69096G 69097G 69098G 69099G 69100G 73536G 73437G 73438G 73439G Clevis Bracket 74076 69205 69205 69206 69207 69207 69208 69209 69210 69210 69211 69212 69213 73542 73542 73543 73544 Pivot Pin 74078 68368 68368 68369 68370 68370 68371 68372 69215 69215 68374 68375 69216 73545 73545 82181 73547 Nominal Force kN 15.0 22.3 25.4 54.0 58.0 85.6 149.4 151.6 147.2 147.2 155.6 150.7 164.6 372.3 372.3 457.5 483.4 Mass kg 0.5 1.3 1.3 3.2 6.6 6.6 12.7 23.4 41.1 41.5 51.2 65.2 69.5 126.7 124.0 180.7 173.5
Cap End Eye Bracket for Styles BB and BC Cylinders

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (1 /2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6") 203.2 (8") 254.0 (10") 304.8 (12") 355.6 (14")
1
Eye Bracket Part Number 74076 2 69195 69195 69195 69196 69196 69196 85361 1 85361 1 69198 85362 1 85363 1
Nominal Force kN 16.0 18.3 18.3 18.3 46.8 46.8 46.8 91.0 91.0 94.5 220.6 312.1
Mass kg 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.4 3.4 5.6 11.1 17.0 All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise stated.
2
1
Cylinder accessory dimensions conform to NFPA recommended standard, NFPA/T3.6.8.R1 - 1984 Mounting plate for 25.4mm (1) bore single tang BB and BC mounting styles is Clevis Bracket 74076
31
Accessories Rod Clevis, Eye Bracket and Pivot Pin

Rod Clevis Dimensions
Part Number 51221G 1 50940G 50941G 50942G 50943G 50944G 50945G 50946G 50947G 50948G 50949G 50950G 50951G 50952G 50953G 50954G A 20.6 19.1 19.1 28.6 41.3 41.3 50.8 57.2 76.2 76.2 88.9 88.9 88.9 88.9 CB 8.8 19.8 19.8 32.6 38.9 38.9 51.6 64.7 64.7 64.7 77.4 77.4 77.4 102.8 CD
+0.10 +0.05
CE 57.2 38.1 38.1 54.0 74.6 74.6 95.3 114.3 139.7 139.7 165.1 171.5 171.5 196.9 223.8 223.8
CW 5.2 12.7 12.7 15.9 19.1 19.1 25.4 31.8 31.8 31.8 38.1 38.1 38.1 50.8 57.2 57.2
ER 7.5 12.7 12.7
KK M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M12x1.5
Nominal Force
kN
Mass kg 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.6 1.3 1.3 3.1 6.0 8.4 8.3 15.1 19.0 18.7 34.1 49.8 48.6
Rod Clevis (Female Clevis)
7.90 12.70 12.70 19.05 25.40 25.40 34.93 44.45 50.80 50.80 63.50 76.20 76.20 88.90 101.60 101.60
11.6 18.9 21.9 49.9 83.8 96.7 149.4 203.3 317.9 341.6 480.2 535.1 589.9 1048.8 1292.2 1480.0
19.1 M20x1.5 25.4 M22x1.5 25.4 M26x1.5 34.9 44.5 50.8 50.8 63.5 69.9 69.9 88.9 101.6 M33x2 M39x2 M45x2 M48x2 M58x2 M64x2 M68x2 M76x2 M90x2
Eye Bracket
101.6 116.0 101.6 116.0
101.6 M100x2
Eye Bracket Dimensions

Part Number 74077 69195 69196 85361 2 69198 85362 2 85363 2 85364 2 85365 2 73538 73539 CB 7.9 19.1 31.8 38.1 50.8 63.5 63.5 76.2 76.2 101.6 114.3 CD +0.05 7.90 12.70 19.05 25.40 34.93 44.45 50.80 63.50 76.20 88.90 101.60
+0.10
DD 6.8 10.3 13.5 16.7 16.7 23.0 27.0 30.2 33.3 46.0 52.4
E 57.2 63.5 88.9 114.3 127.0 165.1 190.5 215.9 241.3 320.7 377.8
F 9.5 9.5 15.9 22.2 22.2 28.6 38.1 44.5 50.8 42.9 49.2
FL 25.4 28.6 47.6 60.3 76.2 85.7 101.6 120.6 133.3 144.5 163.5
LR 15.9 19.1 31.8 38.1 54.0 57.2 63.5 76.2 82.6 101.6 114.3
M 9.5 12.7 19.1 25.4 34.9 44.5 50.8 63.5 69.9 88.9 101.6
MR 12.7 14.3 22.2 31.8 41.3 54.0 61.9 76.2 82.6 95.3 108.0
R 44.5 41.4 64.8 82.6 97.0 125.7 145.5 167.1 190.5 244.3 290.8
Nominal Force
kN
Mass kg 0.3 0.4 1.5 3.4 5.6 11.1 17.0 27.4 35.8 55.6 84.3
7.6 18.3 46.8 91.0 94.5 220.6 312.1 420.0 543.6 256.0 334.4
Pivot Pin for Clevis Bracket and Eye Bracket

Part Number 74078 68368 68369 68370 68371 68372 68373 69215 68374 68375 69216 73545 82181 73547 CD
+0.00 -0.05
CL
+0.0 -0.5
G 40 56 75 88 115 143 145 158 171 173 185 225 235 251
Nominal Force kN 29.4 38.4 86.1 152.9 289.8 469.1 612.7 612.7 957.4 1378.7 1378.7 1876.8 2522.9 2522.9
Mass kg 0.03 0.1 0.2 0.5 1.2 2.4 3.2 3.5 5.9 8.6 9.2 15.2 22.4 23.5
Pivot Pin for Clevis Bracket and Eye Bracket
11.10 12.73 19.08 25.43 34.95 44.48 50.83 50.83 63.53 76.23 76.23 88.93 101.63 101.63
32.7 46.3 65.4 77.9 103.4 128.8 129.7 141.4 155.1 154.7 167.7 205.7 215.5 231.7
1 2
Includes pivot pin Cylinder accessory dimensions conform to NFPA recommended standard, NFPA/T3.6.8.R1 - 1984
All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise stated. Parker Hannifin Ltd. Cylinder Division Europe
32
Accessories Plain Rod Eye and Clevis Bracket

Plain Rod Eye Dimensions
Part Number 74075G 69089G 69090G 69091G 69092G 69093G 69094G 69095G 69096G 69097G 69098G 69099G 69100G 73536G 73437G 73438G 73439G A min. 19.1 19.1 19.1 28.6 28.6 41.3 50.8 57.2 57.2 76.2 88.9 88.9 92.1 101.6 127.0 139.7 139.7 CA 38.1 38.1 38.1 52.4 60.3 71.4 87.3 101.6 111.1 127.0 147.6 155.6 165.1 193.7 193.7 231.8 231.8 CB 11.1 19.1 19.1 31.8 38.1 38.1 50.8 63.5 63.5 63.5 76.2 76.2 88.9 101.6 101.6 114.3 127.0 CD +0.05 11.10 12.70 12.70 19.05 25.40 25.40 34.93 44.45 50.80 50.80 63.50 76.20 76.20 88.90 88.90 101.60 101.60
+0.10
ER 15.2 18.3 18.3 27.0 36.5 36.5 50.0 63.5 72.2 72.2 90.5 108.0 108.0 126.2 126.2 144.5 144.5
Nominal Force kN M8x1.25 14.7 KK M10x1.5 M12x1.5 M20x1.5 M22x1.5 M26x1.5 M33x2 M39x2 M45x2 M48x2 M58x2 M64x2 M68x2 M76x2 M90x2 M100x2 M110x2 22.3 25.4 54.0 58.0 96.8 149.4 200.6 238.6 334.4 440.1 490.5 549.8 719.3 969.0 1220.9 1375.6
Mass kg 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.5 1.1 1.1 2.6 5.1 6.4 6.8 12.1 16.0 19.6 31.1 28.4 42.5 48.4
Plain Rod Eye
Clevis Bracket Dimensions

Part Numbers 74076 69205 69206 69207 69208 69209 69210 69211 69212 69213 73542 73543 73544 CB 12.0 19.8 32.6 38.9 51.6 64.7 64.7 77.4 77.4 90.1 102.8 116.0 128.2 CD
+0.10 +0.05
CW 9.5 12.7 15.9 19.1 25.4 31.8 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 50.8 50.8 50.8
DD 6.8 10.3 13.5 16.7 16.7 23.0 27.0 30.2 33.3 33.3 46.0 52.4 52.4
E 57.2 88.9 127.0 165.1 190.5 241.3 323.9 323.9 323.9 323.9 393.7 444.5 444.5
F 9.5 12.7 15.9 19.1 22.2 22.2 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 42.9 49.2 49.2
FL 25.4 38.1 47.6 57.2 76.2 92.1 108.0 114.3 152.4 152.4 169.9 195.3 195.3
LR 15.9 19.1 30.2 38.1 50.8 69.9 81.0 88.9 108.0 108.0 127.0 146.1 146.1
M 9.5 12.7 19.1 25.4 34.9 44.5 57.2 63.5 76.2 76.2 88.9 101.6 101.6
MR 12.7 15.9 23.0 31.8 42.1 56.4 70.6 79.4 91.3 91.3 104.8 123.8 123.8
R 44.5 64.8 97.0 125.7 145.5 190.5 238.8 238.8 238.8 238.8 304.8 349.3 349.3
Nominal Force
kN
Mass kg 0.4 1.0 2.5 5.0 8.8 15.9 31.2 33.2 40.7 40.7 80.4 115.8 101.6
11.10 12.70 19.05 25.40 34.93 44.45 50.80 63.50 76.20 76.20 88.90 101.60 101.60
16.0 32.6 62.4 85.6 164.6 151.6 147.2 155.6 150.7 164.6 372.3 457.5 483.4
Clevis Bracket
33
Non-Lubricated Air Cylinders

3 1 2 5
Tie Rod Cylinders 2AN Series 2A Series

6 8
7&8 4
Rounded Lipseals
Series 2AN Non-Lubricated Air Cylinders

Increased market demand and Parkers continuous research and testing efforts inspired the development of the Series 2AN Non-Lubricated Air Cylinder, suitable for use with filtered air. These cylinders are designed to operate in environments where it is not possible to add lubrication to the compressed air entering the cylinder. Certain packaging and assembly operations, food environments, and microprocessor chip manufacturing are typical examples of applications where the exhausting of oil into the environment is not desirable. Available in bore sizes up to 304.8mm (12) diameter and rod diameters up to 63.5mm (21/2), the Series 2AN cylinder features rounded lip rod and piston seals.
Ordering Information
To order a Non-Lubricated Air Cylinder, specify Series 2AN. See page 47 for the ordering code.
Available Bore and Rod Sizes

The following bore and rod sizes are available with Series 2AN cylinders. For all other sizes, please contact the factory.
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") Rod Number 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 6 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 1 3 Rod Diameter MM 12.7 (1/2") 15.9 (5/8") 15.9 (5/8") 25.4 (1") 15.9 (5/8") 34.9 (13/8") 25.4 (1") 15.9 (5/8") 44.5 (13/4") 25.4 (1") 34.9 (13/8") 25.4 (1") 50.8 (2") 34.9 (13/8") 44.5 (13/4") 25.4 (1") 63.5 (21/2") 34.9 (13/8") 44.5 (13/4") 50.8 (2") 25.4 (1") 34.9 (13/8") 44.5 (13/4") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 34.9 (13/8") 44.5 (13/4") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 34.9 (13/8") 44.5 (13/4") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 44.5 (13/4") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") Parker Hannifin Ltd. Cylinder Division Europe
Rounded Lipseal
The rounded sealing lip glides over lubricant film instead of scraping it off, and the increased heel thickness and outer lip extension improve stability and resist rolling. The use of the rounded lipseal reduces friction, increases life and eliminates the need for added lubrication.
82.6 (31/4")

For the standard features shown above, please see pages 4 and 5. For available bore and rod sizes, please see table opposite. Benefits of the 2AN Series cylinder include long seal and bearing life and, since no oil is added through the use of lubricators, no oil is expelled into the atmosphere with the exhaust air as the cylinder strokes. In addition, the use of non-lubricated air results in lower overall operating costs. With the exception of fluorocarbon elastomer seals, and unless otherwise stated, all modifications available with Series 2A Cylinders are also available with Series 2AN cylinders.
101.6 (4")
127.0 (5")
152.4 (6")
203.2 (8") 254.0 (10") 304.8 (12")
Operating Temperatures
The temperature range for Series 2AN cylinders with Group 1 seals is -20C to +80C. Group 5, high temperatures seals, are suitable for operating temperatures between -15C and +150C. 34
Replacement Parts for 2AN Cylinders Service Assemblies and Seal Kits
Service Assembly Kits and Seal Kits for 2AN cylinders simplify the ordering and maintenance processes. This page lists only those kits specific to 2AN Series cylinders. For standard Series 2A cylinder service kits, please refer to page 45. They contain sub-assemblies which are ready for installation, and are supplied with full instructions. When ordering Service Assemblies and Seal Kits, please refer to the identification plate on the cylinder body and supply the following information: Serial Number - Bore - Stroke - Model Number - Fluid Type
Tie Rod Cylinders 2A Series 2AN Series Contents and Part Numbers of 2AN Seal Kits for Pistons and Glands
(see key to part numbers opposite and on page 44)
Gland Cartridge Service Kit

Contains items 14, 40, 41, 45.
Gland Service Kit

Contains items 40, 41, 45.
Rod Diameter mm 12.7 (1/2") 15.9 (5/8") 25.4 (1") 34.9 (13/8") 44.5 (1 /4") 50.8 (2")
3
Key to Part Numbers

(For all other part numbers, please refer to page 44). 14 17 40 41 42 45 Gland/bearing cartridge Piston Wiperseal for gland Rounded Lipseal for gland Rounded Lipseal for piston O-ring gland/head
40 41 14 45
Gland Cartridge Service Kit, Standard Seals RG2AN00051 RG2AN00061 RG2AN00101 RG2AN00131 RG2AN00171 RG2AN00201 RG2AN00251
Gland Service Kit, Standard Seals RK2AN00051 RK2AN00061 RK2AN00101 RK2AN00131 RK2AN00171 RK2AN00201 RK2AN00251
63.5 (21/2")
Piston Service Kit, Lipseal Piston

Contains two each of items 42 and 47.
Bore 25.4 (1") Piston Service Kit Lipseal Piston PK1002AN01 PK1502AN01 PK2002AN01 PK2502AN01 PK3202AN01 PK4002AN01 PK5002AN01 PK6002AN01 PK8002AN01 PK9002AN01 PK9202AN01
2AN Gland Cartridge and Seals

42
38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4")
17
127.0 (5") 152.4 (6") 203.2 (8") 254.0 (10")
Lipseal Piston
304.8 (12")
Seal Groups
Group 1 Seal Kits are supplied as standard. Special seals are available for 2AN Series cylinders in high temperature (Group 5) applications please contact the factory for details.
Tie Rod Torques

Please refer to the table on page 37.
Repairs
Although 2AN cylinders are designed to make on-site maintenance or repairs as easy as possible, some operations can only be carried out in our factory. It is standard policy to fit a cylinder returned to the factory for repair with those replacement parts which are necessary to return it to as good as new condition. Should the condition of the returned cylinder be such that repair would be uneconomical, you will be notified.
To order a non-lubricated air cylinder, specify '2AN' in the order code on page 47.
35
Mounting Information
The notes which follow provide information for use in specic applications and should be read in conjunction with the information given on page 7.

The turning moment which results from the application of force by a foot mounted cylinder must be resisted by secure mounting and effective guidance of the load. A thrust key modication is recommended to provide positive cylinder location. Thrust key mountings eliminate the need for tted bolts or external keys on Styles C, F and G side mounted cylinders. The gland retainer plate is extended below the nominal mounting surface to t into a keyway milled into the mounting surface of the machine member. See Mounting Modications in the order code, page 47.
Integral key
Mounting Styles
Foot Mountings and Thrust Keys
The standard tie rod extension for cylinders with mounting style TB, TC and TD is shown as BB in dimension tables. Longer or shorter extensions can be supplied. Cylinders with extended tie rod mountings TB and TC are supplied with an additional set of mounting nuts of the appropriate grade for securing the cylinder to the machine member. For style TD, tie rods extended both ends, two additional sets of mounting nuts are supplied. In such applications one end is used for mounting and the opposite end to support the cylinder, or to attach other machine components. Cylinders may be ordered with extended tie rods in addition to another mounting style. The extended tie rods may then be used for mounting other systems or machine components.
Extended Tie Rods
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6")
1
F Nominal 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 15.9 15.9 15.9 19.1
FA
+0.0 -0.075
PA
+0.0 -0.2
PD 23.8 30.2 36.5 42.9 55.6 65.1 77.8 92.1
8 8 8 8 14 14 14 18
4.9 4.9 4.9 4.9 8.1 8.1 8.1 9.5
The diameter of the rod gland extension (B), pages 20 and 30, at the head end can be used as a pilot to locate the cylinders in relation to the machine. After alignment has been obtained, the anges may be drilled for pins or dowels to prevent movement.
Pivot pins are supplied with style BB cap xed clevis mounted cylinders and style BC cap detachable clevis mounted cylinders, with the exception of 1 bore sizes, which feature a single tang pivot see page 16.
Pivot Mountings
GP mounting not available on 25.4mm (1) bore cylinders.
Trunnions require lubricated pillow blocks with minimum bearing clearances. Blocks should be aligned and mounted to eliminate bending moments on the trunnion pins. Self-aligning mounts must not be used to support the trunnions as bending forces can be set up. An intermediate xed trunnion mounting can be positioned to balance the weight of the cylinder, or it can be located at any point between the head or cap to suit the application. The position of the trunnion is xed during manufacture and its location must be specied at the time of order.
To increase the resistance to buckling of long stroke cylinders, tie rod supports may be tted. These move the tie rods radially outwards and allow longer than normal strokes to be used without the need for an additional mounting.
Bore 38.1 (1 /2")
1
Tie Rod Supports
Stroke (Metres) 1.5 1.8 2.1 2.4 2.7 3.0 3.3 3.6 3.9 4.2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 1 3 2 1 1 1 3 2 2 1 1 4 3 2 1 1 Number of Supports Required
Foot mounted cylinders should not be pinned or keyed at both ends. Changes in temperature and pressure under normal operating conditions cause the cylinder to increase (or decrease) from its installed length and it therefore must be free to expand and contract. It must not be pinned or keyed at both ends as advantages of cylinder elasticity in absorbing high shock loads would be lost.
50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4")
Bore sizes above 101.6mm (4) do not require tie rod supports.
36
Parker Hannin Ltd. Cylinder Division Europe
Manifold Ports and Pressure Limitations Stroke Tolerances

Stroke length tolerances are required due to the build-up of tolerances of piston, head, cap and cylinder body. Standard production stroke tolerances are -0.4 to +0.8mm on all bore sizes and stroke lengths. For closer tolerances, please specify the required tolerance plus the operating temperature and pressure. Stroke tolerances of less than 0.4mm are generally impracticable due to the elasticity of cylinders and, in these cases, the use of a stroke limiter should be considered see page 43.
Tie Rod Cylinders 2A Series Manifold Ports

Side mounted cylinders (Style C) can be supplied with the cylinder ports arranged for mounting and sealing to a manifold surface. Manifold ports are available with both single- and double-rodded cylinders. The ports are drilled and counterbored for O-ring seals which are provided. With these specifications, the mounting is designated Style CM. Please consult the factory.
Mounting Bolts
Parker recommends that mounting bolts with a minimum strength of ISO 898/1 grade 10.9 should be used for fixing cylinders to the machine or base. This recommendation is of particular importance where bolts are placed in tension or subjected to shear forces. Mounting bolts should be torque loaded to their manufacturers recommended figures.
P + stroke
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (1 /2") 50.8 (2")

1
Rod No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Y 0.8 49.2 50.8 50.8 50.8 61.9 61.9 61.9 71.4 71.4 79.4 82.6 96.8
P 0.8 54.0 54.0 54.0 57.2 66.7 66.7 73.0 79.4 82.6 104.8 117.5 139.7
EEM
ED
Tie Rod Nuts

Tie rod mounting nuts, with lubricated threads, should be to a minimum strength of ISO 898/2 grade 10, torque loaded to the figures shown.
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6") 203.2 (8") 254.0 (10") 304.8 (12") 355.6 (14") 150 - 155 200 - 205 230 - 235 370 - 375 110 - 114 148 - 152 170 - 175 275 - 280 80 - 85 60 - 64 Tie Rod Nut Torques Nm min-max 3 - 3.5 8-9 15 - 17 lb.ft min-max 2 - 2.5 5-6 11 - 12 9.5 12.7 12.7 12.7 15.9 15.9 15.9 22.2 22.2 30.2 30.2 39.7 17.5 20.6 20.6 20.6 23.8 23.8 23.8 30.2 30.2 38.1 38.1 47.6
Parker O-Ring No. 2 - 015 2 - 017 2 - 017 2 - 017 2 - 019 2 - 019 2 - 019 2 - 023 2 - 023 2 - 028 2 - 028 2 - 131
63.5 (2 /2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6") 203.2 (8") 254.0 (10")
33 - 36
25 - 26
304.8 (12") 355.6 (14")
Dimensions for rod no. 1 only. For alternative rod sizes, please consult the factory.
Maximum Pressure
The maximum working pressure of 18 bar (250 psi) is based on pure tensile and compressive loadings, without the presence of any bending stresses. Where it is impractical to avoid side loadings, eg: by the use of pivot mountings, please consult the factory giving full details of the application. In many applications, the pressure developed within a cylinder may be greater than the working pressure, due to pressure intensification across the piston and cushioning, eg: in meterout circuits. In most cases, this intensification does not affect the cylinder mountings or piston rod threads in the form of increased loading. If the induced pressure with the no. 1 rod exceeds 18 bar (250 psi), please consult the factory.
inPHorm
For more comprehensive information about pressure limitations for individual cylinders, please refer to the European cylinder inPHorm selection program HY07-1260/Eur.
37
Theoretical Push and Pull Forces Calculation of Cylinder Diameter

Given that the force and operating pressure of the system are known, and that a piston rod size has been estimated taking account of whether the rod is in tension (pull) or compression (push), then the cylinder bore can be selected. If the piston rod is in compression, use the Push Force table below, as follows: 1. Identify the operating pressure closest to that required. 2. In the same column, identify the force required to move the load (always rounding up). 3. In the same row, look along to the cylinder bore required. If the cylinder envelope dimensions are too large for the application, increase the operating pressure, if possible, and repeat the exercise.

If the piston rod is in tension, use the Deduction for Pull Force table. The procedure is the same but, due to the reduced area caused by the piston rod, the force available on the pull stroke will be smaller. To determine the pull force: 1. Follow the procedure for push applications as described above. 2. Using the pull table, identify the force indicated according to the rod and pressure selected. 3. Deduct this from the original push force. The resultant is the net force available to move the load. If this force is not large enough, go through the process again but increase the system operating pressure or cylinder diameter if possible. If in doubt, our design engineers will be pleased to assist.
inPHorm
For more comprehensive information on the calculation of cylinder bore size required, please refer to the European cylinder inPHorm selection program HY07-1260/Eur.
Push Force
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6") 203.2 (8") 254.0 (10") 304.8 (12") 355.6 (14") Piston Area mm
2
Cylinder Push Force in kN 2 bar 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.6 1.1 1.6 2.5 3.6 6.5 10.1 14.6 19.9 3.5 bar 0.2 0.4 0.7 1.1 1.9 2.8 4.4 6.4 11.4 17.7 25.5 34.8 5.5 bar 0.3 0.6 1.1 1.7 2.9 4.5 7.0 10.0 17.8 27.9 40.1 54.6 7 bar 0.4 0.8 1.4 2.2 3.8 5.7 8.9 12.8 22.7 35.5 51.1 69.5 18 bar 0.9 2.1 3.6 5.7 9.6 14.6 22.8 32.8 58.4 91.2 131.3 178.8 25 psi 20 44 79 123 208 314 491 707 1257 1964 2828 3849
Cylinder Push Force in Pounds Force 50 psi 39 88 157 245 415 628 982 1414 2513 3927 5655 7697 65 psi 51 115 204 319 540 817 1277 1838 3268 5105 7352 10006 80 psi 65 142 251 393 664 1006 1571 2262 4022 6283 9048 12315 100 psi 79 177 314 491 830 1257 1964 2827 5027 7854 11310 15394 250 psi 196 443 785 1228 2075 3143 4910 7068 12568 19635 28275 38485
sq. in. 0.785 1.767 3.14 4.9 8.3 12.5 20 28.3 50.3 78.5 113 154
510 1140 2020 3170 5360 8110 12670 18240 32430 50670 72930 99320
Deduction for Pull Force

Piston Rod 12.7 (1/2") 15.9 (5/8") 25.4 (1") 34.9 (13/8") 44.5 (13/4") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 76.2 (3") 88.9 (31/2") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 139.7 (51/2") Piston Rod Area mm
2
Piston Rod Forces in kN 2 bar 0.03 0.04 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.9 1.2 1.6 2.5 3.1 3.5 bar 0.05 0.07 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.1 1.6 2.2 2.8 4.4 5.4 5.5 bar 0.07 0.1 0.3 0.5 0.9 1.1 1.7 2.5 3.4 4.5 7.0 8.4 7 bar 0.09 0.1 0.4 0.7 1.1 1.4 2.2 3.2 4.3 5.7 8.9 10.7 18 bar 0.2 0.4 0.9 1.7 2.8 3.6 5.7 8.2 11.2 14.6 22.8 27.6 25 psi 5 8 20 37 60 79 123 177 241 314 491 594
Piston Rod Forces in Pounds Force 50 psi 10 15 39 75 121 157 245 354 481 628 982 1188 65 psi 13 20 51 97 157 204 319 460 625 817 1277 1544 80 psi 16 25 65 119 193 251 393 566 770 1006 1571 1901 100 psi 20 31 79 149 241 314 491 707 962 1257 1964 2376 250 psi 49 77 196 373 603 785 1228 1767 2405 3143 4910 5940
sq. in. 0.196 0.307 0.785 1.49 2.41 3.14 4.9 7.0 10 12.5 20 24
130 200 500 960 1560 2020 3170 4560 6210 8110 12670 15330
38
Piston Rod Sizes and Stop Tubes Piston Rod Size Selection
The selection of a piston rod for thrust (push) conditions requires the following steps to be carried out: 1. Determine the type of cylinder mounting style and rod end connection to be used. Consult the Stroke Factor table on page 40 and determine which factor corresponds to the application. 2. Using the appropriate stroke factor from page 40, determine the basic length from the equation: Basic Length = Net Stroke x Stroke Factor (The graph is prepared for standard rod extensions beyond the face of the gland retainers. For rod extensions greater than standard, add the increases to the net stroke to arrive at the basic length.) 3. Calculate the load imposed for the thrust application by multiplying the full bore area of the cylinder by the system pressure, or by referring to the Push and Pull Force charts on page 38. 4. Using the graph below, look along the values of basic length and thrust as found in 2 and 3 above, and note the point of intersection. The correct piston rod size is read from the diagonally curved line labelled Rod Diameter above the point of intersection. Note: When considering the use of long stroke cylinders, the piston rod should be of sufficient diameter to provide the necessary column strength.
graph by following the horizontal band within which the point of intersection lies. Note that stop tube requirements differ for fixed and pivot mounted cylinders. For cylinders fitted with a stop tube and cushion at the head end, a dual piston arrangement is required please consult the factory. If the required length of stop tube is in the region labelled consult factory, please submit the following information: 1. Cylinder mounting style. 2. Rod end connection and method of guiding load. 3. Bore required, stroke, length of rod extension (dimension W - dimension V see pages 20 and 30) if greater than standard. 4. Mounting position of cylinder. (Note if at an angle or vertical, and specify the direction of the piston rod.) 5. Operating pressure of cylinder, if limited to less than the standard pressure for the cylinder selected. For accurate sizing, please refer to the European cylinder inPHorm selection program HY07-1260/Eur. When specifying a cylinder with a stop tube, please insert an S (Special) and the net stroke of the cylinder in the order code and state the length of the stop tube. Note that net stroke is equal to the gross stroke of the cylinder less the length of the stop tube. The gross stroke determines the envelope dimensions of the cylinder.
Cushion sleeve Stop tube
Stop Tubes
Stop tubes prevent the cylinder from completing its full stroke, to provide a separation between the piston and the rod bearing at full extension. The required length of stop tube, where necessary, is read from the vertical columns on the right of the
Piston Rod Selection Chart
Recommended length of Stop Tube (mm)
Rod Diameter (mm)
Basic Length (mm) log scale
Fixed Mountings
Thrust (kN) log scale
Consult factory
39
No Stop Tube required
Pivot Mountings
Stroke Factors Stroke Factors

The stroke factors which follow are used in the calculation of cylinder basic length see Piston Rod Size Selection, page 39.
Rod End Connection
Mounting Style
Type of Mounting
Stroke Factor
Fixed and rigidly guided
TB, TD, J, JB, C, F, G
0.5
Pivoted and rigidly guided
0.7
Fixed and rigidly guided
TC, H, HB
1.0
1.0
TC, H, HB, DD
1.5
Supported but not rigidly guided
2.0
BB, DB, BC
2.0
TC, H, HB
4.0
BB, DB, BC
4.0
Long Stroke Cylinders

When considering the use of long stroke cylinders, the piston rod should be of sufficient diameter to provide the necessary column strength. For tensile (pull) loads, rod strength is unaffected by stroke length. For long stroke cylinders under compressive loads, the use of stop tubes should be considered, to reduce bearing stress. The Piston Rod Selection Chart on page 39 provides guidance where unusually long strokes are required.
inPHorm
40
Cushioning An Introduction to Cushioning

Cushioning is recommended as a means of controlling the deceleration of masses, or for applications where piston speeds are in excess of 0.1m/s and the piston will make a full stroke. Cushioning extends cylinder life and reduces undesirable noise and pressure peaks. Deceleration devices or built-in cushions are optional and can be supplied at the head end, cap end, or at both ends of the cylinder without affecting its envelope or mounting dimensions.
Tie Rod Cylinders 2A Series Cushion Length & Piston and Rod Mass
Where specified, 2A cylinders incorporate the longest cushion sleeve and spear that can be accommodated within the standard envelope without reducing the rod bearing and piston bearing lengths. See table of cushion lengths below. Cushions are adjustable via recessed needle valves.
inPHorm
Cushioning requirements can be calculated for individual cylinder/load combinations using the European cylinder inPHorm selection program HY07-1260/Eur.
Bore Sizes from 25.4mm to 152.4mm (1 to 6)

MM Rod Diameter 12.7 ( /2") 15.9 (5/8") 15.9 (5/8") 25.4 (1") 15.9 (5/8") 34.9 (13/8") 25.4 (1") 15.9 44.5 25.4 34.9 25.4 50.8 34.9 44.5 25.4 63.5 34.9 44.5 50.8 25.4 88.9 34.9 44.5 50.8 63.5 76.2 (5/8") (13/4") (1") (13/8") (1") (2") (13/8") (13/4") (1") (21/2") (13/8") (13/4") (2") (1") (31/2") (13/8") (13/4") (2") (21/2") (3")
1
Bore sizes from 203.2mm to 355.6mm (8 to 14)

MM Rod Diameter 34.9 (1 /8") 139.7 (51/2") 44.5 (13/4") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 76.2 (3") 88.9 (31/2") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 44.5 (13/4") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 76.2 (3") 88.9 (31/2") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 139.7 (51/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 76.2 (3") 88.9 (31/2") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 139.7 (51/2") 63.5 (21/2") 76.2 (3") 88.9 (31/2") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 139.7 (51/2")
3
Bore
Rod No.
Cushion Length Head Cap
Piston & Rod at Zero Stroke kg 0.18 0.23 0.38 0.65 0.58 1.34 0.85 0.91 2.43 1.18 1.68 1.74 3.71 2.26 3.04 2.42 6.36 2.93 3.72 4.39 4.16 12.91 4.68 5.46 6.13 8.11 10.48 6.38 18.56 7.19 7.88 9.91 12.35 14.86
Rod Only per 10mm stroke kg 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.02 0.07 0.04 0.02 0.12 0.04 0.07 0.04 0.16 0.07 0.12 0.04 0.25 0.07 0.12 0.16 0.04 0.48 0.07 0.12 0.16 0.25 0.35 0.07 0.63 0.12 0.16 0.25 0.35 0.48
Bore
Rod No.
Cushion Length Head Cap
Piston & Rod at Zero Stroke kg 11.34 39.78 12.15 12.85 14.88 17.31 19.83 23.52 33.43 22.97 23.86 25.61 28.13 30.95 34.74 44.87 51.35 40.36 42.11 44.62 47.44 51.23 61.36 67.85 65.95 68.59 71.05 75.33 85.91 92.65
Rod Only per 10mm stroke kg 0.07 1.19 0.12 0.16 0.25 0.35 0.48 0.63 0.98 0.12 0.16 0.25 0.35 0.48 0.63 0.98 1.19 0.16 0.25 0.35 0.48 0.63 0.98 1.19 0.25 0.35 0.48 0.63 0.98 1.19
25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2")
1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
See Note 1 22.2 22.2 20.6 20.6
203.2 (8")
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 1 3 4 5 7 8
27.0 23.8 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 34.9 34.9 23.8 44.1 33.3 33.3 33.3 33.3 33.3 30.1 30.1 33.1 33.3 33.3 33.3 33.3 30.1 30.1 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 42.9 42.9
31.8
22.2 28.6 20.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 20.6 28.6 20.6 20.6 28.6 20.6 20.6 20.6 20.6 28.6 28.6 34.9 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 34.9
20.6
82.6 (31/4")
25.4
254.0 (10")
44.5
101.6 (4")
25.4
304.8 (12")
44.5
127.0 (5")
25.4
355.6 (14")
50.8
152.4 (6")
34.9 (13/8") 101.6 (4") 44.5 (13/4") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 76.2 (3") 88.9 (31/2")
31.8
Cushions are not available on 25.4mm (1) bore size.
41
Ports Standard Ports

Series 2A and 2AN cylinders are supplied as standard with R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1, spot faced for sealing washers. Smaller R2 size ports, where demanded by the application, are also available. Parker recommends R1 port sizes for their higher flow rate and piston speed capacity. Metric threaded ports to DIN 3852 Pt.1, BSPT (taper thread) ports or NPTF ports in sizes as shown for BSPP ports, can be supplied if specified. Where required, oversize or additional ports can be supplied on the sides of heads and caps that are not occupied by cushion valves. Refer to the tables of port sizes opposite.

Standard Port Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6") 203.2 (8") 254.0 (10") 304.8 (12") 355.6 (14") Port Size (BSPP) R1 G1/4 G /8 G3/8 G3/8 G1/2 G1/2 G /2 G3/4 G3/4 G1 G1 G11/4
1 3
R2 G1/4 G /4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/2 G1/2 G1/2 G3/4 G3/4 G1 G1 G11/4

1
Port Size Metric M14x1.5 M14x1.5 M14x1.5 M14x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 M26x1.5 M26x1.5 M33x2 M33x2 M42x2
Oversize Ports
For higher speed applications, oversize ports can be supplied in all bore sizes. Ports one size larger than standard are the maximum that can be accommodated in most heads or caps within the standard envelope dimensions. Certain oversize metric, BSPT or NPTF ports require welded port bosses. The bosses protrude from the side of the cylinder. Port sizes are shown in the tables opposite. Note that Y and P dimensions may vary slightly to accommodate oversize ports please contact the factory where these dimensions are critical.
Oversize Port Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6") 203.2 (8") 254.0 (10") 304.8 (12") 355.6 (14")
1 2
Port Size (BSPP) R1 G3/8 G1/2 1 G1/2 1 G /2

1 2
R2 G3/8 G3/8 1 G3/8 1 G3/8 2 G3/4 2 G3/4 2 G /4 G1 G1

2 2 2 1 1 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
Port Size Metric M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M26x1.5 2 M26x1.5 2 M26x1.5 2 M33x2 2 M33x2 2 M42x2 2 M42x2 2 M48x2 2
Manifold Ports
Manifold ports are available on all mounting styles to special order. Side mounted cylinders (Style C) can be supplied with the cylinder ports arranged for mounting and sealing to a manifold surface see page 37.
G3/4 2 G3/4 2 G /4 G1 G1
1 1 3 2 2 2
G1 /4 G1 /4 G1 /2
1
G1 /4 G1 /4 G1 /2
1
Ports and Cushion Adjustment Location

The table below shows standard positions for ports, and cushion adjusting screws where fitted. However, by specifying the position numbers for the desired locations for head and cap ports, many mounting styles can be assembled with ports located at 90 or 180 from standard. In these cases, cushion needle and check valves are also repositioned, where fitted, since their relation with the port position does not change.
Requires welded port bosses on both head and cap Requires welded port bosses on cap only
Position of Ports and Cushion Screws in Head and Cap Head Cap Port Cushion Port Cushion
Mounting Styles TB, TC, TD, J, JB, H, HB, BB & BC 1 2 1 2 2 3 2 3 3 4 3 4 4 1 4 1 C 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 3 2 4 3 1 D 3 1 4 2 1 3 1 3 2 4 DB 3 1 3 1 4 2 1 3 1 3 2 4 2 4 DD 3 1 3 1 4 2 4 2 1 2 1 2 G&F 2 4 2 4 4 1 4 1
42
Optional Features Removable Trunnions
Tie Rod Cylinders 2A Series Stroke Limiter

Where absolute precision in stroke length is required, a screwed adjustable stop can be supplied. Several types are available the illustration shows Seal a design suitable for infrequent adjustment J Wrench at the uncushioned cap Square end of a cylinder. Please contact the factory, specifying details of the application and the adjustment required.
Removable trunnions are available when machine structures or confined space prohibit the use of separate pillow blocks situated close to the cylinder sides. Parker offers a removable trunnion design in 38.1mm to 203.2mm (11/2 to 8) bore sizes. Mounting diameters and lengths are identical to those in mounting style D and DB for any given bore size. These removable trunnions can be provided on the cap end (see Mounting Modifications in the order code, page 47) of Series 2A cylinders with any rod diameter. They can also be provided on the head end (see Mounting Modifications in the order code, page 47) of cylinders with standard rods (rod no. 1). Maximum pressure ratings of the removable trunnion mountings are shown in the table below.
Bore 38.1 to 101.6 (11/2" to 4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6") 203.2 (8") Bar 18 10 13 8.5 psi 250 150 200 125
Bore 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6") 203.2 (8")
J 11 17 17 17 17 17 22 22
K min 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85
L max 127.0 127.0 203.2 203.2 203.2 228.6 228.6 457.2
Multiple Stroke Positioning

To obtain linear force in one plane with controlled stopping at intermediate points, several designs are available. For three stopped positions, it is common practice to mount two standard single rod Style H cylinders back-to-back, or to use throughtie rods. By extending or retracting the stroke of each cylinder independently, it is possible to achieve three positions at the piston ends. An alternative technique is to use a tandem cylinder with an independent piston rod in the cap section. Please consult the factory for further details.
Single-Acting Cylinders
Standard 2A series cylinders are of the double-acting type. They are also suitable for use as single-acting cylinders, where the load or other external force is used to return the piston after the pressure stroke.
Rod End Bellows

Unprotected piston rod surfaces which are exposed to contaminants with air hardening properties should be protected by rod end bellows. Longer rod extensions are required to accommodate the collapsed length of the bellows. Please consult the factory for further information.
Spring-Returned, Single-Acting Cylinders

Series 2A single-acting cylinders can also be supplied with an internal spring to return the piston after the pressure stroke. Please supply details of load conditions and friction factors, and advise whether the spring is required to advance or return the piston rod. On spring-returned cylinders, it is recommended that tie rod extensions be specified on the cylinder end in which the spring is located to allow the spring to be backed off until compression is relieved. Tie rod nuts should be welded to the tie rods at the opposite end of the cylinder, to further assure safe disassembly. Please consult the factory when ordering spring-returned cylinders.
Metallic Rod Wipers

Metallic rod wipers replace the standard wiper seal, and are recommended where dust, ice or splashings might damage the wiper seal material. Metallic rod wipers do not affect cylinder dimensions.
DC Proximity Sensors
These can be fitted to give reliable end of stroke signals. Please consult the factory for further information.
43
Replacement Parts and Service Service Assemblies and Seal Kits

70 Needle valve, cushion adjustment (bore sizes above 63.5mm) 70a Needle valve assembly, cartridge type (bore sizes up to 63.5mm) 71 Ball cushion check valve 72 Cushion check valve screw 73 Floating cushion bush 74 Retaining ring for cushion bush
1 2
Service Assembly Kits and Seal Kits for 2A cylinders simplify the ordering and maintenance processes. They contain subassemblies which are ready for installation, and are supplied with full instructions. When ordering Service Assemblies and Seal Kits, please refer to the identication plate on the cylinder body, and supply the following information: Serial Number - Bore - Stroke - Model Number - Fluid Type
Key to Part Numbers

1 7 14 15 17 18 19 23 27 34 35 36 37 40 41 42 Head Cap Gland/bearing cartridge Cylinder body Piston (Lipseal) Cushion sleeve Tie rod Tie rod nut Retainer Piston rod single rod, no cushion Piston rod single rod, cushion at head end Piston rod single rod, cushion at cap end Piston rod single rod, cushion at both ends Wiperseal for gland Lipseal for gland Lipseal for piston
Not illustrated See page 21 double rod cylinders Gland Cartridge Wrench 69590 69590 69591 69592 69593 69594 69595 69596 69597 69598 69599 69600 Spanner Wrench
Piston Rod 12.7 (1/2") 15.9 (5/8") 25.4 (1") 34.9 (13/8") 44.5 (13/4") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 76.2 (3") 88.9 (31/2") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 139.7 (51/2")
11676 11676 11676 11703 11677 11677 11677 11677 11677 11677 11678 11678
42
17
Lipseal Piston
43 41 14
43 45 47 55 57 1 58 1 60 1 61 1 69 69a
Back-up washer for gland lipseal 41 O-ring gland/head O-ring cylinder body Locking pin piston/rod Piston rod double (stronger 2) rod, no cushion Piston rod double (stronger 2) rod, cushion one end Piston rod double (weaker 2) rod, no cushion Piston rod double (weaker 2) rod, cushion one end O-ring needle valve and check valve screws O-ring cartridge-type needle valve 44
40
45
Gland Cartridge and Seals

Parker Hannin Ltd. Cylinder Division Europe
Replacement Parts and Service Contents and Part Numbers of Seal Kits for Pistons and Glands
(see key to part numbers opposite)
Tie Rod Cylinders 2A Series Contents and Part Numbers of Service Assembly Kits
(see key to part numbers opposite) Head Assembly Non-cushioned: 1, 47 Cushioned: 1, 47, 69, (69a), 70, (70a), 71, 72 Cap Assembly Non-cushioned: Cushioned: Cylinder Body All types:
Gland Cartridge Service Kit

Contains items 14, 40, 41, 43, 45.
Gland Service Kit

Contains items 40, 41, 43, 45.
Piston Rod 12.7 (1/2") 15.9 (5/8") 25.4 (1") 34.9 (13/8") 44.5 (13/4") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 76.2 (3") 88.9 (31/2") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 139.7 (51/2") Gland Cartridge Service Kit, Standard Seals * RG2AHL051 RG2AHL061 RG2AHL101 RG2AHL131 RG2AHL171 RG2AHL201 RG2AHL251 RG2AHL301 RG2AHL351 RG2AHL401 RG2AHL501 RG2AHL551 Gland Service Kit, Standard Seals * RK2AHL051 RK2AHL061 RK2AHL101 RK2AHL131 RK2AHL171 RK2AHL201 RK2AHL251 RK2AHL301 RK2AHL351 RK2AHL401 RK2AHL501 RK2AHL551
7, 47 7, 47, 69, (69a), 70, (70a), 73, 74
15
Cushion Screw/Cartridge Assembly Screw type: 69, 70 Cartridge type: 69a, 70a Check Valve Screw Assembly Screw type: 69, 71, 72 Piston Rod Assemblies These kits contain a fully assembled piston and rod assembly which is ready to install. They comprise a piston assembly, plus a rod assembly from the types listed below. Piston Assemblies Lipseal: Rod Assemblies Single rod, non-cushioned: Single rod, cushioned head: Single rod, cushioned cap: Single rod, cushioned both ends: Double rod, non-cushioned: Double rod, cushioned stronger end: Double rod, cushioned weaker end: Double rod, cushioned both ends:
Piston Service Kit, Lipseal Piston

Contains two each of items 42 and 47.
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6") 203.2 (8") 254.0 (10") 304.8 (12") 355.6 (14") Piston Service Kit, Lipseal Piston * PK1002A001 PK1502A001 PK2002A001 PK2502A001 PK3202A001 PK4002A001 PK5002A001 PK6002A001 PK8002A001 PK9002A001 PK9202A001 PK9402A001
17, 42, 44
34 35, 18 36 37, 18 57, 60, 58, 60, 18 58, 61, 18 58, 61, 18 x 2
Repairs
Although 2A cylinders are designed to make on-site maintenance or repairs as easy as possible, some operations can only be carried out in our factory. It is standard policy to fit a cylinder returned to the factory for repair with those replacement parts which are necessary to return it to as good as new condition. Should the condition of the returned cylinder be such that repair would be uneconomical, you will be notified.
* Seal Groups Ordering

The part numbers shown in the tables above are for Group 1 seals. For Group 5 seals, substitute a 5 for the 1 at the end of the number sequence. For example, a Group 5 RG gland cartridge kit for a 50.8mm bore cylinder will be RG2AHL205.
Non-Lubricated Service Kits

Service kits for 2AN Series non-lubricated air cylinders are shown on page 35.
Service Kits
Group 1 Service Kits contain seals of Nitrile (Buna-N) elastomers. Group 5 Service Kits contain seals of fluorocarbon elastomers. For further information on seals please refer to page 5.
Parker Lube-A-Cyl Air Cylinder Lubricant

Lube-A-Cyl is intended as a supplement to normal lubrication methods, and is recommended for use during reassembly of air cylinders after servicing. It also helps to prevent damage to static and dynamic seals. This multi-purpose lubricant is available in 110g (4 oz) tubes, part no. 76163.
Tie Rod Torques

45
Storage Information and Masses Storage

When cylinders must be stored for a period of time, the following procedures are recommended: 1. Store the cylinders in an indoor area which has a dry, clean and non-corrosive atmosphere. Take care to protect the cylinder from both internal corrosion and external damage. 2. Whenever possible, cylinders should be stored in a vertical position (piston rod up). This will minimize corrosion due to possible condensation which could occur inside the cylinder, and seal set due to the weight of the piston and rod assembly. 3. Port protector plugs should be left in the cylinder until the time of installation. 4. For long duration storage add a vapour phase inhibitor to both sides of the piston to prevent internal corrosion.

Single Rod Cylinders Double Rod Cylinders Mass at Zero Stroke Mass at Zero Stroke Mass Mass Mounting Styes Mounting Styles per per
TB, TC, C, G, BB, 10mm TD, J, JB, BC, D, Stroke TB, TD, J, JB, F (kg) H, HB, F DB, DD (kg)
(kg) (kg)
Bore Rod No.
C, G, D, DD
(kg)
10mm Stroke
(kg)
25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2")
1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 1 3 4 5 7 8
1.2 1.2 1.9 2.2 3.0 3.6 3.2 4.4 5.5 4.5 4.9 8.3 9.6 8.6 9.1 11.9 14.6 12.2 12.7 13.2 18.5 24.6 18.8 19.3 19.7 21.2 22.9 30.0 38.0 29.9 31.0 32.0 34.0 35.0 52 72 52 53 54 56 57 60 67 96 97 98 100 102 104 112 117 146 147 149 151 154 161 166 228 230 231 234 242 246
1.3 1.4 2.2 2.6 3.4 4.3 3.5 4.6 6.7 4.9 5.6 9.0 11.5 9.6 10.6 12.5 17.9 13.2 14.2 15.0 19.5 32.0 20.0 21.1 22.0 24.9 28.3 33 48 32 35 38 41 44 57 98 58 59 61 65 68 73 88 108 109 111 114 118 123 138 148 161 163 166 170 176 191 200 250 253 256 262 277 286
0.04 0.04 0.05 0.08 0.07 0.13 0.09 0.08 0.18 0.10 0.14 0.12 0.24 0.16 0.20 0.14 0.34 0.17 0.22 0.26 0.17 0.61 0.21 0.25 0.29 0.38 0.49 0.23 0.79 0.28 0.32 0.40 0.51 0.64 0.43 1.60 0.47 0.51 0.60 0.71 0.84 1.00 1.40 0.57 0.61 0.69 0.80 0.93 1.10 1.50 1.70 0.68 0.76 0.87 1.00 1.20 1.50 1.70 0.87 0.98 1.10 1.30 1.60 1.80
1.5 1.6 2.4 2.9 3.7 4.8 4.0 5.4 7.6 5.7 6.4 10.5 13.0 11.0 12.1 15.0 21.0 15.6 16.6 17.5 23 36 24 25 26 29 32 37 54 38 39 42 45 48 64 105 65 66 68 72 75 80 95 112 113 115 119 122 128 142 152 168 171 174 178 183 198 208 266 269 272 278 292 302
1.7 1.9 2.9 3.7 4.4 6.2 4.8 5.9 10.1 6.5 7.8 11.8 16.8 12.9 15.0 16.3 28.0 17.5 19.5 21.3 25 50 27 29 31 36 43 44 73 42 48 54 60 66 74 156 76 78 83 90 96 107 137 124 125 128 133 138 147 168 183 183 187 191 197 205 228 242 288 292 297 306 327 342
0.05 0.06 0.07 0.12 0.08 0.20 0.13 0.09 0.30 0.14 0.21 0.16 0.40 0.23 0.32 0.18 0.59 0.25 0.34 0.41 0.21 1.10 0.28 0.37 0.45 0.62 0.84 0.31 1.50 0.40 0.47 0.65 0.87 1.20 0.50 2.80 0.60 0.67 0.85 1.10 1.40 1.60 2.40 0.70 0.76 0.94 1.20 1.40 1.70 2.40 2.80 0.83 1.00 1.30 1.50 1.80 2.50 2.90 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.90 2.60 3.00
Installation
1. Cleanliness is an important consideration, and Parker cylinders are shipped with the ports plugged to protect them from contaminants entering the ports. These plugs should not be removed until the piping is to be installed. Before making the connection to the cylinder ports, piping should be thoroughly cleaned to remove all chips or burrs which might have resulted from threading or flaring operations. 2. Cylinders operating in an environment where air drying materials are present such as fast-drying chemicals, paint, or weld splatter, or other hazardous conditions such as excessive heat, should have shields installed to prevent damage to the piston rod and piston rod seals. 3. Correct alignment of the cylinder piston rod and its mating component on the machine should be checked in both the extended and retracted positions. Incorrect alignment will result in excessive rod gland and/or cylinder bore wear, shortening the life of the cylinder.
82.6 (31/4")
101.6 (4")
127.0 (5")
152.4 (6")
Warranty
Defective Work or Material Every effort is made to ensure sound material and good workmanship, but the Seller gives no warranty, expressed or implied, of material, workmanship, or fitness of goods for any particular purpose, whether such purpose be known to the Seller or not. In the event of any material or workmanship proving defective the Seller is prepared to rectify or replace such material at the place of delivery and in the condition originally specified, or if rectification or replacement is not practicable, will credit the value of the goods at the invoice price, if required in writing to do so, provided always that the claim is made and admitted and the material is returned within six months from date of invoice. The Sellers liability in respect of or consequent upon any such defect whether in original or replaced material or workmanship, is limited as aforesaid and does not extend in any circumstances to cover any other expenditure incurred nor any consequential damages or loss of profit.
203.2 (8")
254.0 (10")
304.8 (12")
Masses Series 2A Cylinders

To determine the mass of the cylinder, first select the basic mass for zero stroke from the table, then calculate the mass for the cylinder stroke and add the result to the basic mass. Masses for accessories are shown on pages 31 to 33.
All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise stated. 355.6 (14")
46
How to Order
C Bore Cushion Head Page 41 K Mounting Style Mounting Modifications Double Rod Series 2A Ports S

C Piston Rod End Piston Rod Thread Cushion Cap Page 41 Operating Temperature
Special Features
Piston Type
Piston Rod Number
Net Stroke (mm)
Port Positions
Code S S S S S
Special Features Page Oversize ports 42 Rod end bellows 43 Stop tube 39 Stroke limiter 43 Tie rod supports 36 or to customer specification
Code Operating Page Temp. M Group 1 5 D Group 5 5
Code eg : 4 eg : 4 Code L Piston Lipseal Page 5 Code M A
Port Position Page Head position 1-4 42 Cap position 1-4 42
Code R1 R2 G U B
Ports Page BSPP thread (R1 sizes) 42 BSPP thread (R2 sizes) 42 Metric 42 NPTF (dry seal pipe thread) 42 BSPT (taper thread) 42
Rod Thread Metric standard UNF optional
Page 20, 30 20, 30
Code 4 8 9 3
Rod End Style Style 4 Style 8 Style 9 Style 3 (non standard)
Page 20, 30 20, 30 20, 30 20, 30
Code P M R
Mounting Modifications Thrust key (styles C, F, G) Manifold port O-ring seal (style C only) Removable trunnions
Page 36 37 43 Code eg : 1 Rod Number Select from rod numbers 1-9, or 0 Page 20, 30
Code TB TC TD J JB H HB C F G BB BC D DB DD
Mounting Style Tie Rods Extended Head End Tie Rods Extended Cap End Tie Rods Extended Both Ends Head Rectangular Flange Head Square Flange Cap Rectangular Flange Cap Square Flange Side Lug Mounting Side Tapped Mounting Side End Lug Cap Fixed Clevis Cap Detachable Clevis Head Trunnion Cap Trunnion Intermediate Trunnion
Page 8, 22 8, 22 9, 23 10 10, 24 12 12, 24 14, 26 14, 26 15, 27 16, 25 17 18, 28 18, 28 19, 29
Key
Required for basic cylinder Indicate optional features or leave blank
Accessories
Please state on order whether accessories are to be assembled to cylinder or supplied separately.
Double Rod Cylinder example

38.1 C K J 2A R1 1 4 M 1 4 M C 127 D 11
47
Hydraulics Group Sales Ofces

Europe
Austria
Wiener Neustadt Tel: +43 (0)2622 23501 Fax: +43 (0)2622 66212
International
Italy
Corsico (MI) Tel: +39 02 45 19 21 Fax: +39 02 4 47 93 40
Australia
Castle Hill Tel: +61 (0)2-9634 7777 Fax: +61 (0)2-9842 5111
Austria
Wiener Neustadt (Resp for East Europe) Tel: +43 (0)2622 23501-970 Fax: +43 (0)2622 23501-977
The Netherlands
Oldenzaal Tel: +31 (0)541 585000 Fax: +31 (0)541 585459
Canada
Milton, Ontario Tel: +1 905-693-3000 Fax: +1 905-876-0788
Norway
Ski Tel: +47 64 91 10 00 Fax: +47 64 91 10 90
China
Shanghai Tel: +86 21 5031 2525 Fax: +86 21 5834 3714
Belgium
Nivelles Tel: +32 (0)67 280 900 Fax: +32 (0)67 280 999
Poland
Warsaw Tel: +48 (0)22 573 24 00 Fax: +48 (0)22 573 24 03
Asia Pacific Group

Hong Kong Tel: +852 2428 8008 Fax: +852 2425 6896
Czech Republic
Klecany Tel: +420 284 083 111 Fax: +420 284 083 112
Portugal
Leca da Palmeira Tel: +351 22 9997 360 Fax: +351 22 9961 527
India
Mumbai Tel: +91 22 5613 7081/82-85 Fax: +91 22 2768 6841/6618
Denmark
Ballerup Tel: +45 4356 0400 Fax: +45 4373 3107
Slovakia
Ref. Czech Republic
Japan
Tokyo Tel: +(81) 3 6408 3900 Fax: +(81) 3 5449 7201
Finland
Vantaa Tel: +358 20 753 2500 Fax: +358 20 753 2200
Spain
Madrid Tel: +34 91 675 73 00 Fax: +34 91 675 77 11
Latin America Group

Brazil Tel: +55 51 3470 9144 Fax: +55 51 3470 9281
France
Contamine-sur-Arve Tel: +33 (0)450 25 80 25 Fax: +33 (0)450 25 24 25
Sweden
Spnga Tel: +46 (0)8 597 950 00 Fax: +46 (0)8 597 951 10
South Africa
Kempton Park Tel: +27 (0)11-961 0700 Fax: +27 (0)11-392 7213
Germany
Kaarst Tel: +49 (0)2131 4016 0 Fax: +49 (0)2131 4016 9199
United Kingdom
Warwick Tel: +44 (0)1926 317 878 Fax: +44 (0)1926 317 855
USA
Cleveland (industrial) Tel: +1 216-896-3000 Fax: +1 216-896-4031 Lincolnshire (mobile) Tel: +1 847-821-1500 Fax: +1 847-821-7600
Ireland
Dublin Tel: +353 (0)1 293 9999 Fax: +353 (0)1 293 9900
Parker Hannifin is the worlds premier supplier of motion and control systems and solutions, with sales and manufacturing facilities throughout the world. For product information and details of your nearest Parker sales office, visit us at www.parker.com or call free on 00800 2727 5374.
Catalogue HY07-0910/UK 10/06 PC Copyright 2006 Parker Hannifin Corporation All rights reserved
3L Tie-Rod Cylinders
NFPA Hydraulic Cylinders for working pressures up to 70 bar
Tie Rod Cylinders 3L Series
Catalogue HY07-1130/UK May 2003
Parker Hannifin plc Cylinder Division Europe
Mounting Styles 3L Cylinder Mounting Styles

The standard range of Parker 3L cylinders comprises 15 mounting styles, to suit the majority of applications. General guidance for the selection of the cylinders is given below, with dimensional information about each mounting style shown on pages 10 - 21 for 25.4mm to 152.4mm (1 to 6) bore sizes, and pages 22 - 29 for 203.2mm (8) bore sizes.
Application-specific mounting information is shown on pages 34 - 35. Where a non-standard mounting style is required to satisfy a particular application, our design engineers will be happy to assist. Please contact the factory for details.
NFPA MX3
NFPA MX2
NFPA MX1
TB NFPA MF1
TC NFPA MF5
TD NFPA MF2
J NFPA MF6
JB NFPA MS2
H NFPA MS4
HB NFPA MS7
C NFPA MP1
F NFPA MP2
G NFPA MT1
BB NFPA MT2
BC NFPA MT4
DB
DD
K (KTB shown)
Most mounting styles are available as double rod cylinders
Piston Rod End Data Piston Rod End Details 25.4mm to 152.4mm (1 to 6) bore sizes only
Piston Rod End Data for 203.2mm (8) bore size cylinders is shown on page 46.

Rod End Style 4
A W V
Rod End Style 8

A W V

Style 4 rod ends are recommended for all applications in which the work piece is secured against the rod shoulder. Where the work piece is not shouldered, Style 8 rod ends are recommended. If a rod end style is not specified, Style 4 will be supplied.
B NA
KK D Wrench Flats
MM
B NA
CC D Wrench Flats
MM
Rod End Style 9

W V
Rod End Style 9

Rod End Style 3

Non-standard piston rod ends are designated 'Style 3'. A dimensional sketch or description should accompany the order. Please specify dimensions KK or CC, and A.
B NA KK D Wrench Flats A
MM
Rod End Dimensions 25.4mm to 152.4mm (1 to 6) bore sizes only

MM Bore Rod Rod No. Diameter 1 12.7 (1/2") 2 15.9 (5/8") 38.1 1 15.9 (5/8") (11/2") 2 25.4 (1") 1 15.9 (5/8") 50.8 2 34.9 (13/8") (2") 3 25.4 (1") 1 25.4 (1") 63.5 2 44.5 (13/4") (21/2") 3 34.9 (13/8") 7 15.9 (5/8") 1 25.4 (1") 82.6 2 50.8 (2") (31/4") 3 34.9 (13/8") 4 44.5 (13/4") 1 34.9 (13/8") 2 63.5 (21/2") 101.6 3 44.5 (13/4") (4") 4 50.8 (2") 7 25.4 (1") 1 44.5 (13/4") 2 88.9 (31/2") 3 50.8 (2") 127.0 4 63.5 (21/2") (5") 5 76.2 (3") 7 25.4 (1") 8 34.9 (13/8") 1 44.5 (13/4") 2 101.6 (4") 3 50.8 (2") 152.4 4 63.5 (21/2") (6") 5 76.2 (3") 6 88.9 (31/2") 7 34.9 (13/8") 25.4 (1")
Style 4 & 9 KK Metric M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M10x1.5 M20x1.5 M10x1.5 M26x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5 M33x2 M26x1.5 M10x1.5 M20x1.5 M39x2 M26x1.5 M33x2 M26x1.5 M48x2 M33x2 M39x2 M20x1.5 M33x2 M64x2 M39x2 M48x2 M58x2 M20x1.5 M26x1.5 M33x2 M76x2 M39x2 M48x2 M58x2 M64x2 M26x1.5
5 7
Style 8 CC Metric M10x1.5 M12x1.5 M12x1.5 M22x1.5 M12x1.5 M30x2 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 M39x2 M30x2 M12x1.5 M22x1.5 M45x2 M30x2 M39x2 M30x2 M56x2 M39x2 M45x2 M22x1.5 M39x2 M76x2 M45x2 M56x2 M68x2 M22x1.5 M30x2 M39x2 M95x2 M45x2 M56x2 M68x2 M76x2 M30x2
7
+0.00
KK UNF 1 /16 - 24 /16 - 20 7 /16 - 20 3 /4 - 16 7 /16 - 20 1 - 14 3 /4 - 16 3 /4 - 16 11/4 - 12 1 - 14 7 /16 - 20 3 /4 - 16 11/2 - 12 1 - 14 11/4 - 12 1 - 14 17/8 - 12 11/4 - 12 11/2 - 12 3 /4 - 16 11/4 - 12 21/2 - 12 11/2 - 12 17/8 - 12 21/4 - 12 3 /4 - 16 1 - 14 11/4 - 12 3 - 12 11/2 - 12 17/8 - 12 21/4 - 12 21/2 - 12 1 - 14
CC UNF 1 /16 - 20 /2 - 20 1 /2 - 20 7 /8 - 14 1 /2 - 20 11/4 - 12 7 /8 - 14 7 /8 - 14 11/2 - 12 11/4 - 12 1 /2 - 20 7 /8 - 14 13/4 - 12 11/4 - 12 11/2 - 12 11/4 - 12 21/4 - 12 11/2 - 12 13/4 - 12 7 /8 - 14 11/2 - 12 31/4 - 12 13/4 - 12 21/4 - 12 23/4 - 12 7 /8 - 14 11/4 - 12 11/2 - 12 33/4 - 12 13/4 - 12 21/4 - 12 23/4 - 12 31/4 - 12 11/4 - 12
1
A 15.9 19.0 19.0 28.6 19.0 41.3 28.5 28.5 50.8 41.3 19.0 28.5 57.1 41.3 50.8 41.3 76.2 50.8 57.1 28.5 50.8 88.9 57.1 76.2 88.9 28.5 41.3 50.8 101.6 57.1 76.2 88.9 88.9 41.3
B
-0.05
D 10 13 13 22 13 30 22 22 36 30 13 22 41 30 36 30 55 36 41 22 36 75 41 55 65 22 30 36 85 41 55 65 75 30
NA 11.1 14.3 14.3 22.6 14.3 32.2 22.6 22.6 41.6 32.2 14.3 22.6 48.0 32.2 41.6 32.2 60.3 41.6 48.0 22.6 41.6 85.7 48.0 60.3 73.0 22.6 32.2 41.6 98.4 48.0 60.3 73.0 85.7 32.2
V 6.4 6.4 6.4 12.7 6.4 15.9 12.7 12.7 19.1 15.9 6.4 6.4 12.7 9.5 12.7 9.5 15.9 12.7 12.7 6.4 12.7 15.9 12.7 15.9 15.9 6.4 9.5 9.5 12.7 9.5 12.7 12.7 12.7 6.4
W 15.9 15.9 15.9 25.4 15.9 31.8 25.4 25.4 38.1 31.8 15.9 19.1 34.9 25.4 31.8 25.4 41.3 31.8 34.9 19.1 31.8 41.3 34.9 41.3 41.3 19.1 25.4 28.6 38.1 31.8 38.1 38.1 38.1 22.2
25.37 28.55 28.55 38.07 28.55 50.77 38.07 38.07 60.30 50.77 28.55 38.07 66.65 50.77 60.30 50.77 79.35 60.30 66.65 38.07 60.30 107.92 66.65 79.35 95.22 38.07 50.77 60.30 120.62 66.65 79.35 95.22 107.92 50.77
All rod threads are UNF except 1 - 14 which is UNS.

Storage Information and Cylinder Masses Storage

When cylinders must be stored for a period of time, the following procedures are recommended: 1. Store the cylinders in an indoor area which has a dry, clean and non-corrosive atmosphere. Take care to protect the cylinder from both internal corrosion and external damage. 2. Whenever possible, cylinders should be stored in a vertical position (piston rod up). This will minimize corrosion due to possible condensation which could occur inside the cylinder, and seal set due to the weight of the piston and rod assembly. 3. Port protector plugs should be left in the cylinder until the time of installation. 4. For long duration storage add a vapour phase inhibitor to both sides of the piston to prevent internal corrosion.
Tie Rod Cylinders 3L Series Masses Series 3L Cylinders

To determine the mass of the cylinder, first select the basic mass for zero stroke, then calculate the mass for the cylinder stroke and add the result to the basic mass.
Single Rod Cylinders Mass at Zero Stroke Bore Rod No. Mounting Styles TB, TC, C, G, TD, J, JB, BB, BC, D, H, HB, F DB, DD (kg) (kg) 1.2 1.3 1.2 1.4 1.9 2.2 2.2 2.6 3.0 3.4 3.6 4.3 3.2 3.5 4.5 4.9 5.5 6.7 4.9 5.6 4.4 4.6 8.3 9.0 9.6 11.5 8.6 9.6 9.1 10.6 12.2 13.2 14.6 17.9 12.7 14.2 13.2 15.0 11.9 12.5 19.3 21.1 24.6 32.0 19.7 22.0 21.2 24.9 22.9 28.3 18.5 19.5 18.8 20.0 29.9 32 38 48 31 35 32 38 34 41 35 44 30 33 53 59 72 98 54 61 56 65 57 68 60 73 52 57 52 58 67 88 Double Rod Cylinders Mass at Zero Stroke Mass per 10mm stroke (kg) 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.12 0.08 0.20 0.13 0.14 0.30 0.21 0.09 0.16 0.40 0.23 0.32 0.25 0.59 0.34 0.41 0.18 0.37 1.10 0.45 0.62 0.84 0.21 0.28 0.40 1.50 0.47 0.65 0.87 1.20 0.31 0.67 2.80 0.85 1.10 1.40 1.60 0.50 0.60 2.40
Mass Mounting Styles per 10mm TB, TD, J, C, G, stroke JB, F D, DD (kg) (kg) (kg) 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.08 0.07 0.13 0.09 0.10 0.18 0.14 0.08 0.12 0.24 0.16 0.20 0.17 0.34 0.22 0.26 0.14 0.25 0.61 0.29 0.38 0.49 0.17 0.21 0.28 0.79 0.32 0.40 0.51 0.64 0.23 0.51 1.60 0.60 0.71 0.84 1.00 0.43 0.47 1.40 1.5 1.6 2.4 2.9 3.7 4.8 4.0 5.7 7.6 6.4 5.4 10.5 13.0 11.0 12.1 15.6 21.0 16.6 17.5 15.0 25 36 26 29 32 23 24 38 54 39 42 45 48 37 66 105 68 72 75 80 64 65 95 1.7 1.9 2.9 3.7 4.4 6.2 4.8 6.5 10.1 7.8 5.9 11.8 16.8 12.9 15.0 17.5 28.0 19.5 21.3 16.3 29 50 31 36 43 25 27 42 73 48 54 60 66 44 78 156 83 90 96 107 74 76 137
25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2")
Installation
1. Cleanliness is an important consideration, and Parker cylinders are shipped with the ports plugged to protect them from contaminants entering the ports. These plugs should not be removed until the piping is to be installed. Before making the connection to the cylinder ports, piping should be thoroughly cleaned to remove all chips or burrs which might have resulted from threading or flaring operations. 2. Cylinders operating in an environment where air drying materials are present such as fast-drying chemicals, paint, or weld splatter, or other hazardous conditions such as excessive heat, should have shields installed to prevent damage to the piston rod and piston rod seals. 3. Correct alignment of the cylinder piston rod and its mating component on the machine should be checked in both the extended and retracted positions. Incorrect alignment will result in excessive rod gland and/or cylinder bore wear, shortening the life of the cylinder.
63.5 (21/2")
82.6 (31/4")
101.6 (4")
Warranty
127.0 (5")
Defective Work or Material Every effort is made to ensure sound material and good workmanship, but the Seller gives no warranty, expressed or implied, of material, workmanship, or fitness of goods for any particular purpose, whether such purpose be known to the Seller or not. In the event of any material or workmanship proving defective the Seller is prepared to rectify or replace such material at the place of delivery and in the condition originally specified, or if rectification or replacement is not practicable, will credit the value of the goods at the invoice price, if required in writing to do so, provided always that the claim is made and admitted and the material is returned within six months from date of invoice. The Sellers liability in respect of or consequent upon any such defect whether in original or replaced material or workmanship, is limited as aforesaid and does not extend in any circumstances to cover any other expenditure incurred nor any consequential damages or loss of profit.
152.4 (6")
203.2 (8")
1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0
Masses for accessories are shown on pages 31 to 33.
Introduction Contents
Piston Rod End Data 25.4mm to 152.4mm (1 to 6) bore sizes Storage Information and Cylinder Mass Data Warranty Introduction Standard Specifications Design Features and Benefits Cylinder Selection Check List Mounting Styles Double Rod Cylinders Accessories Mounting Information Push and Pull Forces Piston Rod Sizes and Stop Tubes Stroke Factors and Long Stroke Cylinders Cushioning Pressure Limitations Ports, Locations and Piston Speeds Seals and Fluids Optional Features Replacement Parts and Service Repairs Piston Rod End Data 203.2mm (8) bore sizes How to Order Cylinders
Tie Rod Cylinders 3L Series Page

3 4 4 5 5 6 8 9 30 31 34 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Index
Accessories Air Bleeds Cushioning Cylinder Masses Cylinder Selection Check List Design Features Double Rod Cylinders Forces Push and Pull inPHorm Model Numbers Mounting Styles and Information Optional Features Ordering Instructions Piston Rod End Data Piston Rod Size Selection Piston and Seal Types Ports Standard and Oversize Pressure Ratings and Limitations Repairs Replacement Parts and Service Seals and Fluids Speed Limitations Standard Specifications Stop Tubes Storage and Installation Stroke Adjusters Stroke Factors Stroke Tolerances Thrust Keys Warranty
Page
31 - 33 7, 41, 43 39 4, 31 - 33 8 6-7 30 36 5 47 2, 9, 34 - 35 43 47 3, 46 37 7, 42 41 40 45 44 - 45 42 41 5 37 4 43 38 35 34 4
Introduction
Parker Hannifin Corporation is a world leader in the manufacture of components and systems for motion control. Parker has more than 800 product lines for hydraulic, pneumatic and electro-mechanical applications in some 1200 industrial and aerospace markets. With more than 45,000 employees and some 210 manufacturing plants and administrative offices around the world, Parker provides customers with technical excellence and first class customer service. Parker Hannifin's Cylinder Division is the world's largest supplier of hydraulic cylinders for industrial applications. The 3L cylinders described in this catalogue are 70 bar medium pressure cylinders, rated for use at working pressures up to 70 bar depending on the rod end and type of service. In addition to the standard cylinders featured in this catalogue, 3L cylinders can be designed to suit customer requirements. Our engineers will be pleased to advise on unique designs to suit specific applications.
inPHorm
European Cylinder inPHorm is Parker Hannifins new product selection program that helps you to select the correct part for an application. The program prompts for the details of the application, makes the necessary design calculations, and selects a suitable product. inPHorm can generate CAD drawings of the selected part, which can be viewed in other software applications, and customised and imported into other CAD packages. Please contact your local Sales Office for further information and ask for HY07-1260/Eur.
Visit us at www.parker.com/uk
l Medium-duty service ANSI B93.15-1987 and NFPA
specifications
l Piston rod diameters 12.7mm (1/2) to 139.7mm (51/2) l Mounting styles 15 standard styles l Strokes available in any practical stroke length l Cushions optional at either end or both ends of stroke l Rod ends three standard choices specials to order l Tested in accordance with ISO 10100:2001
l Standard construction square end, 4 tie rod design l Standard pressure to 70 bar (1000 psi) dependent on
bore size
l Standard fluid hydraulic mineral oil l Standard temperature -20C to +80C (-4F to +176F) l Bore sizes 25.4mm (1) to 203.2mm (8) 5

3 5 2

8 6
7&8
7 9
1 Piston Rod
Gland seal life is maximised by manufacturing piston rods from precision ground, high tensile carbon alloy steel, hard chrome plated and polished to 0.2m max. Piston rods are induction case hardened to Rockwell C54 minimum before chrome plating, resulting in a dent-resistant surface.
service life of up to five times that of traditional seal materials. Standard seals are suitable for speeds of up to 0.5m/s special seal combinations including PTFE are available for higher speed applications.
2 Parker's Rod Gland

Continuous lubrication, and therefore longer gland life, are provided by the long bearing surface inboard of the lipseal. The gland, complete with rod seals, can easily be removed without dismantling the cylinder, so servicing is quicker and therefore more economical.
4 Cylinder Body
Strict quality control standards and precision manufacture ensure that all tubes meet rigid standards of straightness, roundness and surface finish. The steel tubing is surface finished to minimise internal friction and prolong seal life.
5 Cylinder Body Seals

To ensure that the cylinder body remains leak free, even under pressure shock conditions, Parker fits pressure-energised body seals.
3 Rod Seals
The serrated lipseal has a series of sealing edges which take over successively as pressure increases, providing efficient sealing under all operating conditions. On the return stroke the serrations act as a check valve, allowing the oil adhering to the rod to pass back into the cylinder.
6 Piston
Wear-resistant cast iron piston rings are fitted as standard to 3L cylinders. Lipseal pistons are available to suit different applications see Piston Seals opposite. All pistons are of one-piece type, and feature wide bearing surfaces to resist side loading. Long thread engagement secures the piston to the piston rod and, for additional safety, the piston is secured by thread-locking adhesive and a locking pin.
7 Cushioning
Deceleration of a load attached to the piston rod is achieved by using built-in cushions at either or both ends of the cylinder see page 39 for details. At the head end a cushion sleeve is fitted, while the polished cap end spear is an integral part of the piston rod.
8 Floating Cushion Bushes & Sleeves

Closer tolerances and therefore more effective cushioning are permitted by the use of a floating cushion sleeve at the head end of the cylinder, and a floating cushion bush at the cap end. A specially designed cushion sleeve on bore sizes up to 101.6mm (4) operates as a check valve. On larger bore sizes a conventional ball check valve is used. The use of a check valve in the head and lifting of the bronze cushion bush in the cap, provides minimum fluid flow restriction at the start of the return stroke. This allows full pressure to be applied over the whole area of the piston, to provide full power and fast cycle times.
The double lip wiperseal acts as a secondary seal, trapping excess lubricating film in the chamber between the wiper and lip seals. Its outer lip prevents the ingress of dirt into the cylinder, extending the life of gland and seals. Standard lipseals are manufactured from an enhanced polyurethane, giving efficient retention of pressurized fluid and a
Features and Benefits 9 Cushion Adjustment

Needle valves are provided at both ends of the cylinder for precise cushion adjustment, and retained within the head and cap so that they cannot be inadvertently removed. The cartridge type needle valve illustrated below is fitted to cylinders of up to 63.5mm (21/2) bore see page 41.
Tie Rod Cylinders 3L Series Piston Seals

A variety of piston seal options is available, to suit different applications. The seal option should be specified at the time of order as a seal type cannot be changed unless the piston is also changed. Cast Iron Piston Rings are extremely durable but allow some leakage across the piston and cannot therefore hold a load in position. Piston rings are fitted as standard on series 3L hydraulic cylinders. Lipseal Pistons can hold a load in position, but they are not as durable as piston rings. Lipseal pistons are optional on series 3L hydraulic cylinders.
Air Bleeds
Available as an option at both ends, the air bleeds are recessed into the head and cap and retained so that they cannot be inadvertently removed see pages 41 and 43.
Seal Groups
To accommodate the many types of fluid and the varying temperature ranges used in industry, Parker offers a range of rod gland, piston and body seals moulded in different profiles and from different materials. These are described in detail on page 42.
Special Designs
Parker's design and engineering staff are available to produce special designs to meet customer's specific requirements. Alternative sealing arrangements, special mounting styles, different bores and rod sizes are just a few of the custom features which can be supplied.

The following check list indicates the principal factors which should be considered when selecting a hydraulic cylinder for a particular application. Further information is available on the pages shown. If more detailed information is required about any aspect of a cylinders specification, please contact our design engineers who will be happy to assist.
Tie Rod Cylinders 3L Series inPHorm

The European cylinder inPHorm program can assist with the selection and specification of an hydraulic cylinder for a particular application. Please ask for HY07-1260/Eur.
Weight to be moved and force required Nominal operating pressure and range Distance to be travelled Average and maximum piston speed Fluid medium and temperature
Single or double rod? Determine the minimum rod diameter required to withstand buckling forces Is a stop tube required? Select a suitable rod end and rod end thread Check pressure rating of selected cylinder and piston rod
Does seal type suit application?
Select suitable ports Are they capable of the speed required? Are the standard positions acceptable?
Select seals to suit the chosen fluid medium and temperature range
Are rod end and/or cap end accessories required?
Air bleeds, rod end bellows etc.
10 Optional Features
Seals
Ports
Cushioning
Piston
Piston Rod
Cylinder Bore and Operating Pressure
Mounting Style
Establish System Parameters
Series 3L
Page 9
Pages 36, 40
Pages 3, 30, 37, 40, 46
Page 7
Page 39
Page 41
Pages 7, 42
Pages 31-33
Page 43
Mounting Styles Cylinder Mounting Styles

The standard range of Parker 3L cylinders comprises 15 mounting styles, to suit the majority of applications. General guidance for the selection of cylinders is given below, with dimensional information about each mounting style shown on the pages indicated. Application-specific mounting information is shown on pages 34 and 35. Where a non-standard mounting style is required to satisfy a particular application, our design engineers will be happy to assist. Please contact the factory for details.
Extended Tie Rods

Cylinders with TB, TC and TD mountings are suitable for straight line force transfer applications, and are particularly useful where space is limited. For compression (push) applications, cap end tie rod mountings are most appropriate; where the major load places the piston rod in tension (pull applications), head end mounting styles should be specified. Cylinders with tie rods extended at both ends may be attached to the machine member from either end, allowing the free end of the cylinder to support a bracket or switch.
Styles TB, TC, TD

See pages 10-11, 22-23
TB

Flange mounted cylinders are also suitable for use on straight line force transfer applications. Four flange mounting styles are available: head rectangular flange (J), head square flange (JB), cap rectangular flange (H), and cap square flange (HB). Selection of the correct flange mounting style depends on whether the major force applied to the load will result in compression (push) or tension (pull) stresses on the piston rod.
Styles J, JB, H, HB
See pages 12-15, 24

Foot mounted cylinders do not absorb force on their centreline. As a result, the application of force by the cylinder produces a turning moment which attempts to rotate the cylinder about its mounting bolts. It is important, therefore, that the cylinder should be firmly secured to the mounting surface and that the load should be effectively guided, to avoid side loads being applied to rod gland and piston bearings. A thrust key modification may be specified to provide positive cylinder location see page 34.
Styles C, F, G
See pages 16-17, 26-27
Pivot Mountings
Cylinders with pivot mountings, which absorb forces on their centrelines, should be used where the machine member to be moved travels in a curved path. Pivot mountings may be used for tension (pull) or compression (push) applications. Two pivot mounting styles are available: cap fixed clevis (BB), and cap detachable clevis (BC). These styles may be used if the curved path of the piston rod travel is in a single plane, and perpendicular to the cylinder pivot axis (one degree of freedom).

These cylinders are designed to absorb force on their centrelines. They are suitable for tension (pull) or compression (push) applications, and may be used where the machine member to be moved travels in a curved path in a single plane. Trunnion mounted cylinders are available in head trunnion (D), cap trunnion (DB), and intermediate fixed trunnion (DD). Trunnion pins are designed for shear loads only and should be subjected to minimum bending stresses.
Styles BB, BC
See pages 18-19, 25
BB
Styles D, DB, DD
See pages 20-21, 28-29
DB
Tie Rod Mountings 25.4 to 152.4mm bore

Y

ZB + stroke P + stroke EE E
1
AA
E DD
Style TB
BB F
G LB + stroke
See Notes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
ZB + stroke ZJ + stroke P + stroke EE E

1
AA
Style TC
F K G LB + stroke J BB
DD
3
See Notes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Dimensions TB, TC & TD See also Dimensions, page 3 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 AA 38.9 51.3 BB 19.1 25.4 DD
2
E 38.1
5
EE
(BSPP)
F 9.5 9.5
G 38.1 38.1
10-24
1
G1/4 G3/8
6.4 3.2 2.4 2.4 -
/4 - 28
50.8 5
66.2
28.6
/16 - 24
63.5 5
G3/8
9.5
38.1
63.5 (21/2")
78.5
28.6
/16 - 24
76.2 5
G3/8
9.5
38.1
82.6 (31/4")
99.1
34.9
/8 - 24
95.2
G 1/ 2
15.9
44.5
101.6 (4")
119.4
34.9
/8 - 24
114.3
G 1/ 2
15.9
44.5
127.0 (5")
147.2
46.0
/2 - 20
139.7
G1/2
15.9
44.5
152.4 (6")
175.4
46.0
/2 - 20
165.1
G3/4
19.1
50.8
10
Tie Rod Mountings 25.4 to 152.4mm bore

1
AA
E DD F BB G LB + stroke J BB DD
Style TD
See Notes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Notes
1 2 3 4 5 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings see page 40. All tie rod threads (dimension DD) are UNF, with the exception of 25.4mm (1) bore which is UNC. Mounting nuts should be tightened to the torque values shown for tie rod nuts see page 35. For Styles TB and TC an additional set of mounting nuts are supplied. For Style TD, two additional sets of mounting nuts are supplied. The extra height H of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and rod sizes shown in the table below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2) bore cylinders only. R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 3L cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, see page 41.
E H

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J 25.4 25.4 K 5.0 6.4 R 27.4 36.3 Y 49 49 49 58 49 65 58 58 71 65 49 58 74 65 71 65 81 71 74 58 71 81 74 81 81 58 65 74 84 78 84 84 84 68 + Stroke LB 98.4 101.6 P 54 58 ZB max. 119.3 119.3 123.8 133.4 125.8 141.7 135.3 138.4 151.2 144.9 129.0 152.9 168.8 159.3 165.6 159.3 175.1 165.6 168.8 152.9 174.9 184.0 178.1 184.5 184.5 162.2 168.6 187.6 197.2 191.8 197.2 197.2 197.2 181.3 ZJ 114.3 114.3 117.4 127.0 118.3 134.2 127.8 130.9 147.3 137.4 121.5 142.9 158.8 148.3 155.6 149.3 165.1 155.6 158.8 142.9 161.9 171.0 165.1 171.5 171.5 149.2 155.6 174.6 184.2 178.8 184.2 184.2 184.2 168.3
25.4
7.5
46.7
101.6
58
63.5 (21/2")
25.4
7.5
55.6
104.8
61
82.6 (31/4")
31.8
10.0
70.1
123.8
70
101.6 (4")
31.8
10.0
84.3
123.8
70
127.0 (5")
31.8
13.0
104.1
130.2
77
152.4 (6")
38.1
13.0
123.9
146.1
83
11
Head Flange Mounts 25.4 to 152.4mm bore

Y W

ZB + stroke P + stroke EE UF E
1
Style J
Head Rectangular Flange (NFPA Style MF1)
F G LB + stroke J K
FB (x4)
TF
See Notes 1, 2, 3
Y W
UF E
1
EE
UF E
R TF
Style JB
Head Square Flange (NFPA Style MF5)
F G LB + stroke J K
R TF
FB (x8)
See Notes 1, 2, 3
Dimensions J & JB See also Dimensions, page 3 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 E 38.1 50.8
2
EE 3
(BSPP)
F 9.5 9.5
FB 6.4 7.9
G 38.1 38.1
J 25.4 25.4
K 5.0 6.4
G1/4 G3/8
6.4 3.2 2.4 2.4 -
63.5
G3/8
9.5
9.5
38.1
25.4
7.5
63.5 (21/2")
76.2
G3/8
9.5
9.5
38.1
25.4
7.5
82.6 (31/4")
95.2
G1/2
15.9
11.1
44.5
31.8
10.0
101.6 (4")
114.3
G1/2
15.9
11.1
44.5
31.8
10.0
127.0 (5")
139.7
G1/2
15.9
14.2
44.5
31.8
13.0
152.4 (6")
165.1
G3/4
19.1
14.2
50.8
38.1
13.0
12
Head Flange Mounts 25.4 to 152.4mm bore
Notes
1 2 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings see page 40. The extra height H of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and rod sizes shown in the table below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2) bore cylinders only. R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 3L cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, see page 41.
Dimensions J & JB Continued

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 R 27.4 36.3 TF 50.8 69.8 UF 63.5 85.7 W 15.9 15.9 15.9 25.4 15.9 31.8 25.4 25.4 38.1 31.8 15.9 19.1 34.9 25.4 31.8 25.4 41.3 31.8 34.9 19.1 31.8 41.3 34.9 41.3 41.3 19.1 25.4 28.6 38.1 31.8 38.1 38.1 38.1 22.2 Y 49 49 49 58 49 65 58 58 71 65 49 58 74 65 71 65 81 71 74 58 71 81 74 81 81 58 65 74 84 78 84 84 84 68 + Stroke LB 98.4 101.6 P 54 58 ZB max. 119.3 119.3 123.8 133.4 125.8 141.7 135.3 138.4 151.2 144.9 129.0 152.9 168.8 159.3 165.6 159.3 175.1 165.6 168.8 152.9 174.9 184.0 178.1 184.5 184.5 162.2 168.6 187.6 197.2 191.8 197.2 197.2 197.2 181.3
46.7
85.7
104.7
101.6
58
63.5 (21/2")
55.6
98.4
117.4
104.8
61
82.6 (31/4")
70.1
119.0
139.7
123.8
70
101.6 (4")
84.3
138.1
158.7
123.8
70
127.0 (5")
104.1
168.2
193.7
130.2
77
152.4 (6")
123.9
193.7
219.1
146.1
83
13
Cap Flange Mounts 25.4 to 152.4mm bore

UF E
1

Y K ZF + stroke P + stroke EE
Style H
Cap Rectangular Flange (NFPA Style MF2)
FB (x4)
TF
F G LB + stroke XF + stroke J F
See Notes 1, 2, 3
UF
1
E Y K
ZF + stroke P + stroke EE
E UF
2 4
R TF
Style HB
Cap Square Flange (NFPA Style MF6)
F
3
FB (x8)
R TF
G LB + stroke XF + stroke
See Notes 1, 2, 3
Dimensions H & HB See also Dimensions, page 3 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 E 38.1 50.8
2
EE
(BSPP)
F 9.5 9.5
FB 6.4 7.9
G 38.1 38.1
J 25.4 25.4
K 5.0 6.4
G1/4 G3/8
6.4 3.2 2.4 2.4 -
63.5
G3/8
9.5
9.5
38.1
25.4
7.5
63.5 (21/2")
76.2
G3/8
9.5
9.5
38.1
25.4
7.5
82.6 (31/4")
95.2
G1/2
15.9
11.1
44.5
31.8
10.0
101.6 (4")
114.3
G1/2
15.9
11.1
44.5
31.8
10.0
127.0 (5")
139.7
G1/2
15.9
14.2
44.5
31.8
13.0
152.4 (6")
165.1
G3/4
19.1
14.2
50.8
38.1
13.0
14
Cap Flange Mounts 25.4 to 152.4mm bore
Notes
1 2 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings see page 40. The extra height H of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and rod sizes shown in the table below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2) bore cylinders only. R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 3L cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, see page 41.
Dimensions H & HB Continued

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 R 27.4 36.3 TF 50.8 69.8 UF 63.5 85.7 Y 49 49 49 58 49 65 58 58 71 65 49 58 74 65 71 65 81 71 74 58 71 81 74 81 81 58 65 74 84 78 84 84 84 68 + Stroke LB 98.4 101.6 P 54 58 XF 114.3 114.3 117.5 127.0 117.5 133.4 127.0 130.2 142.9 136.5 120.7 142.9 158.8 149.2 155.6 149.2 165.1 155.6 158.8 142.9 161.9 171.5 165.1 171.5 171.5 149.2 155.6 174.6 184.2 177.8 184.2 184.2 184.2 168.3 ZF 123.8 123.8 127.0 136.5 127.0 142.9 136.5 139.7 152.4 146.1 130.2 158.8 174.6 165.1 171.5 165.1 181.0 171.5 174.6 158.8 177.8 187.3 181.0 187.3 187.3 165.1 171.5 193.7 203.2 196.9 203.2 203.2 203.2 187.3
46.7
85.7
104.7
101.6
58
63.5 (21/2")
55.6
98.4
117.4
104.8
61
82.6 (31/4")
70.1
119.0
139.7
123.8
70
101.6 (4")
84.3
138.1
158.7
123.8
70
127.0 (5")
104.1
168.2
193.7
130.2
77
152.4 (6")
123.9
193.7
219.1
146.1
83
15
Foot Mountings 25.4 to 152.4mm bore

See Notes 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8
Y ZB + stroke P + stroke LB + stroke EE
E ST
SB (x4) E/2
-0.15 -0.20
Style C
F XS G SS + stroke J K
E SW US TS SW
ZB + stroke P + stroke LB + stroke EE E

1
See Notes 1, 2, 3, 7, 8
E/2
-0.15 -0.20
Style F
F XT G SN + stroke J K
TN
NT thread, ND deep (4 mounting holes)
Dimensions C, F & G See also Dimensions, page 3 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 E 38.1 7 50.8
7
EB 9.0
EE
(BSPP)
EL 19.1
EO 6.4
ES 14
ET 14.3
F 9.5 9.5
G 38.1 38.1
J 25.4 25.4
K 5.0 6.4
ND 6.4 6.4 9.5 4.8 9.5 9.5 9.5 12.7 11.1 12.7 12.7 19.1 12.7 19.1 19.1 19.1 15.9 19.1 19.1 19.1 23.8 19.1 23.8 23.8 23.8 23.8 23.8 28.6 22.2 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6
NT 3 M5 M6
R 36.3
SB 4 6.6 11.0
G1/4 G 3/ 8
6.4 3.2 2.4 2.4 -
63.5
9.5
G 3/ 8
23.8
7.9
16
19.1
9.5
38.1
25.4
7.5
M8
46.7
11.0
63.5 (21/2")
76.2
9.5
G 3/ 8
27.0
7.9
20
22.2
9.5
38.1
25.4
7.5
M10
55.6
11.0
82.6 (31/4")
95.2
11.1
G 1/ 2
22.2
9.5
25
25.4
15.9
44.5
31.8
10.0
M12
70.1
14.0
101.6 (4")
114.3
11.1
G 1/ 2
25.4
9.5
32
31.8
15.9
44.5
31.8
10.0
M12
84.3
14.0
127.0 (5")
139.7
14.2
G 1/ 2
27.0
12.7
35
38.1
15.9
44.5
31.8
13.0
M16
104.1
22.0
152.4 (6")
165.1
14.2
G 3/ 4
25.4
12.7
45
41.3
19.1
50.8
38.1
13.0
M20
123.9
22.0
16
Foot Mountings 25.4 to 152.4mm bore

ZE + stroke XE + stroke P + stroke LB + stroke EE
See Notes 1, 2, 5, 7, 8
E K
1
E/2
-0.15 -0.20
Style G
EO EL
G SE + stroke
J EL EO ES
R ES
0.2 - 0.4
ET
EB (x4)
Notes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings see page 40. Consider the use of a thrust key with this mounting see page 34. Tapped mounting holes are metric (coarse pitch series). Upper surfaces of lugs are machined for socket head screws. Not available in 25.4mm (1) bore sizes. Style C cylinders can be supplied with the cylinder ports arranged for mounting and sealing to a manifold surface see page 35. The extra height H of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and rod sizes shown in the table below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2) bore cylinders only. R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 3L cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, see page 41.
E H

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 7.9 12.7 SW 7.9 9.5 TN 13.5 15.5 TS 54.0 70.0 US 69.9 88.9 XS 33.3 33.3 34.9 44.5 34.9 50.8 44.5 44.5 57.2 50.8 34.9 47.6 63.5 54.0 60.3 54.0 69.8 60.3 63.5 47.6 65.1 74.6 68.3 74.6 74.6 52.4 58.7 65.1 74.6 68.3 74.6 74.6 74.6 58.6 XT 49.2 49.2 49.2 58.7 49.2 65.1 58.7 58.7 71.4 65.1 49.2 61.9 77.8 68.3 74.6 68.3 84.1 74.6 77.8 61.9 74.6 84.1 77.8 84.1 84.1 61.9 68.3 77.8 87.3 81.0 87.3 87.3 87.3 71.4 Y 49 49 49 58 49 65 58 58 71 65 49 58 74 65 71 65 81 71 74 58 71 81 74 81 81 58 65 74 84 78 84 84 84 68 + Stroke LB 98.4 101.6 P 54 58 SE 139.7 SN 54.0 57.2 SS 73.0 73.0 XE ZB max. 119.3 119.3 136.5 123.8 146.1 133.4 141.3 125.8 157.2 141.7 150.8 135.3 157.2 138.4 170.0 151.2 163.5 144.9 147.6 129.0 165.1 152.9 181.0 168.8 171.5 159.3 177.8 165.6 174.6 159.3 190.5 175.1 181.0 165.6 184.2 168.8 168.3 152.9 188.9 174.9 198.4 184.0 192.1 178.1 198.4 184.5 198.4 184.5 176.2 162.2 182.6 168.6 200.0 187.6 209.6 197.2 203.2 191.8 209.6 197.2 209.6 197.2 209.6 197.2 193.7 181.3 ZE 142.9 152.4 149.2 165.1 158.8 165.1 177.8 171.5 155.6 174.6 190.5 181.0 187.3 184.2 200.0 190.5 193.7 177.8 201.6 211.1 204.8 211.1 211.1 188.9 195.3 212.7 222.3 215.9 222.3 222.3 222.3 206.4
12.7
9.5
22.0
82.6
101.6
101.6
58
149.2
57.2
73.0
63.5 (21/2")
12.7
9.5
31.0
95.3
114.3
104.8
61
158.8
60.3
76.2
82.6 (31/4")
19.1
12.7
38.0
120.7
146.1
123.8
70
168.3
66.7
82.6
101.6 (4")
19.1
12.7
52.0
139.7
165.1
123.8
70
174.6
66.7
82.6
127.0 (5")
25.4
17.5
66.0
174.6
209.5
130.2
77
184.2
73.0
79.4
152.4 (6")
25.4
17.5
80.0
200.0
235.0
146.1
83
196.9
79.4
92.1
17
Pivot Mountings 25.4 to 152.4mm bore

Y
1
ZC + stroke P + stroke EE CD
Style BB 38.1 to 152.4mm bore sizes

Cap Fixed Clevis (NFPA Style MP1)
MR LR
3
CW
CB
CW
G F XC + stroke
Y
1
ZD + stroke P + stroke EE CD
MR LR
3
Style BC
Cap Detachable Clevis (NFPA Style MP2)
CW
CB
CW
G F LB + stroke XD + stroke
J F L
See Notes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Dimensions BB & BC See also Dimensions, page 3 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
+0.00
CB 19.9
CD
-0.05
CW 12.7
E 38.1
5
EE 6
(BSPP)
EW 11.1 -
F 9.5 9.5
G 38.1 38.1
H5 6.4 3.2 2.4 2.4 -
J 25.4 25.4
K 5.0 6.4
11.20 12.73
G1/4 G3/8
50.8 5
19.9
12.73
12.7
63.5
G3/8
9.5
38.1
25.4
7.5
63.5 (21/2")
19.9
12.73
12.7
76.2
G3/8
9.5
38.1
25.4
7.5
82.6 (31/4")
32.6
19.08
15.8
95.2
G 1 /2
15.9
44.5
31.8
10.0
101.6 (4")
32.6
19.08
15.8
114.3
G1/2
15.9
44.5
31.8
10.0
127.0 (5")
32.6
19.08
15.8
139.7
G1/2
15.9
44.5
31.8
13.0
152.4 (6")
38.9
25.43
19.1
165.1
G3/4
19.1
50.8
38.1
13.0
18
Pivot Mountings 25.4 to 152.4mm bore

Y
1
ZC + stroke P + stroke K EE CD
Style BB 1 bore only

MR
3
LR G F XC + stroke J L
EW
See Notes 3, 6
Notes
1 2 3 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings see page 40. Supplied complete with pivot pin. Dimension CD is the pivot pin diameter except for 25.4mm (1) bore. On 25.4mm (1) bore size styles BB and BC a single eye clevis mounting lug 11.1mm thick is fitted. Dimension CD is the crosshole diameter the pivot pin is not included. Cylinders with long strokes being used in thrust (push) applications are limited by piston rod column strength. See piston selection chart on page 37. The extra height H of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and rod sizes shown in the table below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2) bore cylinders only. R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 3L cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, see page 41.
E H
4 5
Dimensions BB & BC Continued

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 L 12.7 19.1 LR 12.7 14.3 MR 12.7 15.9 Y 49 49 49 58 49 65 58 58 71 65 49 58 74 65 71 65 81 71 74 58 71 81 74 81 81 58 65 74 84 78 84 84 84 68 + Stroke LB 98.4 101.6 P 54 58 XC 127.0 127.0 136.5 146.1 136.5 152.4 146.1 149.2 161.9 155.6 139.7 174.6 190.5 181.0 187.3 181.0 196.9 187.3 190.5 174.6 193.7 203.2 196.9 203.2 203.2 181.0 187.3 212.7 222.3 215.9 222.3 222.3 222.3 206.4 XD 136.5 136.5 146.1 155.6 146.1 161.9 155.6 158.8 171.5 165.1 149.2 190.5 206.4 196.9 203.2 196.9 212.7 203.2 206.4 190.5 209.6 219.1 212.7 219.1 219.1 196.9 203.2 231.8 241.3 235.0 241.3 241.3 241.3 225.4 ZC 138.1 138.1 149.2 158.8 149.2 165.1 158.7 161.9 174.6 168.2 152.4 193.7 209.6 200.0 206.4 200.0 215.9 206.4 209.6 193.7 212.7 222.3 215.9 222.3 222.3 200.6 206.4 238.2 247.7 241.3 247.7 247.7 247.7 231.8 ZD 147.6 147.6 158.8 168.3 158.8 174.6 168.3 171.5 184.2 177.8 161.9 209.6 225.4 215.9 222.3 215.9 231.8 222.3 225.4 209.6 228.6 238.1 231.8 238.2 238.2 215.9 222.3 257.4 266.7 260.4 266.7 266.7 266.7 250.8
19.1
14.3
15.9
101.6
58
63.5 (21/2")
19.1
14.3
15.9
104.8
61
82.6 (31/4")
31.8
25.4
23.8
123.8
70
101.6 (4")
31.8
25.4
23.8
123.8
70
127.0 (5")
31.8
25.4
23.8
130.2
77
152.4 (6")
38.1
31.8
30.2
146.1
83
19
Trunnion Mountings 25.4 to 152.4mm bore

Y

ZB + stroke P + stroke LB + stroke EE UT
1 R3.2
TD
Style D
F XG G J K
TL
TL
See Notes 2, 5, 6
ZB + stroke P + stroke LB + stroke EE UT

1 R3.2
TD
Style DB
F G XJ + stroke J K
TL
TL
See Notes 2, 5, 6
Dimensions D, DB & DD See also Dimensions, page 3 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BD 31.7 E 38.1 50.8
5
EE 6
(BSPP)
+0.00
F 9.5 9.5
G 38.1 38.1
J 25.4 25.4
K 5.0 6.4
TD
-0.03
TL 19.1 25.4
TM 63.5
G1/4 G3/8
6.4 3.2 2.4 2.4 -
19.05 25.40
38.1
63.5
G3/8
9.5
38.1
25.4
7.5
25.40
25.4
76.2
63.5 (21/2")
38.1
76.2
G3/8
9.5
38.1
25.4
7.5
25.40
25.4
88.9
82.6 (31/4")
50.8
95.2
G1/2
15.9
44.5
31.8
10.0
25.40
25.4
114.3
101.6 (4")
50.8
114.3
G1/2
15.9
44.5
31.8
10.0
25.40
25.4
133.4
127.0 (5")
50.8
139.7
G1/2
15.9
44.5
31.8
13.0
25.40
25.4
158.8
152.4 (6")
63.5
165.1
G3/4
19.1
50.8
38.1
13.0
34.92
34.9
193.7
20
Trunnion Mountings 25.4 to 152.4mm bore

Y

ZB + stroke P + stroke LB + stroke EE BD
UM E
1 R3.2
E UV
4 2
TD
Style DD
F G XI J K TL
TM
TL
See Notes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Notes
1 2 3 4 5 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings see page 40. Trunnions are nitro-carburised or chrome plated for improved corrosion resistance. XI dimension to be specified by customer, note minimum dimension. Not available in 25.4mm (1) bore size. The extra height H of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and rod sizes shown in the table below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2) bore cylinders only. R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 3L cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, see page 41.
E H

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 UM 114.3 UT 76.2 101.6 UV 63.5 XG 44.5 44.5 44.5 54.0 44.5 60.3 54.0 54.0 66.7 60.3 44.5 57.2 73.0 63.5 69.8 63.5 79.4 69.8 73.0 57.2 69.8 79.4 73.0 79.4 79.4 57.2 63.5 73.0 82.6 76.2 82.6 82.6 82.6 66.7 Min. 3 XI 80 89 83 99 93 93 105 99 83 105 121 112 118 112 127 118 121 105 118 127 121 127 127 105 112 131 140 134 140 140 140 124 Y 49 49 49 58 49 65 58 58 71 65 49 58 74 65 71 65 81 71 74 58 71 81 74 81 81 58 65 74 84 78 84 84 84 68 Style DD Min. Stroke 3.2 + Stroke LB 98.4 101.6 P 54 58 XJ 101.6 101.6 104.7 114.3 104.7 120.7 114.3 117.4 130.2 123.8 108.0 127.0 142.9 133.4 139.7 133.4 149.2 139.7 142.9 127.0 146.1 155.6 149.2 155.6 155.6 133.4 139.7 155.6 165.1 158.8 165.1 165.1 165.1 149.2 ZB max. 119.3 119.3 123.8 133.4 125.8 141.7 135.3 138.4 151.2 144.9 129.0 152.9 168.8 159.3 165.6 159.3 175.1 165.6 168.8 152.9 174.9 184.0 178.1 184.5 184.5 162.2 168.6 187.6 197.2 191.8 197.2 197.2 197.2 181.3
127.0
114.3
76.2
10.0
101.6
58
63.5 (21/2")
139.7
127.0
88.9
6.4
104.8
61
82.6 (31/4")
165.1
146.1
108.0
20.0
123.8
70
101.6 (4")
184.2
165.1
127.0
20.0
123.8
70
127.0 (5")
209.6
190.5
152.4
13.0
130.2
77
152.4 (6")
263.6
235.0
177.8
26.0
146.1
83
21
Tie Rod Mountings 203.2mm (8") bore

1
Y WF
AA
DD
Style TB
F BB
G LB + stroke
T T R
See Notes 1, 2, 3
Y WF

1
AA
Style TC
F
DD K G LB + stroke J BB
TT R
See Notes 1, 2, 3
Dimensions TB, TC & TD See also Dimensions, page 46 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34
Bore Rod No. 1 2 3 4 203.2 (8") 5 6 7 8 0 231.1 58.7
5
AA
BB
DD
(UNF)
EE
(BSPP)
/8-18
215.9
G 3/ 4
19.1
50.8
38.1
16
22
Tie Rod Mountings 203.2mm (8") bore

ZB + stroke ZJ + stroke P + stroke EE
Y WF
E
1
AA
DD
DD BB F LB + stroke G J BB
Style TD
TT R
See Notes 1, 2, 3
Notes
1 2 3 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings see page 40. For Styles TB and TC an additional set of mounting nuts are supplied. For Style TD, two additional sets of mounting nuts are supplied. R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 3L cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, see page 41.

Bore Rod No. 1 2 3 4 203.2 (8") 5 6 7 8 0 163.6 R TT 101.6 177.8 101.6 139.7 139.7 139.7 101.6 101.6 177.8 WF 50.8 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 41.3 47.6 57.2 Y 78 84 84 84 84 84 68 74 84 149.2 86 + Stroke LB P ZB max. 197.0 203.3 203.3 203.3 203.3 203.3 187.4 193.8 203.3 ZJ 181.0 187.3 187.3 187.3 187.3 187.3 171.5 177.8 187.3
23
Head and Cap Flange and Clevis Mountings

1
Y WF
TE
Style JB
Head Square (NFPA Style ME3)
G LB + stroke
TT TE
EB (x4)
See Notes 1, 3
Y E
1
ZJ + stroke P + stroke EE
TE
Style HB
Cap Square (NFPA Style ME4)
TE
EB (x4)
K F G XK + stroke LB + stroke
See Notes 1, 3
Dimensions JB, HB & BB See also Dimensions, page 46 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34
Bore Rod No. 1 2 3 4 203.2 (8") 5 6 7 8 0 39.7 25.43 19.1 215.9 18 G 3/4 19.1 50.8 38.1 16 38.1 31.8
+0.00
CB
CD
-0.05
CW
EB
EE
(BSPP)
LR
24
Head and Cap Flange and Clevis Mountings

ZC + stroke P + stroke EE CD
E
1
E MR LR
Style BB
CW
CB
CW
G LB + stroke XC + stroke
J L
See Notes 1, 2, 3
Notes
1 2 3 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings see page 40. Supplied complete with pivot pin. R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 3L cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, see page 41.
Dimensions JB, HB & BB Continued

Bore Rod No. 1 2 3 4 203.2 (8") 5 6 7 8 0 30.2 192.3 MR TE TT 101.6 177.8 101.6 139.7 139.7 139.7 101.6 101.6 177.8 WF 50.8 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 41.3 47.6 57.2 Y 78 84 84 84 84 84 68 74 84 149.2 86.0 + Stroke LB P XC 219.1 225.4 225.4 225.4 225.4 225.4 209.5 215.9 225.4 XK 142.9 149.2 149.2 149.2 149.2 149.2 133.4 139.7 149.2 ZB max. 197.0 203.3 203.3 203.3 203.3 203.3 187.4 193.8 203.3 ZC 244.5 250.8 250.8 250.8 250.8 250.8 235.0 241.3 250.8 ZJ 181.0 187.3 187.3 187.3 187.3 187.3 171.5 177.8 187.3
25
Foot Mountings 203.2mm bore

ZB + stroke P + stroke EE
1
US
E/2 -0.15 -0.20 ST

3
Style C
F XS
G SS + stroke LB + stroke
TT E TS
SB (x4) SW
E TT
1
E/2 -0.15 -0.20
Style F
F XT
G SN + stroke LB + stroke
TN
NT thread, ND deep 4 tapped mounting holes
See Notes 1, 5, 6
Dimensions C, F & G See also Dimensions, page 46 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34
Bore Rod No. 1 2 3 4 203.2 (8") 5 6 7 8 0 215.9 18 G3/4 28.6 15.9 57.2 50.8 19.1 50.8 38.1 16 28.6 M20 163.6 22 25.4 E EB EE
6
(BSPP)
EL
EO
ES
ET
ND
NT
SB
ST
26
Foot Mountings 203.2mm bore

Y ZE + stroke XE + stroke P + stroke EE
E TT
1
E/2 -0.15 -0.20 ET

3
Style G
F EO
G EL LB + stroke SE + stroke
J K EL
R EO ES ES
0.4 min EB (x4)
See Notes 1, 3, 6
Notes
1 2 3 4 5 6 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings see page 40. Upper surfaces of lugs are machined for socket head screws. For mounting style G, rod diameters greater than 63.5mm (21/2), i.e. rod numbers 2, 4, 5, 6 and 0, are not available. Style C cylinders can be supplied with the cylinder ports arranged for mounting and sealing to a manifold surface see page 35. Tapped mounting holes are metric (coarse pitch series). R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 3L cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, see page 41.

Bore Rod No. 1 2 3 4 203.2 (8") 5 6 7 8 0 17.5 SW TN TS TT 101.6 177.8 101.6 139.7 114.3 250.8 139.7 285.8 139.7 101.6 101.6 177.8 US XS 68.3 74.6 74.6 74.6 74.6 74.6 58.7 65.1 74.6 XT 81.0 87.3 87.3 87.3 87.3 87.3 71.4 77.8 87.3 Y 78 84 84 84 84 84 68 74 84 149.2 86 187.3 82.6 95.3 + Stroke LB P SE SN SS XE 209.6 215.9 200.0 206.4 ZB max. 197.0 203.3 203.3 203.3 203.3 203.3 187.4 193.8 203.3 ZE 225.4 231.8 215.9 222.3 -
27
Trunnion Mountings 203.2mm bore

UT
1
R3.2
TD
Style D
F XG
G LB + stroke
TL
T T E
TL
See Notes 1, 2, 4
UT
1
R3.2
TM
Style DB
G XJ + stroke LB + stroke
TL
T T E
TL
See Notes 1, 2, 4
Dimensions D, DB, & DD See also Dimensions, page 46 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34
Bore Rod No. 1 2 3 4 203.2 (8") 5 6 7 8 0 63.5 215.9 G /4
3
BD
EE
+0.00
(BSPP)
TD
-0.03
TL
TM
TT 101.6 177.8 101.6 139.7
19.1
50.8
38.1
16
34.93
34.9
247.7
139.7 139.7 101.6 101.6 177.8
28
Trunnion Mountings 203.2mm bore

Y ZB + stroke P + stroke EE BD UM
1
R3.2 E UV
4 2
TD
Style DD
G XI LB + stroke
K TL
TT E TM TL
Notes
1 2 3 4 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings see page 40. Trunnions are nitro-carburised or chrome plated for improved corrosion resistance. XI dimension to be specified by customer, note minimum dimension. R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 3L cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, see page 41.
Dimensions D, DB, & DD Continued

Bore Rod No. 1 2 3 4 203.2 (8") 5 6 7 8 0 317.5 285.7 241.3 UM UT UV XG 76.2 82.6 82.6 82.6 82.6 82.6 66.7 73.0 82.6 Min. XI 133.4 139.7 139.7 139.7 139.7 139.7 123.8 130.2 139.7
3
Y 78 84 84 84 84 84 68 74 84
Style DD min.stroke
+ Stroke LB P XJ 161.9 168.3 168.3 168.3 ZB max. 197.0 203.3 203.3 203.3 203.3 203.3 187.4 193.8 203.3
22.2
149.2
86
168.3 168.3 152.4 158.8 168.3
29
Double Rod Cylinders

ZM + (2 x stroke) ZL + stroke P + stroke LD + stroke EE

ZM + (2 x stroke) LD + stroke P + stroke EE K
MM
MM
G F XS SSK + stroke
G F
K F XS G SSK + stroke G F
Double Rod Cylinders 25.4 to 152.4mm Bores
Available with Styles TB, TD, J, JB, C, F, G, D and DD
Double Rod Cylinders 203.2mm Bores
Available with Styles TB, TD, JB, C, F, G, D, and DD
Mounting Styles and Codes

Double rod cylinders are denoted by a 'K' in the model code, shown on page 47.
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0
Dimensions
To obtain dimensional information for double rod cylinders, first select the desired mounting style by referring to the corresponding single rod models shown on the preceding pages. Dimensions for the appropriate single rod model should be supplemented by those from the table opposite to provide a full set of dimensions.
Rod Strength
Double rod cylinders employ two separate piston rods, with one screwed into the end of the other within the piston rod assembly. As a result, one piston rod is stronger than the other. The stronger rod is identified by the letter 'K' stamped on its end, and its pressure limitations with a 4:1 design factor are identical to those shown in the table on page 40 for the equivalent single rod assembly. The weaker rod should always be used for the lighter duty. Pressure limitations for the weaker rod in pull applications at a 4:1 design factor are also identical to those on page 40.
63.5 (21/2")
82.6 (31/4")
101.6 (4")
Combination Rods
Double rod cylinders with stronger and weaker rods of differing rod sizes are also available. Please contact the factory for details.
127.0 (5")
Cushioning
Double rod cylinders can be supplied with cushions at either or both ends. Cushioning requirements should be specified by inserting a 'C' in the ordering code see page 47. Double rod cylinders that require cushioning are supplied with floating cushion sleeves as standard.
152.4 (6")
Style 9 Rod Ends

If a stroke of less than 25mm on bore sizes up to 82.6mm (31/4), or a stroke of less than 100mm on bore sizes of 101.6mm (4) and over, is required, where Style 9 rod ends are required at both ends, please consult the factory.
203.2 (8")
MM Rod Diameter 12.7 (1/2") 15.9 (5/8") 15.9 (5/8") 25.4 (1") 15.9 (5/8") 34.9 (13/8") 25.4 (1") 25.4 (1") 44.5 (13/4") 34.9 (13/8") 15.9 (5/8") 25.4 (1") 50.8 (2") 34.9 (13/8") 44.5 (13/4") 34.9 (13/8") 63.5 (21/2") 44.5 (13/4") 50.8 (2") 25.4 (1") 44.5 (13/4") 88.9 (31/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 76.2 (3") 25.4 (1") 34.9 (13/8") 44.5 (13/4") 101.6 (4") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 76.2 (3") 88.9 (31/2") 34.9 (13/8") 50.8 (2") 139.7 (51/2") 63.5 (21/2") 76.2 (3") 88.9 (31/2") 101.6 (4") 34.9 (13/8") 44.5 (13/4") 127.0 (5")
Add Stroke LD 120.7 123.8 ZL 139.7 146.1 155.6 147.6 163.5 157.1 160.3 173.0 166.7 150.8 181.0 196.9 187.3 193.6 187.3 203.2 193.6 196.9 181.0 201.6 211.1 204.7 211.1 211.1 188.9 195.2 217.4 227.0 220.7 227.0 227.0 227.0 211.1 SSK 85.7 85.7
Add 2 x Stroke ZM 152.4 155.6 174.6 155.6 187.3 174.6 177.8 203.2 190.6 158.8 190.6 222.3 203.2 216.0 203.2 235.0 216.0 222.3 190.5 222.3 241.3 228.6 241.3 241.3 196.9 209.6 235.2 254.2 241.3 254.2 254.2 254.2 222.3 244.5 257.2 257.2 257.2 257.2 257.2 225.4 238.3 257.2
123.8
85.7
127.0
88.9
152.4
95.3
152.4
95.3
158.8
92.1
178.0
104.8
181.0
108.0
30
Accessories Accessory Selection

Accessories for the rod end of a cylinder are selected by reference to the rod end thread, shown on pages 3 and 46, while the same accessories, when used at the cap end, are selected by cylinder bore size. See tables of part numbers below and on the following pages.
Tie Rod Cylinders 3L Series Load Capacity

The various accessories on these pages have been load rated for your convenience. The load capacity in kN is the recommended maximum load for that accessory based on a 4:1 factor of safety in tension. (The pivot pin is rated in shear). Before specifying, compare the actual load or the pull force at maximum operating pressure of the cylinder with the load capacity of the accessory you plan to use. If the load or pull force of the cylinder exceeds the load capacity of the accessory, please consult the factory.

Accessories for the 3L cylinder comprise: Rod End rod clevis, eye bracket and pivot pin plain rod eye, clevis bracket and pivot pin Cap End eye bracket for style BB mounting
Rod Clevis, Eye Bracket and Pivot Pin

Thread KK M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M12x1.5 M20x1.5 M22x1.5 M26x1.5 M33x2 M39x2 M45x2 M48x2 M58x2 M64x2 M68x2 M76x2 M90x2 M100x2 M110x2 Rod Clevis 51221G 50940G 50941G 50942G 50943G 50944G 50945G 50946G 50947G 50948G 50949G 50950G 50951G 50952G 50953G 50954G Eye Bracket 74077 69195 69195 69196 85361 1 85361 1 69198 85362 1 85363 1 85363 1 85364 1 85365 1 85365 1 73538 73539 73539 Pivot Pin 68368 68368 68369 68370 68370 68371 68372 68373 68373 68374 68375 68375 73545 73547 73547 Nominal Force kN 7.7 18.3 18.3 46.8 83.8 91.0 94.5 203.3 312.1 312.1 420.0 420.0 543.6 256.0 334.4 334.4 Mass kg 0.4 0.7 0.7 2.3 5.2 5.1 9.9 19.5 28.6 28.5 48.4 63.4 63.1 104.8 157.8 156.6 -
Plain Rod Eye, Clevis Bracket and Pivot Pin

Thread KK M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M12x1.5 M20x1.5 M22x1.5 M26x1.5 M33x2 M39x2 M45x2 M48x2 M58x2 M64x2 M68x2 M76x2 M90x2 M100x2 M110x2 Plain Rod Eye 74075G 69089G 69090G 69091G 69092G 69093G 69094G 69095G 69096G 69097G 69098G 69099G 69100G 73536G 73437G 73438G 73439G Clevis Bracket 74076 69205 69205 69206 69207 69207 69208 69209 69210 69210 69211 69212 69213 73542 73542 73543 73544 Pivot Pin 74078 68368 68368 68369 68370 68370 68371 68372 69215 69215 68374 68375 69216 73545 73545 82181 73547 Nominal Force kN 15.0 22.3 25.4 54.0 58.0 85.6 149.4 151.6 147.2 147.2 155.6 150.7 164.6 372.3 372.3 457.5 483.4 Mass kg 0.5 1.3 1.3 3.2 6.6 6.6 12.7 23.4 41.1 41.5 51.2 65.2 69.5 126.7 124.0 180.7 173.5
Cap End Eye Bracket for Styles BB and BC Cylinders

Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (1 /2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6") 203.2 (8")
1
1
Eye Bracket Part No. 74076

2
Nominal Force kN 16.0 18.3 18.3 18.3 46.8 46.8 46.8
Mass kg 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.4 3.4
69195 69195 69195 69196 69196 69196 85361 85361

1 1
91.0 91.0
Cylinder accessory dimensions conform to NFPA recommended standard, NFPA/T3.6.8.R1 1984 Mounting plate for 25.4mm (1) bore single tang BB and BC mounting styles is Clevis Bracket 74076, shown on page 33
31
Accessories Rod Clevis, Eye Bracket and Pivot Pin

Rod Clevis Dimensions
Part No. 51221G1 50940G 50941G 50942G 50943G 50944G 50945G 50946G 50947G 50948G 50949G 50950G 50951G 50952G 50953G 50954G
+0.10
A 20.6 19.1 19.1 28.6 41.3 41.3 50.8 57.2 76.2 76.2 88.9 88.9 88.9 88.9 101.6 101.6
CB 8.8 19.8 19.8 32.6 38.9 38.9 51.6 64.7 64.7 64.7 77.4 77.4 77.4 102.8 116.0 116.0
CD
+0.05
CE 57.2 38.1 38.1 54.0 74.6 74.6 95.3 114.3 139.7 139.7 165.1 171.5 171.5 196.9 223.8 223.8
CW 5.2 12.7 12.7 15.9 19.1 19.1 25.4 31.8 31.8 31.8 38.1 38.1 38.1 50.8 57.2 57.2
ER 7.5 12.7 12.7 19.1 25.4 25.4 34.9 44.5 50.8 50.8 63.5 69.9 69.9 88.9 101.6 101.6
KK M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M12x1.5 M20x1.5 M22x1.5 M26x1.5 M33x2 M39x2 M45x2 M48x2 M58x2 M64x2 M68x2 M76x2 M90x2 M100x2
Nominal Force kN 11.6 18.9 21.9 49.9 83.8 96.7 149.4 203.3 317.9 341.6 480.2 535.1 589.9 1048.8 1292.2 1480.0
Mass kg 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.6 1.3 1.3 3.1 6.0 8.4 8.3 15.1 19.0 18.7 34.1 49.8 48.6
Rod Clevis (Female Clevis)

CW ER CD CE A CB CW
7.90 12.70 12.70 19.05 25.40 25.40 34.93 44.45 50.80 50.80 63.50 76.20 76.20 88.90 101.6 101.6
KK
Eye Bracket Dimensions

Part No. 74077 69195 69196 85361
2
+0.10
CB 7.9
CD
+0.05
DD 6.8
E 57.2
F 9.5 9.5
FL 25.4 28.6 60.3 76.2 85.7
LR 15.9 19.1 31.8 38.1 54.0 57.2
M 9.5 12.7 19.1 25.4 34.9 44.5 50.8 63.5 69.9
MR 12.7 14.3 22.2 31.8 41.3
R 44.5 41.4 64.8 82.6 97.0
Nominal Mass Force kg kN 7.6 18.3 46.8 91.0 94.5 220.6 312.1 420.0 543.6 256.0 334.4 0.3 0.4 1.5 3.4 5.6 11.1 17.0 27.4 35.8 55.6 84.3
Eye Bracket
MR M 25 FL F LR R E R E CB
7.9
19.1 12.70 10.3 63.5 31.8 19.05 13.5 88.9
15.9 47.6
CD DD (x4)
38.1 25.40 16.7 114.3 22.2 50.8 34.93 16.7 127.0 22.2 63.5 44.45 23.0 165.1 28.6
69198 85362 2 85363 2 85364 2 85365 2 73538 73539
54.0 125.7 61.9 145.5 76.2 167.1 82.6 190.5 95.3 244.3
63.5 50.80 27.0 190.5 38.1 101.6 63.5 76.2 63.50 30.2 215.9 44.5 120.6 76.2 76.2 76.20 33.3 241.3 50.8 133.3 82.6
101.6 88.90 46.0 320.7 42.9 144.5 101.6 88.9
114.3 101.6 52.4 377.8 49.2 163.5 114.3 101.6 108.0 290.8
Pivot Pin for Clevis Bracket & Eye Bracket

Part No. 74078 68368 68369 68370 68371 68372 68373 69215 68374 68375 69216 73545 82181 73547
+0.00 +0.0
CD
-0.05
CL
-0.5
G 40 56 75 88 115 143 145 158 171 173 185 225 235 251
Nominal Force kN 29.4 38.4 86.1 152.9 289.8 469.1 612.7 612.7 957.4 1378.7 1378.7 1876.8 2522.9 2522.9
Mass kg 0.03 0.1 0.2 0.5 1.2 2.4 3.2 3.5 5.9 8.6 9.2 15.2 22.4 23.5
Pivot Pin for Clevis Bracket & Eye Bracket

G CL
11.1 12.73 19.08 25.43 34.95 44.48 50.83 50.83 63.53 76.23 76.23 88.93 101.63 101.63
32.7 46.3 65.4 77.9 103.4 128.8 129.7 141.4 155.1 154.7 167.7 205.7 215.5 231.7
CD
1 2
Includes pivot pin Cylinder accessory dimensions conform to NFPA recommended standard, NFPA/T3.6.8.R1 1984
32
Accessories Plain Rod Eye and Clevis Bracket

Plain Rod Eye Dimensions
Part No. 74075G 69089G 69090G 69091G 69092G 69093G 69094G 69095G 69096G 69097G 69098G 69099G 69100G 73536G 73437G 73438G 73439G A min. 19.1 19.1 19.1 28.6 28.6 41.3 50.8 57.2 57.2 76.2 88.9 88.9 92.1 101.6 127.0 139.7 139.7 CA 38.1 38.1 38.1 52.4 60.3 71.4 87.3 101.6 111.1 127.0 147.6 155.6 165.1 193.7 193.7 231.8 231.8 CB 11.1 19.1 19.1 31.8 38.1 38.1 50.8 63.5 63.5 63.5 76.2 76.2 88.9 101.6 101.6 114.3 127.0 CD 11.1 12.70 12.70 19.05 25.40 25.40 34.93 44.45 50.80 50.80 63.50 76.20 76.20 88.90 88.90 101.6 101.6 ER 15.2 18.3 18.3 27.0 36.5 36.5 50.0 63.5 72.2 72.2 90.5 108.0 108.0 126.2 126.2 144.5 144.5 KK M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M12x1.5 M20x1.5 M22x1.5 M26x1.5 M33x2 M39x2 M45x2 M48x2 M58x2 M64x2 M68x2 M76x2 M90x2 M100x2 M110x2
Nominal Force kN 14.7 22.3 25.4 54.0 58.0 96.8 149.4 200.6 238.6 334.4 440.1 490.5 549.8 719.3 969.0 1220.9 1375.6
Mass kg 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.5 1.1 1.1 2.6 5.1 6.4 6.8 12.1 16.0 19.6 31.1 28.4 42.5 48.4
Plain Rod Eye

CD CD ER CB
CD
+0.10 CD +0.05
CA A min.
KK
Clevis Bracket Dimensions

+0.10
Part No. 74076 69205 69206 69207 69208 69209 69210 69211 69212 69213 73542 73543 73544
CB 12.0
CD
+0.05
CW DD 6.8
E 57.2
F 9.5
FL 25.4
LR 15.9
M 9.5
MR 12.7 15.9
R 44.5 64.8 97.0
Nominal Mass Force kg kN 16.0 32.6 62.4 85.6 164.6 151.6 147.2 155.6 150.7 164.6 372.3 457.5 483.4 0.4 1.0 2.5 5.0 8.8 15.9 31.2 33.2 40.7 40.7 80.4 115.8 101.6
Clevis Bracket
CW MR M 25 FL F LR R E R E CB CW
11.1 9.5
19.8 12.70 12.7 10.3 88.9 12.7 38.1 32.6 19.05 15.9 13.5 127.0 15.9 47.6 38.9 25.40 19.1 16.7 165.1 19.1 57.2 51.6 34.93 25.4 16.7 190.5 22.2 76.2
19.1 12.7 30.2
CD DD (x4)
19.1 23.0
38.1 25.4 50.8 34.9 44.5 57.2 63.5
31.8 125.7 42.1 145.5 56.4 190.5 70.6 238.8 79.4 238.8 91.3 238.8 91.3 238.8
64.7 44.45 31.8 23.0 241.3 22.2 92.1 69.9 64.7 50.80 38.1 27.0 323.9 25.4 108.0 81.0 77.4 63.50 38.1 30.2 323.9 25.4 114.3 88.9
77.4 76.20 38.1 33.3 323.9 25.4 152.4 108.0 76.2 90.1 76.20 38.1 33.3 323.9 25.4 152.4 108.0 76.2
102.8 88.90 50.8 46.0 393.7 42.9 169.9 127.0 88.9 104.8 304.8 116.0 101.6 50.8 52.4 444.5 49.2 195.3 146.1 101.6 123.8 349.3 128.2 101.6 50.8 52.4 444.5 49.2 195.3 146.1 101.6 123.8 349.3
33
Mounting Information Mounting Styles

General guidance for the selection of mounting styles is given on page 9. The notes which follow provide information for use in specific applications and should be read in conjunction with the information given on page 9.
Tie Rod Cylinders 3L Series Foot Mountings and Thrust Keys

The turning moment which results from the application of force by a foot mounted cylinder must be resisted by secure mounting and effective guidance of the load. A thrust key modification is recommended to provide positive cylinder location. Thrust key mountings eliminate the need for fitted bolts or external keys on Styles C, F and G side mounted cylinders. The gland retainer plate is extended F below the nominal mounting surface to fit into a keyway milled into the mounting surface of the machine member. See 'Mounting Modifications' in the PD order code, page 47.
PA FA +0.0 Integral Key
Extended Tie Rods

The standard tie rod extension for cylinders with mounting styles TB, TC and TD is shown as BB in dimension tables. Longer or shorter extensions can be supplied. Cylinders with extended tie rod mountings TB and TC are supplied with an additional set of mounting nuts of the appropriate grade for securing the cylinder to the machine member. For style TD, tie rods extended both ends, two additional sets of mounting nuts are supplied. Cylinders may be ordered with extended tie rods in addition to another mounting style. The extended tie rods may then be used for mounting other systems or machine components.
Bore 25.4 (1")

1
F Nom. 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 15.9 15.9 15.9 19.1
+0.0
FA
-0.075
PA
-0.2
PD 23.8 30.2 36.5 42.9 55.6 65.1 77.8 92.1
8 8 8 8 14 14 14 18
4.9 4.9 4.9 4.9 8.1 8.1 8.1 9.5

The diameter of the rod gland extension (B) at the head end can be used as a pilot to locate the cylinder in relation to the machine. After alignment has been obtained, the flange may be drilled for pins or dowels to prevent shifting.
38.1 (1 /2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6")
1
Pivot Mountings
Pivot pins are supplied with Style BB cap fixed clevis mounted cylinders and Style BC cap detachable clevis mounted cylinders, with the exception of 1 bore sizes.
G mounting is not available with a thrust key on 25.4mm (1) bore.

Trunnions require lubricated pillow blocks with minimum bearing clearances. Blocks should be aligned and mounted to eliminate bending moments on the trunnion pins. Self-aligning mounts must not be used to support the trunnions as bending forces can be set up. An intermediate fixed trunnion mounting can be positioned to balance the weight of the cylinder, or it can be located at any point between the head or cap to suit the application. The position of the trunnion is fixed during manufacture and its location must be specified at the time of order.
Tie Rod Supports

To increase the resistance to buckling of long stroke cylinders, tie rod supports may be fitted.
These move the tie rods
radially outwards and allow longer than normal strokes to be used without the need for an additional mounting.
Bore 38.1 50.8 63.5 82.6 101.6
Stroke (metres) 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.1 2.4 2.7 3.0 3.3 3.6 3.9 4.2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 1 3 2 1 1 1 3 2 2 1 1 4 3 2 1 1 No. of Supports Req'd.

Foot mounted cylinders should not be pinned or keyed at both ends. Changes in temperature and pressure under normal operating conditions cause the cylinder to increase (or decrease) from its installed length and it therefore must be free to expand and contract. It must not be pinned or keyed at both ends as advantages of cylinder elasticity in absorbing high shock loads would be lost.
Bore sizes above 101.6mm (4) do not require tie rod supports.
34
Mounting Information Stroke Tolerances

Stroke length tolerances are required due to the build-up of tolerances of piston, head, cap and cylinder body. Standard production stroke tolerances are -0.4 to +0.8mm on all bore sizes and stroke lengths. For closer tolerances, please specify the required tolerance plus the operating temperature and pressure. Stroke tolerances of less than 0.4mm are generally impracticable due to the elasticity of cylinders and, in these cases, the use of a stroke adjuster should be considered see page 43.
Tie Rod Cylinders 3L Series Manifold Ports

Side mounted cylinders (Style C) can be supplied with the cylinder ports arranged for mounting and sealing to a manifold surface. Manifold ports are available with both single- and double-rodded cylinders. The ports are drilled and counterbored for O-ring seals which are provided. With these specifications, the mounting is designated Style CM. Please consult the factory.
Mounting Bolts
Parker recommends that mounting bolts with a minimum strength of ISO 898/1 grade 10.9 should be used for fixing cylinders to the machine or base. This recommendation is of particular importance where bolts are placed in tension or subjected to shear forces. Mounting bolts should be torque loaded to their manufacturer's recommended figures.
EEM Y P + Stroke ED
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2")
Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 7 1
Y
0.8
P
0.8
EEM
9.5 12.7
ED
17.5 20.6
Parker O-Ring No.

2 - 015 2 - 017
Tie Rod Nuts

Tie rod mounting nuts, with lubricated threads, should be to a minimum strength of ISO 898/2 grade 10, torque loaded to the figures shown.
Tie Rod Nut Torque Specifications Nm min-max 3 - 3.5 8 -9 15 - 17 lb.ft min-max 2 - 2.5 5-6 11 - 12
49.2 50.8 60.3 50.8 66.7 60.3 60.3 73.0 66.7 50.8 61.9 77.8 68.3 74.6 69.3 84.1 74.6 77.8 61.9 74.6 84.1 77.8 84.1 84.1 61.9 68.3 77.9 87.3 81.0 87.3 87.3 87.3 71.4 81.0 87.3 87.3 87.3 87.3 87.3 71.4 77.8 87.3
54.0 54.0
54.0
12.7
20.6
2 - 017
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6") 203.2 (8")
63.5 (21/2")
57.2
12.7
20.6
2 - 017
82.6 (31/4")
2 3 4 1
66.7
15.9
23.8
2 - 019
33 - 36
25 - 26
101.6 (4")
2 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
80 - 85 150 - 155
60 - 64 110 - 114
66.7
15.9
23.8
2 - 019
127.0 (5")
73.0
15.9
23.8
2 - 019
152.4 (6")
79.4
22.2
30.2
2 - 023
203.2 (8")
82.6
22.2
30.2
2 - 023
35

Given that the force and operating pressure of the system are known, and that a piston rod size has been estimated taking account of whether the rod is in tension (pull) or compression (push), then the cylinder bore can be selected. If the piston rod is in compression, use the 'Push Force' table below, as follows:
To determine the pull force: 1. 2. Follow the procedure for 'push' applications as described above. Using the 'pull' table, identify the force indicated according to the rod and pressure selected. Deduct this from the original 'push' force. The resultant is the net force available to move the load.
3. 1. 2. Identify the operating pressure closest to that required. In the same column, identify the force required to move the load (always rounding up). In the same row, look along to the cylinder bore required.
If this force is not large enough, go through the process again but increase the system operating pressure or cylinder diameter if possible. If in doubt, our design engineers will be pleased to assist. Note: For maximum pressures, please refer to page 40.
3.
If the cylinder envelope dimensions are too large for the application, increase the operating pressure, if possible, and repeat the exercise. If the piston rod is in tension, use the 'Deduction for Pull Force' table. The procedure is the same but, due to the reduced area caused by the piston rod, the force available on the 'pull' stroke will be smaller.
inPHorm
For more comprehensive information on the calculation of cylinder bore size required, please refer to the European cylinder inPHorm selection program (HY07-1260/Eur).
Push Force
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6") 203.2 (8")
Piston Area mm2 510 1140 2020 3170 5360 8110 12670 18240 32430 sq.in. 0.785 1.767 3.14 4.91 8.30 12.57 19.64 28.27 50.27 5 bar 0.3 0.6 1.0 1.6 2.7 4.1 6.4
Cylinder Push Force in kN 10 bar 0.5 1.1 2.0 3.2 5.4 8.1 25 bar 1.3 2.9 5.1 7.9 70 bar 3.6 8.0 100 bar 5.1 11.4 140 bar 16.0 28.3 44.4 75.3
Cylinder Push Force in Pounds Force 80 psi 65 142 251 393 664 100 psi 79 177 314 491 830 250 psi 196 443 785 1228 2075 1000 psi 785 1770 3140 4910 8300 1500 psi 1177 2651 4713 7364 2000 psi 3540 6280 9820
Displacement per 10mm Stroke Litres 0.0050 0.0114 0.0202 0.0317 0.0535 0.0811 0.1267 0.1827 0.3246 Imp. Galls 0.0011 0.0025 0.0044 0.0070 0.0120 0.0178 0.0279 0.0402 0.0714
14.1 20.2 22.2 31.7
13.4 37.5 53.5
12450 16600
20.3 56.8 81.1 113.3 127 177.3 183 255.3 325 454.7 128
1006 1257 3143 12570 18856 25140 1571 1964 4910 19640 29460 39280 2262 2827 7068 28270 42406 56540 4022 5027 12568 50270 75406 100540
12.7 31.6 88.5
9.1 18.3 45.5
16.2 32.5 81.1 227

Piston Rod 12.7 ( /2") 15.9 (5/8") 25.4 (1") 34.9 (13/8") 44.5 (13/4") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 76.2 (3") 88.9 (31/2") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 139.7 (51/2")
1
Piston Rod Area mm2 130 200 500 960 1560 2020 3170 4560 6210 8110 12670 15330 sq.in. 0.196 0.307 0.785 1.49 2.41 3.14 4.91 7.07 9.62 12.57 19.64 23.76 5 bar 0.1 0.1 0.3 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.6 2.3 3.1 4.1 6.4 7.7
Piston Rod Forces in kN 10 bar 0.1 0.2 0.5 1.0 1.6 2.0 3.2 4.6 6.2 8.1 25 bar 0.3 0.5 1.3 2.4 3.9 5.1 7.9 70 bar 0.9 1.4 3.5 6.8 100 bar 1.3 2.0 5.0 9.6 140 bar 2.8 7.0 13.5 21.9 28.3 44.4 63.9 86.7 80 psi 16 25 65
Piston Rod Forces in Pounds Force 100 psi 20 31 79 149 241 314 491 707 962 250 psi 49 77 196 373 603 785 1228 1767 2405 1000 psi 196 307 785 1490 2410 3140 4910 7070 9620 1500 psi 294 461 1177 2235 3615 4713 7364 2000 psi 614 1570 2980 4820 6280 9820
Displacement per 10mm Stroke Litres 0.0013 0.0020 0.0050 0.0097 0.0156 0.0202 0.0317 0.0456 0.0621 0.0811 0.1267 0.1523 Imp. Galls 0.0003 0.0004 0.0011 0.0021 0.0034 0.0044 0.0070 0.0100 0.0137 0.0178 0.0279 0.0335
119 193 251 393 566 770
10.9 15.6 14.1 20.2 22.2 31.7
11.4 32.0 45.6 15.5 43.4 62.0
10604 14140 14430 19240
20.3 56.8 81.1 114.0 126 177.3 153 214.7 107
1006 1257 3143 12570 18856 25140 1571 1964 4910 19640 29460 39280 1901 2376 5940 23760 35640 47520
12.7 31.6 88.7 15.3 38.4
36
Piston Rod Sizes and Stop Tubes Piston Rod Size Selection
The selection of a piston rod for thrust (push) conditions requires the following steps to be carried out: 1. Determine the type of cylinder mounting style and rod end connection to be used. Consult the Stroke Factor table on page 38 and determine which factor corresponds to the application. Using the appropriate stroke factor from page 38, determine the 'basic length' from the equation: Basic Length = Net Stroke x Stroke Factor (The graph is prepared for standard rod extensions beyond the face of the gland retainers. For rod extensions greater than standard, add the increases to the net stroke to arrive at the 'basic length'.) 3. Calculate the load imposed for the thrust application by multiplying the full bore area of the cylinder by the system pressure, or by referring to the Push and Pull Force charts on page 36. Using the graph below, look along the values of 'basic length' and 'thrust' as found in 2 and 3 above, and note the point of intersection.
Tie Rod Cylinders 3L Series Stop Tubes

Stop tubes prevent the cylinder from completing its full stroke, to provide a spread between the piston and the rod bearing at full extension. Note that stop tube requirements differ for fixed and pivot mounted cylinders. The required length of stop tube, where necessary, is read from the vertical columns on the right of the graph by following the horizontal band within which the point of intersection lies. If the required length of stop tube is in the region labelled 'consult factory', please supply the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Cylinder mounting style. Rod end connection and method of guiding load. Bore required, stroke, length of rod extension (dimension W dimension V see pages 3 and 46) if greater than standard. Mounting position of cylinder. (Note if at an angle or vertical, and specify the direction of the piston rod.) Operating pressure of cylinder, if limited to less than the standard pressure for the cylinder selected.
2.
4.
For accurate sizing, please refer to the European cylinder inPHorm selection program (HY07-1260/Eur). When specifying a cylinder with a stop tube, please insert an S (Special) and the net stroke of the cylinder in the order code and state the length of the stop tube. Note that net stroke is equal to the gross stroke of the cylinder less the length of the stop tube. The gross stroke determines the envelope dimensions of the cylinder.
Cushion Sleeve Stop Tube
Note : When considering the use of long stroke cylinders, the piston rod should be of sufficient diameter to provide the necessary column strength. The correct piston rod size is read from the diagonally curved line labelled 'Rod Diameter' above the point of intersection.
Recommended Length of Stop Tube (mm)
Consult Factory
37
Stroke Factors Stroke Factors

The stroke factors which follow are used in the calculation of cylinder 'basic length' see Piston Rod Size Selection, page 37.
Rod End Connection Mounting Style TB, TD, J, JB, C, F, G
Type of Mounting
Stroke Factor
Fixed and Rigidly Guided
0.5
Pivoted and Rigidly Guided
0.7
TC, H, HB
1.0
1.0
TC, H, HB, DD
1.5
Supported but not Rigidly Guided
2.0
BB, DB, BC
2.0
Fixed but not Rigidly Guided
TC, H, HB
4.0
Pivoted but not Rigidly Guided
BB, DB, BC
4.0
Long Stroke Cylinders

When considering the use of long stroke cylinders, the piston rod should be of sufficient diameter to provide the necessary column strength. For tensile (pull) loads, rod strength is unaffected by stroke length. For long stroke cylinders under compressive loads, the use of stop tubes should be considered, to reduce bearing stress. The Piston Rod Selection Chart on page 37 provides guidance where unusually long strokes are required.
inPHorm
38

Cushioning is recommended as a means of controlling the deceleration of masses, or for applications where piston speeds are in excess of 0.1m/s and the piston will make a full stroke. Cushioning extends cylinder life and reduces undesirable noise and hydraulic shock. Deceleration devices or built-in cushions are optional and can be supplied at the head end, cap end, or at both ends of the cylinder without affecting its envelope or mounting dimensions.
F= where a = and
ma + Ad P/10 0.62 2 x 27 x 10-3 = 6.66 m/s2
F = 2268 x 6.66 + 12670 x 35/10 - 3337 = 56128N
Standard Cushioning
Many forms of cushioning exist, and each has its own specific merits and advantages. Final speed may be adjusted using the cushion screws. Note that cushion performance will be affected by the use of water or high water based fluids. Please consult the factory for details.
The total deceleration force is developed by the fluid compressed in the cushion chamber. This pressure is approximately equal to the force divided by the annular area (cylinder bore area - rod area): 56128N 12670mm2 - 1560mm2 = 5.1N/mm2 or 51 bar.
This induced pressure should not exceed 135 bar.
Alternative Forms of Cushioning

To complement the standard cushioning, special cushions can be designed to suit applications where the energy to be absorbed exceeds the standard cushion performance. Please consult the factory for further details.
Cushion Length & Piston and Rod Mass

Where specified, 3L cylinders incorporate the longest cushion sleeve and spear that can be accommodated within the standard envelope without reducing the rod bearing and piston bearing lengths (see table of cushion lengths below). Cushions are adjustable via recessed needle valves.
Bore Rod No. 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 MM Rod Diameter 12.7 15.9 15.9 25.4 15.9 34.9 25.4 25.4 44.5 34.9 15.9 25.4 50.8 34.9 44.5 34.9 63.5 44.5 50.8 25.4 44.5 88.9 50.8 63.5 76.2 25.4 34.9 44.5 101.6 50.8 63.5 76.2 88.9 34.9 50.8 139.7 63.5 76.2 88.9 101.6 34.9 44.5 127.0 (1/2") (5/8") (5/8") (1") (5/8") (13/8") (1") (1") (13/4") (13/8") (5/8") (1") (2") (13/8") (13/4") (13/8") (21/2") (13/4") (2") (1") (13/4") (31/2") (2") (21/2") (3") (1") (13/8") (13/4") (4") (2") (21/2") (3") (31/2") (13/8") (2") (51/2") (21/2") (3") (31/2") (4") (13/8") (13/4") (5") Cushion Length Head 22.2 22.2 22.2 Cap 19.1 20.6 20.6 Piston & Rod Rod Only at Zero per 10mm Stroke (kg) Stroke (kg) 0.18 0.23 0.38 0.65 0.58 1.34 0.85 1.18 2.43 1.68 0.91 1.74 3.71 2.26 3.04 2.93 6.36 3.72 4.39 2.42 5.46 12.91 6.13 8.11 10.48 4.16 4.68 7.19 18.56 7.88 9.91 12.35 14.86 6.38 12.85 39.78 14.88 17.31 19.83 23.52 11.34 12.15 33.43 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.02 0.07 0.04 0.04 0.12 0.07 0.02 0.04 0.16 0.07 0.12 0.07 0.25 0.12 0.16 0.04 0.12 0.48 0.16 0.25 0.35 0.04 0.07 0.12 0.63 0.16 0.25 0.35 0.48 0.07 0.16 1.19 0.25 0.35 0.48 0.63 0.07 0.12 0.98
Cushion Calculations
Modelling the cushion performance on uniform deceleration, the formulae below can be used to determine the approximate force developed in the cushion chamber when decelerating a load.
inPHorm
Cushioning requirements can be calculated automatically for individual cylinder/load combinations using the European cylinder inPHorm selection program HY07-1260/Eur.
Formulae
F = ma + Ad P/10 + mgsina - f (for inclined or vertically downward direction of mass) F = ma + Ad P/10 - mgsina - f (for inclined or vertically upward direction of mass) Where: F = total force acting on the cushion chamber in Newtons m = mass of load in kilogrammes (including piston, rod, and rod end accessories, see table and pages 31 to 33) a = deceleration in m/s2, derived from the formula v2 a= 2s x 10-3 where: v = piston velocity in m/s s = cushion length in mm Ad = area acted on by pump pressure in mm2 (see page 36) P = pump pressure in bar g = acceleration due to gravity = 9.81m/s2 a = angle to the horizontal in degrees f = friction forces in Newtons = mg x 0.15
22.2 28.6 20.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 20.6 28.6 20.6 20.6 28.6 20.6 20.6 20.6 20.6 28.6 28.6 34.9 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 34.9 27.0 23.8 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 34.9 34.9 23.8
20.6
82.6 (31/4")
25.4
101.6 (4")
25.4
127.0 (5")
25.4
152.4 (6")
31.8
Example
The following example shows how to calculate horizontal deceleration (a=0). Selected bore/rod 127/44.5mm (No. 1 rod) Pressure = 35 bar Mass = 2268kg Velocity = 0.6m/s Cushion length = 27mm Friction coefficient = 0.15 or 3337N.
203.2 (8")
31.8
39
Pressure Limitations Pressure Limitations Introduction

The pressure limitations of a hydraulic cylinder must be reviewed when considering its application. To assist the designer in obtaining the optimum performance from a cylinder, the following guidelines are provided. If in doubt, please consult the factory.
Tie Rod Cylinders 3L Series Maximum Pressure Ratings

Bore (with Rod No. 1) 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6") 203.2 (8") 4:1 Design Factor (yield) (bar) 140 115 70 80 65 50 50 40 35 (psi) 2000 1650 1000 1180 925 700 690 560 510 Heavy-duty Service (bar) 105 105 70 70 70 70 60 50 40 (psi) 1500 1500 1000 1000 1000 1000 850 750 600
Low Pressure Operation

At low operating pressures, a wide range of application factors begin to affect cylinder performance. As a result, consideration should be given to factors such as seal friction and mounting alignment when selecting a cylinder for low pressure use. Low Friction seals are available to special order, to optimise performance at low pressures. For further information, please consult the factory.
Maximum Pressure
Series 3L cylinders are recommended for pressures up to 70 bar with hydraulic oil as the fluid medium. For pressures above those indicated, Series 2H cylinders should be considered. The 4:1 design factor rating shown is conservative for continuous severe applications. Safety factors at other pressures can be calculated from this rating. In addition, mounting styles, stroke, etc., should be considered because of the limiting effect they may have on these ratings. The designer must, however, take account of fatigue stress which may restrict the cylinder to a lower pressure. Three main areas of cylinder design may be affected: the cylinder body (pressure envelope), the cylinder mountings, and the piston rod. The maximum pressures indicated in the tables opposite are based on pure tensile and compressive loadings, without the presence of any bending stresses. Where it is impractical to avoid side loadings, eg: by the use of pivot mountings, please consult the factory giving full details of the application.
Maximum Pressure for J Mountings

Bore Style J Mounting Push Application (Bar) Rod Nos. 1, 7, and 8 45 45 35 20 45 30 20 25 Rod No. 2 30 25 15 10 25 15 10 15 Rod Nos. 3 and 4 25 15 30 25 15 20 Rod Nos. 5 and 6 15 15
25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (3 /4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6")
1
Cylinder Body (Pressure Envelope)

In many applications, the pressure developed within a cylinder may be greater than the working pressure, due to pressure intensification across the piston and cushioning, eg: meter-out circuits. In most cases, this intensification does not affect the cylinder mountings or piston rod threads in the form of increased loading. This induced pressure should not exceed 135 bar. If in doubt, please consult the factory.
For pressures exceeding those shown use mounting JB
inPHorm
For more comprehensive information about pressure limitations for individual cylinders, please refer to the European cylinder inPHorm selection program (HY07-1260/Eur).
40
Ports, Locations and Piston Speeds Standard Ports

Series 3L cylinders are supplied as standard with R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1, spot faced for sealing washers. Smaller R2 size ports, where demanded by the application, are also available. Parker recommends R1 port sizes for their higher flow rate and piston speed capacity. Metric ISO 6149 Port Identification threaded ports to DIN 3852 Pt.1 and ISO 6149, or NPTF Raised Ring ports in sizes as shown for within Spot Face BSPP ports, can be supplied if specified. The ISO 6149 port incorporates a raised ring in the spot face for identification. Where required, oversize or additional ports can be supplied on the sides of heads and caps that are not occupied by cushion valves. Refer to the tables of port sizes opposite.

Standard Port Piston Tube l/min Port Size Bore Flow at Speed in Metric mm 5m/sec1 m/sec M14x1.5 M14x1.5 M14x1.5 M14x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 M26x1.5 M26x1.5 7 8 8 8 13 13 13 18 18 11.5 14.9 14.9 14.9 40.0 40.0 40.0 76.2 76.2 0.42 0.37 0.21 0.13 0.12 0.08 0.05 0.06 0.03
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6") 203.2 (8")
Port Size
(BSPP)
R1 G1/4 G3/8 G3/8 G3/8 G1/2 G /2 G1/2 G3/4 G3/4

1
R2 G1/4 G1/44 G1/44 G1/44 G1/2 G1/2 G1/2 G3/4 G3/4
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (3 /4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6") 203.2 (8")
1 2
1
Port Size
(BSPP)
Oversize Ports
For higher speed applications, oversize ports can be supplied in all bore sizes. Ports one size larger than standard are the maximum that can be accommodated in most heads or caps within the standard envelope dimensions. Certain oversize metric, BSPT or NPTF ports require welded port bosses, which protrude from the side of the cylinder. Port sizes are shown in the tables opposite. Note that Y and P dimensions may vary slightly to accommodate oversize ports please contact the factory where these dimensions are critical.
R1 G3/8 G1/2 2 G1/2 2 G1/2 3 G3/4 3 G3/4 3 G3/4 3 G1 3 G1 3
R2 G3/8 G3/8 4 G3/8 4 G3/8 4 G3/4 3 G3/4 3 G3/4 3 G1 3 G1 3
Oversize Port Piston Tube l/min Port Size Bore Flow at Speed Metric mm 5m/sec1 (m/sec) M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M26x1.5 3 M26x1.5 3 M26x1.5 3 M33x2 3 M33x2 3 8 13 13 13 18 18 18 22 22 14.9 40.0 40.0 40.0 76.2 76.2 76.2 113.9 113.9 0.82 0.56 0.32 0.20 0.18 0.12 0.08 0.10 0.06
Port Size and Piston Speed

One of the factors which influences the speed of a hydraulic cylinder is fluid flow in the connecting lines, particularly at the cap end port, due to the absence of a piston rod. Fluid velocity in connecting lines should be limited to 5m/s to minimize fluid turbulence, pressure loss and water hammer effects. The tables opposite are a guide for use when determining whether cylinder ports are adequate for the application. Data shown gives piston speeds for standard and oversize ports and connecting lines where the velocity of the fluid is 5m/s. If the desired piston speed results in a fluid flow in excess of 5m/s in connecting lines, larger lines with two ports per cap should be considered. Parker recommends that a flow rate of 12m/s in connecting lines should not be exceeded.
This refers to fluid velocity in connecting lines, not piston velocity Requires welded port bosses on both head and cap 3 Requires welded port bosses on cap only 4 Tube bore, flow and piston speed data do not apply
Ports, Air Bleeds and Cushion Adjustment Location

The table below shows standard positions for ports, and cushion adjusting screws where fitted. However, by specifying the position numbers for the desired locations for head and cap ports, many mounting styles can be assembled with ports located at 90 or 180 from standard. In these cases, cushion needle 1 and check valves are also repositioned, where fitted, since their relation with the port position 4 2 does not change. Air bleeds, see page 43, may be fitted in unoccupied faces of the head or cap, depending on mounting.
3
Speed Limitations
Where large masses are involved, or piston speeds exceed 0.1m/s and the piston will make a full stroke, cushions are recommended see page 39. For cylinders with oversize ports and with a fluid velocity exceeding 8m/s into the cap end, please consult the factory with details of the application.
Manifold Ports
Manifold ports are available on all mounting styles to special order. Side mounted cylinders (Style C) can be supplied with the cylinder ports arranged for mounting and sealing to a manifold surface see page 35.
Mounting Styles
Positions of Ports and Cushion Screws in Head and Cap Head Cap Port Cushion Port Cushion
TB, TC, TD, J, JB, H & HB 1 2 1 2 2 3 2 3 3 4 3 4 4 1 4 1 1 2 1
BB, BC 2 3 3 4 3 4 1
D 1 3 1 3
5
DB 3 1 1 3 4 2 1 3 2 4 3 1 3 1 4 2 1 3 1 3 2 4 2 4
DD 3 1 3 1 4 2 4 2 1 2 1 2
G&F 2 4 2 4 4
1 2 1 2
1
4
2 4
3 1
Ports in positions 2 and 4 can be fitted. Please consult the factory.

41
Seals and Fluids

Group 1 2 3 Seal Materials a combination of: Nitrile (NBR), PTFE, enhanced polyurethane (AU) Nitrile (NBR), PTFE Ethylene Propylene (EPR), PTFE

Fluid Medium to ISO 6743/4-1982 Mineral Oil HH, HL, HLP, HLPD 1, HM, MIL-H 5606 oil, air, nitrogen Water glycol (HFC) Some phosphate ester fluids Skydrol 500, 700 Class 3 seals are not compatible with hydraulic oil Low temperature air or hydraulic oil Fire resistant fluids based on phosphate esters (HFD-R) Also suitable for hydraulic oil at high temperatures or in hot environments. Not suitable for use with Skydrol See fluid manufacturer's recommendations Water Oil in water emulsion 95/5 (HFA) Water in oil emulsion 60/40 (HFB) Temperature Range -20C to +80C 1 -20C to +60C -23C to 54C
4 5
Special (Nitrile) Fluorocarbon elastomer (FPM), PTFE
-46C to 66C -15C to +150C
6 7
1
Various compounds including nitrile, enhanced polyurethane, fluorocarbon elastomers and PTFE
+5C to +50C +5C to +50C
For HLPD fluids where the maximum temperature exceeds 60C, please contact the factory.
Operating Medium
Sealing materials used in standard cylinders are suitable for use with most petroleum-based hydraulic fluids. Special seals are available for use with water-glycol or water-in-oil emulsions, and with fluids such as fire-resistant synthetic phosphate ester and phosphate ester-based fluids. The table above is a guide to the sealing compounds and operating parameters of the materials used for standard and optional rod gland, piston and body seals. If there is any doubt regarding seal compatibility with the operating medium, please consult the factory.
Low Friction Seals

For applications where very low friction and an absence of stick-slip are important, the option of low friction seals is available. Please consult the factory.
Water Service
Special modifications to cylinders are available for high water content fluids. Modifications include a stainless steel piston rod with lipseal piston, and plating of internal surfaces. When ordering, please specify the maximum operating pressure or load/speed conditions, as the stainless steel rod is of lower tensile strength than the standard material.
Green Fluids
Special seals for use with specific 'green fluids' are available to special order. Please consult the factory for details.
Pure Water
Parker Hannifin can also supply cylinders for use with pure water as the fluid medium. Please consult the factory.
External Fluids
The environment in which a cylinder is used may cause fluids such as cutting fluids, coolants, and wash down fluids, to come into contact with the external surfaces of the cylinder. These fluids may attack the cylinder O-ring seals, the piston rod wiper and/or the rod seal, and must be taken into account when selecting and specifying seal compounds.
Warranty Parker Hannifin warrants cylinders modified for water or high water content fluid service to be free of defects in materials or workmanship, but cannot accept responsibility for premature failure caused by excessive wear resulting from lack of lubricity, or where failure is caused by corrosion, electrolysis or mineral deposits within the cylinder. Filtration
For maximum component life, the system should be protected from contamination by effective filtration. Fluid cleanliness should be in accordance with ISO 4406. The quantity of filters should be in accordance with the appropriate ISO standards. The rating of the filter medium depends on the system components and the application. The minimum required for hydraulic systems should be class 19/15 to ISO 4406, which equates to 24(b1075) to ISO 4572.
Temperature
Group 1 seals can be operated at temperatures between -20C and +80C. Where operating conditions result in temperatures which exceed these limits, special seal compounds may be required to ensure satisfactory service life please consult the factory. For seal groups 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7, where operating conditions fall outside of those specified in the table above, please contact the factory.
Optional and Special Seal Designs and Materials

Group 1 seals are fitted as standard to 3L cylinders. For other duties, the optional seal groups 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 are available please quote in the cylinder order code, shown on page 47. (Please note that system pressure for Group 6 seals for use with HFA fluids should not exceed 70 bar). Special seals can also be supplied please consult the factory with details of the application. Please insert an S (Special) in the order code and specify fluid medium when ordering.
42
Optional Features Air Bleeds

The option of bleed screws, illustrated on page 7, is available at either or both ends of the cylinder, at any position except in the port face see page 41. The selected positions should be shown in the order code see page 47.
Tie Rod Cylinders 3L Series Single-Acting Cylinders

Standard 3L series cylinders are of the double-acting type. They are also suitable for use as single-acting cylinders, where the load or other external force is used to return the piston after the pressure stroke. Cast iron piston rings should not be used with single-acting cylinders.
Stroke Limiters
Where absolute precision in stroke length is required, a screwed adjustable stop can be supplied at the cap end. Several types are available the illustration Seal shows a design suitable for infrequent adjustment of an uncushioned J Wrench cylinder. Please contact Square the factory, specifying details of the application and the adjustment required.
L K
Spring-Returned, Single-Acting Cylinders

Series 3L single-acting cylinders can also be supplied with an internal spring to return the piston after the pressure stroke. Please supply details of load conditions and friction factors, and advise whether the spring is required to extend or return the piston rod. On spring-returned cylinders, it is recommended that tie rod extensions be specified on the cylinder end in which the spring is located to allow the spring to be 'backed off' until compression is relieved. Tie rod nuts should be welded to the tie rods at the opposite end of the cylinder, to further assure safe disassembly. Please consult the factory when ordering spring-returned cylinders.
Bore 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (2 /2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6") 203.2 (8")
1
J 11 17 17 17 17 17 22 22
K min. 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85
L max. 127.0 127.0 203.2 203.2 203.2 228.6 228.6 457.2
Multiple Stroke Positioning

To obtain linear force in one plane with controlled stopping at intermediate points, several designs are available. For three stopped positions, it is common practice to mount two standard single rod Style H cylinders back-to-back, or to use through-tie rods. By extending or retracting the stroke of each cylinder independently, it is possible to achieve three positions at the piston ends. An alternative technique is to use a tandem cylinder with an independent piston rod in the cap section. Please consult the factory for further details.
Rod End Bellows

Unprotected piston rod surfaces which are exposed to contaminants with air hardening properties should be protected by rod end bellows. Longer rod extensions are required to accommodate the collapsed length of the bellows. Please consult the factory for further information.
Rod Locking Devices

These units provide positive locking of the piston rod. They require hydraulic pressure to release, while loss of pressure causes the clamp to operate, allowing them to be used as a fail-safe device. Please consult the factory for further information.
Metallic Rod Wipers

Metallic rod wipers replace the standard wiper seal, and are recommended where dust, ice or splashings might damage the wiper seal material. Metallic rod wipers do not affect cylinder dimensions.
Position Switches
These can be fitted to give reliable end of stroke signals. See catalogue HY07-0810/UK for details.
Position Feedback
Linear position transducers of various types are available for 3L series cylinders. Please consult the factory for further details.
43

Service Assembly Kits and Seal Kits for 3L cylinders simplify the ordering and maintenance processes. They contain sub-assemblies which are ready for installation, and are supplied with full instructions. When ordering Service Assemblies and Seal Kits, please refer to the identification plate on the cylinder body, and supply the following information:
60 1 61 1 69 69a 70 70a
Serial Number - Bore - Stroke - Model Number - Fluid Type

71
Key to Part Numbers

1 7 14 15 16 17 18 19 23 27 Head Cap Gland/bearing cartridge Cylinder body Piston - Cast Iron Ring Piston - Lipseal Cushion sleeve Tie rod Tie rod nut Retainer
72 73 74
1 2
Piston rod double (weaker 2) rod, no cushion Piston rod double (weaker 2) rod, cushion one end O-ring needle valve and check valve screws O-ring cartridge-type needle valve Needle valve, cushion adjustment bore sizes above 63.5mm (21/2) Needle valve assembly, cartridge type bore sizes up to 63.5mm (21/2) Ball cushion check valve bore sizes above 101.6mm (4) Cushion check valve screw bore sizes above 101.6mm (4) Floating cushion bush Retaining ring for cushion bush
Not illustrated See page 30 double rod strength

Gland Cartridge Wrench Spanner Wrench
Rod
12.7 15.9 25.4 34.9 44.5 50.8 63.5 76.2 88.9 101.6 127.0 139.7
69590 69590 69591 69592 69593 69594 69595 69596 69597 69598 69599 69600
48
11676 11676 11676 11703 11677 11677 11677 11677 11677 11677 11678 11678
16
34 35 36 37 40 41 42 43 44 45 47 48 55 57 1 58 1
Piston rod single rod, no cushion Piston rod single rod, cushion at head end Piston rod single rod, cushion at cap end Piston rod single rod, cushion at both ends Wiperseal for gland Lipseal for gland Lipseal for Lipseal piston Back-up washer for gland lipseal 41 (Groups 2, 5, 6 & 7 seals) Back-up washer for Lipseal piston O-ring gland/head O-ring cylinder body Cast iron piston ring Locking pin piston/rod Piston rod double (stronger 2) rod, no cushion Piston rod double (stronger 2) rod, cushion one end
Cast Iron Piston

40 43 41 14 45 44 42
17
Gland Cartridge and Seals
Lipseal Piston
44
(see key to part numbers opposite) RG Kit Gland Cartridge and Seals Contain items 14, 40, 41, 43, 45. Where the original gland incorporates a gland drain, please consult the factory. (Includes RK Kit). RK Kit Gland Cartridge Seals Contain items 40, 41, 43, 45.
Rod Diameter mm 12.7 (1/2") 15.9 (5/8") 25.4 (1") 34.9 (13/8") 44.5 (13/4") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 76.2 (3") 88.9 (3 /2") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 139.7 (51/2")
1
Tie Rod Cylinders 3L Series Contents and Part Numbers of Service Assembly Kits
Head Assembly
Non-cushioned: Cushioned: 1, 47 1, 47, 69, (69a), 70, (70a), 71, 72
Cap Assembly
Non-cushioned: Cushioned: 7, 47 7, 47, 69, (69a), 70, (70a), 73, 74
RG Kit Standard Gland Cartridge and Seals* RG2HLTS051 RG2HLTS061 RG2HLTS101 RG2HLTS131 RG2HLTS171 RG2HLTS201 RG2HLTS251 RG2HLTS301 RG2HLTS351 RG2HLTS401 RG2HLTS501 RG2HLTS551
RK Kit Seals for Standard Gland Cartridge* RK2HLTS051 RK2HLTS061 RK2HLTS101 RK2HLTS131 RK2HLTS171 RK2HLTS201 RK2HLTS251 RK2HLTS301 RK2HLTS351 RK2HLTS401 RK2HLTS501 RK2HLTS551
Cylinder Body
All types: 15
Cushion Screw/Cartridge Assembly

Screw type: Cartridge type: 69, 70 69a, 70a
Check Valve Screw Assembly

Screw type: 69, 71, 72 (bore sizes above 101.6mm)
Piston Rod Assemblies

These kits contain a fully assembled piston and rod assembly which is ready to install. They comprise a piston assembly, plus a rod assembly from the types listed below.
CB Kit Cylinder Body End Seals Contains two of item 47. PR Kit Piston Rings Contains CB Kit, plus three of item 48. PK Kit Piston Lip Seals Contains CB Kit, plus two each of items 42 and 44.
Bore 25.4 (1") 38.1 (11/2") 50.8 (2") 63.5 (21/2") 82.6 (31/4") 101.6 (4") 127.0 (5") 152.4 (6") 203.2 (8")
CB Body Seals * CB102HL001 CB152HL001 CB202HL001 CB252HL001 CB322HL001 CB402HL001 CB502HL001 CB602HL001 CB802HL001 PR Piston Rings* PR103L001 PR153L001 PR203L001 PR253L001 PR323L001 PR403L001 PR503L001 PR603L001 PR803L001 PK Piston Seals * PK102HLL01 PK152HLL01 PK202HLL01 PK252HLL01 PK322HLL01 PK402HLL01 PK502HLL01 PK602HLL01 PK802HLL01
Piston Assemblies
Cast Iron Ring: Lipseal: 16, 48 17, 42, 44
Rod Assemblies
Single rod, non-cushioned: Single rod, cushioned head: Single rod, cushioned cap: Single rod, cushioned both ends: Double rod, non-cushioned: Double rod, cushioned stronger end: Double rod, cushioned weaker end: Double rod, cushioned both ends: 34, 55 35, 18, 55 36, 55 37, 18, 55 57, 60, 55 58, 60, 18, 55 58, 61, 18, 55 58, 61, 18 x 2, 55
Tie Rod Torques

Repairs
Although 3L cylinders are designed to make on-site maintenance or repairs as easy as possible, some operations can only be carried out in our factory. It is standard policy to fit a cylinder returned to the factory for repair with those replacement parts which are necessary to return it to 'as good as new' condition. Should the condition of the returned cylinder be such that repair would be uneconomical, you will be notified.
* Seal Groups Ordering

The part numbers shown in the tables above are for Group 1 seals. For Group 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7 seals, substitute AHL for HLTS where used, and substitute a 2, 3, 4, '5', '6' or 7 for the '1' at the end of the number sequence. For example, a Group 5 RG Gland Cartridge Kit for a 50.8mm bore cylinder will be RG2AHL205.
Notes
Group 1 Seals are manufactured from an enhanced polyurethane material and do not require a gland lipseal back-up washer. These seals provide improved performance in mineral oil applications. They should not be used if the working fluid is water glycol. Group 6 Seals System pressure should not exceed 70 bar when using HFA fluids.
45
Piston Rod End Data
Piston Rod End Data 203.2mm (8) bore sizes only

Rod End Style 4

A W V
Rod End Style 8

A W V
Rod End Style 9

W V
B NA
KK
MM
B NA CC
MM
NA KK
MM
D Wrench Flats
D Wrench Flats
D Wrench Flats

Style 4 rod ends are recommended for all applications in which the work piece is secured against the rod shoulder. Where the work piece is not shouldered, Style 8 rod ends are recommended. If rod end style is not specified, Style 4 will be supplied.
Rod End Style 9

Rod End Style 3

Non-standard piston rod ends are designated 'Style 3'. A dimensional sketch or description should accompany the order. Please specify dimensions KK or CC, and A.
Rod End Dimensions 203.2mm (8) bore sizes only

Rod Bore No. 1 2 3 4 203.2 (8") 5 6 7
8 0
1
MM Rod Diameter 50.8 (2") 139.7 (5 /2") 63.5 (21/2") 76.2 (3") 88.9 (31/2") 101.6 (4") 34.9 (1 /8") 44.5 (13/4") 127.0 (5")
3 1
Style 4 & 9 KK Metric M39x2 M100x2 M48x2 M58x2 M64x2 M76x2 M26x1.5 M33x2 M90x2 KK UNF 1 11/2 - 12 4 - 12 17/8 - 12 21/4 - 12 21/2 - 12 3 - 12 1 - 14 11/4 - 12 3 /2 - 12
1
Style 8 CC Metric M45x2 M130x2 M56x2 M68x2 M76x2 M95x2 M30x2 M39x2 M110x2 CC UNF 13/4 - 12 51/4 - 12 21/4 - 12 23/4 - 12 31/4 - 12 33/4 - 12 11/4 - 12 11/2 - 12 43/4 - 12 A 57.2 139.7 76.2 88.9 88.9 101.6 41.3 50.8 127.0
+0.00
B
-0.05
D 41 120 55 65 75 85 30 36 110
NA 49.2 136.5 60.3 73.0 85.7 98.4 33.3 42.9 123.8
V 9.5 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 6.3 9.5 12.7
W 31.8 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 22.2 28.6 38.1
66.65 158.72 79.35 95.22 107.92 120.62 50.77 60.30 146.02
All rod threads are UNF except 1 - 14 which is UNS.
46
How To Order
C Bore Cushion Head Page 39 Double Rod K 3L Mounting Ports Series Style Mounting Modifications Piston Type S

C Piston Rod End Rod Thread Cushion Cap Page 39 Net Stroke (mm) Code Fluid Medium Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Fluid Medium Air Bleeds
Special Features
Piston Rod Number
Port Positions
Page 42 42 42 42 42 42 42
Code S S S S S S S
Special Features Page Oversize Ports 41 Rod End Bellows 43 Special Seals 42 Stop Tube 37 Stroke Limiter 43 Tie Rod Supports 34 Water Service Modifications 42 or to customer specification Page 7 7
M C P R D A1 B
Code C L Code R1 R2 G Y U
Piston Cast Iron Piston Rings (Standard) Lipseal
Code 1 1
Port Position Head position 1-4 Cap position 1-4
Page 41 41
Code Port Style Page BSPP thread (R1 sizes) 41 BSPP thread (R2 sizes) 41 Metric 41 Metric to ISO 6149 41 NPTF (dry seal pipe thread) 41 Code M A 4 4 00
Air Bleed Position Head position 1-4 Cap position 1-4 No air bleeds
Page 43 43 43
Code P M
Modification Page Thrust Key (Styles C, F, G) 34 Manifold Port O-Ring Seal (Style C only) 35 Page 10, 22 10, 22 10, 22 12, 24 12, 24 14, 24 14, 24 16, 26 16, 26 17, 27 18, 25 18 20, 28 20, 28 20, 28 Code 4 8 9 3
Thread Metric (standard) UNF (optional)
Page 3, 46 3, 46
Code TB TC TD J JB H HB C F G BB BC D DB DD
Mounting Style Tie Rods Extended Head End Tie Rods Extended Cap End Tie Rods Extended Both Ends Head Rectangular Flange Head Square Flange Cap Rectangular Flange Cap Square Flange Side Lug Mounting Side Tapped Mounting Side End Lug Cap Fixed Clevis Cap Detachable Clevis Head Trunnion Cap Trunnion Intermediate Trunnion
Rod End Style Style 4 Style 8 Style 9 Style 3 (Special) please supply description or drawing
Page 3, 46 3, 46 3, 46 3, 46
Code eg:1
Rod Number Select from Rod No.1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 0
Page
3, 46
Key
Double Rod Cylinders Example

38.1 C K J 3L R1 L 1 4 M 1 4 M C 127 D 11 44
Accessories
47
Hydraulics Group Sales Offices

Europe
Austria
Wiener Neustadt Tel: +43 (0)2622 23501 970 Fax: +43 (0)2622 23501 977
International
Italy
Australia
Belgium
Nivelles Parc Industriel Sud-Zone II Tel: +32 (0)67 280 900 Fax: +32 (0)67 280 999
The Netherlands
Canada
Czech Republic
Norway
Prague Tel: +420 2 830 85 221 Fax: +420 2 830 85 360
Ski Tel: +47 64 91 10 00 Fax: +47 64 91 10 90
China
Beijing Tel: +86 10 6561 0520 Fax: +86 10 6561 0526
Denmark
Poland
Ishj Tel: +45 4356 0400 Fax: +45 4373 8431
Warsaw Tel: +48 (0)22 863 49 42 Fax: +48 (0)22 863 49 44
Asia Pacific Group
Hong Kong, Kowloon Tel: +852 2428 8008 Fax: +852 2425 6896
Finland
Portugal
Vantaa Tel: +358 (0)9 4767 31 Fax: +358 (0)9 4767 3200
India
Mumbai Tel: +91 22 7907081 Fax: +91 22 7907080
France
Slovakia Spain
Ref. Czech Republic Madrid Tel: +34 91 675 73 00 Fax: +34 91 675 77 11
Japan
Tokyo Tel: +(81) 3 6408 3900 Fax: +(81) 3 5449 7201
Germany
Latin America Group

Brazil Tel: +55 12 3954-5100 Fax: +55 12 3954-5266
Kaarst Tel: +49 (0)2131 4016 0 Fax: +49 (0)2131 4016 9199
Sweden
Hungary
Budapest Tel: +36 (06)1 220 4155 Fax: +36 (06)1 422 1525
Spnga Tel: +46 (0)8 597 950 00 Fax: +46 (0)8 597 951 10
South Africa
United Kingdom
Ireland
Clonee Tel: +353 (0)1 801 4010 Fax: +353 (0)1 801 4132
Watford (industrial) Tel: +44 (0)1923 492 000 Fax: +44 (0)1923 256 059 Ossett (mobile) Tel: +44 (0)1924 282 200 Fax: +44 (0)1924 282 299
USA
Catalogue HY07-1130/UK 2M 05/03 PD
48
Parker Hannifin Corporation Parker Hannifin plc Cylinder Division All rights reserved. Europe
Copyright 2003
ACP Series Piston Accumulators

PED 97/23/EC accumulators for working pressures up to 275 bar
Catalogue HY07-1246/UK July 2002
Introduction and Features Introducing the new ACP Series ....

Parker's new ACP Series piston accumulators are tough, reliable units designed to withstand high compression ratios. Offering exceptional strength and fatigue resistance, the ACP range of premium quality accumulators combines a design proven in the most demanding mobile and industrial environments with an innovative manufacturing process. ACP Series piston accumulators are a cost-effective alternative to diaphragm and bladder accumulator designs.
Piston Accumulators ACP Series

Rugged Construction ACP Series accumulators feature a high strength, compact, steel shell and caps, permanently joined and sealed by a revolutionary crimping process. ! effective heat dissipation prevents fluid and seal degradation ! superior fatigue life ! micro-finished for extended seal life Effective, Durable Sealing 50mm bore models feature Parker's unique, patented fivebladed V-O-ring piston seal. The 40mm model combines an elastomeric seal with a low friction PTFE piston ring. All models employ PTFE bearing rings to eliminate metal-to-metal contact between the tube and piston. ! dependable, full pressure storage of hydraulic energy ! effective separation of fluid and gas for long service intervals ! reduced wear for extended service life ! safe in operation cannot suffer catastrophic failure Unlike a bladder or diaphragm unit, the piston and seal design prevents sudden failure of the accumulator, making the ACP particularly suitable for applications such as steering and braking circuits where catastrophic failure could be dangerous. Protective Steel Gas Cap Models fitted with a gas valve are supplied with a protective steel cap. Tamperproof versions are fitted with a threaded plug which provides progressive release of pre-charge pressure prior to safe disposal. ! steel cap reduces the risk of damage from external impact ! security cap provides a secondary seal Spanner Holes To permit easy installation on hydraulic manifolds, or in areas where mounting space is restricted, spanner holes are provided on all models.
Why use an ACP Series Piston Accumulator?

! high-strength crimped construction provides long, reliable service life ! small piston seal area minimizes the permeability problems associated with diaphragm accumulators ! maintenance-free, sealed-for-life design ! versatile wide range of lengths and bore sizes allows installation to be adapted to available space ! rechargeable and 'tamperproof' versions available with gas valve for customer charging, or valveless ! manufactured to EU Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC can be used in any European Union or EEA country without additional certification ! custom sizes available for unique applications
Specification
Standard volumes Bore diameters Max. working pressure Max. piston speed Working temp. range 0.08 to 0.95 litres 40mm and 50mm 260 bar 40mm bore sizes 275 bar 50mm bore sizes 4m/s shell: -20C to +150C seals: see table on page 3
Rechargeable or 'Tamperproof' Designs

ACP Series accumulators are available in two versions. Rechargeable models allow the user to monitor and regulate the gas pre-charge to suit different operating conditions, and feature a Schrader-type gas valve cartridge to ISO 4570 8V1. Tamperproof, sealed-for-life versions of the ACP are pre-charged on assembly to customer specification and are completely maintenance-free.
Features and Benefits

Lightweight Piston The ACP Series feature a dished, lightweight aluminium piston, deep-walled for stability in the bore. ! high efficiency fast response times ! reduced system shock in rapid cycling applications ! extra gas capacity 2
Parker Hannifin Cylinder Division Europe
Application Data Applications

! Construction and mining equipment suspension and load stabilising systems, emergency back-up for steering, braking and pilot circuits ! Hydrostatic drives shock absorption when changing direction ! Assembly automation reducing noise and smoothing pump pulsations ! Fork lifts and cherry pickers pressure spike damping ! Transportation vehicles suspension and braking systems ! Turbine engines maintaining oil pressure for lubrication ! Machine tools energy saving
Piston Accumulators ACP Series Seals, Fluids and Temperature Ranges

Seal Type Code Fluid Medium General purpose, petroleum-based fluids High temperature and/or synthetic fluids Phosphate-esters Most oil-based and biodegradable fluids Temperature Range -30C to +75C
Nitrile (NBR) Fluorocarbon Elastomer (FPM) Ethylene Propylene (EPR) Hydrogenated Nitrile (HNBR)
-25C to +120C
-40C to +120C
-40C to +160C
Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC

All ACP Series piston accumulators are manufactured in compliance with the European Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC, recognized and accepted in all member states of the European Union and European Economic Area. Accumulators with a gas volume of less than 1 litre do not require CE marking or a Declaration of Conformity, but must be manufactured in accordance with sound engineering practice to ensure safety in use.
Optional Ports
Hydraulic ports are available in a range of male and female sizes, in both BSPP, metric and SAE styles. Metric ports are offered to both the DIN 3852-1 and the ISO 6149-1 standards see pages 4 and 5.
Maximum Flow Rates

Volume Litres 0.08 - 0.32 0.50 - 0.95 Max. Recommended Flow Litres per Minute 40 100
Mounting
The choice of lengths and bore sizes available in the ACP range makes these piston accumulators particularly suitable for applications where mounting space is critical. The same fluid capacity can be achieved from different configurations of bore and overall length, providing exceptional versatility for the designer. 'U' bolts are recommended for the secure attachment of larger ACP accumulators please contact the factory for further information.
The flow rates shown are for standard port sizes. For higher flow ports, please contact the factory.
Parker's Accumulator Product Range

Parker offers an extensive range of accumulators and associated products for mobile and industrial applications. In addition to the accumulators listed in the table, the
Series Construction & Type Crimped, piston Threaded, piston Threaded, piston Bladder Standard Approval CE CE CE CE Max. Working Pressure 275* 350 350 350
range includes UCA charging and gauging kits (bulletin no. 1244-T) and ASB safety blocks (catalogue no. 1241).
Fluid Capacity litres 0.08-0.95 0.1-38 6-300 1-48.5
Bore Dia.
Max. Piston Speed 4m/s 4m/s 8m/s
Mounting Interface Metric Metric & Inch Metric Metric
Catalogue
ACP A AP ABE
40-50mm 50-150mm 2-6 in. 180-360mm
1246/UK 1245/UK 1240/UK 1235/UK
* 260 bar for 40mm bore models
Dimensions
Dimensions ACP with Gas Valve (Code A)

Model Code 008 016 032 050 016 032 050 075 100 Bore Volume Litres 0.08 0.16 0.32 0.50 0.16 0.32 0.50 0.75 0.95 D (BSPP) A B 155 225 365 523 177 254 341 461 558 C Female Male
ACP04EA
38
44.5
25.4
G3/8
G3/4
B
25.4 G3/4 G1
ACP05EA
51
60.5
D C
Dimensions ACP without Gas Valve (Code D)

Model Code 008 016 032 050 016 032 050 075 100 Bore Volume Litres 0.08 0.16 0.32 0.50 0.16 0.32 0.50 0.75 0.95 A B 132 202 342 500 154 231 318 438 534 C
D (BSPP) Female Male
ACP04ED
38
44.5
G3/8
G3/4
ACP05ED
51
60.5
G3/4
G1
D A
Male Port all models Port Availability

Female BSPP Model 3/8 ACP04 ACP05 1/2 o o 3/4 3/4 1 M14x1.5 M18x1.5 M22x1.5 M18x1.5 M22x1.5 o 6 8 10 12 16 Male BSPP Female Metric * Male Metric *
D
Female SAE
Male SAE

o o
standard optional
* Metric ports are available to DIN 3852-1 or ISO 6149-1
All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise specified.
Ordering Code
AC Series
P Model Options Working Pressure Capacity
2 Design Number Seal Type Port Size
Piston Type Code 04 05 Bore Size (Nominal) 40mm 50mm
Type of construction
Code 2 4 1 3
Port BSPP port Metric port SAE port Special
Code E A
Approval Type To PED 97/23/EC for use in Europe No approvals not for European use
Code A D
Valve Options Gas valve (standard) No gas valve
Code K E D H S
Service/Fluid Standard High temperatures Phosphate-esters Extended temp. range Special
Code Model Volume 008 04 0.08 litre 016 04 0.16 litre 032 04 0.32 litre 050 04 0.50 litre 016 032 050 075 100 05 05 05 05 05 0.16 litre 0.32 litre 0.50 litre 0.75 litre 0.95 litre
Code RA RB RC RD LC LD GA GB GC HB HC YA YB YC ZB ZC TB TC TI AD AE
Port Size and Type 3/8" BSPP Female 1/2" BSPP Female 3/4" BSPP Female 1" BSPP Female 3/4" BSPP 1" BSPP Male Male
M14 x 1.5 DIN 3852-1 Female M18 x 1.5 DIN 3852-1 Female M22 x 1.5 DIN 3852-1 Female M18 x 1.5 DIN 3852-1 Male M22 x 1.5 DIN 3852-1 Male M14 x 1.5 ISO 6149-1 Female M18 x 1.5 ISO 6149-1 Female M22 x 1.5 ISO 6149-1 Female M18 x 1.5 ISO 6149-1 Male M22 x 1.5 ISO 6149-1 Male SAE #6 SAE #8 SAE #10 SAE #12 SAE #16 Female Female Female Male Male
For more information about Parker's range of accumulator products, please contact: Parker Hannifin plc 6 Greycaine Road Watford Herts. UK WD24 7QA Phone: 01923 492000 Fax: 01923 210562 Email: hydraulic_sales_uk@parker.com Visit us at www.parker.com
Code R E
Working Pressure 260 bar (40mm bore only) 275 bar (50mm bore only)
WARNING
Failure or improper selection or use of the product and/or systems described herein can cause death, personal injury and property damage. This document and other information from Parker Hannifin Corporation, its subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product and/or system options for further investigation by users having technical expertise. It is important that all aspects of the application are analysed and the information concerning the product or system in the current product catalogue is reviewed. Due to the variety of operating conditions and applications for these products or systems, the user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making the final selection of the products and systems and assuring that all performance, safety and warning requirements of the application are met. The products described herein, including without limitation, product features, specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by Parker Hannifin Corporation and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
Offer of Sale
The items described in this document are hereby offered for sale by Parker Hannifin Corporation, its subsidiaries or authorized distributors. This offer and its acceptance are governed by the provisions stated in the full 'Offer of Sale'.
Cylinder Division Sales Offices

Austria Marchtrenk Parker Hannifin GmbH Tel: (7242) 56921 Fax: (7242) 5692120 Belgium Nivelles Parker Hannifin SA NV Tel: 67 280 900 Fax: 67 280 999 Czech Republic Prague Parker Hannifin Corporation Tel: (02) 830 85 221 Fax: (02) 830 85 360 Denmark Ishj Parker Hannifin Danmark A/S Tel: 43 56 04 00 Fax: 43 73 31 07 Finland Vantaa Parker Hannifin Oy Tel: 9 476 731 Fax: 9 476 73200 France Contamine-sur-Arve Parker Hannifin SA Tel: 4 50 25.80.25 Fax: 4 50 03.67.37 Germany Cologne Parker Hannifin GmbH Tel: (221) 71720 Fax: (221) 7172219 Hungary Budapest Parker Hannifin Corp. Tel: 1 252 8137 Fax: 1 252 8129 Ireland Clonee Parker Sales (Ireland) Ltd. Tel: (353) 1 8014010 Fax: (353) 1 8014132 Italy Arsago-Seprio Parker Hannifin S.p.A. Tel: (0331) 765611 Fax: (0331) 765612 Netherlands Oldenzaal Parker Hannifin B.V. Tel: (0541) 585000 Fax: (0541) 585459 Norway Ski Parker Hannifin A/S Tel: 64 91 10 00 Fax: 64 91 10 90 Poland Warsaw Parker Hannifin Corp. Tel: (22) 863 49 42 Fax: (22) 863 49 44 Portugal Leca da Palmeira Parker Hannifin Portugal Lda. Tel: (22) 999 7360 Fax: (22) 996 1527 Slovakia Ref. Czech Republic Spain Madrid Parker Hannifin Espana S.A. Tel: (91) 675 73 00 Fax: (91) 675 77 11 Sweden Spnga Parker Hannifin AB. Tel: 08 5979 50 00 Fax: 08 5979 51 20 Switzerland Romanshorn Hydrel A.G. Romanshorn Tel: (714) 66 66 66 Fax: (714) 66 63 33 Turkey Istanbul Hidroser Hidrolik - Pnmatik Tel: (212) 886 72 70 Fax: (212) 886 69 35 United Kingdom Watford Parker Hannifin Plc Tel: (01923) 492000 Fax: (01923) 248557
Need a Parker part? Call Parker's European Product Information Centre on 00800 27 27 5374
HY07-1246/1-UK 2M PD 0702
Hd
li
A Series Piston Accumulators

250 & 350 bar accumulators with fluid volumes from 0.1 litres to 76 litres
Piston Accumulators A Series Page

2 2 3 4 5 6 6 6 7 8 10 11

Accumulator Selection
Parker offers a comprehensive range of CE-approved piston and bladder accumulators to suit different application and performance criteria. A Series piston accumulators, described in this catalogue, are designed for industrial and mobile applications where piston speeds and flow rates are relatively low, such as in suspension systems, power units and pressure maintenance. AP Series piston accumulators are high performance accumulators designed for demanding industrial applications such as die-casting and plastic injection moulding, where high flow rates and piston speeds up to 8m/s are routinely demanded. AP Series accumulators are described in catalogue HY07-1247. BAE Series bladder accumulators For applications where fast response times, a higher tolerance of fluid contamination and an instantaneous failure mode are required, the BAE Series of bladder accumulators is available see catalogue HY07-1235. When selecting an accumulator, factors to be considered should include the following: appropriate certification for the country of final destination maximum working pressure fluid capacity gas capacity flow rate, port type and size mounting space and orientation Guidance regarding the selection of a piston or bladder accumulator is provided in Parker bulletin HY07-1243, Making the Choice. In addition, the type of gas valve and its connection and the requirement for a charging and gauging kit should also be considered. In certain industrial applications, the use of a safety shut-off valve or safety block is mandatory, and a suitable valve should be incorporated into the system design. Parker offers a range of safety blocks for this purpose see catalogue HY07-1241.
Accumulator Selection Certification Specification Features and Benefits Capacities and Dimensions Ports Operating Temperatures Seals and Fluid Media Options and Spare Parts Accumulator Sizing Accessories How to Order

Certification
Accumulators are pressure vessels which are subject to the safety laws and regulations of the country in which they are operated. In addition, other industry-specific regulations may apply in applications such as shipbuilding, aviation etc. Prior to the adoption of the Europe-wide CE approval for pressure vessels in 2002, many European member states operated their own approvals systems, eg: TV in Germany, DRIRE in France, ISPESL in Italy etc. Following the introduction of the Pressure Equipment Directive (97/23/EC), users of accumulators can opt for CE approval in place of existing national standards. CE approval incorporates the requirements of all existing national approvals, enabling an approved pressure vessel to be used in any European Union member state without the need for local approval.
Mounting
The wide variety of lengths and bore sizes available within Parkers piston accumulator range makes this design particularly suitable for applications where mounting space is critical. The same fluid capacity can be achieved from different configurations of bore and overall length, providing exceptional versatility for the designer. While the optimum mounting orientation is vertical, angled and horizontal mountings are permissible if the hydraulic fluid is kept clean; high levels of contaminants in the fluid can result in uneven or accelerated seal wear.
Special Designs
For applications where a standard accumulator is not suitable, our engineers will be pleased to discuss custom designs to suit your application.
Industry-Leading Systems Capability

Parkers comprehensive range of pumps, valves, hoses and filtration products enables you to design and build a complete hydraulic system with proven, 100% compatible parts. With value-adding services which extend from design to commissioning and in-service support, you can be confident that Parker is the right partner for your motion and control application.
Parker Hannifin plc Cylinder Division Watford, Herts.
Specification 250 and 350 Bar Pressure Ranges

A Series accumulators are available to suit maximum working pressures of 250 and 350 bar. The same premium quality design and technical features guarantee optimum performance and service life from every model, while differing wall thicknesses to suit 250 or 350 bar working pressures allow the designer to specify precisely the right performance envelope for the application.
Piston Accumulators A Series Available Options

A wide variety of options is available for A Series accumulators, including: Threaded and manifold port styles and sizes Seal compounds Metric and inch mounting styles High flow gas ports for use with remote gas storage bottles Water service versions Gas valves 250 and 350 bar 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200mm 50, 75, 100, 150mm shell: -20 to +150C (CE approved) seals: see page 6 (other temperatures consult factory) 0.176 litres 4m/s BSPP (standard others on request) 350 bar rated cored type CE (standard others on request) The rating of the filter media depends on the system components and the application. The minimum required for hydraulic systems should be class 19/15 to ISO 4406, which equates to 25 (1075) to ISO 4572. Safety fuses Accumulator mounting systems Precharge monitors and piston position sensors Certifications to suit different market requirements
Specification
Max. working pressures Bore sizes (nominal): 250 bar range 350 bar range Working temp. range
Filtration
For maximum component life, the system should be protected from contamination by effective filtration. Fluid cleanliness should be in accordance with ISO 4406. The quality of filters should be in accordance with the appropriate ISO standards.
Fluid volumes Max. piston speed Port style Gas valve Approval
Materials
Shell high strength steel End caps steel Pistons lightweight aluminium alloy Piston and end cap seals NBR (standard): other compounds to suit application Piston seal backup washers PTFE Piston bearing rings PTFE Gas valve assembly stainless steel Gas valve protector steel Paint finish black primer (standard others on request)
Safety
Charging must be carried out by qualified personnel. Before taking any readings or pressurizing with nitrogen, the accumulator must be isolated from the hydraulic system and the fluid side discharged in order to depressurize it. Use only nitrogen (N2) to pressurize the accumulator.
Danger of Explosion Never Charge with Oxygen

The types of nitrogen permitted are: type S (99.8% pure); type R (99.99% pure); type U (99.993% pure).
Custom Designs
For unique applications and hostile environments, different designs, materials and coatings can be supplied. Please contact our engineering department to discuss custom solutions to individual application requirements.
Actual Bore Sizes and Theoretical Maximum Flow Rates

Model Pressure A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A8 250/350 250/350 250/350 250 250/350 250
Nominal Bore Dia. 50 75 100 125 150 200 Actual Bore Dia. 51.4 76.2 102.4 127.0 146.9 200.0 Recommended Max. Flow lpm 380 825 1500 2200 3100 5700
Features and Benefits
Piston Accumulators A Series
3 2 8
10
1, 2 & 3 Shell and Caps

Effective heat dissipation is vital for long seal life. Compact, rugged steel shell and end caps allow heat to dissipate efficiently, while the bore of the accumulator is micro-finished to maximise seal life. Downtime is minimised by the use of threaded caps to simplify maintenance of the accumulator, permitting quick and easy installation of seals.
6 PTFE Bearing Rings

To reduce wear and extend service life, carbon-filled PTFE bearing rings are fitted, eliminating metal-to-metal contact between the piston and bore.
7 Safety Bleed Grooves

A bleed groove in the gas cap progressively releases unrelieved gas pressure in the accumulator as the gas cap is unscrewed. Note: to avoid the risk of damage or injury, an accumulator must always be discharged before disassembly.
4 Piston
Rapid response in high cycling applications is assured by Parkers lightweight piston design. The dished profile of the aluminium piston gives extra gas capacity while maintaining stability in the bore, and permits a greater usable volume of fluid. Piston position sensors, available as an optional feature, enable the condition of the accumulators precharge to be monitored.
8 Gas Valve
To avoid the risk of damage or injury, an accumulator must be discharged before disassembling. For added safety, the gas valves fitted by Parker vent progressively as they are unscrewed. A robust, cored-type gas valve rated at 350 bar is fitted as standard to all A Series piston accumulators. A mechanically opened and closed poppet-type gas valve cartridge, also rated at 350 bar, is available as an option.
5 Piston Sealing
Long service intervals are made possible by total separation of oil and gas, even under the most severe operating conditions. Parkers A Series accumulators feature a wide piston seal assembly comprising a unique five-bladed V-profile O-ring with back-up washers, which eliminates seal roll-over even in high speed applications. The V-O-ring holds full pressure throughout long idle periods between cycles, providing dependable, full pressure storage of hydraulic energy.
9 Gas Valve Protector

To prevent accidental and potentially hazardous damage to the gas valve, the steel gas valve protector reduces the risk to the valve from external impact.
10 Ports
PTFE back-up washer
To provide the required flow rate and simplify system design, a wide range of port types and sizes is available. BSPP ports are supplied as standard; ISO, metric and SAE threaded and metric flanged ports to ISO 6162 are available to special order.
V-O-ring
Capacities and Dimensions

Mounting holes E Thread G Deep
F p.c.d.
A D
250 and 350 Bar Models, Capacities and Dimensions

Model C ode 0005 0010 0015 0029 0058 0029 0058 0090 0116 0183 0058 0116 0231 0347 0578 0058 0116 0231 0347 0578 0231 0347 0578 0924 1155 1733 2310 0578 1155 1733 2310 2772 2888 3465 4620 F l ui d Gas Bore Volume Volume Litres Litres 0.1 0.15 0.25 0.5 1.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 1.0 2.0 3.8 5.7 9.5 1.0 2.0 3.8 5.7 9.5 3.8 5.7 9.5 15 19 28.5 38 9.5 19 28.5 38 45 47 57 76 0.1 0.2 0.25 0.5 1.0 0.55 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 1.1 2.0 4.0 5.9 9.6 1.3 2.2 4.1 6.0 9.8 4.3 6.2 10.0 15.7 19.4 28.9 38.4 10.7 20.2 29.7 39.1 46.2 48.2 58.0 77.2
250 Bar A B 172 211 250 360 590 260 364 481 573 814 295 411 640 872 1330 272 346 496 645 943 442 554 778 1113 1337 1896 2454 629 931 1232 1532 1774 1834 2136 2738 D BSPP A
350 Bar B 172 211 250 360 590 260 364 481 573 814 306 422 651 883 1341 D BSPP C E2 F G
250 Bar 350 Bar Weight kg 1.8 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.4 9.0 11 13 14 16 15 18 23 29 41 22 26 32 39 52 35 42 54 73 85 112 147 98 122 146 170 189 194 217 266 2.7 3.0 3.3 4.3 6.2 9.0 11 13 15 20 18 22 30 38 54 53 60 74 96 110 148 183
A2
51.4
61
G3/4
64
G3/4
27 1
A3
76.2
91
G3/4
96
G3/4
29 1
M10
60
15
A4
102.4
121
G1
127
G1
29 1
M12
82
18
A5
127.0
153
G1
29 1
M12
100
18
A6
146.9
175
G11/2
180
487 600 824 1159 1383 1941 2500
G1
29 1
M12
110
18
A8
200.0
230
G2
42
M16
170
24
Ports and Fluid Media

Notes to Tables
1
Piston Accumulators A Series Hydraulic and Gas Ports

The ports shown on page 5 are supplied as standard at the fluid ends of A Series accumulators, and at the gas ends of these accumulators when ordered for use with gas bottles. A range of optional threaded and flanged ports is also available, as shown in the tables below. These are specified by adding the relevant code to the accumulator model number see page 11. Note that, where the required fluid port is the standard BSPP size for the accumulator model chosen, the fluid port field in the order code should be left blank.
Metric to ISO 6149-1 Thread Size M14 M18 M22 M27 M33 M42 From Model A2 A2 A2 A2 A3 A3 Code YA YB YC YD YE YF Thread Size #5 #6 #8 #10 #12 #16 #20 #24 SAE Thread From Model A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A3 A3 A4 Code TA TB TC TI TD TE TF TG
Where the optional poppet-type gas valve is fitted (see page 7), dimension C should be increased by 13mm. A Series piston accumulators are supplied as standard with the metric threaded mounting holes shown in the table. They are also available with inch pattern mounting holes, indicated by the Design Number in the model code see page 11.
Optional Threaded Ports

BSPP 1 Thread Size G /4 G1 G11/4 G11/2 G2 1
Metric to DIN 3852-1 Code RC RD RE RF RG Thread Size M14 M18 M22 M27 M33 M4 2 From Model A2 A2 A2 A2 A3 A3 Code GA GB GC GD GE GF -
From Model A2 A3 A3 A4 A4 -
Where the required fluid port is the standard BSPP size for the accumulator bore diameter chosen (see dimension D, page 5), the fluid port field in the order code on page 11 should be left blank.
Optional Flanged Ports

A Series accumulators are available with metric flange ports to ISO 6162, as shown in the table. Inch pattern flange ports and flange ports for higher pressure operation are also available please consult the factory for details.
A
Flange Size DN13 DN19 DN25 DN32 DN38 From Model A3 A3 A3 A3 A4 A4 A6 A8
Flange Por ts to ISO 6162 A* M8 M10 M10 M10 M12 M12 M12 M16 B
0.25
C
0.25
F 13 19 25 32 38 51 64 76
Code MT MU MV MW MJ ML MM MN
17.5 22.3 26.2 30.2 35.7 42.9 50.8 61.9
38.1 47.6 52.4 58.7 69.9 77.8 88.9 106.4
DN51 DN64 DN76
* Parker recommends that bolts with a minimum strength of ISO 898/1 grade 12.9 should be used for attaching port flanges to the accumulator.
Operating Temperatures, Seals and Fluids

A Series piston accumulators are fitted as standard with nitrile (NBR) seals. A range of alternative seal materials is available for use at higher or lower temperatures, or with synthetic or high water content fluids, as shown in the table. Other seals are also available for use in exceptional conditions please consult the factory with details of the application. The shells of Parkers A series accumulators are CE approved for operation at temperatures between -20C and +150C.
Seal Type Nitrile (NBR) Fluorocarbon Elastomer (FPM) Ethylene Propylene (EPR) Hydrogenated Nitrile (HNBR) Carboxilated Nitrile (XNBR) Low Temperature Nitrile (NBR) Code K E D H J Q Fluid Medium General purpose, petroleum-based fluids High temperature and/or synthetic fluids Phosphate-esters Most oil-based and biodegradable fluids Water glycol, high water content fluids General purpose fluids at low temperatures
Temperature Range -30C to +75C -25C to +120C -40C to +120C -40C to +160C -30C to +75C -45C to +70C
Water Service
A Series piston accumulators are available for use with water as the fluid medium. Modifications include plating of all working surfaces. Please consult the factory for details.
Optional Features and Spares Gas Valves

The standard gas charging valve fitted to A Series 250 and 350 bar piston accumulators is a cored-type gas valve, rated at 350 bar. A mechanically opened and closed poppet-type gas valve cartridge, also rated at 350 bar, is available as an option. Both types of charging valve may be used with the Charging and Gauging Kit illustrated on page 10.
Safety Fuses
Safety fuses are available on A Series accumulators to prevent over-pressurization of gas due to external heat or excess hydraulic pressure. They comprise a housing incorporating a disk which is calibrated to rupture at a pre-determined pressure, to be specified by the customer at the time of ordering. Please contact the factory for further information.
Standard Cored-Type Gas Valve Optional Poppet-Type Gas Valve
Piston Position Sensors

Position sensors, available as an optional feature, enable a wide range of conditions to be monitored. The design illustrated is one of several available to suit differing applications. In this design, non-contacting proximity sensors monitor the travel of a steel rod which bears against the gas side of the piston, indicating piston positions specified by the customer. The resulting signals can be used to switch pumps on or off, or to operate control valves in a pre-set sequence. For more information, please contact our Engineering Department with details of the application.
x x = customer specified dimension x
Piston Accumulator Seal Kits

Seal kits are available for all A Series accumulator models. When ordering seal kits, please supply the complete model number from the identification plate and specify the fluid type and the temperature at which the accumulator is to be used.
Seal Kit Numbers

The seal kits listed contain items 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 11. Parts List
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Shell Hydraulic cap Gas cap Piston V-O-ring V-O-ring back-up washers PTFE bearing ring (piston) 8 O-ring 9 O-ring back-up washer 10 Gas valve 11 Gas valve O-ring 12 Gas valve protector 13 Gas valve protector screw 2
5&6
1 3 10
12 11 13 4 8&9
Model A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A8
Nitrile NBR RK0200K000 RK0300K000 RK0400K000 RK0500K000 RK0600K000 RK0800K000
Fluorocarbon Elastomer FPM RK0200E000 RK0300E000 RK0400E000 RK0500E000 RK0600E000 RK0800E000
Ethylene Propylene EPR RK0200D000 RK0300D000 RK0400D000 RK0500D000 RK0600D000 RK0800D000
Hydrogenated Nitrile HNBR RK0200H000 RK0300H000 RK0400H000 RK0500H000 RK0600H000 RK0800H000
Carboxilated Nitrile XNBR RK0200J000 RK0300J000 RK0400J000 RK0500J000 RK0600J000 RK0800J000
Low Temp. Nitrile NBR RK0200Q000 RK0300Q000 RK0400Q000 RK0500Q000 RK0600Q000 RK0800Q000
Sizing an Accumulator Calculating Accumulator Size

Accurate calculation of accumulator size requires many factors to be considered the working volume of fluid, ambient and maximum operating temperatures, the working pressure range etc. In addition, correction factors must be applied to allow for temperature compensation between the ambient and gas temperatures, and the consequent effect on precharge pressure in the accumulator. Where the working cycle is sufficiently rapid that no heat transfer takes place, the process is termed adiabatic. Conversely, where the process takes place at a constant temperature, it is termed isothermal.
Piston Accumulators A Series How to Use the Sizing Chart

These charts are used to find accumulator size Vo when the required output V is known. Example Refer to the red lines in the charts opposite. V = 6 litres P2 = 170 bar P1 = 100 bar Step 1 As the accumulator output V is known, choose the appropriate pair of charts from the two sets shown opposite. For outputs up to 50 litres use charts A and B, and for outputs above 50 litres use charts C and D. In this case, as the required output is 6 litres, charts A and B should be used. Step 2 Calculate P2 /P1 by dividing the maximum system pressure by the minimum pressure required to make the machine function. In this case, 170/100 = 1.7 Step 3 Using chart A, locate 1.7 on the X-axis and draw a vertical line to the top of the chart. Step 4 Depending on the cycle time, select the appropriate curve on chart A. For fast cycle times, use the adiabatic curve; for slow cycle times, the isothermal curve should be used. In this case, use the adiabatic curve. (n and f = 1.8) Step 5 On chart A, identify the point at which the vertical line drawn in step 3 crosses the chosen curve (in this case adiabatic) and draw a horizontal line across to the right hand end of chart B. Step 6 Using the lower X-axis on chart B, locate the required accumulator output (V), in this case 6 litres. Draw a vertical line to the top of the chart. Step 7 Locate the point where the vertical line drawn in step 6 crosses the horizontal line drawn in step 5. Locate the first curve to the right of this intersection. Step 8 Follow the curve selected in step 7 up to the top X-axis (Vo) and read off the required accumulator size, in this case 30 litres. Always round up to the next largest size available; for this example, therefore, a 38 litres accumulator should be selected.
Accumulator Sizing Charts

The charts shown opposite are used to estimate the size of piston accumulator required to provide a given volume of fluid discharge from the accumulator. The curves are based on the following formula: V = 0.855 Vo [(P2 /P1)1/n 1] (P2 /P1)1/f where: V = volume of fluid discharged Vo = Accumulator size f = charge coefficient n = discharge coefficient P2 = maximum system pressure P1 = minimum system pressure It is assumed that the gas precharge pressure = 0.9 P1
Isothermal and Adiabatic Operation

In constructing the curves, the following factors have been assumed. For isothermal operation eg: slow charge and discharge time, f and n = 1 For adiabatic operation, eg: fast charge and discharge time, f and n = 1.8 Note: The charts provide an estimate of the volume of accumulator required to store and release a given volume of fluid under specified conditions. In practice, the true charge and discharge coefficients will depend on the application, and may cause significant variations from the chart results. If in doubt, please contact our engineering department for a more detailed calculation. Where the ratio P2 /P1 exceeds 1.9, a fatigue analysis is necessary. Please contact our engineering department for further information.
Summary
Pre-charge Adiabatic / Isothermal Accumulator selected 90% of 100 bar = 90 bar Adiabatic A6ES2310L2K
Accumulator Sizing Chart V = 0.1 to 50 Litres Chart A
Sizing an Accumulator
Chart B
1 2
Vo Litres
10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 4 6 8
80
Isothermal
100
Adiabatic
150 200 250 300
1.5 1.7
2.5
3 P2/P1
3.5
4.5
0.10
1.00
V Litres
10
50
200
250
100
Isothermal
Adiabatic
1.5
2.5
3 P2/P1
3.5
4.5
10
150
300
25
40
20
30
50
60
80
9
Accumulator Sizing Chart V = 10 to 200 Litres Chart C
Chart D
Vo Litres

50
V Litres
100
300
Accessories U Bolts for Piston Accumulators

Piston accumulator U bolt F F
Welded lug
D E
Mounting surface A
Model A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A8 Par t No. PE1093-4 PE1093-1 PE1093-2 PE1093-12 PE1093-3 PE1093-13
A M6 x 1 M8 x 1.25 M12 x 1.75 M12 x 1.75 M16 x 2 M16 x 2
B 62 96 128 158 180 234
C 68 104 140 170 196 250
D 70 92 114 140 155 200
E 45 60 76 76 95 95
F Min 10 10 10 15 20 20 Max 25 25 30 40 45 50
B C
Note: U bolts should be mounted within the distances shown from the end of the accumulator, to avoid deformation of the shell.
Charging and Gauging

The charging and gauging assemblies listed in the table are suitable for use with both the standard cored-type gas valve and the optional poppet type. Each kit contains a UCA assembly incorporating a gas valve, bleed valve and gas chuck, and a 3m long charging hose with standard nitrogen bottle fittings. The kit includes 25 bar and 250 bar pressure gauges, to permit easy monitoring of the gas precharge. Full details for use of the charging and gauging kit are given in Bulletin HY07-1244-T.
Territor y UK France Germany Italy US Gas Bottle Fitting 5/8 BSP (male) W 21.7 x 1/14" (female) W 24.32 x 1/14" (female) W 21.7 x 1/14" (male) 0.960 x 1/14" (male) Par t No. UCA 02 UCA 04 UCA 01 UCA 05 UCA 03
Bleed valve Pressure gauge
Hose
Inflation valve
Adapters
10
How to Order
A Product type Model Approval type Options Capacity (litres)
Design number Design pressure Seal compound
Hydraulic port Gas port
Code Options S Cored-type gas valve (standard) W Cored-type gas valve + water service F Cored-type gas valve + safety fuse G Cored-type gas valve + water service + safety fuse M Poppet-type gas valve L Poppet-type gas valve + water service P Poppet-type gas valve + safety fuse R Poppet-type gas valve + water service + safety fuse
Page 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Hydraulic Port Page Specification 6 (leave blank if standard)
Gas Port Page Specification 6 (where no valve supplied)
Code Seal Compound

K E H D J Q S Nitrile (NBR) Fluorocarbon Elastomer (FPM) Hydrogenated nitrile (HNBR) Ethylene Propylene (EPR) Carboxilated nitrile (XNBR) Low temperature nitrile Special please specify
Page
6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Code Approval type E CE approved 1
Page 2
Code 2 3 4 5 6 8
Model 51.4mm bore A Series 76.2mm bore A Series 102.4mm bore A Series 127mm bore A Series 146.9mm bore A Series 200mm bore A Series
Page 5 5 5 5 5 5
Code Design Number 2 Metric mounting + BSPP

1 3 ### ports (standard) Inch mounting + SAE ports Special ports Specials (Parker assigned number)
Page
6 6 6
Code 0005 0010 0015 0029 0058 0090 0116 0183 0231 0347 0578 0924 1155 1733 2310 2772 2888 3465 4620
Capacity Page 0.1 A2 only 5 0.15 A2 only 5 0.25 A2 only 5 0.5 A2 & A3 5 1.0 A2, A3, A4, A5 5 1.5 A3 only 5 2.0 A3, A4, A5 5 3.0 A3 only 5 3.8 A4, A5, A6 5 5.7 A4, A5, A6 5 9.5 A4, A5, A6, A8 5 15 A6 only 5 19 A6, A8 5 28.5 A6, A8 5 38 A6, A8 5 45 A8 only 5 47 A8 only 5 57 A8 only 5 76 A8 only 5
Code Design Pressure L 250 bar H 350 bar
Page 3 3
1 2 3
Other approvals are available to order please consult the factory. Where a gas port is specified, no gas valve will be supplied. For other pressure ratings, please consult the factory.
Hydraulic and Gas Port Modifications

For accumulators with non-standard ports, specify special gas and/or hydraulic ports and use the appropriate port code from page 6. A typical model number for an accumulator with ISO 6149 hydraulic and gas ports would be:
A 3 T M 0090 D 2 K YE/YE
11

Europe
Austria
Wiener Neustadt Tel: +43 (0)2622 23501 Fax: +43 (0)2622 66212
International
Italy
Australia
Belgium
Nivelles Tel: +32 (0)67 280 900 Fax: +32 (0)67 280 999
The Netherlands
Canada
Czech Republic
Prague Tel: +420 2 830 85 221 Fax: +420 2 830 85 360
Norway
Ski Tel: +47 64 91 10 00 Fax: +47 64 91 10 90
China
Beijing Tel: +86 10 6561 0520 Fax: +86 10 6561 0526
Denmark
Ballerup Tel: +45 4356 0400 Fax: +45 4373 8431
Poland
Warsaw Tel: +48 (0)22 863 49 42 Fax: +48 (0)22 863 49 44
Asia Pacific Group

Finland
Vantaa Tel: +358 (0)9 4767 31 Fax: +358 (0)9 4767 3200
Portugal
India
Mumbai Tel: +91 22 7907081 Fax: +91 22 7907080
France
Slovakia
Ref. Czech Republic
Japan
Tokyo Tel: +(81) 3 6408 3900 Fax: +(81) 3 5449 7201
Spain
Madrid Tel: +34 91 675 73 00 Fax: +34 91 675 77 11
Germany
Kaarst Tel: +49 (0)2131 4016 0 Fax: +49 (0)2131 4016 9199
Latin America Group Brazil

Tel: +55 12 3954-5100 Fax: +55 12 3954-5266
Sweden
Spnga Tel: +46 (0)8 597 950 00 Fax: +46 (0)8 597 951 10
Hungary
Budapest Tel: +36 (06)1 220 4155 Fax: +36 (06)1 422 1525
South Africa
United Kingdom
Warwick Tel: +44 (0)1926 317 878 Fax: +44 (0)1926 317 855
Ireland
Dublin Tel: +353 (0)1 293 9999 Fax: +353 (0)1 293 9900
USA
Catalogue HY07-1240/5-UK
2M 10/04
Copyright 2004 Parker Hannifin Corporation All rights reserved.
BAE Bladder Accumulators

For working pressures up to 330 bar
Catalogue HY07-1235/UK February 2004
Introduction Bladder Accumulators

Liquids are practically incompressible and therefore cannot be used directly for storing energy. Hydro-pneumatic accumulators use the differing compressibility of liquid and gaseous media to enable energy to be stored in liquids under pressure. Parker's hydro-pneumatic bladder accumulators provide a means of regulating the performance of a hydraulic system. Their simple, compact, design ensures dependable performance, maximum efficiency and long service life.
Bladder Accumulators Series BAE Technical Data

Standard volumes Operating pressure 1 50 litres Up to 330 bar, with p2 < 4 x p1 where p1 = minimum working pressure and p2 = maximum working pressure Precharge pressure energy storage 90% of minimum working pressure pulsation dampening 60% of maximum working pressure shock suppression 60% of maximum pump pressure Std. temperature range Shell and ports: -40C to +80C Bladder and seals: -15C to +80C For use at other temperatures, please consult factory. Fluid type Mineral oil (standard compounds)
Why use a Bladder Accumulator?

stores energy under pressure damps out pump pulsation and flow fluctuations improves system efficiency supplements pump delivery supplies power in emergency absorbs hydraulic shocks compensates for pressure changes in cases of
Flow Rate The maximum values listed in the selection table only apply in the case of vertical installation (fluid port facing downwards). Positioning From vertical (fluid port downwards) to horizontal. Note that a minimum clearance of 200mm must be left above the gas valve for mounting the charging and gauging assembly see page 5.
thermal stress
very contaminant tolerant suitable for use with low-lubricity fluids fast response times Safety cannot disassemble under pressure
Contents
Technical Data Design Features and Benefits Models, Capacities and Dimensions Repair Kits and Parts List Bladder Compounds Charging and Gauging Assemblies Fluid Port Adapters Mounting Accessories How to Order
Page
2 3 3 4 5 5 5 6 7
Index
Approvals Bladder Compounds Charging and Gauging Assemblies Dimensions Features and Benefits Flow Rates Fluid Port Adapters Model Numbers Mounting Accessories Ordering Parts List Repair Kits Technical Data
Page
3 5 5 3 3 3 5 7 6 7 4 4 2
Parker Hannifin Corporation . . .

is a world leader in the manufacture of components and systems for motion control. Parker has more than 800 product lines for hydraulic, pneumatic and electro-mechanical applications in some 1200 industrial and aerospace markets. With over 45,000 employees and some 210 manufacturing plants and administrative offices around the world, Parker provides its customers with technical excellence and first class customer service. Parker Hannifin's Cylinder Division is the world's largest supplier of hydraulic actuators and accumulators for industrial applications. Catalogues describing our standard products are available from your nearest Parker sales office please see the rear cover of this catalogue for addresses. Where an application demands a non-standard approach, special products can be designed to order our engineers will be pleased to advise.
Parker Hannifin Plc Cylinder Division Watford, Herts.
Features and Dimensions Design Features and Benefits

1 Approvals
Bladder Accumulators Series BAE
Parker's BAE bladder accumulators are built to meet the requirements of the European Pressure Directive (PED) 97/23/EC. Bladder accumulators are marked with the CE logo and supplied with a declaration of conformity. Hydraulic accumulators fulfil the safety requirements for all member states of the European Union, as well as Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway and Switzerland.
Shell
Parker's bladder accumulator shells are made from seamless chrome-molybdenum alloy steel with forged ends, for maximum strength. The standard shell is suitable for use at operating temperatures down to -40C.
A
Bladder
The absence of dynamic sealing surfaces makes bladder accumulators tolerant of contamination and particularly suitable for low-lubricity fluids. Specially formulated for low permeability, Parker's bladders retain their high performance under a wide range of operating conditions including closed loop operation. Optional bladder compounds are available to suit all common fluids and operating temperatures.
B SW
Gas Valve
Accurate precharging of a bladder accumulator is the key to long and reliable service life. All Parker's bladder accumulators feature a robust gas valve, which is readily accessible for maintenance purposes. A charging and gauging assembly, described on page 5, allows precharging and monitoring to be carried out quickly and easily.
F G H K Adapter shown is an optional accessory J
Fluids and Fluid Ports
Parker's bladder accumulators are supplied as standard for use with hydraulic mineral oil. They are also available for use with other media, such as bio-degradable hydraulic fluids, non-inflammable liquids, emulsions, etc. Fluid ports are made from high-strength alloy steel, for maximum durability. BSPP ports are fitted as standard. Other port styles are available.
Models, Capacities and Dimensions

Mod el BAE01 BAE02 BAE04 BAE06 BAE10 BAE20 BAE24 BAE32 BAE50 Volume Litres 1 2.4 3.7 6.0 9.2 17.8 22.5 34.6 50 Mass Kg 5 10 13.5 17.8 29.5 46 53 73 101 Max flow l/min 1 240 450 450 450 900 900 900 900 900
A max 305 535 417 540 559 874 1009 1394 1938
B max 50 67 67 67 93 93 93 93 93
C max 55 55 55 55 51 51 51 51 85
D 115 115 170 170 223 223 223 223 223
d 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 75
F G3/4 G11/4 G11/4 G11/4 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2
G 35 53 53 53 76 76 76 76 76
H 51 75 75 75 101 101 101 101 101
SW 32 50 50 50 73 73 73 73 73
J G3/8 G3/4 G3/4 G3/4 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1
K 8 10 10 10 13 13 13 13 13
Notes 1 A minimum liquid volume (10% of Vo) must be maintained inside the accumulator.
All dimensions are subject to manufacturing tolerances. All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise stated.
In line with our policy of continuing product improvement, specifications in this catalogue are subject to change without notice.
Repair Kits Spare Parts and Repair Kits

3 1 2
10 11 13 6 14 & 15 12
Gas Valve Assembly
Fluid Port Assembly All Models
Parts List (All Models)

1* Protective cap 2* O-ring protective cap 3* Gas valve 4* Gas valve lock nut 5* Bladder 6 Shell 7 Identification plate 8 Hydraulic port assembly 9* Anti-extrusion ring moulding 10 Port spacer 11* O-ring hydraulic port 12* O-ring back-up washer 13 Fluid port lock nut 14* Bleed plug 15* Sealing washer for bleed plug * included in repair kit
Repair Kits
Repair kits are available for all accumulator models. When ordering repair kits, please supply the complete model number from the identification plate and specify the fluid type and the temperature at which the accumulator is to be used. The repair kit comprises those parts marked with an asterisk in the parts list. For a full description of the compound abbreviations, see 'Bladder Compounds' on page 5.
Comp ound
Mod el BAE01 BAE02 BAE04 BAE06 BAE10 BAE20 BAE24 BAE32 BAE50
NBR BAE-BK01NBR BAE-BK02NBR BAE-BK04NBR BAE-BK06NBR BAE-BK10NBR BAE-BK20NBR BAE-BK24NBR BAE-BK32NBR BAE-BK50NBR
IIR
FPM
EPDM
ECO
Consult Fac tory
Bladder Compounds, Ports and Accessories Bladder Compounds

Parker offers bladders moulded from a variety of compounds, to suit a wide range of fluids and operating temperatures. Unless ordered specially, a Group 1 (nitrile) bladder will be supplied. The table lists the compounds in which bladders are available, their recommended operating temperature ranges,
Group Blad d er Comp ound
and the types of fluids with which the different materials are generally compatible. Note that temperature ranges may vary depending on the fluid used in the hydraulic system. If in doubt, contact the factory with details of the application.
Fluid Med ium General p urp ose, mineral oil-b ased fluid s HFA and HFB fluid s 1 HFC fluid s 1 Mineral oil-b ased fluid s Most p hosp hate ester and some synthetic fluid s Hig h temp erature and /or synthetic fluid s Phosp hate ester-b ased fluid s and water General p urp ose fluid s with enhanc ed low temp erature p erformanc e
Temp erature Rang e -15C to + 80C + 5C to + 55C -15C to + 60C -35C to + 75 C -15C to + 80C -20C to + 100C -40C to + 80C -32C to + 80C
2 3 3
1 2 3 5 7 9
1 2 3
Nitrile (NBR) Low Temp erature Nitrile (LT NBR) Butyl (IIR) Fluoroc arb on Elastomer (FPM) Ethylene Prop ylene Diene (EPDM) Ep ic hlorohyd rine (ECO)
Check with fluid supplier that fluid is compatible with nitrile compounds For operating temperatures above 80C, please consult the factory For operating temperatures below -20C, please consult the factory
Port Sizes
Fluid ports are made from high-strength alloy steel, for maximum durability. BSPP ports are fitted as standard. ISO 6149 and SAE ports are available on request.
Mod el BAE01 BAE02 - BAE06 BAE10 - BAE50 BSPP ISO 6149-1 SAE-Thread G3/4 G11/ G2
4
Charging and Gauging Assembly

The charging and gauging assembly enables the user to charge Parker's bladder accumulators with nitrogen, and to test and alter the precharge pressure. It attaches to the accumulator's gas valve, and can be connected by hose to a standard commercial nitrogen bottle. Each kit contains:
Test and filling apparatus incorporating gas valve key and
SAE Flang e (ISO 6162) n/a 1" 6000 p si Cod e 62 11/2" 6000 p si Cod e 62
M27x2 M42x2 M60x2
#12 11/16"-12 #20 #24 15/

8"-12
bleed valve
Filling hose, length 2.5m Protective case Gas valve adapters to fit all standard bladder accumulators
17/8"-12
Fluid Port Adapters

A range of adapters is available for use with Parker's bladder accumulators, to reduce the size of the fluid port. Adapters are supplied complete with a nitrile O-ring.
Mod el BAE01 BAE02 - BAE06 BAE10 - BAE50 Fluid Port Thread G3/4 G11/4 G2 Ad ap ter Thread G3/8 G3/4 G1 Part No. BPA1 BPA2 BPA3
25 bar and 250 bar pressure gauges
Parker strongly recommends that the nitrogen bottle used should be fitted with a high pressure regulator.
Charging and Gauging Assembly with Adapter All Models Territory UK France Germany Italy US Gas Bottle Fitting 5/8 BSP (male) W 21.7 x 1/14" (female) W 24.32 x 1/14" (female) W 21.7 x 1/14" (male) 0,960 x 1/14" (male) Part No. UCA 02 UCA 04 UCA 01 UCA 05 UCA 03
Accessories Mounting Accessories

Parker clamp and base brackets provide a simple and secure method of mounting the accumulator. The clamps and brackets are galvanised to resist damage from corrosion. Rubber inserts absorb vibration and resist deformation in high temperature environments.
1 litre
2.5 - 6 litres
10 - 24 litres
32 - 50 litres
Clamp Bracket Assembly

Mod el BAE01 BAE02 BAE04 BAE06 BAE10 BAE20 BAE24 BAE32 BAE50 Nominal Volume (l) 1 2.5 4 6 10 20 24 32 50 Part No. CB1 CB2 Quantity 1 2 See Fig ure 1 2 A 138 188 B 100 148 C 159 181 D 114 168 E 230 H 73 92 K 30 40 L 9 9 M 14 14
1 CB3 2 3 270 216 241 226 290 123 40 15 21
D H M
D C H M
D C H M
B A
B A K M
B A K M
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
L M
Base Bracket Assembly

Mod el BAE10 - BAE50 Nominal Volume (l) 10 - 50 Part No. BB1
A 123 B 235
D
C 100
D 170
E 200
F 30
L
G 260
H 25
K 115
L 17
H C K
A B All dimensions are in mm unless otherwise stated
E G
How to Order Bladder Accumulators

BAE Product Type Capacity B Type of Construction (Bottom repairable standard on all sizes) Working pressure
Bladder Compound
Approval Type
Hydraulic Port
Design Number
Code 01 02 04 06 10 20 24 32 50
Capacity 1 litre 2.5 litres 4 litres 6 litres 10 litres 20 litres 24.5 litres 32 litres 50 litres
Page 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Code Design Number 1 Standard * Design number 1

1
Parker allocated design number.
Code C S Page 2 2
Approval Type CE (European Union) Special
Page 3 3
Code Working Pressure 3 330 bar nominal S Special
Code R Y T F S
Port Style BSPP standard ISO 6149-1 SAE Thread SAE Flange Special
Page 3, 5 3, 5 3, 5 3, 5 3, 5
Code 1 2 3 5 7 9
Bladder Compound Page Nitrile (NBR) Standard 5 Low temperature nitrile (LT NBR) 5 Butyl (IIR) 5 Fluorocarbon elastomer (FPM) 5 Ethylene propylene diene (EPDM) 5 Epichlorohydrine (ECO) 5
BAE Series bladder accumulators are supplied with a Declaration of Confirmity in accordance with European Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC, and with an operating manual and a drawing showing the main dimensions and materials.

Europe
Austria
Wiener Neustadt Tel: +43 (0)2622 23501 970 Fax: +43 (0)2622 23501 977
International
Italy
Australia
Belgium
The Netherlands
Canada
Nivelles Parc Industriel Sud-Zone II Tel: +32 (0)67 280 900 Fax: +32 (0)67 280 999
Czech Republic
Norway
Ski Tel: +47 64 91 10 00 Fax: +47 64 91 10 90
China
Beijing Tel: +86 10 6561 0520 Fax: +86 10 6561 0526
Prague Tel: +420 2 830 85 221 Fax: +420 2 830 85 360
Denmark
Ishj Tel: +45 4356 0400 Fax: +45 4373 8431
Poland
Warsaw Tel: +48 (0)22 863 49 42 Fax: +48 (0)22 863 49 44
Asia Pacific Group
Finland
Vantaa Tel: +358 (0)9 4767 31 Fax: +358 (0)9 4767 3200
Portugal
India
Mumbai Tel: +91 22 7907081 Fax: +91 22 7907080
France
Slovakia
Ref. Czech Republic
Japan
Tokyo Tel: +(81) 3 6408 3900 Fax: +(81) 3 5449 7201
Spain
Germany
Kaarst Tel: +49 (0)2131 4016 0 Fax: +49 (0)2131 4016 9199
Madrid Tel: +34 91 675 73 00 Fax: +34 91 675 77 11
Latin America Group

Brazil Tel: +55 12 3954-5100 Fax: +55 12 3954-5266
Sweden
Hungary
Budapest Tel: +36 (06)1 220 4155 Fax: +36 (06)1 422 1525
Spnga Tel: +46 (0)8 597 950 00 Fax: +46 (0)8 597 951 10
South Africa
United Kingdom
Watford (industrial) Tel: +44 (0)1923 492 000 Fax: +44 (0)1923 256 059 Ossett (mobile) Tel: +44 (0)1924 282 200 Fax: +44 (0)1924 282 299
Ireland
USA
Clonee Tel: +353 (0)1 801 4010 Fax: +353 (0)1 801 4132
Catalogue HY07-1235/3-UK 2M 02/04 PD Copyright 2004 Parker Hannifin Corporation All rights reserved.
Hd
li
HTR Hydraulic Rotary Actuators

For working pressures up to 210 bar
Rotary Actuators Series HTR
Catalogue HY07-1220/UK November 2002
Introduction HTR Rotary Actuators

The HTR Series of heavy duty hydraulic rack and pinion rotary actuators converts fluid power into rotary motion. They are suitable for a wide variety of applications, including material handling and valve actuation, in industries as diverse as machine tools, primary metals, mining and oil field equipment. HTR Series rotary actuators employ conventional tie rod cylinder construction and are rated for use at working pressures up to 210 bar. The pinion and output shaft are supported in large tapered roller bearings, allowing the unit to
support high external and thrust loads. All HTR Series rotary actuators feature a high strength, ductile iron housing, for ease of mounting and good shock resistance. In addition to the standard HTR Series rotary actuators described in this catalogue, special designs can be produced to suit customer requirements. Our engineers will be pleased to advise on unique designs to meet specific applications.
Contents
Applications Design Features and Benefits General Specifications Dimensions Mounting Styles Port Sizes and Positions Air Bleeds Shaft Options Cushioning Piston Seals Seal Kits Filtration Stroke Adjusters Bearing Load Capacities Position Switches Feedback Devices Ordering Information Maintenance and Spare Parts Applications Data Check List
Page
3 4 5 6 8 8 8 9 10 12 12 12 12 13 14 15 16 16 17
Index
Air Bleeds Applications Data Check List General Bearing Load Capacities Construction Cushioning Design Features and Benefits Dimensions Feedback Devices Filtration Maintenance Model Numbers Mounting Styles Ordering Information Pistons and Seals Port Positions Port Sizes Position Switches Rack and Pinion Seals and Seal Kits Selection Check List Shaft Options Spare Parts Specifications Stroke Adjusters Torque Outputs Weights
Page
8 17 3 13 4 4, 10 4 6, 7 15 12 16 16 8 16 4, 12 8 8 14 4 4, 12 17 4, 9 16 3, 5 12 5 5
Parker Hannifin Corporation . . .

is a world leader in the manufacture of components and systems for motion control. Parker has more than 800 product lines for hydraulic, pneumatic and electromechanical applications in some 1200 industrial and aerospace markets. With over 45,000 employees and some 210 manufacturing plants and administrative offices around the world, Parker provides its customers with technical excellence and first class customer service. Parker Hannifin's Cylinder Division is the world's largest supplier of hydraulic actuators and accumulators for industrial applications. In addition to the HTR Series of rotary actuators featured in this catalogue, Parker also manufactures a wide range of other hydraulic and electro-hydraulic actuator products. Linear actuators are available in a wide range of sizes, mounting styles and operating pressures. Catalogues describing our standard products are available on request from your nearest Parker sales office see rear cover for addresses. Where an application demands a non-standard approach, special products can be designed to order our engineers will be pleased to advise.
Applications Why use a Rotary Actuator?

provides uniform torque in both directions simple, compact design wide range of sizes high torque output from a small envelope no external linkage needed for rotary motion excellent holding capability rotation can be specified to suit application will support radial and thrust loads
Rotary Actuators Series HTR Typical Rotary Actuator Applications

Power Generation Gas Turbines Diverter flap valves Nuclear Fail-safe valve operation, typically using different sizes of rack and piston with one side 'pushing' against an accumulator Steel and Aluminium Mills coil boxes in rolling mills, using a back-and-forth rolling action to reduce ingots to slabs, then strips walking beam, for moving material pickling process in tube mill, for immersion/agitation of tubes in sulphuric acid tank ladle turrets on continuous-casting process, with slotted mounts to allow for thermal expansion crust breaking Safety Systems fire door closure, using a spring-return actuator cylinder and fitted with high temperature seals Petro-Chemical Industries process control valves Satellite/Aeronautical pre-launch disconnection of monitoring and loading equipment Tyre Industry drop valves for rubber mixing/processing, using high temperature seals Marine Engineering trim and drain valves missile tube closure systems Handling Systems self-unloading mechanisms for bulk carriers General Engineering dumping, indexing, bending, screwing, clamping & toggle clamping
Specifications
Max. non-shock operating pressure Design pressure Rotational range 210 bar 315 bar Standard 90, 180, 360 Special order any rotation to a maximum of 1800 -0, +2 100 68000Nm 5 bar 30 minutes 15 minutes 10 minutes
Rotational tolerance Output torque at 210 bar Min. operating pressure Max. angular backlash HTR.9 HTR10 HTR15 HTR150 HTR300 HTR600
Self-energizing, wear-compensating polyurethane piston seals
Optional Features
HTR Series rotary actuators are available with a wide range of options including port positions, cushioning, different seal types and mounting styles. Feedback devices and proximity sensors can be fitted to provide fine control of position and velocity.
Rotary Actuator Application Guide

Full guidance for the selection and application of rotary actuators is available in the Rotary Actuator Application Guide please ask for catalogue no. 1230.
Design Features and Benefits 1 Rack and Pinion

Maximum strength and shock resistance result from the use of through-hardened chrome alloy steel for the rack and for the one-piece pinion and output shaft. Gears are packed with molybdenum disulphide grease on assembly, to reduce wear and prolong gear life under conditions of extreme pressure.
Rotary Actuators Series HTR 6 Tie Rod Cylinders

Proven tie rod construction, using standard cylinder bore sizes, guarantees reliability and ease of maintenance for the hydraulic cylinders which drive the rack and pinion. Heavywalled alloy steel tubing is micro-finished for long piston and seal life, while tie rods are drawn from alloy steel, with precision rolled threads for high strength and resistance to fatigue.
2 Bronze Rack Bearings

Generous support for the rack is provided by a bronze rack bearing, reducing wear and extending pinion life. The bronze rack bearing, a standard feature on HTR15 models and above, is available as an option on smaller units.
7 Pistons and Seals

Rugged one-piece steel pistons (not HTR.9 or HTR1.8) are fitted as standard with polyurethane seals and PTFE wear rings, preventing metal-to-metal contact. The piston seals are self-compensating for long life and reduced maintenance and, subject to access, seals and wear rings can be inspected or replaced without removing the actuator from the machine.
3 Gear Housing
High strength ductile iron provides resistance to shock loads under the most arduous operating conditions. Four mounting holes in both the front and rear faces permit flexibility in machine design, with base and pilot mounting styles available as options.
8 Cushioning
Progressive deceleration is available by specifying cushions for either or both directions of rotation. The self-centring cushions are adjustable, permitting exact matching to load and speed conditions, and offer extended machine life with reduced noise and shock. 2 7
1 4 8 5
4 Tapered Roller Bearings

High capacity tapered roller bearings provide rigid support for the pinion and output shaft. Generous size and capacity allow the bearings to withstand external radial and thrust loads, even under high cycling applications. Correct bearing preload during maintenance is easily achieved by torque adjustment of the threaded retainer ring on the rear face of the rotary actuator, eliminating the inconvenience of shims and reducing the risk of damage to the bearing through incorrect adjustment.
9 3
5 Shaft Options
A plain male shaft with two keyways, the most widely used style of shaft, is supplied as standard with all HTR Series rotary actuators. The keyways are set at the 12- and 6-o'clock positions at mid-stroke for ease of positioning and assembly, and are as large as possible to ensure maximum strength. Shaft options include a female shaft with keyway, and male and female splined types. Both single and double shaft options are available, providing the greatest possible flexibility for the machine designer.
9 Floating Cushion Bushes

Closer tolerances and therefore more effective cushioning are permitted by the use of floating cushion bushes. Lifting of the bronze cushion bush minimises fluid restriction to the start of the return stroke, allowing full pressure to be applied over the whole area of the piston, to provide full power and rapid cycle times.
Benefits and General Specifications Advantages of Parker's Rack and Pinion Rotary Actuators
Cost-effectiveness especially above 90, where linear actuators need increasingly intricate linkages to generate rotary motion. Simplicity a rotary actuator with a hollow, or female, shaft can replace support bearings and pillow blocks, due to the high load capacity of the bearings. Resistance to Hostile Environments no extending/ retracting sealing surfaces exposed to abrasive or corrosive substances. Special materials and coatings ensure long life in arduous usage. Ease of Maintenance servicing of pistons and seals can be carried out with the actuator in place on the machine, subject to access. Leakage Resistance pressurized fluid is remote from the output side of the mechanism; piston seals are the only dynamic seals subject to system pressure. Long Life the rack/pinion/bearing assembly is packed with molybdenum grease on assembly and does not come into contact with hydraulic fluid. Premium Quality every Parker rotary actuator is proof tested before shipping.
Rotary Actuators Series HTR General Specification Volumes

Model Single Rack HTR.9 HTR1.8 HTR3.7 HTR7.5 HTR5 HTR10 HTR15 HTR30 HTR22 HTR45 HTR75 HTR150 HTR300 HTR600 Double Rack
cm3 per degree 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.9 0.6 1.1 1.6 3.2 2.5 5.1 8.4 17 32 65
cm3 per radian 6 12 25 51 33 65 93 185 145 290 480 960 1855 3707
Displacement - cm3 90 180 360 Rotation Rotation Rotation 9 19 40 79 51 102 145 291 227 455 754 1508 2913 5823 19 37 80 159 102 205 291 582 455 910 1508 3016 5827 11645 37 74 159 318 205 410 582 1164 910 1819 3016 6032 11653 23290
General Specification Torque Outputs, Pressure Ratings and Weights

Model Single Rack HTR.9 HTR1.8 HTR3.7 HTR7.5 HTR5 HTR10 HTR15 HTR30 HTR22 HTR45 HTR75 HTR150 HTR300 HTR600
1
Continuous Duty 1 Torque Nm 80 160 260 540 330 700 960 2000 960 2000 4500 9500 13000 28000
2
Intermittent Duty 2 Torque Nm 100 200 390 800 495 1000 1440 3000 1440 3000 6750 14200 19500 42000 Pressure bar 210 210 190 200 180 190 175 190 115 120 165 170 120 130
3
Static Duty 3 Torque Nm 100 200 420 850 565 1130 1700 3400 1700 3400 8500 17000 34000 68000 Pressure bar 210 210 210 210 210 210 210 210 140 140 210 210 210 210
Weights kg 90 Rotation 5 7 13 16 17 20 25 40 27 45 90 146 345 505 180 Rotation 6 9 14 19 18 25 27 44 30 49 100 167 382 573 360 Rotation 9 11 17 24 22 30 32 53 36 61 120 206 414 709
Double Rack
Pressure bar 160 160 125 130 120 130 115 120 80 80 110 115 80 85
Continuous duty >107 cycles
Intermittent duty <104 cycles
Static duty maximum rating (no dynamic loads)
Dimensions HTR.9 to HTR10

A A/2 M

R Square
O T S P V G 0.4mm Radius F K N C
Relief Valve E D
E/2 J (Both Sides) U B B/2
HTR.9 to HTR5 Single Rack Models
A T S M A/2 L
R Square
0.4mm Radius 2V V P G F K N C
Relief Valve E D
HTR1.8 to HTR10 Double Rack Models
Dimensions with Face Mount and Male Keyed Shaft

Model HTR.9 22.2 HTR1.8 HTR3.7 HTR7.5 38.1 HTR5 HTR10 HTR15 50.8 HTR30 HTR22 63.5 HTR45 HTR75 101.6 HTR150 HTR300 152.4 HTR600 Bore Rotation 90 180 360 90 180 360 90 180 360 90 180 360 90 180 360 90 180 360 90 180 360 A max. 190 237 333 257 333 464 289 372 562 406 543 816 416 553 822 514 702 1073 794 1111 1749
B C Cd Cs D E
0.13
F
0.13
Fd
0.13
Fs
0.13
76
92.5
89
70
60
30
100
133.5
102
75
90
45
100
152.5 -
175
102
75
125 -
50
62.5
127
206.5 176
178
150
170 50
85
127
213 254
178
150
170 115
85
191
327 387
216
165
290 125 -
145 195 175
305
476.5 -
403
330
350
Dimensions HTR15 to HTR600

A A/2 M
L O T S P V Fs G 0.4mm Radius K N
R Square
Cs
Relief Valve E D
HTR15 to HTR300 Single Rack Models
A T S M A/2 L
R Square
0.4mm Radius 2V P G Fd K N Cd
Relief Valve E D
HTR30 to HTR600 Double Rack Models
Dimensions with Face Mount and Male Keyed Shaft

Model HTR.9 22.2 HTR1.8 HTR3.7 HTR7.5 38.1 HTR5 HTR10 HTR15 50.8 HTR30 HTR22 63.5 HTR45 HTR75 101.6 HTR150 HTR300 152.4 HTR600 M10 x 1.5 x 16 M12 x 1.75 x 19 M12 x 1.75 x 19 M20 x 2.5 x 30 M30 x 3.5 x 48 44 66 12 39 -0.2
+0.0
Bore
J M8 x 1.25 x 13 M10 x 1.5 x 16
K
+0.00 -0.02
M
P9
N
+0.0 -0.1
U
(BSPP)
22
33
18.5
25
25
45
10
13
G1/4
24
28
48
24
+0.0 -0.2
38
38
64
13
18
G1/4
35
50
45
64
13
18
G1/4
41
54
86
16
48 -0.2
+0.0
60
73
76
16
18
G1/2
62
54
86
16
48 -0.2
+0.0
60
73
89
16
18
G1/2
62
76
115
22
67 -0.2
+0.0
85
95
127
26
21
G3/4
89
125
190
32
114 -0.2
+0.0
152
165
191
32
32
G1
130
Mountings, Ports and Air Bleeds Base and Pilot Mountings

HTR Series rotary actuators are available with the options of face, base or pilot mounting styles, to suit the requirements of different applications. Mounting dimensions for the face
F
mounting styles are shown with other major dimensions on pages 6 and 7. The equivalent dimensions for base and pilot mounting styles are shown in the table.
Base Mounting A 60 75 75 B 70 75 75 C M8x1.25 x 13 M10x1.5 x 16 M10x1.5 x 16 D 46.1 66.7 76.2 Pilot Mounting E
+0 -0.05mm
Model HTR.9 & 1.8 HTR3.7 & 7.5

E
F 6.5 6.5 6.5 10 10 10 12
47.625 66.675 73.025 107.950 107.950 139.700 222.250
HTR5 & 10 HTR15 & 22 HTR30 & 45
100 150 M12x1.75 x 19 103.2 100 150 M12x1.75 x 19 106.4 145 165 M20x2.5 x 30 163.5 240 330 M30x3.5 x 48 238.2
0.4mm x 45 Chamfer 0.4mm Radius
HTR75 & 150 HTR300 & 600
Pilot Mounting
A/2 A B
B/2 C
Base Mounting
Port Sizes and Positions

The standard port style for HTR Series rotary actuators is a BSP (parallel) port, but NPTF, SAE, and metric port styles to DIN 3852/1 and ISO 6149/1 are also available. The relevant sizes of port for each model of rotary actuator are shown in the table. Ports will be supplied in position 1, as shown in the diagram, unless a different position is specified on the order. Ports are available in positions 2, 3 and 4 at no extra cost; position 5 is available as an extra cost option.
Model HTR.9 & 1.8 HTR3.7 & 7.5 HTR5 & 10 HTR15 & 22 HTR30 & 45 HTR75 & 150 HTR300 & 600
BSPP G1/4 G /4 G /4 G1/2 G /2 G3/4 G1

1 1 1
Metric DIN & ISO M14 x 1.5 M14 x 1.5 M14 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5 M27 x 2 M33 x 2
9 9 9
SAE /16 -18 (SAE 6) /16 -18 (SAE 6) /16 -18 (SAE 6) /4 -16 (SAE 8) /4 -16 (SAE 8)
NPTF
1 1 1
/4 /4 /4 /2 /2
3 3
1 1 3
11/16 -12 (SAE 12) 15/16 -12 (SAE 16)
/4
Air Bleeds
These may be fitted in positions unoccupied by ports.
2 2
Shaft Options Shaft Options

Keyed and splined shaft designs are available for the HTR Series rotary actuators, in both male and female forms. The standard male, twin key shaft style is illustrated with other major dimensions on pages 6 and 7, while other shaft options are shown below. All the shaft options illustrated are shown in the mid-stroke position.
Male Splined Shaft
Male Splined Shaft to DIN/ISO 14

Model HTR.9 & 1.8 L 33 48 66 86 86 115 190 M 22 32 44 58 58 76 125 N
a11
P 18 23 36 46 46 62 112
R 5 6 7 9 9 12 18
No. of splines 6 6 8 8 8 8 10
22 28 42 54 54 72 125
L M R
HTR3.7 & 7.5 HTR5 & 10 HTR15 & 30

N
HTR22 & 45 HTR75 & 150
Mounting Face of Unit
HTR300 & 600

P
Female Keyed Shaft
Female Keyed Shaft to DIN 6885

Model A
H7
B
P9
+0.4
C 20.6 27.6 38.6 55.6 55.6 81.8 139.8
D 74.6 98.4 98.4 125.4 125.4 188.9 303.2
E 25.4 38.1 44.5 73.0 73.0 95.2 165.1
D Pinion & Keyway Length
B Keyway
HTR.9 & 1.8 HTR3.7 & 7.5
16 22 32 48 48 72 125
5 6 10 14 14 20 32
0.4mm Radius C
HTR5 & 10 HTR15 & 30 HTR22 & 45
E Dia. Pinion Journal (All shaft styles)
A Bore
HTR75 & 150 HTR300 & 600
Female Splined Shaft
Female Splined Shaft to DIN/ISO 14

Model
G K
D 74.6 98.4 98.4 125.4 125.4 188.9 303.2
F 17 23 29 49 49 73 126
G 16 22 29 50 50 76 127
H
H10
J
H7
K 3.5 5 6 8 8 12 18
No. of splines 6 6 6 8 8 8 10
HTR.9 & 1.8 HTR3.7 & 7.5 HTR5 & 10 HTR15 & 30
16 22 28 48 48 72 125
13 18 23 42 42 62 112
HTR22 & 45 HTR75 & 150 HTR300 & 600

J
Cushioning Cushions and Cushion Adjustment Location

Cushioning is recommended as a means of controlling the deceleration of masses. Machine life is extended as a result of the reduced shock, permitting faster cycle times with lower levels of noise. Cushions are recommended for high kinetic energy applications and/or where the full rotation of the actuator is being used. They are available as an option on all HTR Series rotary actuators, for one or both rotations, and do not affect the actuator's envelope or mounting dimensions. For the HTR Series rotary actuator, the standard angle of cushioning is 20 (0.349 rads). Each cushion is adjustable individually, allowing cushion performance to be matched to the application. The positions of cushion adjusters, relative to port positions, are shown in the table numbers relate to the diagram of port positions on page 8. * Single rack models only
Port Position 1 2 3 4* 5 Cushion Position 2 3 2 3 2
Formulae
For a load that moves in the horizontal plane, only the kinetic energy need be considered. If the load is to move vertically, then the potential energy change of the load during cushioning must also be taken into account. Both conditions are described by the following equations. The resulting figure for energy to be absorbed can then be applied to the graph of Cushion Energy Absorption Capacity, to identify a rotary actuator with adequate cushion capacity. Note: the graph of Cushion Energy Absorption Capacity should only be used for initial sizing. For accurate sizing, please contact the factory. For masses moving horizontally: E= 1 Jm 2 2
For masses moving downwards: E= 1 Jm 2 + mgR 2
Note: Where cushioning is required on double rack units, the High Performance Cushion option described on page 11 should be specified.
For masses moving upwards: E= 1 Jm 2 - mgR 2
Floating Cushion Bush
Where: E= Jm = = m= g= R= =
energy to be absorbed, Joules rotational mass moment of inertia, kgm2 rotational velocity of load, rads/sec mass of load, kg acceleration due to gravity, 9.81m/s2 radius of rotation, m angle of cushioning, radians (0.349 rads = 20)
Cushion Spear Cushion Adjustment Needle
Note that cushion performance will be affected by the use of high water content fluids. Please consult the factory for details. The energy absorption capacity of the cushion decreases with drive pressure, which in normal circuits is the relief valve pressure.
Example P= 100 bar m= 200 kg R= 0.2 m = 6 rpm Standard cushions = 20 = 0.349 rads. 1 Jm 2 + mgR 2 1 x 200x0.2 2 x 6x 2 2 60
E= E=
+ (200 x 9.81 x 0.2 x 0.349) E = 1.6 + 136.9 E = 138.5 Joules From the graph of Cushion Energy Absorption Capacity, it can be seen that an HTR7.5 (double rack unit) is capable of absorbing this energy where the High Performance Cushion option is specified. An HTR15 (single rack unit) is also capable of absorbing this energy.
10
])
2
Cushioning High Performance Cushions

The High Performance Cushion option can only be specified on double rack rotary actuators. Double rack rotary actuators can achieve very high torques, which need to be decelerated at the end of the movement. This cushion energy is absorbed efficiently by the use of High Performance Cushions. External piping ensures that during cushioning the maximum deceleration torque is available. External interconnecting pipework for the High Performance Cushion is not supplied with the rotary actuator.
Rotary Actuators Series HTR Cushion Energy Absorption Capacity All Cushion Options
5000 3000 2000
HTR600 High Performance Cushion
Operation
The work ports of a standard directional valve are connected directly to ports C-1 and C-2 of the rotary actuator, as shown. Port A-1 is connected directly to A-2, and B-1 is connected directly to B-2. When pressure is applied directly to port C-1 (clockwise shaft rotation), fluid is also directed through line A to the other rack. Exhaust flow from B-1 and B-2 is directed through the cushion bush and cushion adjustment screw until the cushion spear closes off the main passage. The total flow from both end caps is then directed across one cushion adjustment screw, equalizing back pressure and improving cushion performance. Pressurizing C-2 and exhausting C-1 reverses the operation.
Energy Capacity (Joules)
1000 700 400 300 200
HTR150 High Performance Cushion
HTR300 HTR75 HTR30 High Performance Cushion HTR45 High Performance Cushion
HTR15, HTR22
100
HTR7.5 High Performance Cushion HTR10 High Performance Cushion
Notes
1. Pipework between A-1 and A-2, and B-1 and B-2 should be kept to a minimum to reduce the inertia of the fluid. Fluid flow should be less than 5m/s. 2. Connection ports will have the same specification as the working ports.
A-2 C-1 B-1
50 40 30 20
HTR3.7, HTR5 HTR1.8 High Performance Cushion
HTR.9
50
100
150
C-2
Drive Pressure (bar) Note: Cushion performance may be affected by the addition of a stroke limiter. Please consult the factory in critical applications.
B-2
A-1
Port Positions
Rotary actuators with High Performance Cushions differ from standard double rack units only in their port positions all external dimensions of the units remain unaltered.
Work Ports C-1 & C-2 Port Position 1 2 3 5 Cushion Adjuster Position 2 3 2 2 Connection Ports A-1, A-2, B-1, B-2 Port Position 3 1 1 3
11
Piston Seals, Seal Kits and Stroke Limiters Piston Seals and Seal Kits
The Wear-Pak piston fitted as standard to all HTR Series rotary actuators employs a polyurethane seal to contain hydraulic pressure, and a PTFE wear ring (not for HTR.9 or HTR1.8) to prevent metal-to-metal contact. For higher temperatures or use with synthetic fluids, FPM seals should be specified for the piston; for water glycol or high water content fluids, nitrile seals are available.
become over-pressurized. Any external leakage from the gear housing, therefore, is indicative of worn or damaged piston seals and these should be examined and, if necessary, replaced, at the earliest opportunity. Note: it is essential that all hydraulic lines are thoroughly flushed before connection to the rotary actuator.
PTFE Wear Band Steel Piston Polyurethane seal
1
Filtration
Effective filtration is vital to the long life and satisfactory performance of a rotary actuator. If the piston seals of a rack and pinion rotary actuator are worn or damaged, fluid which leaks past the piston will enter the gear housing. In the event of internal leakage into the gear housing, the pressure relief valve will ensure that the housing does not
Seal Class Standard V W
1 2
Materials Seal Polyurethane FPM Carboxilated Nitrile Wear Ring Filled PTFE Filled PTFE Filled PTFE
Fluid Medium General purpose, petroleum-based fluids High Temperature and/or Synthetic Fluids Water Glycol, High Water Content Fluids
Temperature Range -30C to +80C -20C to +150C 0C to +80C
Seal Kit Code PSKHTR.9 2 PSKHTR.9V

2
Filtration
ISO Class 17/14 Cleanliness Level
PSKHTR.9W 2
FPM seals also include a back-up washer. The part numbers shown are for HTR.9 seals. For other seals,
replace '.9' with the appropriate size. For example, a FPM seal kit for a HTR15 will be PSKHTR15V.
Stroke Limiters
Fine control of the end of travel points of the rotary actuator can be obtained by specifying stroke limiters. These operate by reducing the maximum travel of the actuator within preset limits of either 5 or 30 in each direction. Adjustment within this range is infinitely variable and may be carried out by the user. Several types of stroke limiter are available the design illustrated is suitable for applications requiring infrequent adjustment. length. On double rack units with cushions, the cushion is fitted to the upper rack and the stroke limiter to the lower. The increase in build length, for both single and double rack units, is shown as dimension A in the table. Cushion performance may be affected by the addition of a stroke limiter. Please consult the factory in critical applications.
A
Stroke Limiters and Cushions

5 stroke limiters may be combined with the cushioning devices shown on page 10. 30 stroke limiters cannot be combined with cushions. The addition of stroke limiters requires an increase in build
Adjustment per Full Turn 4.0 3.3 2.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.2
B hex
Lock Nut Thread Seal
A max - Increased Build Length 5 Limiter Without Cushion 13 16 16 22 22 65 90 5 Limiter With Cushion 22 29 29 46 46 95 154 30 Limiter Without Cushion 19 29 29 41 41 90 N/A
Model HTR.9 & 1.8 HTR3.7 & 7.5 HTR5 & 10 HTR15 & 30 HTR22 & 45 HTR75 & 150 HTR300 & 600
B Hex Socket Screw in.

5
/32 /4 /4
1 1 3 3
/8 /8
Square Limiter
12
Bearing Load Capacity Bearing Load Capacities

The radial and thrust loads and overhung moments which can be supported by each model of HTR rotary actuator at different operating pressures are shown in the table. These figures should be read in conjunction with the notes below. Notes 1 Static bearing load capacities = dynamic values x 1.5 2 Standard male shafts provide a 4:1 design factor. At the operating conditions marked *, a smaller design factor is achieved and the values listed are 'bearing' moment capacities. For higher capacities, larger shaft sizes are available please consult the factory for details.
Radial Load RL
Axial Load RT
Dynamic Bearing Load Capacities vs. Operating Pressure

Model HTR.9 HTR1.8 HTR3.7 HTR7.5 HTR5 HTR10 HTR15 HTR30 HTR22 HTR45 HTR75 HTR150 HTR300 HTR600 Radial Load kN 70 bar 16.6 17.9 26.3 30.0 34.1 38.1 61.4 68.4 57.9 68.4 72.7 100.7 129.3 192.2 RL per Bearing @ 210 bar 13.9 17.9 18.3 30.0 26.3 38.1 47.4 68.4 16.8 100.7 3.4 192.2 Thrust Load kN 70 bar 12.0 12.4 16.1 17.0 18.9 19.9 54.7 56.9 53.7 56.9 73.6 84.6 107.2 126.7 140 bar 11.5 12.4 15.0 17.0 17.9 19.9 52.6 56.9 50.4 56.9 62.6 84.6 87.7 126.7 RT @ 210 bar 11.1 12.4 13.9 17.0 17.0 19.9 50.4 56.9 51.5 84.6 68.3 126.7 Overhung Moment kN.m 70 bar 0.28 0.30 0.71 0.80 0.87 0.97 2.85 3.18 2.69 3.18 7.37 10.20 19.53 29.04 140 bar 0.25 0.30 0.59 0.80 0.77 0.97 2.53 3.18 2.20 3.18 4.54 10.20 * 10.02 29.04 RL x A @ 210 bar 0.23 0.30 * 0.49 0.80 * 0.67 0.97 2.20 3.18 1.70 10.20 * 0.52 29.04 * 140 bar 15.2 17.9 22.2 30.0 30.2 38.1 54.4 68.4 47.4 68.4 44.8 100.7 66.4 192.2
13
Position Switches Position Switches

Accurate end of rotation indication can be obtained by specifying position switches. These solid state, inductive-type switches are fitted to the caps of the hydraulic cylinders, where a non-contacting probe senses the presence of a ferrous spear attached to the piston. Position switches are not available on rotary actuators fitted with stroke limiters. Both flange mounted (EPS-6 and EPS-7) and threaded type (PS201) position switches are available. Both types of switch can be used to operate relay coils, or as direct input to a PLC. All switches incorporate short-circuit protection. The fault condition must be corrected and the power disconnected in order to reset the switch, preventing automatic restarts. Two LEDs (in the switch or in the connector) indicate power and switch status.
Rotary Actuators Series HTR DC 4-wire Sensor (EPS-6)

Wiring Diagram
1 White Black
(+) (-)
E02
4 Orange Load Sink 4 2 Red 5 Black Load Source
(-)
3 2 5 1
N.O. Red
Load Source
White N.O. Orange Load Sink
(+)
AC/DC 2-wire Sensor (EPS-7)

Wiring Diagram
2 Black US 3 White 1 Green Load L2 or (-/+) AC DC L1 or (+/-) White
3 1 2
Load N.O.
AC DC L2 or (+/-) L1 or (-/+)
Black Green
CE Marking
The position switches fitted by Parker are CE marked to certify that they meet the requirements of the EC Directive 89/336/EEC for electromagnetic compatibility.
Dimensions
C
DC 3-wire Sensor (PS201, 202 and 203)

Wiring Diagram
1 4 3 ) Brown Black Load ) ) Blue + Output, A
4 1 3 2
+
EPS-6 and EPS-7 Model PS201, 202 and 203 C HTR.9 & 1.8 HTR3.7 & 7.5 HTR5 & 10 HTR15 & 30 HTR22 & 45 HTR75 & 150 HTR300 & 600 105 D 52 65 65 62 56 43 83
Dimensions
A
Model A B HTR.9 & 1.8 HTR3.7 & 7.5 HTR5 & 10 HTR15 & 30 32 HTR22 & 45 HTR75 & 150 HTR300 & 600 79 67 88 Consult factory 63 63 86
Note: Connectors not supplied. Please order as an accessory.
Sensor Type Connector Output Function Operating Voltage Operating Current Operating Temperature Protection Class Connector Orientation Signal
EPS-6 105000A01F060 PNP/NPN, normally open 10 30V DC < 200 mA -25C to +70C IP67 direct, switching in sensor PS 011
PS201, 202 and 203
EPS-7 103000A01F060 Normally open 20 250V AC @ 40 60 Hz 20 300V DC < 300 mA -25C to +70C IP67 direct, switching in sensor
PNP, normally open 10 30V DC 200 mA -25C to +80C IP67 to IEC60529 dependent on switch adjustment in connector
14
Feedback Devices Feedback Devices

A linear feedback device or a position sensor can be supplied for continual monitoring of the rotational range. The linear feedback device is built into the cap of the cylinder and registers the position of the rack, and thus indirectly the pinion. This type of position feedback is offered when the rotational range is greater than 355. The position sensor is mounted at the back of the housing and directly registers the position of the pinion.
Rotary Actuators Series HTR Angular Position Transducer

Angular Position Transducers are supplied with a rotary potentiometer, which requires user input. Integral signal conditioning is also available as an option.
Technical Data Potentiometer

single turn precision servo-mount with conductive plastic element Port: Connector LXES-0033 1 Effective mechanical angle: 360 Effective electrical angle: 355 2 Resistance: 5 k Resistance tolerance: 20% Linearity: 0.075% Maximum voltage: 42V DC Maximum current: 10 mA Recommended operating current: < 1 A Temperature rating: -40C to +100C Protection class: IP65 Type:
Linear Feedback Devices

Linear feedback devices are supplied with an optional ultrasonic feedback system. Other types of feedback devices with alternative analogue or digital output signals are available on request. Please consult the factory for further information.
Support Bearing Waveguide Tube
Potentiometer with Integral Signal Conditioning

Type: single turn precision servo-mount with conductive plastic element Port: Connector LXES-0033 1 Effective mechanical angle: 360 Effective electrical angle: 90 or 345 Output signal: 0 or 4 to 20 mA Current: 30 mA Load resistance: 0-500 Linearity: 0.1% (345) 3% (90) Repeatability: 0.007 Operating voltage: 24V DC Temperature rating: -25C to +70C Protection class: IP65
Base Plate Potentiometer Watertight Cover
Sensing Coil and Electronics
Permanent Magnet
Note
When considering rotary actuator applications using a sensor, it should be borne in mind that rack and pinion actuators have a small amount of backlash. This can be overcome by use of a special hydraulic circuit. Please consult the factory for details.
Coupling
Available as an accessory please specify in order

15
Ordering and Maintenance Information

HTR Product Model Code Type Rotation Cushions Mounting Style

D Shaft Style Port Type Port Location Seals Design Series xxxx Options
Code Rotation Page 090 90 3 180 180 3 360 360 3 Other please specify Code .9 1.8 3.7 7.5 5 10 15 30 22 45 75 150 300 600 Bore 22.2 mm 22.2 mm 38.1 mm 38.1 mm 38.1 mm 38.1 mm 50.8 mm 50.8 mm 63.5 mm 63.5 mm 101.6mm 101.6 mm 152.4 mm 152.4 mm Page 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Stroke Limiters
Code Seal Polyurethane standard V FPM W Carboxilated nitrile
Page 12 12 12
Code 1-4 5 9
Location Page Side specify positions 1-4 8 End 8 Special add to 'Options' 8
Code 4 5 6 1 2 9
Type Page BSPP standard 8 Metric to DIN 3852/1 8 Metric to ISO 6149/1 8 SAE straight thread 8 NPTF 8 Special add to 'Options' 8
Code Cushioning1 Page None standard 10 1 Clockwise rotation 5 10 2 Anti-clockwise rotation 5 10 3 Both directions 5 10 8 High Performance Cushion 10 9 Special add to 'Options' 10
Code Style H Male, single ended, double key standard G Female, double key K Male, double ended, double key L Female spline M Male spline, single ended N Male spline, double ended X Special add to 'Options'
Page 6 9 9 9 9 12 12
Code Stroke limiter1 Page None standard 12 A 0-5 Clockwise rotation 3 12 B 0-5 Anti-clockwise rotation 3 12 C 0-5 Both rotations 3 12 D 0-30 Clockwise rotation 4 12 E 0-30 Anti-clockwise rotation 3 12 F 0-30 Both rotations 4 12 X Special add to 'Options' 12
Code C D T
Mounting Page Face standard 6 Base 8 Pilot 8
Code Option Page 1000 Actuator model code defined above Standard 1111 Actuator model code with special options: eg: Air Bleeds specify positions 1-4 8 Position switches 14 Feedback device 15 Bronze rack bearing (HTR.9-10) 4 Please attach full details of Special Options required
Notes: 1 Viewed from shaft end 2 Double rack models only 3 Not available with end ports 4 Not available with end ports and cushions 5 Only available on single rack units
Maintenance and Spare Parts

Full instructions for the maintenance of HTR Series rotary actuators, together with a complete list of the spares available, is contained in the HTR Series Rotary Actuator Maintenance Bulletin. Please ask for bulletin no. 1220/M1-GB.
16
Applications Data Check List

(To be completed when requesting further information)

Parker Ref.
Contact Information
Name ................................................................................................. Job Title ........................................................................... Company ......................................................................................................................................................................................... Address ............................................................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................... Telephone .............................. Fax .................................................... Post Code ........................................................................ E-mail ...............................................................................
Application Details (see page)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Rotation (3) ......................................................................... Operating Pressure bar ......................................................... Operating Temperature C (12) ............................................. Design Torque Nm (5) ........................................................... External Bearing Load kN (13) .............................................. Rotation Time sec. ................................................................ Rotational Acceleration rad/s2 ............................................... Number of rotations per day .................................................. Mass kg ................................................................................. Lever length mm ................................................................... Moment of Inertia kgm2 ......................................................... Plane of movement horizontal/vertical ...................................
Sketch
Brief Description of Application (Please supply a sketch if necessary) .................................................................................................. ........................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................
Actuator Details (see page)

14 Mounting Style (8) ..................................................................... .................................................................................................. 15 Type of Shaft (9) ....................................................................... .................................................................................................. 16 17 18 Port Type and Location (8) ....................................................... Seals (12) ................................................................................. Cushioning (10) ........................................................................ 19 Stroke Limiters ( ) ............................................... 12 20 Position/Feedback Devices ( 14, 15 ) ...................... ........................................................................................... 21 Special Requirements ............................................. ........................................................................................... .......................................................................................... ...........................................................................................
Please photocopy, complete and forward/fax to: Parker Hannifin plc. Greycaine Road, Watford, Herts. WD24 7QA, UK Tel. 01923 492000 Fax: 01923 210562 e-mail: cldemarketing@parker.com
17

Austria Marchtrenk Parker Hannifin GmbH Tel: (7242) 56921 Fax: (7242) 5692120 Belgium Nivelles Parker Hannifin S.A. N.V. Tel: 67 280 900 Fax: 67 280 999 Czech Republic Praha Parker Hannifin Corporation Tel: 283 085 224 Fax: 283 085 360 Denmark Ishj Parker Hannifin Danmark A/S Tel: 43 56 04 00 Fax: 43 73 31 07 Finland Vantaa Parker Hannifin Oy Tel: 9 476 731 Fax: 9 476 73200 Netherlands Oldenzaal Parker Hannifin B.V. Tel: (0541) 585000 Fax: (0541) 585459 Norway Ski Parker Hannifin A/S Tel: 64 91 10 00 Fax: 64 91 10 90 Poland Warsaw Parker Hannifin Corp. Tel: (22) 863 49 42 Fax: (22) 863 49 44 Portugal Leca da Palmeira Parker Hannifin Portugal Lda. Tel: (22) 999 7360 Fax: (22) 996 1527 Slovakia ref. Czech Republic
Need a Parker Part? Call Parker's European Product Information Centre on 00800 27 27 5374
Spain Madrid Parker Hannifin Espaa S.A. France Contamine-sur-Arve Tel: (91) 675 73 00 Fax: (91) 675 77 11 Parker Hannifin S.A. Tel: 4 50 25 80 25 Sweden Spnga Fax: 4 50 03 67 37 Parker Hannifin AB. Tel: 08-5979 50 00 Germany Cologne Fax: 08-5979 51 20 Parker Hannifin GmbH Tel: (0221) 71720 Switzerland Romanshorn Fax: (0221) 7172219 Hydrel A.G. Romanshorn Tel: (714) 66 66 66 Hungary Budapest Fax: (714) 66 66 80 Parker Hannifin Corp. Tel: 1 25 28 137 Turkey Istanbul Fax: 1 25 28 129 Hidroser Hidrolik - Pnmatik Tel: (212) 886 72 70 Ireland Clonee Fax: (212) 886 69 35 Parker Sales (Ireland) Ltd. Tel: (353) 1 801 4010 United Kingdom Watford Fax: (353) 1 801 4132 Parker Hannifin Plc Tel: (01923) 492000 Italy Arsago-Seprio Fax: (01923) 248557 Parker Hannifin S.p.A. Tel: (0331) 765611 Fax: (0331) 765612
Hd
li
18
1220/6-UK, Parker Hannifin Plc 1.5M, 04/03, PD Cylinder Division Watford, Herts.
Industrial Roundline Cylinders
Meeting the Challenge

Todays industry places the highest demands on hydraulic cylinders. Faster cycle times and higher pressures must be balanced against lower costs of ownership and longer service life. The search for higher productivity means that cushions have to work harder, seals have to withstand higher speeds and pressures, and bearing surfaces have to withstand continuous loading with negligible wear. And as the demands on productivity grow, greater environmental awareness brings new challenges of its own. At Parker, weve been making cylinders for a long time over 40 years, in fact. Our wide range of welded, threaded and flange-bolted industrial roundline cylinders reflects this long experience, and has been developed to meet the toughest challenges of industry. In steel mills and foundries, plastic injection moulding plants and paper mills, Parker cylinders meet these challenges every day.
A major force in industry

On the world stage, Parker is a major player. No other motion and control company can rival Parkers breadth of operations, range of products and technical leadership. From a single cylinder to a sophisticated electrohydraulic system, Parkers proven engineering expertise is ready to help. For you, working in partnership with Parker means peace of mind the peace of mind that comes from knowing that, wherever in the world your equipment is in use, its never far from the expertise and premier customer service that have made us Number One in motion and control technology. The Parker Partnership enables you to source a huge range of products, services and systems from a single supplier, reducing your supplier base and simplifying administration. Whether your need is for hydraulic, pneumatic or electro-mechanical solutions, the Parker Partnership places an unequalled resource at your disposal. From design and manufacture to training and maintenance, our aim is to support your business. Your reputation depends on it and so does ours.
Standard Cylinders
From a 40mm bore cylinder that you can hold in your hand to a 5 metre stroke monster, industry demands hydraulic cylinders in a vast range of sizes, pressures and styles of construction. Parkers bolted-flange industrial roundline cylinders feature detachable glands for easy seal replacement, generous bearing surfaces and hardened, dent resistant rod material to resist leakage. Cushions are adjustable and self-centring to maintain performance under the most demanding working conditions, and all cylinders are available with a range of durable sealing options to cover different applications. In service, these premium-quality ISO/DIN cylinders offer exceptional service life with low cost of ownership. Ease of maintenance is designed in so unnecessary machine downtime is designed out. Other styles of cylinder available in our standard ranges include screwed and welded designs, giving you an unequalled choice of high quality cylinders to suit all applications and environments.
Special Cylinders
When a standard product cannot be tailored to your application, Parkers vast experience of designing custom solutions is available. Working with our partners on thousands of cylinder applications often over many years has given us a unique insight into their business requirements. Working in partnership with you, our design engineers will review the operating conditions, load requirements and physical factors to create the best solution for the most challenging of applications. From a one-off actuator to a complete system, Parker has the expertise and resources to deliver cost-effective solutions to your timescale. Special cylinders present special challenges. In the offshore industry, a cylinder on the sea bed may have to operate just once a year but millions of dollars of oil production could depend on it. Lost production in an assembly operation through press failure can impact disastrously on manufacturers and their supply chains. In your business, the reliability of your hydraulic cylinders is paramount and your choice of cylinder supplier will be critical. With Parker as your partner, you can be confident that youve made the right choice.
Parker Roundline Cylinders in Plastic Injection Moulding

The range of products available from plastic injection moulding is growing rapidly. From the simple stamped parts of only a few years ago, todays moulding machines achieve elaborate decorative and textured effects to create complex, deep-moulded structures. In the automotive industry, components ranging from simple thermoplastic handles and ducting to luxuriously textured headlining panels are produced in high volumes to exacting quality standards. Hydraulic cylinders provide the moving force that powers the moulding process. From positioning, clamping, locking and injection to final ejection, the continuous high force and controllable delivery of hydraulics ensures that quality standards and delivery schedules are met. The high cycle times achieved by Parkers cushioned roundline cylinders can be combined with closed-loop electro-hydraulic control to create a system which delivers cost-effective production with short set-up times every time.
Parker Roundline Cylinders in Primary Metals

Primary metals processing presents a tough challenge for motion and control systems. The environment is aggressive, temperatures are extreme and reliability is critical a continuous casting line cannot be shut down just because a hydraulic seal is leaking. Failure between programmed maintenance periods is not acceptable. In applications like this, total reliability is vital and total reliability starts with the choice of product and supplier. The product must be highly engineered, rugged and dependable under all operating conditions and the supplier must be as dependable as the product. In these conditions, Parker is the only choice. The power of Parker means that our partners enjoy premier customer service on a world-wide scale, with technical knowledge and applications expertise second to none. With over 40 years of experience in making cylinders for the steel and aluminium industries, we have the coatings, seal compounds and protective features to ensure that production will continue to meet your targets for years to come.
Parker Roundline Cylinders in Presswork

From making cars and minting coins to filtering waste, modern presswork technology plays a major role in the high volume/low cost manufacturing processes that have shaped the world around us. In the automotive industry, hydraulic power is used to stamp sheet metal into intricate shapes, to form the bodyshells of almost every car on the road. New techniques in hydroforming, where metal tubes are inflated to form highly complex hollow bodies, are becoming increasingly widespread. Greater environmental pressures will continue to drive down the weight of automotive structures, creating vehicles that use less fuel without loss of strength. The hydraulic cylinders used in presswork have to meet exacting performance standards. With nominal press forces of up to 100,000kN, large bore cylinders, frequently with long strokes, have to achieve rapid cycle times. Parkers sophisticated control systems provide the variable press forces required to prevent material deformation during the stamping process, while electro-hydraulic control contributes to reduced set-up times and permits fine control of slide speeds as forming occurs.
Parker Roundline Cylinders in Low Pressure Casting

High definition cast aluminium parts rely on a multi-phase injection system for precise regulation of the casting process. The fine tolerances required for the finished product demand high precision from the hydraulic cylinders used to position dies and eject the finished parts. Working at high temperatures furnaces can reach 900C there's no substitute for experience when selecting seal material and fluid type. With a travel of 1600mm or more and high cycling speeds, Parker's proven sealing systems comfortably withstand the temperatures and piston speeds involved, to provide highly accurate, repeatable performance over millions of production units. The reliability of hydraulics is central to the low pressure die-casting process. Hydraulic cylinders working in sequence control the positioning and closure of the die, locking and core pulling, as well as die stripping and ejection of the finished article. When the failure of just one cylinder means a break in production, it's reassuring to know that, with Parker as your partner, you've specified the best cylinders available.
Committed to our Customers

With six industrial cylinder manufacturing plants in Europe and an extensive network of sales offices, we aim to be close to our customers. Our reputation is founded on the strong relationships weve built with customers like Battenfeld, Bloehm & Voss and Krupp, working with them to meet the challenges of modern engineering with solutions that are timely, cost-effective and soundly engineered. A relationship with Parker, though, doesnt end with delivery.
Training
We offer full training support, from classroom-based courses with purpose-built training equipment for hands-on teaching, to on-site training on your new Parker hydraulic system. Regular in-house training courses are held at centres throughout Europe, covering all levels from beginners hydraulics up to the design of sophisticated electrohydraulic systems.
Design support
inPHorm, our interactive development software for standard cylinders, guides you through the design process quickly and accurately and even draws the finished cylinder, ready to import into your CAD system! inPHorm constantly analyses your input to build up precisely the right cylinder for your application, based on load, working pressure, fatigue life, cycle time, fluid type and many other factors. And when even intelligent software isnt intelligent enough our engineers are only a phone call away.
Installation and commissioning

On complex engineering projects, a seemingly unique problem may be one that weve encountered before. Its at times like this that our experience can make a world of difference. Working together with you, our engineers will assist with installation, trials and start up, to ensure a successful conclusion to your project.
Round the clock assistance

No-one likes to think about failure but if it happens, its good to know that youve got the power of Parker behind you. Our European Product Information Centre is available 24 hours a day, with direct access to specialist help hydraulic, pneumatic and electromechanical. Call us free on 00800 27 27 5374. And if it takes a new cylinder to get you up and running again, you can rely on our Fastrack service to cut cylinder production time to the bare minimum.
Around the world, around the clock... Parker makes it possible.
In addition to industrial roundline cylinders...
Parker Cylinder Sales and Service in Europe

United Kingdom Parker Hannifin plc. Tel: 01923 492000 Fax: 01923 248557 France Parker Hannifin S.A. Tel: 4 50 25 80 25 Fax: 4 50 03 67 37 Germany Parker Hannifin GmbH Tel: (37382) 820 Fax: (37382) 82 211 Italy Parker Hannifin S.p.A. Tel: (331) 768 056 Fax: (331) 769 059
Parker manufactures a vast range of hydraulic, pneumatic and electro-mechanical motion and control products, which are distributed worldwide. For more information about Parker products, please contact your nearest sales office or call our European Product Information Centre on 00800 27 27 5374.
www.parker.com/uk
Catalogue 1201/1-UK 2.0M 0900 GT
LDT Feedback Transducers

For Servo and Proportional Control
Catalogue 1175/LDT/1-GB
Applications Data Check List

(To be completed when requesting further information)
LDT
Parker Ref.
Electro-Hydraulic Actuators
Contact Information
Name ................................................................................... Job title ................................................................................ Company ................................................................................................................................................................................ Address .................................................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................. Post code ............................................................................ Telephone ........................................................................... Fax .......................................................................................
Application and System Data

Application Details
1 Machine type and function .......................................... ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................. 2 Cylinder attitude ( to horizontal) ................................. For more complex motions, please supply a drawing 8 9 Cylinder speed (min/max, m/s) ..................................... Mass (kg) ......................................................................
10 Working life (cycles) ..................................................... 11 Shock duty (heavy/medium/light) ..................................
Control System
1 2 3 4 5 Type of controller ........................................................... Make/model ................................................................... Inputs: sink/source/analogue/digital/LDT direct ........... Signal type ..................................................................... Other .............................................................................
Hydraulic Data
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Maximum working pressure (bar) ................................ Maximum system pressure (bar) ................................. Axial force on cylinder (push/pull, kN) ........................ Fluid medium and viscosity ........................................ Max. available flow (l/min) ........................................... Oil temperature (min/max, C) ..................................... Ambient temperature (min/max, C) ............................
System Requirements
1 2 Speed control ..........% Position control: open/closed loop ...............................
Cylinder and Transducer Data

Cylinder Specification See Model Numbers, Page 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Bore (mm) ..................................................................... Cushion head end ..................................................... Double rod (Special consult factory) ........................ Mounting style .............................................................. Mounting modifications ................................................. Series (2HX, HMX etc.) ................................................. Ports .............................................................................. Piston type/loadholding capability ................................ Special features ............................................................ 17 Air bleeds ....................................................................... 18 Gland drain ....................................................................
Transducer Performance See Specification, Page 3

1 2 3 4 5 Absolute position accuracy ....................................... Repeatability ............................................................... Temperature range (C) ................................................. Synchronization (external/internal) ................................ Outputs (0-10V, 4-20mA, digital etc.) ............................
10 Rod number .................................................................. 11 Rod end style ............................................................... 12 Rod end thread ............................................................. 13 Cushion cap end (Special consult factory) ............ 14 Working or net stroke (mm) .......................................... 16 Port positions ................................................................ Please photocopy, complete and forward/fax to: The Product Manager, Electro-Hydraulic Actuators Parker Hannifin plc. Greycaine Road, Watford, Herts. WD2 4QA, UK Hydraulics Tel. 01923 492000 Fax 01923 210562
Electro-Hydraulic Data See Model Numbers, Page 7

1 2 3 4 Manifold ......................................................................... Manifold position ............................................................ Feedback transducer type ............................................ Conditioning electronics ................................................
LDT
Introduction
The addition of a transducer and conditioning electronics to a hydraulic actuator creates a system which responds rapidly and accurately to control signals for position and velocity, without the need for mechanical re-setting. By combining the sophistication of electronics with the enormous power densities offered by hydraulic motion, greater machine flexibility is achieved and set-up times are cut to a minimum. To select a feedback device for a specific application, a balance has to be achieved between accuracy, cost and durability. Parker recommends the transducers shown below, but can supply cylinders fitted with almost any transducer requested by the customer.
Introduction and Specification

Feedback Transducers from Parker
A full range of magnetostrictive and inductive transducers is available from Parker. This data sheet covers the LDT transducer, and summarizes the electronics, manifold and valve options available. Other data sheets in this series describe the different transducer options available your Parker Sales Office will be pleased to supply copies on request. For more detailed information about individual transducers, manufacturers' data sheets are available. The performance of Parker's standard range of transducers is summarized in the following Selection Guide.
Transducer Selection Guide

PLT
Type Mounting Position Max stroke Max speed Resolution Repeatability Linearity Magnetostrictive Internal 3.5m 2.5m/s Analogue o/p 0.1mV/0.2A Digital o/p 0.01mV min 6m max 0.05% of full stroke
LDT
Magnetostrictive Internal 3.5m 2.5m/s Analogue o/p infinite Digital o/p 5 max 0.001% of full stroke 0.05% of full stroke -40C to +65C 0.009% per C 350 bar Analogue and digital All Medium levels of shock and vibration
LVDT
Inductive Internal 0.8m (200Hz) Infinite 0.1% of full stroke 0.5% of full stroke -30C to +150C 0.03% per C 210 bar Analogue All High levels of shock, vibration and temperature
Operating temperature -20C to +80C Temperature coefficient 0.004% per C Max working pressure Outputs Fluid suitability Environment 210 bar Analogue and digital All Medium levels of shock and vibration
The Linear Displacement Transducer

The linear displacement transducer or LDT is a magnetostrictive device which provides analogue or digital information of actuator position through the interaction of two magnetic fields. Applications for the LDT include closed loop feedback to achieve accurate position, velocity or motion control. On open loop systems, an LDT may be used as a continuous, infinite resolution position monitoring device.
Operating Principles
The two magnetic fields which are central to the operation of the LDT are generated by a permanent magnet on the actuator piston, and by a magnetic pulse produced by a current pulse launched along a wire inside the waveguide tube. The interaction between the two fields produces a torsional strain pulse, which travels down the waveguide tube and is sensed by a coil at the end of the device. The position of the permanent magnet is established by measuring the elapsed time between the launching of the current pulse and the arrival of the strain pulse. Interface electronics convert this information to a digital or analogue output.
Magnetic field of positioning head Magnetic field of current pulse Magnet of positioning head
Applications
Parker feedback systems are suitable for precision control of a wide variety of applications, including: l Machine tools l Robots l Flight simulators l Woodworking machinery l Paper machinery l Valve mechanisms l Injection moulding equipment l Marine stabilisation systems l Rubber processing equipment l Aerial and antennae positioning systems l Welding equipment l Process control systems l Life cycle testing systems
Current pulse Waveguide twist
Magnetostrictive waveguide
Conducting element
Torsional pulse converter
Hydraulics
Availability and Dimensions

Actuator Designation
Where a standard Parker actuator is fitted with a feedback device, an 'X' is added to the Series name see 'Model Numbers' on page 7. Thus, when fitted with a feedback device, a Series 2H cylinder becomes a 2HX, and a Series HMI or HMD becomes an HMX, etc.
LDT
Working Pressure Restrictions
The recommended maximum working pressures of cylinders fitted with a transducer may be lower than that of the standard cylinder, due to the internal drilling of the piston rod. Maximum working pressures for individual bore/rod combinations of 2HX and HMX cylinders are shown in the table below. For working pressure restrictions to other cylinder series, please consult the factory. Note: for stroke lengths in excess of 1250mm, and for applications involving high cycle rates, high frequencies or shock loads, further pressure restrictions may apply please consult the factory.
Mounting Styles and Dimensions

Linear Displacement Transducers or LDTs may be ordered for most Parker tie rod and roundline actuators. The transducer increases the overall build length by an amount which varies with the mounting style chosen. The tables show the variations in dimensions which result when an HMI/HMD or 2H cylinder is specified with an LDT. For the dimensional changes to other actuator series, please contact the factory. The tables of dimensions which follow must be used in conjunction with the current version of the appropriate actuator product catalogue. Except where specified below, the dimensions of an actuator fitted with an LDT are identical with those of the standard, non-feedback actuator. If you are unsure whether you have the latest version of the catalogue, please consult your Parker sales office before ordering.
CE Marking
Transducers and associated components fitted by Parker are CE marked, where appropriate, to certify that they meet the requirements of EC Directive 89/336/EEC for electromagnetic compatibility.
Protective Covers
Protective covers for the transducer body are available to special order. Please contact the factory for details.
Dimensions Series 2HX Cylinder with LDT

%RUH

5RG 1R
5RG
HhXxvt 8Y G9 G` TW TI Y@ YA YE XJ1 Qrr 7h

"' "" "" "" "" "" " " " " " " " " " " #( #( #( #( #( #( #( #( #( #( #( #(
#" $% $% $( $( $( '# '# '# (& (& (& ! ! ! ! ! " ! " ! " ! " !# !# !# !# !%& !%& !%& !%&
"" # # #" #" #" %$ %$ %$ &$ &$ &$ '& '& '& '& '& '& '& '& ! % ! % ! % ! % !# !# !# !#
$ (' (' (! (! (!
&" &" &" &% &% &% '( '( '(
"(' ## # # # #& #"( ##' ##$ #&! #' #&$ #( #(& #(& #(& $"# $"# $"# $"# $'' $'' $'' $'' %!% %!% %!% %!%
"(% #! I6 #" #!# I6 #% #$& I6 #( #'# I6 $& $& I6 I6 $'$ I6 $'$ I6 I6 I6 I6 I6 I6 I6 I6
"& "& #" # $! #% %! &! %' &$ '# &' ( (& (& (& ! " ! " ! " ! " !"' !"' !"' !"' !% !% !% !%
! ! % ! ! " ! ' ! ( ! ! ! " ! ! ! $ ! ( ! # ! ( !
&! &! %' %' #% #% &! &! #( #( %' %' " " #% #% " " #( #( ! ! " " ' ' " "
' ' ' ! !
($ ($ ($ ' '
All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise stated

Hydraulics
LDT
Dimensions
All Mountings Common dimensions
LX + stroke (HMX) LD + stroke (2HX) CX
Base Mounting Style F
SN + stroke (2HX)
Front Flange Mounting Style JJ
LX + stroke (HMX) LY + stroke (2HX)
Trunnion Mountings Styles D, DB & DD

XJ1 + stroke (HMX & 2HX)
Base Mounting Style C
SV + stroke (HMX & 2HX)
Rear Pivot Mountings Styles B, BB, SB & SBd
Rear Flange Mountings Depending on the method of mounting, feedback transducers may be available with rear flange-mounted cylinders. Please contact the factory with details of the application.
XE + stroke (Styles B & BB - HMX & 2HX) XF + stroke (Styles SBd - HMX, & SB - 2HX)
Dimensions Series HMX Cylinder with LDT

%RUH

5RG 1R
5RG

HhXxvt 8Y GY TW Y@ YA YE XJ1 Qrr 7h

#$ "( "( "( "( "( !& !& !& !$ !$ !$ !$ !$ !$ $$ $$ $$ $$ $$ $$
"$ # # #" #" #" %# %# %# &" &" &" (& (& (& '' '' '' !#! !#! !#!
$ (( (( (" (" (" & & & " " " " " " &! &! &! # #
# # #!% #!% #!% #$% #$% #$% #&( #&( #&( $!( $!( $!( $& $& $& %%% %%% %%%
"' ## ## $" $" $" & & & (# (# (# ! # ! # ! # !" !" !" !&% !&% !&%
! ! ' ! ! " ! ! " ! ! ! ! ! ' ! ! # ! !

#! #! #! ##& ##& ##& #&$ #&$ #&$ $ # $ # $ # $# $# $# %"! %"! %"!
All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise stated

Hydraulics
Options and Specifications

Bore Sizes and Mounting Styles
The Series 2HX and HMX bore sizes and mounting styles listed on pages 4-5 are those for which an LDT is commonly specified. Where a different bore size or mounting style is required, modification may be possible to allow a transducer to be added please contact the factory for details.
LDT
Calculation of Running Friction
The seal friction attributable to the cylinder is calculated as the sum of the friction due to the individual sealing elements of the gland and piston. The following formulae apply for 2HX and HMX cylinders, with speeds in excess of 0.1m/s. For other cylinder series, please consult the factory. Series 2HX Seal Type Lipseal HiLoad Low Friction Standard LoadMaster Low Friction Wiper 2d 2d 2d 2d 2d 2d Friction (Newtons) + Rod Seal + Piston Seal + 2FLd + 4FLD + 2FLd + 2FPD + 5FPd + FP D + + + 2FLd 2FLd 5FPd + + + F ND F ND FP D
Rod Diameters
For heavy duty or high cycling applications, large diameter piston rods are recommended. Please refer to the rod selection information in the appropriate cylinder catalogue.
Piston and Seal Options

Feedback devices may be specified with any of the piston and gland seal options shown in the cylinder catalogues. Seals are available in a variety of compounds for standard or high temperature use, and for use with different fluids. Where fine control of acceleration, velocity and position are required, the 'Servo' option should be specified see 'Model Numbers' on page 7. Servo cylinders combine low friction piston and gland seals with specially selected rods and tubes.
HMX
Where:
d = rod diameter (mm) D = bore diameter (mm) F L = friction factor for standard rod seals and Lipseal pistons FN = friction factor for Standard piston seals FP = friction factor for PTFE seals
Cushions
On cylinders with integral feedback, cushioning is normally available at the head end only. Cushioning at the cap end requires special designs please contact the factory with details of the application.
Friction factors may be read from the chart below. Note that the curves are based on the performance of a cylinder with the servo option see 'Piston and Seal Options' above.
Calculation of Break-Out Friction

Break-out friction may be approximated by applying the following correction factors: FL x 1.5; FN x 2; FP no correction needed Bore: 50mm Seals: Low friction 100 bar
Gland Drains
The accumulation of fluid behind the gland wiperseal of long stroke cylinders, or cylinders with constant back pressure, can be relieved by specifying the option of a gland drain. Full details are contained in the appropriate cylinder catalogue.
Example
Series: HMX Rod: 36mm rod Operating pressure: Friction
7 Friction Factor (F) 6 Standard Piston (FN) 5
Analogue and Digital Outputs

Parker offers various types of LDT transducer, to suit the specific requirements of the application. With models which do not support an analogue output directly from the transducer head, conditioning electronics are available. In each case, the outputs supported are 0-10V, 4-20mA and 0-20mA. Digital output is available from all types of LDT transducer, in conjunction with suitable conditioning electronics. Please contact the factory for further information.
= 2d + 5FPd + FPD = (2 x 36) + (5 x 1.3 x 36) + (1.3 x 50) = 371N
Manifold Options
Manifolds can be supplied in a variety of positions, to suit most commonly available valves and valve interfaces. Please consult the factory for details.
Proportional and Servo Valves

Both open and closed loop control of cylinder position and velocity can be achieved using proportional valves. For applications where fine control of acceleration, velocity and position are required, Parker recommends servo valves. Please contact the factory for details.
3
Lipseal Piston (FL)
2 PTFE seals (Fp)
Seal Friction
The effects of seal friction are influenced by a wide range of factors. The following information is offered as a guide but, for critical applications, measurements should be made under simulated or actual operating conditions.
50
100
150
200
250
Hydraulics
LDT
Model Numbers and Ordering
Each Parker feedback cylinder is assigned a model number consisting of a set of characters. As indicated in the key to the table below, some of these characters are taken from the relevant cylinder catalogue while others, which vary with the type of feedback device specified, can be found in the
appropriate transducer catalogue see page 3. To order a cylinder with a feedback transducer, select from the cylinder and feedback transducer catalogues those characters which represent the features required and enter them in the sequence shown in the example. Example
Features
Bore Head Cushion Double Rod Mounting Style
Description
See Cylinder Catalogue If required Special consult factory See Cylinder Catalogue + Front Flanges Base Mountings Rear Pivot Mountings Trunnion Mountings eg: HMX, 2HX See Cylinder Catalogue Standard HMX LoadMaster HMX Low Friction HMX Hi-Load 2HX Lipseal 2HX Low Friction 2HX
Page Symbol
50 C K 6 C J J HMX R N S 1 9 M C 80 M 11 44 B R T A
4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 4 6 6 6 6 6 6
eg: JJ
Series Ports Piston & Seal Options
HMX N Z PF K L F S S S 1, 2 etc.
Special Features Piston Rod
Servo Option 6 Protective covers 6 Others See Cylinder Catalogue Enter Rod No. Number See Cylinder Catalogue Special consult factory See Cylinder Catalogue See Cylinder Catalogue See Cylinder Catalogue See Cylinder Catalogue No manifold required NG6 (CETOP3) interface NG10 (CETOP5) interface Servo interface (Moog 760 or equivalent) NG16 (CETOP7) interface NG25 (CETOP8) interface Other please specify No manifold Rear manifold (Standard) Front manifold (optional) Other please specify No feedback required PLT transducer LDT transducer LVDT transducer Other please specify Not required Voltage 0-10V Current 0-20mA Current 4-20mA Digital please specify Other please specify See Cylinder Catalogue 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 6 3, 4 4-5
Piston Rod End See Cylinder Catalogue Rod Thread Cap Cushion Stroke Fluid Medium Port Position Air Bleeds Manifold/Valve Interface C 80
A B C D E F Z O R F Z A B T L Z O A B C D Z
Manifold Position
Transducer Type
Conditioning Electronics
Key: Information affected by selection of transducer see this catalogue Standard cylinder catalogue information see cylinder catalogue
Accessories
Hydraulics
LDT

Austria Vienna Parker Hannifin GmbH Tel: 1332/36050 Fax: 1332/360577 Belgium Brussels S.A. Parker Hannifin N.V. Tel: (02) 762 18 00 Fax: (02) 762 33 30 Czech Republic Prague Parker Hannifin Corporation Tel: 2 6134 1704 Fax: 2 6134 1703 Denmark Ishj Parker Hannifin Danmark A/S Tel: 43 54 11 33 Fax: 43 73 31 07 Finland Vantaa Parker Hannifin Oy Tel: 0 476 731 Fax: 0 476 73200 France Contamine-sur-Arve Parker Hannifin RAK S.A. Tel: 4 50 25.80.25 Fax: 4 50 03.67.37 Germany Cologne Parker Hannifin GmbH Tel: (221) 71720 Fax: (221) 7172219 Hungary Budapest Parker Hannifin Corp. Tel + Fax: 1 252 2539 Italy Arsago-Seprio Parker Hannifin S.p.A. Tel: (331) 768 056 Fax: (331) 769 059 Netherlands Oldenzaal Parker Hannifin N.V. Tel: (5410) 85000 Fax: (5410) 85459 Norway Langhus Parker Hannifin A/S Tel: (64) 86 77 60 Fax: (64) 86 68 88 Poland Warsaw Parker Hannifin Corp. Tel: (22) 36 50 78 Fax: (22) 36 50 81 Spain Madrid Parker Hannifin Espana S.A. Tel: (1) 675 73 00 Fax: (1) 675 77 11 Sweden Spnga Parker Hannifin Sweden AB. Tel: 08-760 29 60 Fax: 08-760 81 70 Switzerland Romanshorn Hydrel A.G. Romanshorn Tel: (714) 61 11 11 Fax: (714) 66 63 33 Turkey Istanbul Hidroser Hidrolik - Pnmatik Tel: (212) 243 26 29 Fax: (212) 251 19 09 United Kingdom Watford Parker Hannifin Plc Tel: (01923) 492000 Fax: (01923) 248557
697
Hydraulics
MMA Roundline Cylinders

ISO 6022 cylinders for working pressures up to 250 bar
Roundline Cylinders MMA Series
Cylinder Selection
Introduction inPHorm Design Features and Benefits Gland and Piston Seal Options Optional Features Special Designs Mounting Information Cylinder Masses Servicing Features Cylinder Selection Checklist Mounting Styles Round Flange Mountings Clevis Mountings Trunnion and Foot Mountings Rod End Accessories Push and Pull Forces Piston Rod Size Selection Long Stroke Cylinders Stop Tubes Stroke Factors Cushioning Seals and Fluids Ports Ports, Locations and Piston Speeds Replacement Parts and Service Piston Rod End Data How to Order Cylinders
Roundline Cylinders MMA Series Page

3 3 4 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 15 15, 16 16 17, 18 19 20 21 22 24 25
Index
Accessories Air Bleeds Cushioning Design Features Filtration Forces Push and Pull Gland Drains inPHorm Long Stroke Cylinders Masses Model Numbers Mounting Styles and Information Optional Features Ordering Instructions Piston Rod End Data Piston Rod Size Selection Piston Speeds Piston and Seal Types Ports Standard and Oversize Port Size and Piston Speed Repairs Replacement Parts and Service Seals and Fluids Special Designs Standard Specifications Stop Tubes Stroke Factors
Page
13 6 4, 17, 18, 21 4 19 14 6 3 15 7 25 9, 10-13 6 25 24 15 21 5, 19 20, 21 21 7 22-23 19 6 3 15, 16 16
Introduction
Parker Hannifin Corporation is a world leader in the manufacture of components and systems for motion control. Parker has more than 800 product lines for hydraulic, pneumatic and electromechanical applications in some 1200 industrial, mobile and aerospace markets. With more than 45,000 employees and some 210 manufacturing plants and administration offices around the world, Parker provides customers with technical excellence and first class customer service. Parker Hannifin's Cylinder Division is the world's largest supplier of hydraulic cylinders for industrial applications. Parker cylinders are used in applications as diverse as machine tools, flight simulation and tidal barrier control. The heavy duty Series MMA cylinder has been designed for service in steel mills and in other arduous applications where a rugged, dependable cylinder is required. In addition to the standard cylinders featured in this catalogue, MMA cylinders can be designed and manufactured to suit individual customer requirements. Our engineers will be pleased to discuss and advise on unique designs to suit specific applications.
inPHorm
inPHorm is Parker Hannifins product selection program that helps to select the correct part for an application. The program prompts for the details of the application, makes the necessary design calculations, and selects a suitable product. inPHorm can also generate CAD drawings of the selected part, which can be viewed in other software applications, and customised and imported into other CAD packages. Please contact your local Sales Office for further information.
l l
Heavy Duty construction Styles and dimensions to: CETOP RP73H, ISO 6022*, DIN 24 333, BS 6331 Pt. III, AFNOR NF E48-025, VW 39D 921
l l l
Rated pressure: 250 bar Fatigue-free at the rated pressure Hydraulic mineral oil other fluids on request
l l l l l l l
Temperature range of standard seals: -20oC to +80oC Construction: head & cap bolted to heavy steel flanges Bore sizes: 50mm to 320mm Piston rod diameters: 32mm to 220mm Cushioning optional both ends Air bleeds optional both ends Tested in accordance with ISO 10100:2001
8 9
2 7
6 3 4 10 2 5
1 Piston Rod
Manufactured from precision ground, high tensile carbon alloy steel, hard chrome plated and polished to 0.2mm max. Piston rods up to 110mm in diameter are induction case hardened to Rockwell C54 minimum before chrome plating. This provides a 'dent resistant' surface, resulting in improved seal life. Piston rods of 125mm diameter and above can be case hardened on request. All rod and piston assemblies are designed to be fatigue free at full rated pressure.
8 Rod Gland and Bearings

Seals are housed in a corrosion-resistant steel gland, featuring heavy duty polymer bearing rings to resist side loadings. Wide separation of these rings reduces bearing stresses, maximising the service life of the bearing. The rod gland may be screwed or bolted. On bore sizes up to 100mm the rod gland is screwed (illustrated above). On larger bore sizes the rod gland is bolted. The polymer bearing rings, with the rod seals, are easily replaced on removal of the rod gland, and all components may be serviced without further disassembly of the cylinder.
2 Head and Cap Retention

The head and cap are bolted to heavy steel flanges, which are retained by threads at each end of the cylinder body.
3 Cylinder Body
The heavy wall steel tubing is honed to a high surface finish, to minimise internal friction and prolong seal life.
9 & 10 Gland and Piston Seals

A variety of gland and piston seal options is available, to suit different applications, as shown opposite. In addition, MMA cylinders can be designed and manufactured to suit individual customer requirements. Please contact the factory for details. The gland seals listed opposite are located in a screwed or bolted gland housing, and provide efficient retention of pressurized fluid while preventing the ingress of contaminants.
4 & 5 Head & Cap Ends

These are machined from steel and located into the cylinder body's internal diameter for added strength and precise alignment. Both the head and cap are sealed by O-rings which, in turn, are protected by anti-extrusion rings.
6 & 7 Cushioning
Optional cushions at the head and cap are progressive in action, providing controlled deceleration which reduces noise and shock loading, and prolongs machine life. The head end cushion is a self-centring sleeve, while the polished cap end spear is an integral part of the piston rod. Needle valves are provided at both ends of the cylinder for precise cushion adjustment, and are retained so that they cannot be inadvertently removed. Check valves at the head and cap ends of the cylinder minimize restriction to the start of a stroke, permitting full power and fast cycle times. The head end check valve is incorporated into the fully floating cushion sleeve, while the cap end employs a floating bronze cushion bush.
Design Features and Benefits Gland and Piston Seal Options

Application Information
Standard Option General purpose seals suitable for a wide range of applications. For use with Group 1 fluids (see page 19). The standard option may be used for piston speeds up to 0.5m/s. Ordering code 'N'
Glands
Standard gland seals consist of a combination of a polyurethane lipseal and a PTFE stepped seal, providing efficient sealing under normal operating conditions.
Pistons
Standard pistons consist of a heavy duty filled polymer seal, which is leaktight under normal operating conditions. Heavy duty wear rings prevent metal contact with the cylinder bore and help to protect the piston seal from contaminants.
Low Friction Option Suitable for applications where very low friction and an absence of stickslip are important. Not suitable for holding loads in a fixed position. For use with all fluid groups (see page 19). The Low Friction option may be used for piston speeds up to 1m/s. Ordering code 'F'
Low Friction gland seals comprise two low friction PTFE stepped seals and a heavy duty wiperseal.
Low Friction pistons employ a PTFE seal and PTFE wear rings.
Chevron Option Suitable for arduous applications, such as steel mills. May be used to hold a load in position. For use with all fluid groups (see page 19). The chevron option may be used for piston speeds up to 0.5m/s. Ordering code 'LL'
Chevron gland seals have a corrosion-resistant steel retainer, and a separate removable steel housing which retains the inner bearing rings. A heavy duty wiper seal prevents the ingress of contaminants.
Chevron pistons feature a two-piece piston with a wide bearing ring mounted between chevron seals.
Load Holding Option Suitable for applications where loads are required to be held in position. Standard gland seals have a lower friction than the chevron equivalent. For use with Group 1 fluids (see page 19). The load holding option may be used for piston speeds up to 0.5m/s. Ordering code 'A'
Standard gland seals consist of a combination of a polyurethane lipseal and a PTFE stepped seal, providing efficient sealing under normal operating conditions.
Chevron pistons feature a two-piece piston with a wide bearing ring mounted between chevron seals.
Optional Features Air Bleeds

Available as an option at both ends, air bleeds are recessed into the head and cap and retained so they cannot be inadvertently removed.
Roundline Cylinders MMA Series Special Designs

Parker's design and engineering staff are available to produce special designs to incorporate customer's specific requirements. Alternative sealing arrangements, special mounting styles, higher or lower rated pressure designs, welded cap ends to reduce overall length (non-cushioned only), larger cylinder bores and alternative rod sizes are just a few of the special requirements which can be accommodated.
Special Mounting Styles

Mounting styles other than those specified in this catalogue can be supplied on request. Please consult the factory.
Rod Material
As an alternative to the normal piston rod material, stainless steel and other special materials and finishes can be supplied.
Gland Drains
The tendency of hydraulic fluid to adhere to the piston rod can result in an accumulation of fluid in the cavity between the seals under certain operating conditions. This may occur with long stroke cylinders, where there is a constant back pressure as in differential circuitry, or where the ratio of the extend speed to the retract speed is greater than 2 to 1. Gland drains should be piped back to the fluid reservoir, which should be located below the level of the cylinder. Standard and Low Friction glands can be fitted with gland drains. Please consult the factory for further information.
Marine Environments
MMA cylinders can be supplied with modifications to material and paint specifications which make them suitable for operation in a marine environment. Please consult the factory.
Position Feedback
Linear position transducers of various types may be fitted to MMA series cylinders. Please contact the factory for further details.
Position Switches
Non-contacting position switches are available for MMA series cylinders. Please contact the factory for further details.
Double Rodded Cylinders

MMA series cylinders are available with the option of a double-ended piston rod. Please contact the factory for further details.
Rod End Bellows

Exposed rod surfaces that are subjected to air hardening contaminants should be protected by rod end bellows. Longer rod extensions are required to accommodate their collapsed length please consult the factory for details.
Metallic Rod Wipers

For applications where contaminants may adhere to the extended piston rod and thereby cause premature failure of gland seals, the use of a metallic rod wiper in place of the standard wiper seal is recommended.
Mounting Information and Servicing

Mounting Bolts
Roundline Cylinders MMA Series Servicing Features

All cylinders will, at some time, need maintenance or repairs. The MMA series has been designed to make these tasks as easy as possible, by incorporating the following design features: Removable Gland Rod bearing and rod seals can be replaced without completely dismantling the cylinder. For chevron glands, a thread is machined on the outside diameter of the seal housing to assist extraction. Chamfers at both ends of the cylinder body ease assembly of the head and cap and insertion of the piston seals. Retaining flanges are removable, allowing separate replacement of the cylinder body. High tensile bolts are used for ease of maintenance and replacement. Flanges are spaced from the head and cap to allow the bolts to be sawn through in the event of severe damage or corrosion.
Mounting Information
It is recommended that mounting bolts with a strength to ISO 898/1 grade 12.9 should be used for fixing cylinders to the machine or base. Mounting bolts should be torque loaded to their manufacturer's recommended figures.
Spherical Bearings
All spherical bearings should be re-packed with grease periodically. In unusual or severe working conditions, consult the factory regarding the suitability of the bearing chosen.
Trunnions
On the 320mm bore cylinder the trunnion is welded to the cylinder body. On all other bore sizes the trunnion assembly is threaded to the cylinder body and secured with a locking ring. In both cases, the trunnion pins are machined from solid. If a different requirement is needed to suit a particular application, please consult the factory. Trunnions require lubricated pillow blocks with minimum bearing clearances. Blocks should be mounted and aligned to eliminate bending moments on the trunnion pins.
Cylinder Masses
The following table shows the masses of MMA cylinders for each mounting style at zero stroke; a stroke adder for each 10mm of stroke can then be calculated. Where applicable, accessory masses can be added to give a gross mass for the complete assembly see page 13.
Mounting Styles at Zero Stroke, in kg MF3 & MF4 14.8 17.8 27 27 39 39 61 61 103 104 164 164 198 199 289 289 356 357 646 647 1180 1230 MP3 & MP5 16.2 16.2 26 26 37 37 59 59 103 104 168 168 205 205 290 291 377 378 698 700 1294 1345 MT4 16.6 16.7 26 26 37 37 59 59 105 105 171 171 204 205 292 293 363 364 685 687 1239 1290 MS2 16.6 16.6 24 24 35 35 56 56 95 96 158 158 188 188 274 275 335 336 614 616 1116 1118 per 10mm Stroke kg 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.6 1.7 2.0 2.2 2.2 2.4 3.2 3.6 5.1 5.6
Head and Cap Retention Bolts

The head and cap retention bolts on MMA Series cylinders are torque loaded on assembly in the factory. If damage or corrosion is found on removal, the old bolts must be discarded and replacement bolts with a minimum strength to ISO 898/1 grade 12.9 must be fitted. Head and cap bolts should always be tightened progressively in a diagonal sequence and torque loaded to the figures shown in the table.
Bore mm 50 63 80 100 125 140 160 180 200 250 320 Flange Bolts Torque Load (Nm) 26-28 51-54 112-118 157-165 247-260 456-480 Bolt Size M8 M10 M12 M14 M16 M20
Bore 50 63 80 100 125 140 160 180 200 250 320
Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
668-692 M22 1112-1170 M27 1425-1500 M33
Repairs
Although MMA cylinders are designed to make on site maintenance or repairs as easy as possible, some operations should only be carried out in our factory. It is standard policy to fit a cylinder returned to the factory for repair with those replacement parts which are necessary to return it to 'as good as new' condition. Should the condition of the returned cylinder be such that the expense would exceed the cost of a new one, you will be notified.

This check list indicates the major factors which should be considered when selecting a hydraulic cylinder for a particular application. Further information is available on the pages shown. If additional information is required about any aspect of a cylinder's specification, please contact our design engineers.
Roundline Cylinders MMA Series inPHorm

The European cylinder inPHorm program (1260-Eur) can assist with the selection and specification of an hydraulic cylinder for a particular application.
Mass to be moved and force required Nominal operating pressure and range Distance to be travelled Time available to travel this distance Fluid medium

3 Cylinder Bore and Operating Pressure 4 Piston Rod
Determine the minimum rod diameter required to withstand buckling forces Is a stop tube required? Select a suitable rod end and rod end thread

5 Piston
Does seal type suit application?

6 Cushioning 7 Ports
Select suitable ports Are they capable of the speed required? Are the standard positions acceptable?

8 Seals
Select seals to suit the chosen fluid medium

9 Accessories
Are rod end accessories required?

10 Special Features
Mountings, materials, environments and fluids
2 Mounting Style
1 Establish System Parameters
Series MMA
Page 9 Page 14 Page 15
Mounting Styles Mounting Styles and Where to Find Them

Parker manufactures six standard mounting styles for the MMA range of hydraulic cylinders, to suit the majority of applications. General guidance for selection is given below, with detailed information about each mounting style shown on the pages indicated. Where a non-standard mounting style is required to satisfy a particular application, our design engineers will be happy to assist. Please contact the factory for details.
Head Circular Flange MF3 See Page 10

This type of cylinder is suitable for use on straight line force transfer applications. Two mounting styles are available, with flanges at the head or cap. Selection of a particular flange mounting style depends on whether the major force applied to the load will result in compression (push) or tension (pull) stresses on the piston rod. For compression-type applications, cap mounting style MF4 is most appropriate; where the major load places the piston rod in tension, head mounting style MF3 should be specified.
Cap Circular Flange MF4 See Page 10
Clevis Mounted Cylinders

Cylinders with pivot mountings, which absorb forces on their centreline, should be used for applications where the machine member to be moved travels in a curved path. They may be used for tension (pull) or compression (push) applications. Fixed clevis mounting cylinders MP3 may be used if the curved path of the piston rod travel is in a single plane; for applications where the piston rod will travel in a path either side of the true plane of motion, the spherical bearing mounting MP5 is recommended.
Cap Fixed Eye MP3 See Page 11

These cylinders are designed to absorb force on their centre-lines. They are suitable for tension (pull) or compression (push) applications, and may be used where the machine member to be moved travels in a curved path, in a single plane. Trunnion pins are designed for shear loads only and should be subjected to minimum bending stresses.
Cap Fixed Eye with Spherical Bearing MP5 See Page 11

MS2 cylinders do not absorb forces on their centreline see derating note on page 12. As a result, the application of force by the cylinder produces a turning moment which attempts to rotate the cylinder about its mounting bolts. It is important, therefore, that the cylinder should be firmly secured to the machine member on which it is mounted and that the load should be effectively guided, to avoid side loads being applied to the rod gland and piston bearings. The MS2 foot mounted cylinder is not an ISO standard mounting. Foot Mounting MS2 See Page 12 Intermediate Trunnion MT4 See Page 12
Round Flange Mountings

1

221/2 Y EE ZB + stroke PJ + stroke
c.
d.
FC
D max.
p.
FB
UC
F VD WC
Style MF3 Head Circular Flange
Accurate location of 'B' provided as standard on model MF3 only.
221/2 Y PJ + stroke
EE
FC
p.
c.
d.
4
BA D max.
FB
3
F UC ZP + stroke
Style MF4 Cap Circular Flange
Dimensions MF3 and MF4 See also Dimensions, page 24 & Mounting Information, page 7
Bore 50 63 80 100 125 140 1 160 180 1 200 250 320 Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 MM Rod 32 36 40 45 50 56 63 70 80 90 90 100 100 110 110 125 125 140 160 180 200 220
B f8 & BA H 8 63 75 90 110 132 145 160 185 200 250 320 D max. EE
(BSPP)
FB
FC
UC
VD min. 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 8 8
WC
Min Stroke 20 30 20 25 50 50 50 20 20 20 20
+ Stroke PJ 120 133 155 171 205 208 235 250 278 325 350 ZB max. 244 274 305 340 396 430 467 505 550 652 764 ZP 265 298 332 371 430 465 505 550 596 703 830
108 124 148 175 208 255 270 315 330 412 510
G1 /2 G3 /4 G3 /4 G1 G1 G11 /4 G11 /4 G11 /4 G11 /4 G11 /2 G2
25 28 32 36 40 40 45 50 56 63 80
13.5 13.5 17.5 22 22 26 26 33 33 39 45
132 150 180 212 250 300 315 365 385 475 600
155 175 210 250 290 340 360 420 440 540 675
22 25 28 32 36 36 40 45 45 50 56
98 112 120 134 153 181 185 205 220 260 310
140mm and 180mm bore cylinders do not conform to ISO 6022
10
Clevis Mountings
D max. EE
1
PJ + stroke
CD
MR
2 4
BW
L XC + stroke
LX
Style MP3 Cap Fixed Eye
EW
EE 4
2
D max.
1
PJ + stroke
CX
MS
4
4
3
BX
LT XO + stroke
LX
Style MP5 Cap Fixed Eye with Spherical Bearing
EX
Dimensions MP3 and MP5 See also Dimensions, page 24 & Mounting Information, page 7
Bore 50 63 80 100 125 140 1 160 180 1 200 250 320 Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 MM Rod 32 36 40 45 50 56 63 70 80 90 90 100 100 110 110 125 125 140 160 180 200 220
BW & BX 27 35 40 52 60 65 84 88 102 130 162 CD H9 & CX H7 32 40 50 63 80 90 100 110 125 160 200 D max. 108 124 148 175 208 255 270 315 330 412 510 EE
(BSPP)
EW h12 & EX h12 32 40 50 63 80 90 100 110 125 160 200
L & LT 61 74 90 102 124 150 150 185 206 251 316
LX
MR & MS 35 50 61.5 66 90 113 117.5 118 131 163 209
Min Stroke 20 30 20 25 50 50 50 20 20 20 20
+ Stroke PJ 120 133 155 171 205 208 235 250 278 325 350 XC & XO 305 348 395 442 520 580 617 690 756 903 1080
G1/2 G3/4 G3/4 G1 G1 G11/4 G11/4 G11/4 G11/4 G11/2 G2
38 50 61.5 71 90 113 112 129 145 178 230
98 112 120 134 153 181 185 205 220 260 310
11
Trunnion and Foot Mountings
Y EE R3
1
PJ + stroke BD
TD
UV max. TL
3
D max.
TM
TL XV ZB + stroke
Style MT4 Intermediate Trunnion
Note: XV Dimension to be specified by customer. Where minimum dimension is unacceptable, please consult factory.
EE
Y
1
PJ + stroke
SD 2mm
D max.
LH ST SE XS
SB
TS US
SC SC SS + stroke ZB + stroke
SE
Style MS2 Foot Mounting

(Not to ISO 6022)
Note: The MS2 mounting should only be used where the stroke is at least half of the bore diameter or where the cylinder operates below 160 bar.
Dimensions MT4 See also Dimensions, page 24 & Mounting Information, page 7
Bore 50 63 80 100 125 140 1 160 180 1 200 250 320 Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 MM Rod 32 36 40 45 50 56 63 70 80 90 90 100 100 110 110 125 125 140 160 180 200 220
+ Stroke BD D max. 108 124 148 175 208 255 270 315 330 412 510 EE
(BSPP)
TD f8
TL
TM h13
UV max. 108 124 148 175 218 260 280 315 330 412 510
XV min. 187 212 245 280 340 380 400 410 450 540 625
Min Stroke 55 75 90 120 160 180 180 170 190 240 300
PJ 120 133 155 171 205 208 235 250 278 325 350
XV max. 132 137 155 160 180 200 220 240 260 300 325
ZB max. 244 274 305 340 396 430 467 505 550 652 764
38 48 58 73 88 98 108 118 133 180 220
G1/2 G3/4 G3/4 G1 G1 G11/4 G11/4 G11/4 G11/4 G11/2 G2
32 40 50 63 80 90 100 110 125 160 200
25 32 40 50 63 70 80 90 100 125 160
112 125 150 180 224 265 280 320 335 425 530
98 112 120 134 153 181 185 205 220 260 310
12
Foot Mountings and Accessories
Dimensions MS2 See also Dimensions, page 24 & Mounting Information, page 7
Bore 50 63 80 100 125 140 1 160 180 1 200 250 320
1
Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
MM Rod 32 36 40 45 50 56 63 70 80 90 90 100 100 110 110 125 125 140 160 180 200 220
D max. 108 124 148 175 208 255 270 315 330 412 510
EE
(BSPP)
LH h10 SB H13 60 68 80 95 115 135 145 165 170 215 260 11
SC 20.5
2
SD 18 20 26 33 40 48 48 60 60 76 110
SE 15.5 17.5 22.5 27.5 30.0 35.5 37.5 42.5 45.0 50.0 60.0
2
ST 32 37 42 52 62 77 77 87 87 112 152
TS 135 155 185 220 270 325 340 390 405 520 620
US 160 185 225 265 325 390 405 465 480 620
XS 130.0 147.5 170.5 192.5 230.0 254.5 265.5 287.5 315.0 360.0
Y 98 112 120 134 153 181 185 205 220 260 310
Min Stroke 0 20 35 55 65 80 80 70 60 60 80
+ Stroke PJ 120 133 155 171 205 208 235 250 278 325 350 SS 55 55 55 55 60 61 79 85 90 120 120 ZB max. 244 274 305 340 396 430 467 505 550 652 764
G /2 G3/4 G3/4 G1 G1 G11/4 G11/4 G11/4 G11/4 G11/2 G2
13.5 24.5 2 17.5 22 26 30 33 40 40 52 62 22.5 27.5 30.0 35.5 37.5 42.5 47.0 2 52.0 2 62.0 2
740 425.0
Mounting holes offset from centre line
Rod End Accessories

C max. EF EN EM C max. ER BX
CN LF CH
4 LE CA AX min. KK b KK b
CK
AW min.
Rod Eye with Spherical Bearing ISO 6982
Rod Eye with Plain Bearing ISO 6981
Dimensions See also Mounting Information, page 7

Bore 50 63 80 100 125 140 160 180 KK M27 x 2 M33 x 2 M42 x 2 M48 x 2 M64 x 3 M72 x 3 M80 x 3 M90 x 3
Spherical Bearing Part No. 145241 145242 145243 145244 145245 148723 148724 148725 148726 148727 148728
Plain Bearing Part No. 148731 148732 148733 148734 148735 148736 148737 148738 148739 148740 148741
AX min. & AW min. 37 46 57 64 86 91 96 106 113 126 161
CN H7 & CK H9 32 40 50 63 80 90 100 110 125 160 200
EN h12 & EM h12 32 40 50 63 80 90 100 110 125 160 200
CH & CA 80 97 120 140 180 195 210 235 260 310 390
LF & LE 32 41 50 62 78 85 98 105 120 150 195
C max. 76 97 118 142 180 185 224 235 290 346 460
EF & ER 40 50 63 71 90 101 112 129 160 200 250
BX 27 32 40 52 66 72 84 88 103 130 162
b 38 47 58 70 90 100 110 125 135 165 215
Torque Mass Load kg Nm 32 32 64 80 195 195 385 385 385 660 1350 1.2 2.1 4.4 7.6 14.5 17 28 32 43 80 165
200 M100 x 3 250 M125 x 4 320 M160 x 4
13

Given that the load and operating pressure of the system are known, and that a piston rod size has been estimated taking account of whether the rod is in tension (pull) or compression (push), then the cylinder bore can be selected. If the piston rod is in compression, use the 'Push Force' table below. 1. Identify the operating pressure closest to that required. 2. In the same column, identify the force required to move the load (always rounding up). 3. In the same row, look along to the cylinder bore required. If the cylinder envelope dimensions are too large for your application increase the operating pressure, if possible, and repeat the exercise.
If the piston rod is in tension, use the 'Deduction for Pull Force' table. The procedure is the same but, due to the reduced piston surface area resulting from the piston rod, the force available on the 'pull' stroke will be smaller. To determine the pull force: 1. Follow the procedure for 'Push' applications, as described above. 2. Using the 'Deduction for Pull Force' table below, establish the force indicated according to the rod diameter and pressure selected. 3. Deduct this from the original 'Push' force. The resulting figure is the net force available to move the load. If this force is not large enough, go through the process again but increase the system operating pressure or cylinder diameter if possible. If in doubt, our design engineers will be pleased to assist.
Push Force
Bore mm 50 63 80 100 125 140 160 180 200 250 320 Cylinder Bore Area mm2 1964 3117 5026 7854 12272 15386 20106 25434 31416 49087 80425 50 Bar 10 15 25 40 62 77 102 127 160 250 410 Cylinder Push Force in kN at Various Pressures 100 Bar 150 Bar 200 Bar 250 Bar 20 31 51 80 125 154 205 254 320 500 820 30 46 76 120 187 231 307 381 480 750 1230 40 63 102 160 250 308 410 508 640 1000 1640 50 79 128 200 312 385 512 635 801 1250 2050

Piston Rod mm 32 36 40 45 50 56 63 70 80 90 100 110 125 140 160 180 200 220 Piston Rod Area mm2 804 1018 1257 1590 1964 2463 3386 3848 5027 6362 7855 9503 12274 15394 20109 25447 31420 38013 Reduction in Force in kN due to Area of Piston Rod at Various Pressures 50 Bar 4 5 6 8 10 12 17 19 25 32 39 48 61 78 100 129 157 198 100 Bar 150 Bar 200 Bar 250 Bar 8 10 12 16 19 25 34 39 50 64 79 96 123 156 201 259 314 387 12 15 19 24 29 37 51 58 76 97 118 145 184 235 301 389 471 581 16 20 24 32 38 50 68 78 100 129 158 193 246 313 402 518 628 775 20 25 31 40 49 62 85 98 126 162 196 242 307 392 503 648 785 969
inPHorm
For more comprehensive information on the calculation of cylinder bore size required, please refer to the European cylinder inPHorm selection program (1260-Eur).
14
Piston Rods Piston Rod Size Selection

The selection of a piston rod for thrust (push) conditions requires the following steps to be carried out. 1. Determine the type of cylinder mounting style and rod end connection to be used. Consult the Stroke Factor Selection table on page 16 and determine which factor corresponds to the application. 2. Using the stroke factor, determine the 'basic length' from the equation: Basic Length = Actual (net) Stroke x Stroke Factor
Roundline Cylinders MMA Series Long Strokes and Stop Tubes

When considering the use of long stroke cylinders, the piston rod should be of sufficient diameter to provide the necessary column strength. For tension (pull) loads, the rod size is selected by specifying standard cylinders with standard rod diameters, and using them at or below the rated pressure. For long stroke cylinders under compressive loads, the use of stop tubes should be considered, to reduce bearing stress. Selection of a stop tube is described on page 16.
Cushion Sleeve Stop Tube
(The Piston Rod Selection Chart, below, applies to piston rods with standard rod extensions beyond the face of the gland retainer. For rod extensions greater than standard, add the increase to the stroke to arrive at the 'basic length'.) 3. Find the load imposed for the thrust application by multiplying the full bore area of the cylinder by the system pressure, or by referring to the Push and Pull Force charts on page 14. 4. Using the Piston Rod Selection Chart, below, look along the values for 'basic length' and 'thrust' as found in 2. and 3. above, and note the point of intersection. The correct piston rod size is read from the diagonally curved line labelled 'Rod Diameter' above the point of intersection.
inPHorm
For accurate sizing, please refer to the European cylinder inPHorm selection program (1260-Eur).
Rod diameter (mm)
15
Stroke Factors Stop Tubes

The Piston Rod Selection Chart on page 15 indicates where the use of a stop tube should be considered. The required length of stop tube, where necessary, is read from the vertical columns on the right of the chart, by following the horizontal band within which the point of intersection lies. Note that stop tube requirements differ for fixed and pivot mounted cylinders. If the required length of stop tube is in the shaded region marked 'consult factory', please submit the following information: 1. Cylinder mounting style. 2. Rod end connection and method of guiding load. 3. Bore and stroke required, and length of rod extension (Dimension 'W') if greater than standard. 4. Mounting position of cylinder. If at an angle or vertical, specify the direction of the piston rod.
5. Operating pressure of the cylinder if limited to less than the standard pressure for the cylinder selected. When specifying a cylinder with a stop tube, please insert an 'S' (Special) and the net stroke of the cylinder in the order code and state the length of the stop tube. Note that net stroke is equal to the gross stroke of the cylinder less the length of the stop tube. The gross stroke determines the envelope dimensions of the cylinder.
inPHorm
Stroke Factor Selection

Rod End Connection Fixed and Rigidly Guided Style Type of Mounting Stroke Factor
MF3 MS2
0.5
MF3 MS2
0.7
MF4
1.0
MF4 MT4
1.5
Supported but Not Rigidly Guided
MS2
2.0
MP3 MP5
2.0
MF4
4.0
MP3 MP5
4.0
16

Cushioning is recommended as a means of controlling the deceleration of masses, or for applications where piston speeds are in excess of 0.1m/s and the piston will make a full stroke. Cushioning extends cylinder life and reduces undesirable noise and hydraulic shock. Built-in deceleration devices or 'cushions' are optional and can be supplied at the head and cap ends of the cylinder without affecting its envelope or mounting dimensions. Cushions are adjustable via recessed needle valves.

Formulae
Cushioning calculations are based on the formula: E = mv2 for horizontal applications. For inclined or vertically downward or upward applications, this is modified to: E = mv2 + mgl x 10-3 x sina for inclined or vertically downward direction of mass; E = mv2 mgl x 10 -3 x sina for inclined or vertically upward direction of mass. Where: E = energy absorbed in Joules g = acceleration due to gravity = 9.81m/s2 v = velocity in metres/second l = length of cushion in millimetres (see page 18) m = mass of load in kilogrammes (including piston and rod, see page 18) a = angle to horizontal in degrees p = pressure in bar
Standard Cushioning
Ideal cushion performance shows an almost uniform absorption of energy along the cushion's length. Many forms of cushioning exist and each has its own specific merits and advantages. Where specified, the standard form of cushioning for MMA cylinders uses profiled cushions, giving a performance which comes close to the ideal in the majority of applications. The head and cap cushion performance for each bore size is illustrated graphically on the charts on page 18.
Example
The following example shows how to calculate the energy developed by masses moving in a straight line. For non-linear motion, other calculations are required; please consult the factory. The example assumes v that the bore and rod diameters are already appropriate for the application. The effects of friction a on the cylinder and load have been ignored. Selected bore/rod = 80/50mm (No.1 rod) Cushioning at the cap end Pressure = 150 bar Mass = 7710 kg Velocity = 0.4m/s a= 45 o Sina = 0.7 Cushion length = 45mm E= E= E= mv2 + mgl x 10-3 x sina 7710 x 0.42 + 7710 x 9.81 x 45 x 0.7 2 103 617 + 2383 = 3000 Joules
Alternative Forms of Cushioning

As an alternative to profiled cushions, special designs can be produced to suit applications where the energy to be absorbed exceeds the standard cushion performance. Please consult the factory with details of the application.
Cushion Length
All MMA cylinder cushions incorporate the longest cushion sleeve and spear that can be provided in the standard envelope without decreasing the rod bearing and piston bearing lengths see table of cushion lengths on page 18.
Cushion Calculations
The charts on page 18 show the energy absorption capacity for each bore and rod combination at the head (annulus) and the cap (full bore) ends of the cylinder. The charts are valid for piston velocities in the range of 0.10.3m/s. For velocities between 0.3m/s0.5m/s, the energy values from the charts should be reduced by 25%. For velocities of less than 0.1m/s where large masses are involved, and for velocities greater than 0.5m/s, a special cushion profile may be required. Please consult the factory. The cushion capacity of the head end is less than that of the cap, owing to the pressure intensification effect across the piston. The energy absorption capacity of the cushion decreases with drive pressure, which in normal circuits is the relief valve setting.
inPHorm
Cushioning requirements can be calculated automatically for individual cylinder/load combinations using the European cylinder inPHorm selection program (1260-Eur).
Note: as velocity is greater than 0.3m/s, the energy absorption figures obtained from the charts on page 18 should be reduced by 25% see Cushion Calculations, opposite. Comparison with the cushioning chart curve for this cylinder shows an energy capacity for the cap end cushion of 5100 J. Reducing this by 25% gives a capacity of 3825 J, so the standard cushion can safely decelerate the 3000 J in this example. Where cushion performance figures are critical, our engineers can run a computer simulation to determine accurate cushion performance please contact the factory for details.
17
Cushioning Cushion Energy Absorption Data

The cushion energy absorption capacity data shown below are based on the maximum fatigue-free pressures developed in the cylinder tube. If working life cycle applications of less than 106 cycles are envisaged, then greater energy absorption figures can be applied. Please consult the factory if further information is required.
Where cushion performance figures are critical, our engineers can run a computer simulation to determine accurate cushion performance please contact the factory for details.
Head End, No.1 Rod

1000000
Head End, No.2 Rod

1000000
320/200
100000
250/160 200/125 180/110 160/100 140/90 125/80 100/63 80/50 63/40
320/220
100000
250/180
10000
140/100 125/90 100/70 80/56
10000
63/45
50/32
1000
1000
50/36
100
100
10 0 40 80 120 160 Drive Pressure (bar) 200 240 0 40 80 120 160 Drive Pressure (bar) 200 240
10
Cap End, No.1 and No.2 Rods

1000000
Cushion Length, Piston & Rod Mass

Bore mm
100000
Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
320
Rod mm 32 36 40 45 50 56 63 70 80 90 90 100 100 110 110 125 125 140 160 180 200 220
Cushion Length mm 30 40 45 55 60 60 65 65 65 90 100
Piston & Rod Rod per Zero Stroke 10mm Stroke kg kg 2.0 2.3 3.4 4.0 5.8 6.7 10.7 12.1 20.7 23.8 28.0 31.0 40.1 44.6 54.0 62.0 76.2 86.0 131.8 150.2 250.2 279.7 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.15 0.19 0.24 0.30 0.39 0.50 0.50 0.62 0.62 0.75 0.75 0.96 0.96 1.23 1.58 2.00 2.46 2.98
250
50 63
200 180 160 140 125 100 80 63
10000
80 100 125 140 160
50
1000
100
180 200
10 0 40 80 120 160 Drive Pressure (bar) 200 240
250 320
18
200/140 180/125 160/110
Seals and Fluids Seals and Fluid Data

Group 1 2 5 Seal Materials a combination of: Nitrile (NBR), PTFE, enhanced polyurethane (AU) Nitrile (NBR), PTFE Fluorocarbon elastomer (FPM), PTFE
Fluid Medium to ISO 6743/4-1982 Mineral Oil HH, HL, HLP, HLPD, HM, HV, MIL-H 5606 oil, air, nitrogen Water glycol (HFC) Fire resistant fluids based on phosphate esters (HFD-R) Also suitable for hydraulic oil at high temperatures or in hot environments.Not suitable for use with Skydrol. See fluid manufacturer's recommendations
Piston & Gland Temperature Range Type All Chevron and Low Friction Chevron and Low Friction Chevron and Low Friction Chevron and Low Friction -20C to +80C
-20C to +60C -15C to +150C
6 7
Water Various compounds including nitrile, Oil in water emulsion 95/5 (HFA) enhanced polyurethane, fluorocarbon elastomers and PTFE Water in oil emulsion 60/40 (HFB)
+5C to +50C
+5C to +50C
Operating Medium
The Group 1 seal materials supplied with standard cylinders are suitable for use with any petroleum-based hydraulic fluid. Special seals are available for use with fluids such as fire resistant synthetic phosphate ester, and phosphate ester-based fluids. If there is any doubt regarding seal compatibility with the operating medium, please consult the factory. The table above is a guide to commonly used sealing compounds and their operating parameters.
Pure Water
Parker Hannifin can also supply cylinders for use with pure water as the fluid medium. Please consult the factory.
Warranty Parker Hannifin warrants cylinders modified for

water or high water content fluid service to be free of defects in materials or workmanship, but cannot accept responsibility for premature failure caused by excessive wear resulting from lack of lubricity, or where failure is caused by corrosion, electrolysis or mineral deposits within the cylinder.
Temperature
Standard seals are suitable for use at temperatures between -20oC and +80oC. Where operating temperatures exceed these limits, special seal compounds may be required to ensure satisfactory service life please consult the factory.
Filtration
For maximum component life, the system should be protected from contamination by effective filtration. Fluid cleanliness should be in accordance with ISO 4406. The quality of filters should be in accordance with the appropriate ISO standards. The rating of the filter media depends on the system components and the application. The minimum required for hydraulic systems should be class 19/15 to ISO 4406, which equates to 25m (1075) to ISO 4572.
Special Seals
A range of seal options is available for the fluid groups listed above see cylinder model numbers on page 25. Where required, special seals, in addition to those shown above, can also be supplied. Please insert an S (Special) in the model number and specify fluid medium when ordering.
Group 6 Seal Life

Seals used with High Water Content Fluids (HFA) are prone to wear due to the poor lubricity of the operating medium. This problem increases with pressure. These seals are best used where high pressure is applied only to clamp the load. If pressures above 120 bar are applied when the cylinder is actuating, seal life will be significantly reduced. Seal wear can also be affected by the particular HFA fluid specified.
Water Service
Special modifications to cylinders are available for high water content fluids. Modifications include a stainless steel piston rod, and plating of internal surfaces. When ordering, please specify the maximum operating pressure or load/speed conditions, as the stainless steel rod is of lower tensile strength than the standard material.
19
Ports Port Types

Flange Port Sizes
ED A
Standard and Oversize Ports

Parker MMA cylinders are supplied as standard with BSP (parallel thread) ports to ISO 228/1, spot faced for sealing washers. Where required, oversize or additional ports can be supplied on the sides of heads or caps that are not occupied by cushion valves. Refer to the tables of port sizes on page 20.
EB
FF
Optional Ports
In addition to the standard and oversize BSPP ports, metric threaded ports to DIN 3852 Pt.1 and ISO 6149, and flange ports to ISO 6162 (1994) can also be supplied see table opposite. Other flange port styles are available on request.
Standard Port Bore mm 50 63 80 100 125 140 160 180 200 250 BSPP G1/2 G /4 G3/4 G1 G1 G11/4 G1 /4 G11/4 G11/4 G1 /2
1 1 3
EA
Standard Flange Port Bore mm 50 DN Flange1 13 13 13 19 19 25 25 25 25 32 32 A 47 55 68 80 97 121 129 152 160 201 250 30.2 58.7 M12 x 1.752 32 26.2 52.4 M10 x 1.5 25 22.2 47.6 M10 x 1.5 19 17.5 38.1 M8 x 1.25 13 EA EB ED FF
Oversize Port BSPP G3/4 G1 G1 G1 /4 G11/4 G11/2 G1 /2 G11/2 G11/2 G2

1 1
Metric M22 x 1.5 M27 x 2 M27 x 2 M33 x 2 M33 x 2 M42 x 2 M42 x 2 M42 x 2 M42 x 2 M48 x 2**
DN Flange 13 13 13 19 19 25 25 25 25 32
Metric M27 x 2 M33 x 2 M33 x 2 M42 x 2 M42 x 2 M48 x 2 M48 x 2 M48 x 2 M48 x 2 M60 x 2
DN Flange * * 19 25 25 32 32 32 32 38 38
63 80 100 125 140 160 180 200 250 320
Oversize Flange Port Bore mm 50 DN Flange1 19 25 25 32 32 32 32 383 383 A 66 79 97 120 128 151 159 1973 2483 36.53 79.33 M16 x 23 383 30.2 58.7 M12 x 1.752 32 EA 22.2 26.2 EB 47.6 52.4 ED M10 x 1.5 M10 x 1.5 FF 19 25
320 G2 M60 x 2 32 * Consult factory ** An M50 thread to DIN 24 333 can be supplied if required.
ISO 6149 Port Identification

The ISO 6149 port incorporates a raised ring in the spot face for identification, as shown below.
Raised ring within spot face
63 80 100 125 140 160 180 200 250 320

1 2 3
25 bar to 350 bar series M10 x 1.5 to ISO 6162 (1994) optional 400 bar series
20
Ports, Locations and Piston Speeds Port Size and Piston Speed
One of the factors involved in determining the speed of a hydraulic cylinder is fluid flow in connecting lines, particularly at the cap end port, due to the absence of a piston rod. Fluid velocity in connecting lines should be limited to 5m/s to minimise fluid turbulence, pressure loss and water hammer effects. The tables below are a guide for use when determining whether cylinder ports are adequate for the application. Data shown gives piston speeds for standard and oversize ports and connecting lines where the velocity of the fluid is 5m/s. If the desired piston speed results in a fluid flow in excess of 5m/s in connecting lines, larger lines with two ports per cap should be considered. Parker recommends that a flow rate of 12m/s in connecting lines should not be exceeded.
Standard Cylinder Port Port Size
(BSPP)
Roundline Cylinders MMA Series Ports, Air Bleeds and Cushion Adjustment Location
Standard port location is position 1, as shown on pages 10 to 12. Cushion adjustment needle valves are at position 2.
1 1
3 Cap End
Head
Cap
3 Head End
Bore mm 50 63 80 100 125 140 160 180 200 250 320
Bore of Cap End Connecting Lines Flow in l/min mm at 5m/s1 13 15 15 19 19 22 22 22 22 28 38 40 53 53 85 85 114 114 114 114 185 340
Piston Speed m/s 0.34 0.28 0.18 0.18 0.12 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.06 0.06 0.07
The port location can be repositioned at 90 or 180 from standard. To order non-standard port locations, specify using position numbers from the drawing above. In these cases, the cushion adjustment needle valves rotate accordingly, unless otherwise specified. Captive bleed screws are available in the head and cap as an option. The air bleed location, in relation to the supply port location, must be specified on the order. Air bleeds are available at all positions.
G1/2 G3/4 G3/4 G1 G1 G11/4 G11/4 G11/4 G11/4 G11/2 G2
inPHorm
Bore mm 50 63 80 100 125 140 160 180 200 250 320

1
Oversize Cylinder Port Port Size G3/4 G1 G1 G1 /4 G11/4 G11/2 G11/2 G11/2 G11/2 G2 1
Bore of Cap End Connecting Lines Flow in l/min mm at 5m/s1 14 19 19 22 22 28 28 28 28 38 53 85 85 114 114 185 185 185 185 340 -
Piston Speed m/s 0.45 0.46 0.28 0.24 0.16 0.20 0.15 0.12 0.10 0.12 -
This refers to fluid velocity in connecting lines, not piston velocity
21

Service Assembly Kits and Seal Kits for MMA cylinders simplify the ordering and maintenance processes. They contain sub-assemblies which are ready for installation, and are supplied with full instructions. When ordering Service Assemblies and Seal Kits, please refer to the identification plate on the cylinder body, and supply the following information: Serial Number - Bore - Stroke - Model Number - Fluid Type
Key to Part Numbers

1 7 14a 14b 15 17 17a 17b 18 19 23 26 Head Cap Standard and Low Friction gland Chevron gland Cylinder tube Piston Chevron piston head end Chevron piston cap end Cushion sleeve Front/rear flange Head/cap securing screw O-ring (cylinder body) 34/35/36/37 17
124 125 126 127 131 132 133 134 136 137 138 139a 139b 140a 140b 141a 141b 142 143
Pre-load ring for stepseal 123 Standard piston seal Energising ring for standard seal 125 Wear ring for standard piston Low Friction piston seal Energising ring for Low Friction piston seal 131 Wear ring for Low Friction piston O-ring back up washer (gland/head) Gland securing screw Chevron rod seal assembly Back up washer Chevron rod seal assembly Wear ring for chevron gland Wear rings for chevron gland Wear ring for standard gland Wear rings for standard gland Wear ring for Low Friction gland Wear rings for Low Friction gland Chevron piston bearing ring Chevron piston seal assembly
26 73 7
23
18 47 69a 70a
15 26
19
74
45
40
41 124
134
45 126
125
127
27 40 1 14b 134 69a 70a
47
19
140a 123 140b
14a 46
17 55
Standard Gland & Seals

134 124 40 45
Standard Piston
133
131
132
27 34 35 36 37 40 41 45 46 47 55 69a 70a 73 74 123
Gland retainer (secured by screws or threaded) Piston rod single rod, no cushion Piston rod single rod, cushion at head end Piston rod single rod, cushion at cap end Piston rod single rod, cushion at both ends Gland wiperseal Lipseal O-ring (gland/head) O-ring, piston/rod (2 off chevron piston) O-ring (cylinder body) Piston locking pin Cushion needle valve cartridge sealing washer Cushion needle valve cartridge Floating cushion bush Cushion bush retaining ring Stepseal
14a 141a 123 141b 46 17 55
Low Friction Gland & Seals

134 136 27 45
Low Friction Piston
142
143
14b 139a 138 137 139b
17a
17b 55
40
46
Chevron Gland & Seals
Chevron Piston
22
PLL Kit CB Kit plus seals for Chevron Piston Contains CB Kit plus 55, 142, and two each of 46 and 143. PF Kit CB Kit plus seals for Low Friction Piston Contains CB Kit plus 131, 132, and two of 133.
RGN Kit Standard Gland Cartridge and Seals Contains RKN Kit plus 14a. RGLL Kit Chevron Gland Cartridge and Seals Contains RKL Kit plus 14b. RGF Kit Low Friction Gland Cartridge and Seals Contains RKF Kit plus 14a. RKN Kit Standard Gland Cartridge Seals Contains items 40, 41, 45, 123, 124, 134, 140a and two of 140b. RKLL Kit Chevron Gland Cartridge Seals Contains items 40, 45, 134, 137, 138, 139a, and two of 139b. RKF Kit Low Friction Gland Cartridge Seals Contains items 40, 45, 134, 141a, and two each of 123, 124, 141b. CB Kit Cylinder Body End Seals and Back-up Washers Contains two each of items 26 and 47. PN Kit CB Kit plus seals for Standard piston Contains CB Kit plus 125, 126, and two of 127.
Seal Groups Ordering

All part numbers listed contain standard, Group 1 seals. To order kits with other classes of seals, replace the last digit of the part number shown with the number of the seal group required. Eg: RGF210MMA0701, containing a Group 1 seal, becomes RGF210MMA0705 when it contains a Group 5 seal.
Service Kit Order Codes Piston and Body

Bore 50 63 80 100 125 140 160 180 200 250 320 CB Kit PN Kit PLL Kit PF Kit Body End Standard Chevron Low Friction Seals Piston Seals* Piston Seals Piston Seals CB2050MMA01 PN050MMA01 PLL050MMA01 PF2050MMA01 CB2063MMA01 PN063MMA01 PLL063MMA01 PF2063MMA01 CB2080MMA01 PN080MMA01 PLL080MMA01 PF2080MMA01 CB2100MMA01 PN100MMA01 PLL100MMA01 PF2100MMA01 CB2125MMA01 PN125MMA01 PLL125MMA01 PF2125MMA01 CB2140MMA01 PN140MMA01 PLL140MMA01 PF2140MMA01 CB2160MMA01 PN160MMA01 PLL160MMA01 PF2160MMA01 CB2180MMA01 PN180MMA01 PLL180MMA01 PF2180MMA01 CB2200MMA01 PN200MMA01 PLL200MMA01 PF2200MMA01 CB2250MMA01 PN250MMA01 PLL250MMA01 PF2250MMA01 CB2320MMA01 PN320MMA01 PLL320MMA01 PF2320MMA01
Service Kit Order Codes Glands

Bore Rod Rod No. 50 63 80 100 125 140 160 180 200 250 320 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 32 36 40 45 50 56 63 70 80 90 90 100 100 110 110 125 125 140 160 180 200 220 RGN Kit Standard Gland Cartridge and Seals* RGN05MMA0321 RGN05MMA0361 RGN06MMA0401 RGN06MMA0451 RGN08MMA0501 RGN08MMA0561 RGN10MMA0631 RGN10MMA0701 RGN12MMA0801 RGN12MMA0901 RGN14MMA0901 RGN14MMA1001 RGN16MMA1001 RGN16MMA1101 RGN18MMA1101 RGN18MMA1251 RGN20MMA1251 RGN20MMA1401 RGN25MMA1601 RGN25MMA1801 RGN32MMA2001 RGN32MMA2201 RGLL Kit Chevron Gland Cartridge and Seals RGLL05MMA0321 RGLL05MMA0361 RGLL06MMA0401 RGLL06MMA0451 RGLL08MMA0501 RGLL08MMA0561 RGLL10MMA0631 RGLL10MMA0701 RGLL12MMA0801 RGLL12MMA0901 RGLL14MMA0901 RGLL14MMA1001 RGLL16MMA1001 RGLL16MMA1101 RGLL18MMA1101 RGLL18MMA1251 RGLL20MMA1251 RGLL20MMA1401 RGLL25MMA1601 RGLL25MMA1801 RGLL32MMA2001 RGLL32MMA2201 RGF Kit Low Friction Gland Cartridge and Seals RGF205MMA0321 RGF205MMA0361 RGF206MMA0401 RGF206MMA0451 RGF208MMA0501 RGF208MMA0561 RGF210MMA0631 RGF210MMA0701 RGF212MMA0801 RGF212MMA0901 RGF214MMA0901 RGF214MMA1001 RGF216MMA1001 RGF216MMA1101 RGF218MMA1101 RGF218MMA1251 RGF220MMA1251 RGF220MMA1401 RGF225MMA1601 RGF225MMA1801 RGF232MMA2001 RGF232MMA2201 RKN Kit Standard Gland Cartridge Seals* RKN05MMA0321 RKN05MMA0361 RKN06MMA0401 RKN06MMA0451 RKN08MMA0501 RKN08MMA0561 RKN10MMA0631 RKN10MMA0701 RKN12MMA0801 RKN12MMA0901 RKN14MMA0901 RKN14MMA1001 RKN16MMA1001 RKN16MMA1101 RKN18MMA1101 RKN18MMA1251 RKN20MMA1251 RKN20MMA1401 RKN25MMA1601 RKN25MMA1801 RKN32MMA2001 RKN32MMA2201 RKLL Kit Chevron Gland Cartridge Seals RKLL05MMA0321 RKLL05MMA0361 RKLL06MMA0401 RKLL06MMA0451 RKLL08MMA0501 RKLL08MMA0561 RKLL10MMA0631 RKLL10MMA0701 RKLL12MMA0801 RKLL12MMA0901 RKLL14MMA0901 RKLL14MMA1001 RKLL16MMA1001 RKLL16MMA1101 RKLL18MMA1101 RKLL18MMA1251 RKLL20MMA1251 RKLL20MMA1401 RKLL25MMA1601 RKLL25MMA1801 RKLL32MMA2001 RKLL32MMA2201 RKF Kit Low Friction Gland Cartridge Seals RKF205MMA0321 RKF205MMA0361 RKF206MMA0401 RKF206MMA0451 RKF208MMA0501 RKF208MMA0561 RKF210MMA0631 RKF210MMA0701 RKF212MMA0801 RKF212MMA0901 RKF214MMA0901 RKF214MMA1001 RKF216MMA1001 RKF216MMA1101 RKF218MMA1101 RKF218MMA1251 RKF220MMA1251 RKF220MMA1401 RKF225MMA1601 RKF225MMA1801 RKF232MMA2001 RKF232MMA2201
* Only available with the use of Group 1 Seals
23
Piston Rod End Data

Rod End Style 4
D Wrench Flats

Rod End Style 9
D Wrench Flats
NA KK
MM
NA KF
MM
C W
C W AF
Piston Rod End Styles

MMA cylinders are available with standard metric male and female rod ends to ISO 4395. They can also be supplied with other rod end threads, eg: ISO metric coarse, Unified, British Standard etc., or to the customer's special requirements. Style 4 denotes a standard male thread. Style 9 denotes a female thread, and is available only with the No.2 rod. Orders for non-standard rod ends, designated Style 3, should include dimensioned sketches and descriptions, showing dimensions KK or KF, A or AF, and the thread form required.
Wrench Flats
Piston rods up to and including 90mm in diameter are supplied with the wrench flats D shown in the table below. Rods above 90mm in diameter feature four drilled holes to accept a pin wrench.
Rod End Dimensions

Bore 50 Rod No. 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 MM Rod 32 36 40 45 50 56 63 70 80 90 90 100 100 110 110 125 125 140 160 180 200 220
A & AF C 15 15 18 18 20 20 23 23 27 27 27 27 31 31 36 36 36 36 38 38 44 44 D 28 32 34 36 43 46 53 60 65 75 75 NA 31 35 38 43 48 54 60 67 77 87 87 96 96 106 106 121 121 136 155 175 195 214 KK Style 4 M27 x 2 M27 x 2 M33 x 2 M33 x 2 M42 x 2 M42 x 2 M48 x 2 M48 x 2 M64 x 3 M64 x 3 M72 x 3 M72 x 3 M80 x 3 M80 x 3 M90 x 3 M90 x 3 M100 x 3 M100 x 3 M125 x 4 M125 x 4 M160 x 4 M160 x 4 KF Style 9 M27 x 2 M33 x 2 M42 x 2 M48 x 2 M64 x 3 M72 x 3 M80 x 3 M90 x 3 M100 x 3 M125 x 4 M160 x 4 W
36
22
63
45
25
80
56
28
100
63
32
125
85
36.5
140
90
36.5
160
95
40.5
180
105
45.5
200
112
45.5
250
125
50.5
320
160
56.5
24
How To Order
C Bore Mounting Style MMA Ports S Special Features

C Piston Rod End Piston Rod Number Rod Thread Cushion Cap Pages 17-18 Net Stroke Fluid Medium Air Bleeds
Cushion Head Page 17-18 Code MF3 MF4 MP3 MP5 MT4 MS2
Series
Gland and Piston Type Page 10 10 11 11 12 12
Port Positions
Mounting Style Head Circular Flange Cap Circular Flange Cap Fixed Eye Cap Fixed Eye with Spherical Bearing Intermediate Trunnion Foot Mounting
Code Fluid Page Medium M Group 1 19 C Group 2 19 D Group 5 19 A1 Group 6 19 B Group 7 19
Code R M Y P
Port Style Page BSP Parallel 21 Metric to DIN 3852 Pt. 1 21 Metric to ISO 6149 optional 21 Flange Ports to ISO 6162 21
Code Port Position Page 1 Head position 1-4 20 1 Cap position 1-4 20
Code Gland & Piston Type N Standard (Group 1 fluids only) F Low Friction LL Chevron A Load Holding (Group 1 fluids only) E Special designs
Page 5 5 5 5 5 Code 4 9 3
Code Air Bleed Page Position 4 Head position 1-4 6, 20 4 Cap position 1-4 6, 20 00 No air bleeds
Code Thread M Metric (standard)
Page 24
Code S S S
Special Features Page Oversized Ports 21 Special Seals 19 Stop Tube 15-16 or to customer specification
Rod End Style Page Style 4 24 Style 9 24 Style 3 (Special) please supply description or drawing 24 Page 10-13 10-13
Code Rod Number 1 Rod No.1 2 Rod No.2
Key
Example
50 C MF3 MMA R N S 1 9 M C 230 M 11 44
Accessories
25

Austria Marchtrenk Parker Hannifin GmbH Tel: (7242) 56921 Fax: (7242) 5692120 Belgium Nivelles Parker Hannifin S.A. N.V. Tel: 67 280 900 Fax: 67 280 999 Czech Republic Prague Parker Hannifin Corporation Tel: (02) 830 85 221 Fax: (02) 830 85 360 Denmark Ishj Parker Hannifin Danmark A/S Tel: 43 56 04 00 Fax: 43 73 31 07 Finland Vantaa Parker Hannifin Oy Tel: 9 476 731 Fax: 9 476 73200 France Contamine-sur-Arve Parker Hannifin S.A. Tel: 4 50 25 80 25 Fax: 4 50 03 67 37 Germany Cologne Parker Hannifin GmbH Tel: (221) 71720 Fax: (221) 7172219 Hungary Budapest Parker Hannifin Corp. Tel: 1 25 28 137 Fax: 1 25 28 129 Netherlands Oldenzaal Parker Hannifin B.V. Tel: (0541) 585000 Fax: (0541) 585459 Norway Ski Parker Hannifin A/S Tel: 64 91 10 00 Fax: 64 91 10 90 Poland Warsaw Parker Hannifin Corp. Tel: (22) 863 49 42 Fax: (22) 863 49 44 Portugal Leca da Palmeira Parker Hannifin Portugal Lda. Tel: (22) 999 7360 Fax: (22) 996 1527 Slovakia Ref. Czech Republic Spain Madrid Parker Hannifin Espaa S.A. Tel: (91) 675 73 00 Fax: (91) 675 77 11 Sweden Spnga Parker Hannifin AB Tel: 08-5979 50 00 Fax: 08-5979 51 20 Switzerland Romanshorn Hydrel A.G. Romanshorn Tel: (714) 66 66 66 Fax: (714) 66 66 80 Turkey Istanbul Hidroser Hidrolik - Pnmatik Tel: (212) 886 72 70 Fax: (212) 886 69 35 United Kingdom Watford Parker Hannifin Plc Tel: (01923) 492000 Fax: (01923) 248557
Ireland Clonee Parker Sales (Ireland) Ltd. Tel: (353) 1 801 4010 Fax: (353) 1 801 4132 Italy Arsago-Seprio Parker Hannifin S.p.A. Tel: (0331) 765611 Fax: (0331) 765612
26
1210/5-UK, 3M, 10/02, PD
Making the Choice

Selecting and Applying Piston and Bladder Accumulators
Catalogue 1243/1-GB
Hydro-pneumatic accumulators are the most widely used type of accumulator in industrial hydraulic systems. They use compressed gas to apply force to hydraulic fluid. Identical in their operating principle, Parkers piston and bladder accumulators use different mechanisms to separate the gas from the fluid. It is this difference and the resulting performance characteristics which determines their suitability for different applications. The correct selection and application of piston and bladder accumulators is examined in the following pages. Adding an accumulator to a hydraulic system can:
q improve system
Contents
Introduction Design Features and Construction Operation Accumulator Selection Gas Bottle Installations Large/Multiple Accumulators Precharging Failure Prevention 2 3 3 4 7 8 9 11
Note: Failure or improper selection or improper use of accumulators or related items can cause death, personal injury and property damage. Parker Hannifin shall not be liable for any incidental, consequential or special damages that result from use of the information contained in this publication.
Introduction
Parkers hydro-pneumatic accumulators regulate the performance of a hydraulic system by providing an additional volume of system fluid, pressurised by an external gas supply. A correctly specified accumulator can:
q
reduce shock effects in a system resulting from inertia or external mechanical forces maintain system pressure by compensating for pressure loss due to leakage provide a back-up supply of hydraulic energy to maintain a constant flow when system demand is greater than pump delivery.
efficiency
q absorb shock q supplement pump
delivery
q provide emergency q
power
q compensate for
particular advantages and limitations which should be considered when selecting an accumulator for a specific application. Bladder accumulators are generally preferred for applications where very rapid cycling is expected, and high fluid tolerance and very low response times are required. They provide excellent gas/fluid separation.
leakage
q maintain pressure q dispense fluid q act as a fluid barrier
In industrial applications, two types of hydropneumatic accumulator are widely used the piston type and the bladder type. Each has
Piston accumulators offer greater efficiency and flexibility in most applications, due to their wider range of sizes. Parkers piston accumulators feature a patented five-blade V-O-ring which maintains full contact between the piston and the bore, without rolling. Sealing remains effective even under rapid cycling at high operating pressures.
Design Features and Construction

Bladder Accumulators Parkers bladder accumulators feature a seamless, non-pleated, flexible rubber bladder housed within a steel shell. The open end of the bladder is attached to the precharging valve at the gas end of the shell. A poppet valve, normally held open by spring pressure, regulates fluid flow through the hydraulic port. Parkers bladder accumulators are available as either top or bottom repairable units, for optimum flexibility. The bladder is charged with a dry inert gas, eg: nitrogen, to a set precharge pressure determined by the system requirements. As system pressure fluctuates, so the bladder expands and contracts to discharge fluid from, or allow fluid into, the accumulator shell. Piston Accumulators Parkers piston accumulators consist of a cylindrical body, sealed by a gas cap and charging valve at the gas end, and by a hydraulic cap at the hydraulic end. A lightweight piston separates the gas side of the accumulator from the hydraulic side.
Charging valve
Charging valve Gas cap
Shell Bladder Poppet Spring Hydraulic cap Bladder Hydraulic cap Gas Piston Body Piston
As with the bladder accumulator, the gas side is charged to a predetermined pressure. Changes in system pressure cause the piston to rise and fall, allowing fluid to enter or forcing it to be discharged from the accumulator body.
Fig.1 Typical bladder and piston accumulators
Operation
Stage A The accumulator is empty, and neither gas nor hydraulic sides are pressurised. Stage B The accumulator is precharged. Stage C The hydraulic system is pressurised. System pressure exceeds precharge pressure, and fluid flows into the accumulator. Stage D System pressure peaks. The accumulator is filled with fluid to its design capacity. Any further increase in hydraulic pressure would be prevented by a relief valve in the system.
(A)
(B)
(C) Gas
(D)
(E)
(F)
Stage E System pressure falls. Precharge pressure forces fluid from the accumulator into the system.
Stage F Minimum system pressure is reached. The accumulator has discharged its design maximum volume of fluid back into the system.
3
Fig.2 Operating conditions of bladder and piston accumulators
Accumulator Selection
When selecting an accumulator for a particular application, both system and performance criteria should be considered. To ensure long and satisfactory service life, the following factors should be taken into account.
q q q q q q q q q q q q
catastrophic as, for example, in a braking or steering circuit on mobile equipment, a progressive failure mode is desirable. In this application, a piston accumulator would be appropriate. Output Volume The maximum sizes available of each type of accumulator determine the limits of their suitability where large output volumes are required. There are, however, several methods of achieving higher output volumes than standard accumulator capacities suggest see Large/ Multiple Accumulators, page 8. Table 1 compares typical fluid outputs for Parkers 40 litres piston and bladder accumulators operating isothermally as auxiliary power sources over a range of minimum system pressures. The higher precharge pressures recommended for piston accumulators result in substantially higher outputs than from comparable bladder accumulators. Also, bladder accumulators are not generally suitable for compression ratios greater than 4:1, as these could result in excessive bladder deformation and high bladder temperatures. Piston accumulators have an inherently higher output relative to their overall dimensions, which may be critical in locations
4
Table 1: Relative Outputs of a 40 litre Accumulator

Compression Ratio System Pressure bar
max min
Recommended Precharge bar

Bladder Piston
Fluid Output litres

Bladder Piston
1.5 2 3 6
210 210 210 210
140 105 70 35
119 105 59 *
137 102 63 28
11.3 16.9 22.6 *
13 19.3 24 26.7
* Below required minimum operating ratio of 4:1.
Failure mode Output volume Flow rate Fluid type Response time Shock suppression High frequency cycling Mounting position External forces Sizing information Certification Safety
where space is limited. Piston accumulators are available in a choice of diameters and lengths for a given capacity, whereas bladder accumulators are frequently offered in only one size per capacity, and fewer sizes are available. Piston accumulators can also be built to custom lengths for applications in which available space is critical. Flow Rate Table 2 shows typical maximum flow rates for Parkers piston and bladder accumulators in a range of sizes. The larger standard bladder designs are limited to 825 litres/min, although this may be increased to 2250 litres/min using a highflow port. The poppet
valve controls flow rate, with excessive flow causing the poppet to close prematurely. Flow rates greater than 2250 litres/min may be achieved by mounting several accumulators on a common manifold see Large/Multiple Accumulators, page 8. For a given system pressure, flow rates for piston accumulators generally exceed those for bladder designs. Flow is limited by piston velocity, which should not exceed 3m/s to avoid piston seal damage. In high-speed applications, high seal contact temperatures and rapid decompression of nitrogen that has permeated the seal itself, can cause blisters, cracks and pits in the surface of the seal.
Failure Modes In certain applications, a sudden failure may be preferable to a gradual failure: a high-speed machine, for example, where product quality is a function of hydraulic system pressure. Because sudden failure is detected immediately, scrap is minimised, whereas a gradual failure might mean that production of a large quantity of sub-standard product could occur before the failure became apparent. A bladder accumulator would be most suitable for this application. Conversely, where safety is paramount and sudden failure could be
Table 2: Max. Recommended Accumulator Flow Rates

Piston Capacity litres Bore mm Flow, lpm at 210 bar Capacity litres Bladder Flow, lpm at 210bar Standard Hi-Flow
1 4 10 57 75 190
51 102 146 178 229 302
375 1500 3000 4500 7500 12750
1 4 10 Over 10 litres
225 560 825 825 825 825
2250 2250 2250 2250
Fluid Type Bladder accumulators are more resistant than piston types to damage caused by contamination of the hydraulic fluid. While some risk exists from contaminants trapped between the bladder and the shell, a higher risk of failure exists from the same contaminants acting on the piston seal. Bladder accumulators are also preferred to piston types for water service, because water systems tend to carry more solid contaminants, lubrication is poorer, and the piston and bore require plating to resist corrosion. Piston accumulators are preferred for systems using exotic fluids or where extremes of temperature are experienced as, compared to bladders, piston seals are more easily moulded in the special compounds required, and may be less expensive. Response Time In theory, bladder accumulators should respond more quickly to system pressure variations than piston types. There is no static friction to be overcome as with a piston seal, and there is no piston mass to be accelerated and decelerated. In practice, however, the difference in response is not great, and is probably insignificant in most applications.
This applies equally in servo applications, as only a small percentage of servos require response times of 25ms or less, the region where the difference in response between piston and bladder accumulators becomes significant. Generally, a bladder accumulator should be used for applications requiring less than 25ms response time, and either accumulator type for a response of 25ms or greater. Shock Suppression Shock control does not necessarily demand a bladder accumulator.
280
Pressure bar
140 No accumulator in circuit Piston accumulator Bladder accumulator
1000 Time ms
2000
Fig.4 Shock wave test results Example 1
Installing a Parker 4 litre piston accumulator at the valve reduces the transient to 6.9 bar over relief valve setting (green trace). Substituting a 4 litre bladder accumulator further reduces the transient to 5.4 bar over relief valve setting (red trace), an improvement of only 1.5 bar and of little practical significance. Example 2 A second, similar test using 15mm tubing and a relief valve setting of 180 bar (Fig.5) results in a pressure spike of 139 bar over relief valve setting without an accumulator
(blue trace). A Parker piston accumulator reduces the transient to 7.4 bar over relief valve setting (green trace), while a bladder accumulator achieves a transient of 6.0 bar over relief valve setting (red trace). The difference between accumulator types in shock suppression is again negligible.
Tubing length makes pump-toservovalve distance 36m.
Fig.3 Test circuit to generate and measure shock waves in a hydraulic system
280
Example 1 A test circuit (Fig.3) includes a control valve situated 36m from a pump supplying fluid at 113 litres/min. The circuit uses 30mm tubing and the relief valve is set to open at 190 bar. Shutting the control valve (Fig.4) produces a pressure spike of 27 bar over relief valve setting (blue trace).
5
Pressure bar
140 No accumulator in circuit Piston accumulator Bladder accumulator
0 0
1000 Time ms
2000
Fig.5 Shock wave test results Example 2
Accumulator Selection (continued)

High Frequency Cycling High-frequency system pressure cycling can cause a piston accumulator to dither, with the piston cycling rapidly back and forth in a distance less than its seal width. Over an extended period, this condition may cause heat build-up under the seal due to lack of lubrication, resulting in seal and bore wear. For highfrequency damping applications, therefore, a bladder accumulator is generally more suitable. Mounting Position The optimum mounting position for any accumulator is vertical, with the hydraulic port downwards. Piston models can be mounted horizontally if the fluid is kept clean but, if solid contaminants are present or expected in significant amounts, horizontal mounting can result in uneven or accelerated seal wear. A bladder accumulator may also be mounted horizontally, but uneven wear on the top of the bladder as it rubs against the shell while floating on the fluid can reduce its service life and even cause permanent distortion. The
extent of the damage will depend upon fluid cleanliness, cycle rate, and compression ratio (i.e. maximum system pressure divided by minimum system pressure). In extreme cases, fluid can be trapped away from the hydraulic port (Fig.6), reducing output, or the bladder may become elongated, forcing the poppet valve to close prematurely. External Forces Any application subjecting an accumulator to acceleration, deceleration or centrifugal force may have a detrimental effect on its operation, and could cause damage to a bladder accumulator. Forces along the axis of the tube or shell normally have little effect on a bladder accumulator but may cause a variation in gas pressure in a piston type because of the mass of the piston. Forces perpendicular to an accumulators axis should not affect a piston model, but fluid in a bladder accumulator may be thrown to one side of the
Fig.6 A horizontally-mounted bladder accumulator can trap fluid away from the hydraulic valve
Fig.7 Perpendicular force causes the mass of the fluid to displace the bladder
Acceleration
shell (Fig.7), displacing the bladder and flattening and lengthening it. In this condition, fluid discharge could cause the poppet valve to pinch and cut the bladder. Higher precharge pressures increase the resistance of the bladder to the effects of perpendicular forces. Sizing Information Accurate sizing of an accumulator is critical if it is to deliver a long and reliable service life. Information and worked examples are shown in Parkers accumulator catalogues, or accumulator size can be calculated automatically by entering application details into Parkers inPHorm software selection programme please contact your Parker Sales Office for details.
Certification Accumulators are frequently required to conform to domestic or international certification. These requirements range from simple safety factors to elaborate materials testing and inspection procedures carried out by an external agency. Most of the accumulators in Parkers piston and bladder ranges are available with certification to the major European standards. Safety Hydro-pneumatic accumulators should always be used in conjunction with a safety block, to enable the accumulator to be isolated from the circuit in an emergency or for maintenance purposes.
Gas Bottle Installations

q
Fig.8 An accumulator can be used with a remote gas bottle where space is critical
Any accumulator used with remote gas storage should generally have the same size port at the gas end as at the hydraulic end, to allow an unimpeded flow of gas to and from the gas bottle. The gas bottle will have an equivalent port in one end and a gas charging valve at the other. A piston accumulator should be carefully sized to prevent the piston bottoming at the end of the cycle. Bladder designs should be sized to prevent filling to more than 75% full.
Bladder installations require a special device called a transfer barrier at the gas end, to prevent extrusion of the bladder into the gas bottle piping. The flow rate between the bladder transfer barrier and its gas bottle will be restricted by the neck of the transfer barrier tube.
Remote gas storage offers installation flexibility where the available space or position cannot accommodate an accumulator of the required size. A smaller accumulator may be used in conjunction with a Parker auxiliary gas bottle, which can be located elsewhere (Fig.8). The gas bottle is sized by the formula:
For example, an application that calls for a 115 litre accumulator may only actually require 30-40 litres of fluid output. This application could therefore be satisfied with a 40 litre accumulator and a 75 litre gas bottle. Gas bottle installations may use either bladder or piston accumulators, subject to the following considerations.
Because of the above limitations, piston accumulators are generally preferred to bladder types for use in gas bottle installations.
Multiple accumulator/ storage bottle assembly
accumulator size required fluid output = gas bottle size
Large/Multiple Accumulators
The requirement for an accumulator with an output of more than 200 litres cannot usually be met by a single accumulator, because larger piston designs are relatively rare and expensive, and bladder designs are not generally available in these sizes. The requirement can, however, be met using one of the multiple-component installations shown in Figs. 9 and 10. The installation in Fig.9 consists of several gas bottles serving a single piston accumulator through a gas manifold. The accumulator portion may be sized outside of the limitations of the sizing formula on page 7, but should not allow the piston to strike the caps repeatedly while cycling. The larger gas volume available with this configuration allows a relatively greater piston movement and hence fluid output than with a conventionally sized single accumulator, without causing an excessive increase in gas pressure. A further advantage is that, because of the large precharge reservoir, gas pressure is relatively constant over the full discharge cycle of the accumulator. The major disadvantage of this arrangement is that a single seal failure could drain the whole gas system. The installation in Fig.10 uses several accumulators, of piston or bladder design, mounted on a hydraulic manifold. Two advantages of multiple accumulators over multiple gas bottles are that higher unit fluid flow rates are permissible, and a single leak will not drain precharge pressure from the entire system.
Fluid manifold Fig.9 (below) Several gas bottles can supply precharge pressure to a single accumulator Fig.10 (above) Multiple accumulators manifolded together offer high system flow rates
A potential disadvantage is that, where piston accumulators are used, the piston with the least friction will move first and could occasionally bottom on the hydraulic end cap. However, in a slow or infrequently used system, this would be of little significance.
Fluid Gas manifold
Precharging
Precharging Process Correct precharging involves accurately filling the gas side of an accumulator with a dry, inert gas such as nitrogen, before admitting fluid to the hydraulic side. It is important to precharge an accumulator to the correct specified pressure. Precharge pressure determines the volume of fluid retained in the accumulator at minimum system pressure. In an energy storage application, a bladder accumulator is typically precharged to 80% of minimum system pressure, and a piston accumulator to 7 bar below, or 90% of, minimum system pressure. The ability to correctly carry out and maintain precharging is an important factor when choosing the type of accumulator for an application. inside of the shell should be lubricated with system fluid. This fluid acts as a cushion, and lubricates and protects the bladder as it unwinds and unfurls. When precharging, the first 5 bar of nitrogen should be introduced slowly. Failure to follow this precaution could result in immediate bladder failure: high pressure nitrogen, expanding rapidly and thus cold, could form a channel in the folded bladder, concentrating at the Excessively High Precharge Excessive precharge pressure or a reduction in the minimum system pressure without a corresponding reduction in precharge pressure may cause operating problems or damage to accumulators. With excessive precharge pressure, a piston accumulator will cycle between stages (e) and (b) of Fig.2, see page 3, and the piston will travel too close to the hydraulic end cap. The piston could bottom at minimum system pressure, reducing output and eventually damaging the piston and piston seal. The piston can often be heard bottoming, warning of impending problems. An excessive precharge in a bladder accumulator can drive the bladder into the poppet assembly when cycling between stages (e) and (b). This could cause fatigue failure of the poppet spring assembly, or even a pinched and cut bladder, should it become trapped beneath the poppet as it is forced closed (Fig.12). Excessive precharge pressure is the most common cause of bladder failure. Excessively Low Precharge Excessively low precharge pressure or an increase in system pressure without a corresponding increase in precharge pressure can also cause operating
9
problems and subsequent accumulator damage. With no precharge in a piston accumulator, the piston will be driven into the gas end cap and will often remain there. Usually, a single contact will not cause any damage, but repeated impacts will eventually damage the piston and seal. Conversely, for a bladder accumulator, too low or no precharge can have rapid and severe consequences. The bladder will be crushed into the top of the shell and may extrude into the gas valve and be punctured (Fig.13). One such cycle is sufficient to destroy a bladder. Overall, piston accumulators are generally more tolerant of careless precharging.
Fig.12 C-shaped cut shows that bladder has been trapped under poppet
bottom. The chilled, brittle rubber, expanding rapidly would then inevitably rupture (Fig.11). The bladder could also be forced under the poppet and torn (Fig.12). Close attention should be paid to operating temperature during precharging, as a rise in temperature will cause a corresponding increase in pressure which could then exceed the precharge limit. Little damage can occur when precharging a piston accumulator, but the fluid side should be empty so that the gas volume is maximised.
Fig.11 Starburst rupture caused by loss of bladder elasticity
Bladder accumulators are far more susceptible to damage during precharging than piston types. Before precharging and entering service, the
Fig.13 Fluid entering an unprecharged bladder accumulator has forced the bladder into the gas valve

Austria Vienna Parker Hannifin GmbH Tel: 1332/36050 Fax: 1332/360577 Belgium Brussels S.A. Parker Hannifin N.V. Tel: (02) 762 18 00 Fax: (02) 762 33 30 Czech Republic Prague Parker Hannifin Corporation Tel: 2 6134 1704 Fax: 2 6134 1703 Denmark Ishj Parker Hannifin Danmark A/S Tel: 43 54 11 33 Fax: 43 73 31 07 Finland Vantaa Parker Hannifin Oy Tel: 0 9 476 731 Fax: 0 9 476 73200 France Contamine-sur-Arve Parker Hannifin S.A. Tel: 4 50 25.80.25 Fax: 4 50 03.67.37 Germany Cologne Parker Hannifin GmbH Tel: (221) 71720 Fax: (221) 7172219 Hungary Budapest Parker Hannifin Corp. Tel + Fax: 1 252 2539 Italy Arsago-Seprio Parker Hannifin S.p.A. Tel: (331) 768 056 Fax: (331) 769 059 Netherlands Oldenzaal Parker Hannifin N.V. Tel: (541) 585000 Fax: (541) 585459 Norway Langhus Parker Hannifin A/S Tel: (64) 86 77 60 Fax: (64) 86 68 88 Poland Warsaw Parker Hannifin Corp. Tel: (22) 36 50 78 Fax: (22) 36 50 81 Slovak Republic See Czech Republic Spain Madrid Parker Hannifin Espana S.A. Tel: (1) 675 73 00 Fax: (1) 675 77 11 Sweden Spnga Parker Hannifin Sweden AB. Tel: 08-761 29 60 Fax: 08-761 81 70 Switzerland Romanshorn Hydrel A.G. Romanshorn Tel: (714) 66 66 66 Fax: (714) 66 63 33 Turkey Istanbul Hidroser Hidrolik - Pnmatik Tel: (212) 243 26 29 Fax: (212) 251 19 09 United Kingdom Watford Parker Hannifin Plc Tel: (01923) 492000 Fax: (01923) 248557
Hydraulics
10/98
Position Switches
Hydraulics
For Tie Rod and Roundline Cylinders
Catalogue 0810/3-UK
Hydraulics
Introduction
Contents
Introduction Operating Principles Application Selection Guide Read.me Switches Construction Operating Principle Performance Positioning Specification Installation Model Numbers and Ordering End of Stroke Switches Introduction Mounting Data Dimensions Installation Technical Data Ordering Applications Data
Position Switches
Page
2 3 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 11
Index
Application Build Length Cabling CE Marking Connectors Connection Series and Parallel Cushioning Dimensions Installation Introduction Model Numbers Mounting Configurations Mounting Styles Operating Principles Ordering Performance Positioning Protective Covers Selection Guide Short Circuit Protection Specification Stroke Adjusters
Page
3 4 5, 6 3 6 11 6 4, 8 5, 7, 9 2, 3,6 5, 10 7 5 3, 4 5, 10 4 5 5 3 6 5,10 6
Parker Hannifin
Parker Hannifin Corporation is a world leader in the manufacture of components and systems for motion control. Parker has more than 800 product lines for hydraulic, pneumatic and electro-mechanical applications in some 1200 industrial and aerospace markets. With more than 35,000 employees and some 200 manufacturing plants and administration offices around the world, Parker provides customers with technical excellence and first class customer service. Parker Hannifin's Cylinder Division is the world's largest supplier of hydraulic cylinders for industrial applications. Parker cylinders are used in applications as diverse as machine tools, flight simulation and tidal barrier control.
inPHorm
European Cylinder inPHorm is Parker Hannifins new product selection program that helps you to select the correct part for an application. The program prompts for the details of the application, makes the necessary design calculations, and selects a suitable product. inPHorm can generate CAD drawings of the selected cylinder, which can be viewed in other software applications, and customised and imported into other CAD packages. Please contact your local Sales Office for further information.
Introduction
Position switches provide a versatile and cost-effective means of monitoring piston position in a hydraulic cylinder. The switching signal which they generate can be used to control or sequence actions which correspond to specific points in a production cycle or process, as determined by the position of the cylinder's piston. Parker's position switches are rugged units designed for industrial use, and their performance has been proven over millions of cycles of testing and in the harsh operating environments of manufacturing industry. Parker offers two types of position switch an End-of-Stroke switch which mounts in the head and/or cap of the hydraulic cylinder, and the Read.me switch a mid-stroke design which clamps to the body of the cylinder in a position determined by the user. Both types of switch are 'designed in' to the cylinder and must be specified at the time of order. The position switches described in this catalogue have been designed for service in steel mills, plastic injection moulding plants and other applications where rugged, dependable equipment is required. In addition to the standard designs featured in this catalogue, position switches can be adapted to suit individual customer requirements. Our engineers will be pleased to discuss and advise on unique designs to suit specific applications. Position switches are available for the following cylinder ranges: l HMI/HMD 210 bar metric tie rod cylinders l 2H l 3L l 2A l MMA l MMB 210 bar inch series tie rod cylinders 70 bar inch series tie rod cylinders 18 bar inch series pneumatic tie rod cylinders 250 bar metric roundline cylinders 160 bar metric roundline cylinders
Hydraulics
Position Switches
Why Use Position Switches?
l enhance the versatility of a hydraulic cylinder l provide reliable and accurate position sensing l simpler and less costly than a feedback transducer l mid-stroke switches can be adjusted to suit different production processes l can provide safety interlocks in critical applications l integral LEDs provide continuous visual monitoring l non-contacting designs have no wearing parts l suitable for tough operating conditions
Introduction and Application

CE Marking
The position switches fitted by Parker are CE marked to certify that they meet the requirements of the EU Directive 89/336/EWG for electromagnetic compatibility.
Application
The differing designs and performance parameters of the two switch types determine their suitability for different applications. While End of Stroke switches register a fixed point at the beginning and/or end of piston travel, Read.me switches allow mid-stroke positions to be chosen by the user for switching and sequencing operations. Switching by the Read.me switch sensor occurs as the piston enters a switching 'zone'. The switching point is highly repeatable, in either direction, under conditions of constant piston speed and operating temperature. The switching zone may be up to 50mm wide depending on cylinder tube wall thickness and piston speed. Because of the physical size of the sensor, and the magnet carrier's location offset to one side of the piston see figures 1 & 2 on page 4 the point at which this switching zone begins does not allow end-of-stroke switching at the cap end of the cylinder. Where switching at or close to the cap end is critical, machine designers should contact our Engineering department so that a custom solution can be developed. Parker's versatile clamping mechanism allows the position of the Read.me sensor to be adjusted, permitting the same cylinder to be adapted to different processes and operations. The number of Read.me switches which can be fitted is restricted only by available mounting space on the cylinder tube.
Operating Principles
End-of-Stroke switches are inductive-type designs, fitted to the cylinder's head and/or cap. On cushioned cylinders, switches are actuated by the presence of the cushion sleeve and spear at each end of the cylinder's stroke. On non-cushioned cylinders, the sleeve and spear are also fitted but by-pass orifices are added at the head and cap to overcome the cushioning effect. Read.me switches employ a sensor clamped to the cylinder tube, and magnets attached to the piston. The flux of these permanent magnets, as they pass the sensor, induces a temporary change of polarity in the sensor, and it is this change of polarity which provides the switching effect. Parker's End-of-Stroke and Read.me position switches are available for both cushioned and non-cushioned cylinders.
Position Switch Selection Guide

Senses Position at Switch Type End of Stroke Close to End of Stroke Midstroke Bore sizes available (mm) Can Position Register Adjustable Multiple MMB MMA by User HMI/HMD 2H, 3L, 2A Positions Mounting Protective Styles Covers Available Available
End of Stroke
Head

Head
32-200
38.1-203.2
All
All
All
C/F
Read.me
32 -125 1
C/F
40 -125 1
50 -125 1
All 2
Cap - C/F Cap - C/F
C/F consult factory 1 For larger and smaller bore cylinders, please consult factory
Switch position may be restricted on mountings DD (HMI/HMD) and MS2 and MT4 (MMA and MMB) see pages 4 and 5.
Read.me Switch Construction

95mm
Read.me Switch
Standard Cushion Sleeve
Magnets Standard Piston
Standard Magnet Carrier Cushion Spear Assembly

Hydraulics
Performance and Operation

Read.me Position Switches Operating Principle
Parker's Read.me switches detect the change in polarity of a magnetic field which occurs when the magnetic field of one magnet interacts with the flux of a second, more powerful magnet. In the Read.me switch, permanent magnets attached to the cylinder piston induce a residual magnetism in the tube as they travel along its length. The sensor detects and adopts the polarity of the tube see figure 1.
Read.me Position Switches

Operating Range
Read.me switches provide highly repeatable position switching at intermediate stroke positions of a cylinder. They clamp to a cylinder tie rod and are infinitely adjustable between the cylinder's head and cap ends. Because the switching effect occurs within a 'zone' rather than at a single point, see 'Application' on page 3, Read.me switches are not suitable for position switching close to the cap end of a standard cylinder. The length of stroke 'A' which cannot be monitored using a Read.me switch is shown in the table and diagram below, and is measured from the fully retracted (cap end of stroke) position. Where switching within this zone is required, please contact our Engineering department to discuss a custom solution.
Unmonitored Switching Zone - A Bore Size HMI/HMD MMA MS2 only N/A N/A 80 75 87 91 80 MMB All styles excl. MSP N/A 54 47 47 43 43 42 MSP only N/A 68 67 61 64 69 68
All styles, All styles cap end excl. MS2 46 46 38 38 35 35 34 N/A N/A 80 75 76 76 75
32
Figure 1 On the return stroke, the greater strength of the moving magnetic field prevails over the residual magnetism of the switch and causes a change of polarity see figure 2.
40 50 63 80 100 125
Additional Build Length

The addition of the magnet carrier to the piston increases the build length 'B' of cylinders equipped for Read.me switches. The additional lengths shown in the table and diagram below should be added to all the stroke dependent lengths of the cylinders, as listed in the individual product catalogues see page 2.
Bore Size 32 40 Increase in Build Length - B HMI/HMD 33 33 43 43 48 48 48 MMA N/A N/A 43 43 48 48 48 MMB N/A 33 43 43 48 48 48
Figure 2 This switching effect enables the position of the piston in a cylinder to be monitored, allowing external controls and processes to be linked to piston position. LEDs incorporated into the switch housing allow the user to visually monitor the switching point.
Performance
Parker's Read.me switches have been designed to operate at a maximum piston speed of 0.5m/s, and a maximum cylinder temperature of 80C. Exceptions to these figures are as follows: MMA 50mm, 80mm and 100mm bore cylinders: At max. temp. 80C, piston speed should not exceed 0.2m/s. At max. temp. 50C, piston speed should not exceed 0.5m/s. MMB 100mm bore cylinders: At max. temp. 80C, piston speed should not exceed 0.2m/s. At max. temp. 50C, piston speed should not exceed 0.5m/s. Designs for use at higher speeds and/or temperatures are available to special order. Our engineers will be pleased to discuss and advise on unique designs to suit specific applications.
50 63 80 100 125
Unmonitored Switching Zone
B All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise stated.

Hydraulics
Read.me Position Switches

Cylinder Mounting Styles
Read.me switches are suitable for use with all mounting styles. Note, however, that the positioning of the switches can be restricted by the trunnion body on centre trunnion designs DD (HMI/HMD) and MT4 (MMA and MMB), and by the foot mounting flanges on MS2 (MMA) and MSP (MMB) cylinders. Where switching is required in these restricted areas, custom solutions may be available please contact our Engineering department.
Technical Data and Ordering

Installation
A robust alloy bracket holds the Read.me switch against the cylinder tube, and clamps to the tie rod or mounting rod with a set screw. Releasing the set screw allows the switch to be repositioned at any point on the cylinder tube. Read.me switches are supplied with a right-angled connector fitted with five metres of cable, which may be cut to length. To establish switch position relative to piston or process position, proceed as follows. 1 2 Connect the Read.me switch connector to the switch body and to the control unit/power supply. Cycle the cylinder to 'format' the residual magnetism of the tube, and advance the cylinder piston to the position at which switching is to occur. Position the Read.me switch and clamp on the cylinder tie rod or mounting rod. Do not tighten the set screw at this stage. With power supplied to the switch, move the switch body along the tie rod or mounting rod until the switching position can be established using the switch status LED. Depending on the switch status required, move the switch until the status LED has just illuminated or just cut out. Tighten the set screw against the tie rod or mounting rod, and cycle the cylinder at operating speed to confirm switching position. If adjustment is necessary, slacken the set screw slightly, reposition the switch and re-tighten.
Positioning
Read.me switches can be fitted to either side of a tie rod, allowing switching zones to be positioned close together if desired. Note that, where switch orientation is reversed, the action of the status LEDs will also be reversed. The total number of Read.me switches which can be fitted to a cylinder is restricted only by available mounting space.
3
A
Bore B A With Without Cover Cover (max) (max) 30 37 33 24 31 27 C
32-40 50-100
23 35 45
Tie Rod or Switch Mounting Rod
125
On a tie rod cylinder, any of the structural tie rods may be used to mount Read.me switches. On roundline cylinders MMA and MMB, a switch mounting rod (or rods) is added during manufacture to permit attachment of the switches. Unless otherwise specified, this rod will be fitted at 90 to the head port position, ie: in position 2 as illustrated on page 7. Where an alternative switch mounting rod position is required, this should be specified at the time of order.
Connector Wiring
1 Brown 2 Black (output A) 3 White (output B) 4 Blue
Protective Covers
Read.me switches are available with the option of protective covers, for use where the switch or its connector could be vulnerable to damage. The covers attach to the clamp bracket and fit over Parker's standard right-angled connectors.

To order a cylinder with Read.me switches, the standard cylinder model code should be used. Under 'special features', an 'S' should be inserted and the appropriate information from the following table, including quantities, should be added. Note: For MMA/MMB cylinders only, the position of the mounting switch rod(s) relative to head port position must be stated.
Read.me Switch Kit Numbers Switch Kit, Bore Sizes 32-40mm Switch Kit, Bore Sizes 50-100mm Switch Kit, Bore Size 125mm Protective Cover (all models) PS100 PS101 PS102 PS103
Specification
Switch output Switch zone Switch hysteresis Repeatability Supply voltage Load current Current consumption Voltage drop Short circuit protection Reverse polarity protection Protection per DIN 40050 Connection Cable length antivalent pnp 50mm typical 5mm typical 0.5mm typical 10-30V DC 100mA 30mA 1.5V Timed Polarity protected IP67 detachable 4 pin round connector 5m
Example
An MMB cylinder with two Read.me position switches and protective covers mounted at 180 from the port; ports in position 1 and air bleeds in position 4: 100 C MF3 MMB R E S 1 4 M C 250 M 11 44 S = two off PS101 plus two off PS103; switch mounting rod at 180 from port position
Cabling
Position switch cabling should be routed separately from cables carrying high currents or cables wired to inductive loads, as these could interfere with the signal.
Hydraulics
Introduction
Introduction to End of Stroke Position Switches
Parker's End of Stroke position switches are pressure tested to 500 bar. They are unaffected by vibration, dust or oil and, because they are built into the cylinder, are partly protected from physical damage. Where required, steel covers can be supplied to protect the exposed connector. End of Stroke position switches will operate reliably to within 100mm of resistance welding tips. End of Stroke position switches are non-contacting, inductivetype switches. They are available for cushioned and noncushioned cylinders with a stroke length over 15mm, and can be supplied for the head and cap ends of the cylinder. The point at which the switches operate varies for different cylinder configurations, at between 1.0mm and 4.0mm from the end of stroke. The switching point for a particular cylinder is repeatable within 0.5mm.
End of Stroke Position Switches

Connector Types
The standard DC End of Stroke position switch is supplied with a screw-type connector, part no. PS011, moulded onto five metres of cable which can be cut to length. A screwed collar and keyway ensure correct connector alignment. An optional connector, part no. PS012, allows the user to fit his own cabling. The connector may be positioned at 90 intervals to the switch body, as required. Both types of connector are equipped with two LEDs, the first showing 'power on' and the second illuminating when the switch is activated. On the PS012 connector, the LEDs can be connected or left unconnected, as preferred.
Cylinders with Cushions

On cushioned cylinders, End of Stroke switches are actuated by the presence of the cushion sleeve or the cushion spear at the end of the cylinder's stroke. On non-cushioned cylinders, the sleeve and spear are also fitted but by-pass orifices are added at the head and cap to overcome the cushioning effect. The combination of cushions and End of Stroke position switches on a cylinder with one of the following mounting styles requires a special design. Where one of these combinations is required, please contact the factory. Style D with a cushion at the head end Style DB with a cushion at the cap end
Standard Connector PS011
Cylinders with Stroke Adjusters

End of Stroke position switches are not available at the cap ends of cylinders fitted with stroke adjusters.
Short-Circuit Protection
A bi-stable type of short circuit protection prevents damage to the End of Stroke position switch through overload or shortcircuit. If a short circuit occurs, the output transistor is turned off. When the short circuit is removed, the switch will operate normally again if either the power supply is momentarily interrupted, or if the switch is operated by movement of the piston rod from the end of stroke position. The cause of the short circuit must be removed to prevent recurrence. Note: End of Stroke position switches are low current, solid state devices using PNP switching. Care must be taken to prevent overloading on connection. Position switches must not be connected directly to low resistance loads as these would cause the short circuit protection to operate.
Optional Connector PS012
Cabling
Position switch cabling should be routed separately from cables carrying high currents or cables wired to inductive loads, as these could interfere with the signal.
Hydraulics

Mounting Configurations
Tie Rod Cylinders
The tables list the standard mounting positions for End of Stroke position switches fitted to tie rod cylinders, where these positions are not occupied by a port or cushion adjusting screw. Where the required position is not listed, special designs may be available please consult the factory.
1
JJ (HMD) Cap Mounting Style C Head Cap Head JJ (HMI) Cap Head 1, 3
Mounting Data
HMI/HMD Cylinders Switch Positions Available
Bore Size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 Any Any Any Any Any Any Any 1, 3 Any Any 1, 3 Any 1, 3
1, 3 1, 3 1, 3 1, 3
2
HH
Head Cap
3 Head Cap Head End

D
Head Cap Head DB Cap TB, TC, TD, BB, SBd, DD, B
The drawing shows position switch mounting positions for the cylinder head and cap, as viewed from the rod end. The port is shown in position 1, but can be supplied in other positions depending on the mounting style chosen see the appropriate product catalogue for details.
2H Cylinders Switch Positions Available

Mounting Style C Head Cap Head Cap Head Cap Head Cap Head Cap Head Cap Head Cap N/A 1, 3 N/A Bore Size (mm) 38.1 50.8 63.5 82.6 101.6 127.0 152.4 177.8 203.2 1, 3 1, 3 1, 3 1, 3 Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any 1 or 3, opposite port face Any Any 1 or 3, opposite port face Any 1, 2 or 4, except port face Any Any 1, 3
3L and 2A Cylinders Switch Positions Available

Mounting Style Head C Cap Head 1, 3 J Cap Head N/A JB Cap Head H Cap Head HB Cap Head D Cap Head DB Cap T, TB, TC, TD, BB, BC, DD, F, G 1 or 3, opposite port face Any 1, 2 or 4, except port face Any Any N/A N/A Any 1 or 3, opposite port face 1, 3 1, 3 Any Any Any Any Any Any 1, 3 Any 1, 3 1, 3 1, 3 Any Bore Size (mm) 38.1 50.8 63.5 82.6 101.6 127.0 152.4 203.2
JB
HB
DB
T, TB, TC, TD, JJ, BB, DD, SB F, G HH Head Cap
Roundline Cylinders
End of Stroke position switches may be fitted to the heads and caps of MMA and MMB cylinders in any position which is not occupied by a port, or obstructed by the style of mounting chosen. The drawing shows position switch mounting positions for the cylinder head and cap, as viewed from the rod end. The port is shown in position 1, but can be supplied in other positions depending on the mounting style chosen please consult the factory for details.
Head
Cap
Head End
Hydraulics
Dimensions
How to Use These Dimensions
When specifying a cylinder fitted with End of Stroke position switches, this catalogue should be used in conjunction with the appropriate cylinder catalogue. Most cylinder dimensions do not change with the addition of an End of Stroke position switch, and should be taken from the cylinder catalogue.

Roundline Cylinders
For dimensional changes to roundline cylinders fitted with End of Stroke position switches, please consult the factory.
Mounting Dimensions Series 3L and 2A

Bore 38.1 2A Rod No. 1 2 1 50.8 2 3 3 63.5 2 4 1 1 3L Rod No. 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 Rod 15.9 25.4 15.9 34.9 25.4 25.4 44.5 34.9 15.9 25.4 50.8 34.9 44.5 34.9 63.5 44.5 50.8 25.4 44.5 88.9 50.8 63.5 76.2 25.4 34.9 44.5 101.6 50.8 63.5 76.2 88.9 34.9 50.8 139.7 63.5 76.2 88.9 101.6 34.9 44.5 127.0 H1 max 74.5 79.5 71.5 77.5 74.5 68.5 77.5 72.5 65.5 86.5 76.5 66.5 71.5 78.5 71.5 83.5 63.5 74.5 70.5 71.5 75.5 83.5 64.5 61.5 66.5 103.5 64.5 63.5 70.5 77.5 83.5 98.5 82.5 85.5 90.5 96.5 103.5 64.5 73.5 77.5 78.5 18.3 29.3 26.3 18.3 26.3 29.3 26.3 88.5 9.5 18.5 18.3 26.5 A H2 max 69.5 B
Tie Rod Cylinders

Where tie rod cylinder dimensions differ from the basic cylinder, they should be identified from the drawing and tables below. End of Stroke position switches can be fitted to 25mm bore HMI/HMD series cylinders and 25.4mm bore 3L and 2A series cylinders, depending on the mounting style chosen. Where these sizes are required, please consult the factory with details of the application.
22.1 18.1 22.1 18.1 18.1 22.1 18.1 18.5 26.5 18.5 18.5 26.5 18.5 26.5 18.5 18.5
10.4
63.5
10.4
Mounting Dimensions Series 2H

H1 max Bore Rod No. Rod All exc. JJ, JJ, Pos'ns Pos'ns 2&4 2&4 68.5 72.5 68.5 71.5 86.5 71.5 66.5 78.5 63.5 83.5 77.5 65.5 82.5 63.5 83.5 70.5 77.5 103.5 77.5 64.5 71.5 96.5 78.5 103.5 64.5 90.5 72.5 96.5 66.5 73 77 68 71 106 71 66 92 102 97 90 103 95 68 89 76 83 57 76 63 70 46 65 52 59 35 61 41 55 36.7 30.3 33.3 30.3 42.8 30.2 33.7 49.2 39.7 68.5 N/A 31.7 79.5 29 26.8 30.2 87.5 41 25.2 30.3 95.5 55 22 22.3 30.3 22.3 22.3 30.3 66.5 79 19 69.5 82 17.5 22.5 78.5 98 15.6 A H2 max All exc. HH, HH, Pos'ns Pos'ns 2&4 2&4 62.5 68 B
81.5
10.4
82.6
2 3 4 3
78.5
10.3
38.1
1 2 1 2 1
15.9 25.4 25.4 34.9 25.4 44.5 34.9 34.9 50.8 44.5 44.5 63.5 50.8 50.8 88.9 63.5 76.2 63.5 101.6 76.2 88.9 76.2 127.0 88.9 101.6 88.9 139.7 101.6 127.0
22.5
14.1
50.8
22.5
85.5
105
15.6 101.6
2 4 5 1 4 2 5 127.0 6 7 1 3 3 2 4 152.4 5 6 7 1 4 2 5 6 203.2 7 8 1 3 0
67.5
10.3
63.5
2 3 1
82.6
2 3 1
99.5
10.3
101.6
2 3 1
127.0
2 3 4 1
152.4
2 3 4 1
177.8
2 3 4 1
63.5
9.5
203.2
2 3 4

Hydraulics

Mounting Dimensions Series HMI/HMD
H1 max Bore Rod No. Rod 14 22 18 28 22 36 28 28 45 36 36 56 45 45 70 56 56 90 70 70 110 90 90 140 110 All exc. JJ, JJ, Pos'ns Pos'ns 2&4 2&4 80 83 75 77 69 75 72 66 74 69 81 66 85 77 68 85 68 86 75 100 76 111 91 73 101 67 70 77 78 66 73 69 107 70 65 92 102 97 87 102 95 72 89 79 52 73 62 33 60 43 A H2 max All exc. HH, HH, Pos'ns Pos'ns 2&4 2&4 73 61 B
Dimensions and Installation

Switch Installation
There are two alternative methods of installation for End of Stroke position switches, both of which are suitable for use with tie rod or roundline cylinders. Method 1 aligns the connector with the cylinder's centreline, while method 2 may be used where connector alignment is not critical. Note: On series 3L and 2A cylinders with No.2 rods and 38.1mm, 50.8mm or 63.5mm bores, an adapter is used to mount the switch, in place of the retaining plate shown. In these cases, method 2 should be used.
32
1 2 1 2 1
24 21 21 21.5 21 21.5 21 21 21.5 21.5 21 29 21 21 30 28 36 37.5 38 30 30 30 36 32.5 33.5
40
65
67
14.5
Method 1
83 101 14.5
50
2 3 1
63
2 3 1
80
97
14.5
Hold the End of Stroke switch firmly against its locating shoulder, with the connector aligned with the cylinder's centreline. Screw the retaining plate down until it meets the mounting surface, and then back off until the screw holes align. This will leave a gap of less than 0.5mm under the plate. Torque tighten the two fixing screws evenly to 10Nm.
80
2 3 1
71
83
19.5
Method 2
Screw the retaining plate onto the End of Stroke switch, and use the switch for alignment as the plate is fitted to the mounting surface. Torque tighten the two fixing screws evenly to 10Nm. Screw the switch down until the locating shoulder bottoms, and tighten the lock nut to secure in position.
100
2 3 1
66
76
19.5
125
2 3 1
97
56
21.5
Retaining Plate Location Shoulder
160
2 3 1
82
35
24.5
200
2 3
68
N/A
26.5
A B 12 mm clearance to remove connector from switch H1 H2

Hydraulics
Technical Data & Ordering

Specifications
The technical data which follows is applicable to the End of Stroke position switches and connectors fitted to both tie rod and roundline cylinders. The switch is an inductive PNP device, ie: the load is connected to the negative line. The output function is normally open (N/O). Nominal voltage Vs, including ripple Ripple on DC supply No-load current Io Output resistance Ra and diode Output resistance Ra and diode with standard connector LED Residual voltage at load resistance of 10k (switch open) Voltage drop Vd (switch closed) Response time Hysteresis Rate of rise and fall of output voltage Max. output load current Im eg: at Vs = 24, Im max = 5 x 24 = 120mA Min. load resistance RL min. Max. load capacitance including cable Max. duty cycle Ambient temperature Protection class, housing only Protection class, with connector Housing material Peak pressure switch 10-30V DC 15% max. 10mA 4.7k 2.2k 0.8V 1.5V 10sec. (approx) 0.2mm 1V/ sec = 5 x Vs mA 200 150nF 100% -25C to +70C IP 67 (DIN 40 050) IP 67 (DIN 40 050) Stainless steel to DIN X12CrMoS 17 500 bar

Power Supply
Output voltage, including ripple 10-30V DC
Ripple
Vs Vr
= arithmetic average of DC voltage = amplitude of AC component voltage Vr Vs
Ripple =
x 100%
Ripple is the alternating voltage superimposed on the DC voltage (peak peak) in %. For the operation of DC voltage switches, a filtered DC voltage with a ripple of 15% maximum is required.
Schematic Drawing of Switch
Key to Symbols
Maximum load through switch Load current Supply voltage No load current Voltage drop across switch Voltage across load Effective collector load resistance Load resistance Number of switches = = = = = = = = = Im IL Vs Io Vd VL Ra RL n

T1 Ra D D1 D2 = output transistor = output resistance = Zener diode for peak voltage control with inductive loads = wire leakage diode = reverse polarity protection diode (short circuit protection) To order a cylinder with End of Stroke position switches, the standard model code from the appropriate cylinder catalogue should be used. In the 'special features' section of the code, an 'S' should be inserted and the following information included after the model code: End of Stroke position switch(es); end(s) required; position(s); optional connector(s) PS012 if required Note that, if a position switch is required in position 1, the revised port position must be specified in the model code.
-
Connector Wiring and LED

+
Example
4 1
3 2
An HMI cylinder with End of Stroke position switches and standard connectors in position 1, ports in position 3 and air bleeds in position 4: 100 C JJ HMI R N S 1 4 M C 250 M 33 44 S = End of Stroke position switches at both ends in Pos'n 1
Hydraulics
10

Series and Parallel Connection
Parker's End of Stroke position switches may be connected in series, to give an AND function; or in parallel, giving an OR function. The maximum number of switches which may be connected, in series or in parallel, depends on the external load requirements. Calculation of maximum numbers is described below.
Applications Data
Calculation Examples
These show how to determine the number of switches (n) which may be connected in series or parallel for a given voltage supply and output loading. The examples use the following values: Supply voltage Vs Min. voltage across the load VL Load resistance RL Output resistance Ra using standard connector Therefore: Min. external load current IL = VL / RL Max. switch load current Im = 5 x Vs (see Specification, page 6) 24V 18V 360 2.2k
Series Connection (AND Circuit)

The number of position switches which may be connected in series is limited by two factors voltage drop and available current. A voltage drop of approximately 1.5 volts occurs across each switch, therefore the output voltage available at the load is reduced by 1.5V x the number of switches in series. In addition, each switch must supply the noload current of all the other switches, as well as the load current, thus the sum of all the no-load currents, plus the external load current, must not exceed the current of a single switch. The maximum number of switches permissible is determined by whichever approach results in a lower number.
50mA 120mA
Example for Series Connection

a. Voltage relationship is Vs n x Vd VL (Vs VL) Vd (24 18) 1.5
Therefore number of switches n n
Therefore maximum number of switches = 4 Im IL + nIo n n (Im IL) Io (120 50) 10
b. Current relationship is
Parallel Connection (OR Circuit)

There is no limit to the number of switches which may be connected in parallel, provided that isolating diodes are fitted externally to the output of each switch, as indicated. Where connectors with LED indicators are used, external isolating diodes must be fitted to prevent all of the LEDs from illuminating when one switch is actuated. If external diodes are omitted, the number of switches is limited because each switch would have to drive the internal collector load of all other switches, as well as the external loads.
Therefore maximum number of switches = 7 Using the lower of the two results shown above, the maximum number of switches which can be connected in series is four.
Example for Parallel Connection

If external diodes are fitted, the number of switches is limited only by the power supply. Where external diodes are not fitted, the following current formula applies. Current relationship is n Vs Vs + Im Ra RL
Therefore
n n
(Im
Vs RL
Ra Vs
( 120
1000
24 2.2 x 1000 ) 24 360
n 4.9 Rounding down, the maximum number of switches which can be connected in parallel = 4
Hydraulics
11

Austria Marchtrenk Parker Hannifin GmbH Tel: (7242) 56921 Fax: (7242) 5692120 Belgium Nivelles Parker Hannifin S.A. N.V. Tel: (67) 280 900 Fax: (67) 280 999 Czech Republic Prague Parker Hannifin s. r. o. Tel: 2 830 85 221 Fax: 2 830 85 360 Denmark Ishj Parker Hannifin Danmark A/S Tel: 43 56 04 00 Fax: 43 73 31 07 Finland Vantaa Parker Hannifin Oy Tel: 0 9 476 731 Fax: 0 9 476 73200 Netherlands Oldenzaal Parker Hannifin N.V. Tel: (541) 585000 Fax: (541) 585459 Norway Ski Parker Hannifin A/S Tel: (64) 91 10 00 Fax: (64) 91 10 90 Poland Warsaw Parker Hannifin Corp. Tel: (22) 863 49 42 Fax: (22) 863 49 44 Slovakia Ref. Czech Republic Spain Madrid Parker Hannifin Espana S.A. Tel: (91) 675 73 00 Fax: (91) 675 77 11
Sweden Spnga Parker Hannifin AB. France Contamine-sur-Arve Tel: 08-760 29 60 Fax: 08-761 81 70 Parker Hannifin S.A. Tel: 4 50 25.80.25 Switzerland Romanshorn Fax: 4 50 03.67.37 Hydrel A.G. Romanshorn Tel: (714) 66 66 66 Germany Cologne Fax: (714) 66 63 33 Parker Hannifin GmbH Tel: (221) 71720 Turkey Istanbul Fax: (221) 7172219 Hidroser Hidrolik - Pnmatik Tel: (212) 886 72 70 Hungary Budapest Fax: (212) 886 69 35 Parker Hannifin Corp. Tel + Fax: 1 252 2539 United Kingdom Watford Parker Hannifin Plc Italy Arsago-Seprio Tel: (01923) 492000 Parker Hannifin S.p.A. Fax: (01923) 248557 Tel: (0331) 768 056 Fax: (0331) 769 059
Hydraulics
0300

Catalog Parker

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Catalog Parker

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Parker Heavy Duty Hydraulic Cylinders Series 2H

For Cylinder Division Plant Locations See Page II.

For additional information call your local Parker Cylinder Distributor.

Series 2H Heavy Duty Hydraulic Cylinders

Available Mounting Styles

(NFPA MX3) Head Square Flange Style JB 11/2 -6" Page 46

(NFPA MX2) Head Rectangular Style JJ 11/2 -6" Page 46

(NFPA MX1) Cap Rectangular Flange Style H 11/2 -6" Page 48

(NFPA MF1) Cap Square Flange Style HB 11/2 -6" Page 48

(NFPA MF5) Cap Rectangular Style HH 11/2 -6" Page 48

(NFPA ME5) Side Lug Style C 11/2 -6" Page 50

(NFPA MF2) Centerline Lugs Style E 11/2 -6" Page 50

(NFPA MF6) Side Tapped Style F 11/2 -6" Page 50

(NFPA ME6) Side End Angles Style CB 11/2 -6" Page 52

(NFPA MS2) Side End Lugs Style G 11/2 -6" Page 52

(NFPA MS3) Cap Fixed Clevis Style BB 11/2 -6" Page 52

(NFPA MS4) Head Trunnion Style D 11/2 -6" Page 54

(NFPA MS1) Cap Trunnion Style DB 11/2 -6" Page 54

(NFPA MS7) Intermediate Fixed Trunnion Style DD 11/2 -6" Page 54

(NFPA MP1) Spherical Bearing Style SB 11/2 -6" Page 56

(NFPA MT1) Double Rod Cylinders Style KT Shown 11/2 -6"

For Cylinder Division Plant Locations See Page II.

Parker's New, Exclusive

For additional information call your local Parker Cylinder Distributor.

BRONZE FILLED TEFLON RINGS

SYNTHETIC RUBBER EXPANDER RINGS

Step Cut Iron Piston Rings are standard.

Cyl. Rod Bore Dia. In. In. 6 7 8 21/2 4 3 5 31/2 51/2

1 13/4 13/8 2 13/4 21/2 2 31/2

For Cylinder Division Plant Locations See Page II.

Tie Rod Mountings 11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes

Series 2H Heavy Duty Hydraulic Cylinders

ZB + STROKE ZJ + STROKE P + STROKE

Tie Rods Extended Cap End Style TC (NFPA Style MX2)

ZB + STROKE ZJ + STROKE P + STROKE

Tie Rods Extended Both Ends Style TD (NFPA Style MX1)

ZB + STROKE ZJ + STROKE P + STROKE

Rod End Dimensions see table 2 Thread Style 8 Thread Style 4

(NFPA Style IM) Intermediate Male

(NFPA Style SF) Small Female

For additional information call your local Parker Cylinder Distributor.

Series 2H Heavy Duty Hydraulic Cylinders

Tie Rod Mountings 11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes

E 21/2 3 3 1/2 4 1/2 5 6 1/2 7 1/2

G 13/4 13/4 13/4 2 2 2 21/4

J 11/2 11/2 11/2 13/4 13/4 13/4 21/4

R 1.63 2.05 2.55 3.25 3.82 4.95 5.73

NPTF ports are available at no extra charge.

Table 2Rod Dimensions

Table 3 Envelope and Mounting Dimensions

Rod No. 1(Std.) 2 1(Std.) 2 1(Std.) 2 3 1(Std.) 2 3 1(Std.) 2 3 1(Std.) 2 3 4 1(Std.) 2 3 4

For Cylinder Division Plant Locations See Page II.

Rectangular Flange and Head Mountings 11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes

Series 2H Heavy Duty Hydraulic Cylinders

1 1/2 1500 1000 2000 1200

* Maximum pressure rating push application.

ZB + STROKE P + STROKE LB + STROKE EE K

1 1/2 3000 3000 3000 3000

3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 2700 3000 2700

* Maximum pressure rating push application.

Head Rectangular Mounting Style JJ (NFPA Style ME5)

ZB + STROKE P + STROKE LG + STROKE EE K

Rod End Dimensions see table 2 Thread Style 8 Thread Style 4